diff options
| author | Roger Frank <rfrank@pglaf.org> | 2025-10-15 04:50:07 -0700 |
|---|---|---|
| committer | Roger Frank <rfrank@pglaf.org> | 2025-10-15 04:50:07 -0700 |
| commit | 8cc5153a70b43108b86e62838f19e200d2b89dc7 (patch) | |
| tree | dcdb293d3a13730aa319c8b254f54a9dee41e492 | |
| -rw-r--r-- | .gitattributes | 3 | ||||
| -rw-r--r-- | 17000-0.txt | 2834 | ||||
| -rw-r--r-- | 17000-0.zip | bin | 0 -> 48835 bytes | |||
| -rw-r--r-- | 17000-8.txt | 2842 | ||||
| -rw-r--r-- | 17000-8.zip | bin | 0 -> 48688 bytes | |||
| -rw-r--r-- | 17000-h.zip | bin | 0 -> 54745 bytes | |||
| -rw-r--r-- | 17000-h/17000-h.htm | 3910 | ||||
| -rw-r--r-- | 17000.txt | 2850 | ||||
| -rw-r--r-- | 17000.zip | bin | 0 -> 48755 bytes | |||
| -rw-r--r-- | LICENSE.txt | 11 | ||||
| -rw-r--r-- | README.md | 2 |
11 files changed, 12452 insertions, 0 deletions
diff --git a/.gitattributes b/.gitattributes new file mode 100644 index 0000000..6833f05 --- /dev/null +++ b/.gitattributes @@ -0,0 +1,3 @@ +* text=auto +*.txt text +*.md text diff --git a/17000-0.txt b/17000-0.txt new file mode 100644 index 0000000..681727d --- /dev/null +++ b/17000-0.txt @@ -0,0 +1,2834 @@ +The Project Gutenberg EBook of Of the Orthographie and Congruitie of the +Britan Tongue, by Alexander Hume + +This eBook is for the use of anyone anywhere at no cost and with +almost no restrictions whatsoever. You may copy it, give it away or +re-use it under the terms of the Project Gutenberg License included +with this eBook or online at www.gutenberg.org + + +Title: Of the Orthographie and Congruitie of the Britan Tongue + A Treates, noe shorter than necessarie, for the Schooles + +Author: Alexander Hume + +Editor: Henry B. Wheatley + +Release Date: November 4, 2005 [EBook #17000] + +Language: English + +Character set encoding: UTF-8 + +*** START OF THIS PROJECT GUTENBERG EBOOK ORTHOGRAPHIE OF THE BRITAN TONGUE *** + + + + +Produced by Louise Hope, David Starner and the Online +Distributed Proofreading Team at https://www.pgdp.net + + + + + +{Transcriber’s Note: + +All material in parentheses () or square brackets [], including the +(_sic_) notations, is from the 1865 original. Material added by the +transcriber is in braces {}. +Irregularities in chapter numbering are explained at the end of the +editor’s Notes.} + + + OF THE + + ORTHOGRAPHIE AND CONGRUITIE + + OF THE BRITAN TONGUE + + + A Treates, noe shorter then necessarie, + + for the Schooles, + + Be + + ALEXANDER HUME. + + +Edited from the Original MS. in the British Museum, + by + HENRY B. WHEATLEY. + + + + +LONDON: +Published for the Early English Text Society, +by Trübner & Co., 60, Paternoster Row. +MDCCCLXV. + +HERTFORD: +Printed by Stephen Austin. + + + + +PREFACE. + + +The following Tract is now printed for the first time from the original +Manuscript in the old Royal Collection in the Library of the British +Museum (Bibl. Reg. 17 A. xi). It is written on paper, and consists of +forty-five leaves, the size of the pages being 5-3/4 in. by 3-3/4 in. +The dedication, the titles, and the last two lines, are written with a +different coloured ink from that employed in the body of the MS., and +appear to be in a different handwriting. It is probable that the tract +was copied for the author, but that he himself wrote the dedication to +the King. + +The Manuscript is undated, and we have no means of ascertaining the +exact time when it was written; but from a passage in the dedication to +James I. of England, it is fair to infer that it was written shortly +after the visit of that monarch to Scotland, subsequent to his accession +to the throne of the southern kingdom, that is, in the year 1617. This +would make it contemporaneous with Ben Jonson’s researches on the +English Grammar; for we find, in 1629, James Howell (Letters, Sec. V. +27) writing to Jonson that he had procured Davies’ Welch Grammar for +him, “to add to those many you have.” The grammar that Jonson had +prepared for the press was destroyed in the conflagration of his study; +so that the posthumous work we now possess consists merely of materials, +which were printed for the first time in 1640, three years after the +author’s death. + +The Dedication of this Tract is merely signed _Alexander Hume_, and +contains no other clue to the authorship. Curiously enough there were +four Alexander Humes living about the same time, and three of them were +educated at St. Mary’s College, St. Andrew’s; only two, however, became +authors, the first of whom was Minister of Logie, and wrote _Hymnes or +Sacred Songes_. There can be little doubt, however, that the present +grammar was written by the Alexander Hume who was at one time Head +Master of the High School, Edinburgh, and author of _Grammatica Nova_. + +From Dr. Steven’s History of the High School, Edinburgh, and from +M’Crie’s Life of Melville, I have been enabled to extract and put +together the following scanty particulars of our author’s life:--The +time and place both of his birth and of his death are alike unknown; +but he himself, on the title of one of his works, tells us that he was +distantly connected with the ancient and noble family of Home, in the +county of Berwick. He was educated at the school of Dunbar, under the +celebrated Andrew Simson, and in due time was enrolled a student in St. +Mary’s College, St. Andrew’s, and then took the degree of Bachelor of +Arts in 1574. He came to England, and was incorporated at Oxford January +26, 1580-81, as “M. of A. of St. Andrew’s, in Scotland.”[1] He spent +sixteen years in England, partly engaged in studying and partly in +teaching. During the latter part of this term he was a schoolmaster at +Bath, as appears from Dr. Hill’s answer to him, published in 1592; and +the fact of his residence in this city is corroborated at page 18 of +the present treatise. He then returned to Scotland, having gained a +reputation for the excellence of his learning and for the power he +possessed of communicating it to others. On the dismissal of Hercules +Rollock, Rector of the High School, Edinburgh, from his office, Hume was +unanimously chosen to succeed him, and his appointment was dated 23rd +April, 1596. During his incumbency the High School underwent many +changes, and received the form which it retains to the present day. In +March, 1606, Hume resigned his office to become principal master in the +grammar school founded a short time previously, at Prestonpans, by the +munificent John Davidson, minister of the parish. The following document +gives an account of Hume’s admission to this school:-- + + {Transcriber’s Note: + In this passage, caret ^ means that the following single letter, + or bracketed group of letters, was printed in superscript.} + + “At hadintoun y^e 25 of Junij 1606. The q^{lk} day M^r Jo^n ker + minister of y^e panis producit y^e prēntat^one of M^r Alex^r + hoome to be schoolm^r of y^e schoole of y^e panis foundit be M^r J^o + Davedsone for instructioune of the youth in hebrew, greek and latine + subscryvet be yais to quhome M^r Jo^n davedsone gave power to noiãt + y^e man q^{lk} prēntat^one y^e prēbrie allowit and ordenit y^e + moderator & clerk to subscrive y^e samine in y^r names q^{lk} yay + ded. As also ordeanit y^t y^e said kirk of y^e panis suld be visited + upon y^e eight day of Julij next to come for admissione of y^e said + M^r Alex^r to y^e said office. The visitors wer appoyntit M^r Ar^d + oswald M^r Robert Wallace M^r George greir M^r andro blackhall & M^r + andro Maghye to teach.”----“At Saltprestoun July 8, 1606. The haill + parischoners being poisit how yay lyckit of y^e said M^r Alex^r w^t + vniforme consent being particularly inqwyrit schew y^r guid lycking + of him and y^r willingnes to accept and receiv him to y^e said + office Q^rupon y^e said M^r Alex^r wes admittit to y^e said + office & in token of y^e approba^one both of visitors & of y^e + parischonēs p^rnt both y^e ane and y^e vother tuik y^e said M^r + Alex^r be y^e hand & y^e haill magistratis gentlemen and remanēt + parischoners p^rnt faithfullie p^rmisit to cõcurre for y^e + furtherãce of y^e work y^t yit restis to be done to y^e said schoole + as also to keipt y^e said M^r Alex^r and his scholleris skaithlis + finallie for farther authorizing of y^e said (_sic_) it wes thought + meitt y^t y^e haill visitors & parichonēs p^rnt suld enter y^e + said M^r Alex^r into y^e said schoole & y^r heir him teache q^{lk} + also wes doone.” (Rec. of Presb. of Haddington).[2] + + [Footnote 1: Wood’s Fasti Oxonienses, by Bliss, I., 217.] + + [Footnote 2: M’Crie’s Life of Melville, vol. ii., p. 509.] + +The school rapidly rose to distinction under Hume, but in 1615 he +relinquished his position, and accepted the Mastership of the Grammar +School of Dunbar, then in high repute, and the very same school in which +he had commenced his own education. When occupied at Dunbar, Hume had +the honour of being the first who, in a set speech, welcomed James VI. +back to his Scottish dominions, after an absence of fourteen years. The +King stopped on his way northward from Berwick on the 13th of May, 1617, +at Dunglass Castle the residence of the Earl of Home, and Hume, as the +orator of the day, delivered a Latin address. + +The date of Hume’s death is not known; but he was witness to a deed on +the 27th of November, 1627; and later still, in the records of the Privy +Council of Scotland, 8th and 16th July, 1630, Mr. D. Laing tells me that +there is a memorandum of the King’s letter anent the Grammar of Mr. +Alexander Hume, “schoolmaster at Dunbar.” With regard to his private +life, we know that he was married to Helen Rutherford, and had two sons +and a daughter born to him in Edinburgh between the years 1601 and 1606. +He was the father of three more children, also two sons and a daughter, +between 1608 and 1610, in the county of East Lothian. + +Hume was a master in controversy, and wrote on subjects of polemical +divinity; but his mind was principally drawn towards language and the +rules of its construction. He especially gave much of his time to the +study of Latin grammar, and feeling dissatisfied with the elementary +books which were then in use, he drew up one himself, which he submitted +to the correction of Andrew Melville and other learned friends, and +published in 1612 under the title of _Grammatica Nova_. The object he +proposed to himself was to exclude from the schools the grammar of the +Priscian of the Netherlands, the celebrated John Van Pauteren, but his +work did not give the satisfaction which he had expected. He succeeded, +however, in his wishes after many reverses, by the help of Alexander +Seton, Earl of Dunfermline, Chancellor of Scotland, and by authority +both of Parliament and of the Privy Council his grammar was enjoined to +be used in all the schools of the kingdom. But through the interest of +the bishops, and the steady opposition of Ray, his successor at the High +School, the injunction was rendered of no effect. He would not, however, +be beaten, and we find that in 1623 he was again actively engaged in +adopting measures to secure the introduction of his grammar into every +school in North Britain where the Latin language was taught. + +The following is a list of our author’s works:-- + +A Reioynder to Doctor Hil concerning the Descense of Christ into Hell. + By Alexander Hume Maister of Artes. 4o. + + No place of printing, printer’s name, or date, but apparently + printed at London in 1592 or 1593. Dedicated to Robert Earl of + Essex. Although this is the first work that I can find attributed + to Alexander Hume, yet there is no doubt that there must have been + a former one of which we have no record, and the title and + contents of Dr. Hill’s book would lead us to this conclusion--“The + Defence of the Article. Christ descended into Hell. With arguments + obiected against the truth of the same doctrine of one Alexander + Humes. By Adam Hyll, D of Divinity. London 1592. 4o. This little + volume consists of two parts; 1st, the original sermon preached by + Hill 28th February, 1589; 2nd, the reply to Hume. At p. 33, the + end of the sermon, is this note, “This sermon ... was answered by + one Alexander Huns, Schoolemaester of Bath, whose answere wholy + foloweth, with a replye of the author” ... At p. 33, “The reply of + Adam Hill to the answere made by Alexander Humes to a sermon,” + etc. + +A Diduction of the true and Catholik meaning of our Sauiour his words, + _this is my bodie_, in the institution of his laste Supper through + the ages of the Church from Christ to our owne dayis. Whereunto is + annexed a Reply to M. William Reynolds in defence of M. Robert Bruce + his arguments on this subject: displaying M. John Hammilton’s + ignorance and contradictions: with sundry absurdities following upon + the Romane interpretation of these words. Compiled by Alexander + Hume, Maister of the high Schoole of Edinburgh. Edinburgh, Printed + by Robert Waldegrave, Printer to the King’s Maiestie, 1602. Cum + Privilegio Regis. 8o. + +Prima Elementa Grammaticæ in usum juventutis Scoticæ digesta. Edinburgi, + 1612. 8o. + +Grammatica Nova in usum juventutis Scoticæ ad methodum revocata. + Edinburgi, 1612. 8o. + +Bellum Grammaticale, ad exemplar Mri. Alexandri Humii. Edinburgi, + excud. Gideon Lithgo, Anno Dom. 1658 8o. Several later editions. + + This humorous Grammatical Tragi-Comedy was not written by Hume, + but only revised by him. + +King James’s Progresses, collected and Published by John Adamson + afterwards Principal of the University of Edinburgh, entitled-- + ΤΑ ΤΩΝ ΜΟΥΣΩΝ ΕΙΣΟΔΙΑ: + The Muses Welcome to the High and Mighty Prince James &c. At his + Majesties happie Returne to Scotland In Anno 1617. Edinburgh 1618, + folio. + + At page 1: “His Majestie came from Bervik to Dunglas the xiij day + of Maye, where was delivered this [latin] speach following by A. + Hume.”--At page 16, there is also a couple of Latin verses signed + “Alexander Humius.” + +MS. in the British Museum. The present work. + +MS. in the Advocates’ Library:-- + + Rerum Scoticarum Compendium, in usum Scholarum. Per Alexandrum + Humium ex antiqua et nobili gente Humiorum in Scotia, a primâ stirpe + quinta sobole oriundum. This work is dated October 1660, and is + therefore merely a transcript. It is an epitome of Buchanan’s + History, and Chr. Irvine in Histor. Scot. Nomenclatura, calls it + Clavis in Buchananum, and Bishop Nicholson (Scottish Hist. Lib.) + praises its Latin style. + +The following three works are inserted by Dr. Steven in his list of +Hume’s writings, and have been supposed to be his by M’Crie and others; +but Mr. D. Laing believes “there can be no doubt, from internal +evidence, that the true author was Alexander Hume, the poet, who became +minister of Logie, near Stirling, in 1597, and who died in December, +1609.” In Wood’s Athenæ Oxonienses, by Bliss, i., 624, it is stated that +all three of them “were printed in London in 1594, in October,” but this +must, I think, be a mistake. + +Ane Treatise of Conscience, quhairin divers secreits concerning that + subject are discovered. At Edinburgh, printed by Robert Walde-grave, + Printer to the King’s Maiestie 1594. 8o. + +Of the Felicitie of the world to come, unsavorie to the obstinate, + alluring to such as are gone astray, and to the faithfull full of + consolation. Edinb. 1594. 8o. + +Four Discourses, of Praises unto God, to wit, 1 in Praise of the Mercy + and Goodness of God. 2 of his justice. 3 of his Power. 4 of his + Providence. Edinb. 1594. 8o. + +In conclusion, my acknowledgments are due to David Laing, Esq., who +has kindly suggested some corrections in the list of Hume’s works, in +addition to what is noted above. + + London, February, 1865. + + * * * * * + + + To the maest excellent + in all princelie wisdom, + learning, and heroical + artes, JAMES, + of Great Britan, + France, and + Ireland, + King, + Defender of the faeth, + grace, mercie, peace, + honoure here and + glorie hereafter. + + +May it please your maest excellent M_ajestie_, I, your grace’s humble +servant, seeing sik uncertentie in our men’s wryting, as if a man wald +indyte one letter to tuentie of our best wryteres, nae tuae of the +tuentie, without conference, wald agree; and that they quhae might +perhapes agree, met rather be custom then knawlege, set my selfe, about +a yeer syne, to seek a remedie for that maladie. Quhen I had done, +refyning it, I fand in Barret’s Alvearie,[3] quhilk is a dictionarie +Anglico-latinum, that Sr. Thomas Smith,[4] a man of nae less worth +then learning, Secretarie to Queen Elizabeth, had left a learned and +judiciouse monument on the same subject. Heer consydering my aun +weaknes, and meannes of my person, began to fear quhat might betyed my +sillie boat in the same seas quhaer sik a man’s ship was sunck in the +gulf of oblivion. For the printeres and wryteres of this age, caring for +noe more arte then may win the pennie, wil not paen them selfes to knau +whither it be orthographie or skuiographie that doeth the turne: _and_ +schoolmasteres, quhae’s sillie braine will reach no farther then the +compas of their cap, content them selfes with αὐτὸς ἔφη my master said +it. Quhil I thus hovered betueen hope _and_ despare, the same Barret, +in the letter E, myndes me of a star _and_ constellation to calm al +the tydes of these seaes, if it wald please the supreme Majestie to +command the universitie to censure and ratifie, and the schooles to +teach the future age right and wrang, if the present will not rectius +sapere. Heere my harte laggared on the hope of your M_ajesties_ +judgement, quhom God hath indeued with light in a sorte supernatural, if +the way might be found to draue your eie, set on high materes of state, +to take a glim of a thing of so mean contemplation, and yet necessarie. +Quhiles I stack in this claye, it pleased God to bring your M_ajestie_ +hame to visit your aun Ida. Quher I hard that your G_race_, in the +disputes of al purposes quherwith, after the exemple of _th_e wyse in +former ages, you use to season your moat, ne quid tibi temporis sine +fructu fluat, fel sundrie tymes on this subject reproving your +courteoures, quha on a new conceat of finnes sum tymes spilt (as they +cal it) the king’s language. Quhilk thing it is reported that your +M_ajestie_ not onlie refuted with impregnable reasones, but alsoe fel +on Barret’s opinion that you wald cause the universities mak an Inglish +gra_m_mar to repres the insolencies of sik green heades. This, quhen I +hard it, soe secunded my hope, that in continent I maed moien hou to +convoy this litle treates to your M_ajesties_ sight, to further (if +perhapes it may please your G_race_) that gud motion. In school materes, +the least are not the least, because to erre in them is maest absurd. +If the fundation be not sure, the maer gorgiouse the edifice the grosser +the falt. Neither is it the least parte of a prince’s praise, curasse +rem literariam, and be his auctoritie to mend the misses that ignorant +custom hath bred. Julius Cæsar was noe less diligent to eternize his +name be the pen then be the suord. Neither thought he it unworthie of +his paines to wryte a grammar in the heat of the civil weer, quhilk was +to them as the English gram_m_ar is to us; _and_, as it seemes noe less +then necessarie, nor our’s is now. Manie kinges since that tyme have +advanced letteres be erecting schooles, and doting revennues to their +ma_in_tenance; but few have had the knaulege them selfes to mend, or +be tuiched with, the defectes or faltes crept into the boueles of +learning, among quhom JAMES the first, ane of your M_ajesties_ worthie +progenitoures, houbeit repressed be the iniquitie of the tyme, deserved +noe smal praise; and your M_ajesties_ self noe less, co_m_manding, at +your first entrie to your Roial scepter, to reform the grammar, and to +teach Aristotle in his aun tongue, quhilk hes maed the greek almaest as +common in Scotland as the latine. In this alsoe, if it please your +M_ajestie_ to put to your hand, you have al the windes of favour in your +sail; account, that al doe follow; judgement, that al doe reverence; +wisdom, that al admire; learning, that stupified our scholes hearing +a king borne, from tuelfe yeeres ald alwayes occupyed in materes of +state, moderat in theological and philosophical disputationes, to the +admiration of all that hard him, and speciallie them quha had spent al +their dayes in those studies. + + [Footnote 3: “An Alvearie or Quadruple Dictionarie, containing + four sundrie tongues, namelie, English, Latine, Greeke and French + ... by Jo. Baret. _London_, 1580.” Folio. An edition was published + in 1573, with three languages only, the Greek not being included.] + + [Footnote 4: “De recta et emendata Linguæ Anglicæ Scriptione + Dialogus. _Lutetiæ_, 1568.” 4to.] + +Accept, dred Soveragne, your pover servantes myte. If it can confer anie +thing to the montan of your Majesties praise, and it wer but a clod, use +it _and_ the auctour as your’s. Thus beseeking your grace to accep my +mint, and pardon my miss, commites your grace to the king of grace, to +grace your grace with al graces spiritual _and_ temporal. + +Your M_ajesties_ + humble servant, + Alexander Hume. + + + + + OF THE ORTHOGRAPHIE + + OF THE BRITAN TONGUE; + + A TREATES, NOE + + SHORTER + + THEN NECESSARIE, FOR + + THE SCHOOLES. + + + + +OF THE GROUNDES OF ORTHOGRAPHIE. + +Cap. 1. + + +1. To wryte orthographicallie ther are to be considered the symbol, the +thing symbolized, and their congruence. Geve me leave, gentle reader, +in a new art, to borrow termes incident to the purpose, quhilk, being +defyned, wil further understanding. + +2. The symbol, then, I cal the written letter, quhilk representes to the +eie the sound that the mouth sould utter. + +3. The thing symbolized I cal the sound quhilk the mouth utteres quhen +the eie sees the symbol. + +4. The congruence between them I cal the instrument of the mouth, +quhilk, when the eie sees the symbol, utteres the sound. + +5. This is the ground of al orthographie, leading the wryter from the +sound to the symbol, and the reader from the symbol to the sound. As, +for exemple, if I wer to wryte God, the tuich of the midle of the tongue +on the roofe of the mouth befoer the voual, and the top of the tongue on +the teeth behind the voual, myndes me to wryte it g_o_d. The voual is +judged be the sound, as shal be shaued hereafter. This is the hardest +lesson in this treates, and may be called the key of orthographie. + + + + +OF THE LATINE VOUALES. + +Cap. 2. + + +1. We, as almaest al Europ, borrow our symboles from the Romanes. +Quherforr, to rectefie our aun, first it behoves us to knaw their’s. +Thei are in nu_m_ber 23: a, b, c, d, e, f, g, h, i, k, l, m, n, o, p, q, +r, s, t, u, x, y, and z. + +2. To omit the needless questiones of their order and formes; of them, +five be vouales, ane a noat of aspiration, and all the rest consonantes. + +3. A voual is the symbol of a sound maed without the tuiches of the +mouth. + +4. They are distinguished the ane from the other be delating and +contracting the mouth, and are a, e, i, o, u. + +5. Quhat was the right roman sound of them is hard to judge, seeing now +we heer nae romanes; and other nationes sound them after their aun +idiomes, and the latine as they sound them. + +6. But seeing our earand is with our aun britan, we purpose to omit +curiosities, _et_ quæ nihil nostra intersunt. Our aun, hou-be it +dialectes of ane tong, differing in the sound of them, differ alsoe in +pronuncing the latine. Quherfoer, to make a conformitie baeth in latine +and English, we man begin with the latine. + +7. A, the first of them, the south soundes as beath thei and we sound it +in bare, nudus; and we, as beath thei and we sound it in bar, obex. + +8. But without partialitie (for in this earand I have set my compas to +the loadstar of reason), we pronunce it better. If I am heer deceaved, +reason sall deceave me. + +9. For we geve it alwaies ane sound beath befoer and behind the +consonant: thei heer ane and ther an other. As in amabant, in the first +tuae syllabes they sound it as it soundes in bare, and in the last as it +sounds in bar. Quherupon I ground this argument. That is the better +sound, not onelie of this, but alsoe of al other letteres, q_uhi_lk is +alwayes ane. But we sound it alwayes ane, and therfoer better. Ad that +their sound of it is not far unlyke the sheepes bae, q_uhi_lk the greek +symbolizes be η not α, βη not βα. See Eustat. in Homer. + +10. Of this letter the latines themselfes had tuae other sounds +differing the ane from the other, and beath from this, quhilk they +symbolized be adding an other voual, æ and au. And these they called +diphthonges. + +11. The diphthong they defyne to be the sound of tuae vouales coalescing +into ane sound, quhilk definition in au is plaen, in æ obscurer as now +we pronunce it, for now we sound it generallie lyke the voual e, without +sound of the a, q_uhi_lk, notwithstanding is the principal voual in this +diphthong sound. Questionles at the first it semes to have had sum +differing sound from a, sik as we pronunce in stean, or the south in +stain. But this corruption is caryed with a stronger tyde then reason +can resist, and we wil not stryve with the stream. + +14. E followes, q_uhi_lk in reason sould have but ane sound, for without +doubt the first intent was to geve everie sound the awn symbol, and +everie symbol the awn sound. But as now we sound it in quies and +quiesco, the judiciouse ear may discern tuae soundes. But because +heer we differ not, I wil acquiess. My purpose is not to deal with +impossibilities, nor to mend al crookes, but to conform (if reason wil +conform us) the south and north beath in latine and in English. + +15. Af this voual ryseth tuae diphthonges, ei and eu, quhilk beath +standes wel with the definition, sect. 11. + +16. Of the next, i, we differ farder, and the knot harder to louse, +for nether syde wantes sum reason. Thei in mihi, tibi, and sik otheres, +pronunce it as it soundes in bide, manere; we as it soundes in bid, +jubere. + +17. Among the ancientes I fynd sum groundes for their sound. Cic. epist. +fam. lib. 9, epis. 22, avoues that bini, in latin, and βίνει in Greek, +had ane sound. And Varro, with sundrie ancientes, wrytes domineis and +serveis, for dominis and servis, quhilk is more lyke the sound of bide +then bid. If this argument reached as wel to i short as i lang, and if +we wer sure how ει was pronunced in those dayes, this auctoritie wald +over-weegh our reason; but seing i, in mihi, _et_c., in the first is +short, and in the last co_m_mon, and the sound of ei uncertan, I stand +at my reason, sect. 9, q_uhi_lk is as powerful heer for i as ther for a. +They pronunce not i in is and quis, id and quid, in and quin, as they +pronunce it in mihi, tibi, sibi, ibi, _et_c., and therfoer not right. + +18. As for o, in latin, we differ not; u, the south pronu_n_ces quhen +the syllab beginnes or endes at it, as eu, teu for tu, and eunum meunus +for unum munus, q_uhi_lk, because it is a diphthong sound, and because +they them selfes, quhen a consonant followes it, pronunce it other +wayes, I hoep I sal not need argumentes to prove it wrang, and not be +a pure voual. + + + + +OF THE BRITAN VOUALES. + +Cap. 3. + + +1. Of a, in our tongue we have four soundes, al so differing ane from an +other, that they distinguish the verie signification of wordes, as, a +tal man, a gud tal, a horse tal. + +2. Quherfoer in this case I wald co_m_mend to our men the imitation of +the greek and latin, quho, to mend this crook, devysed diphthongs. Let +the simplest of these four soundes, or that q_uhi_lk is now in use, +stand with the voual, and supplie the rest with diphthonges; as, for +exemple, I wald wryte the king’s hal with the voual a; a shour of hael, +with ae; hail marie, with ai; and a heal head, as we cal it, quhilk the +English cales a whole head, with ea. And so, besydes the voual, we have +of this thre diphthonges, tuae with a befoer, ae and ai, and ane w_i_th +the e befoer, ea. Ad to them au, howbeit of a distinct sound; as, +knaulege with us, in the south knowlege. + +3. These and al other diphthonges I wald counsel the teacheres not to +name be the vouales quherof they are maed, but be the sound q_uhi_lk +they maek, for learneres wil far maer easelie take the sound from the +mouth of the teacher, then maek it them selves of the vouales +ingredient. + +4. Of e, we have tuae soundes, q_uhi_lk it is hard to judge q_uhi_lk is +simplest; as, an el, ulna; and an el, anguilla; hel, infernus; and an +hel, calx pedis. Heer I wald com_m_end to our men quhae confoundes these +the imitation of the south, q_uhi_lk doth wel distinguish these soundes, +wryting the el, ulna, with the voual e, and eel, anguilla, with the +diphthong ee. I am not ignorant that sum symbolizes this sound w_i_th a +diphthong made of ie; eie, oculus; hiel, fiel, miel, _et_c. Here I am +indifferent, and onelie wishes that the ane be used; let the advysed +judge make choise of q_uhi_lk, for my awne paert I lyke the last best; +1. becaus eie, oculus, can not wel be symbolized ee; 2. because the +greekes expresse η be εε, q_uhi_lk, as appeares be the Ioneanes +and Doreanes, drawes neerar to α, than ε. + +5. Of i, also, our idiom receaves tuae soundes, as in a man’s wil, and +the wil of a fox. Heer, also, I wald have our men learne of the south, +for these soundes they wel distinguish, wryting wil, fil, mil, stil, +with i; and wyl, fyl, myl, styl, with y. + +6. Heer I see be Barrat, in his Alvearie, that sum wald be at +symbolizing these soundes, the ane with the greek diphthong ει, and +the other with ᴉ inverted; as, rειd, equitare; bειd, manere; +rᴉd, legere; hᴉd, cavere. In this opinion I se an eye of judgement, +and therfoer wil not censure it, except I saw the auctour’s whole drift. +Onelie for my awn parte I will avoid al novelties, and content my self +with the letteres q_uhi_lk we have in use. And seeing we have no other +use of y distinguished from i, condiscend to the opinion of the south +using i for ane, and y for the other. + +7. O, we sound al alyk. But of it we have sundrie diphthonges: oa, as +to roar, a boar, a boat, a coat; oi, as coin, join, foil, soil; oo, as +food, good, blood; ou, as house, mouse, &c. Thus, we com_m_onlie wryt +mountan, fountan, q_uhi_lk it wer more etymological to wryt montan, +fontan, according to the original. + +8. In this diphthong we co_m_mit a grosse errour, saving better +judgement, spelling how, now, and siklyk with w, for if w be (as it sal +appear, quhen we cum to the awn place of it) a consonant, it can noe +wayes coalesse into a diphthong sound, sik as this out of controversie +is. + +9. U, the last of this rank, the south, as I have said in the latin +sound of it, pronu_n_ces eu, we ou, both, in my simple judgement, wrang, +for these be diphthong soundes, and the sound of a voual sould be +simple. If I sould judge, the frensh sound is neerest the voual sound +as we pronu_n_ce it in mule and muse. + +10. Of it we have a diphthong not yet, to my knawlege, observed of anie; +and, for my awn parte, I am not wel resolved neither how to spel it, nor +name it. Onelie I see it in this, to bou, a bow. I wait not quhither I +sould spel the first buu, or the last boau. As, for exemple, if Roben +Hud wer nou leving, he wer not able to buu his aun bou, or to bou his +aun boau. And therfoer this with al the rest, hou be it in other I have +more for me, I leave to the censure of better judgement. + + + + +OF CONSONANTES. + +Cap. 4. + + +1. This for the vouales, and diphthonges made of them without the +tuiches of the mouth. Now followe the consonantes. + +2. A consonant is a letter symbolizing a sound articulat that is broaken +with the tuiches of the mouth. + +3. The instrumentes of the mouth, quherbe the vocal soundes be broaken, +be in number seven. The nether lip, the upper lip, the outward teeth, +the inward teeth, the top of the tongue, the midle tong, and roof of the +mouth. Of these, thre be, as it were, ha_m_meres stryking, and the rest +stiddies, kepping the strakes of the ha_m_meres. + +4. The ham_m_eres are the nether lip, the top of the tongue, and the +midle tongue. The stiddies the overlip, the outward teeth, the inward +teeth, and the roofe of the mouth. + +5. The nether lip stryking on the overlip makes b, m, p, and on the +teeth it makes f and v. + +6. The top of the tongue stryking on the inward teeth formes d, l, n, r, +s, t, and z. + +7. The midle tongue stryking on the rouf of the mouth formes the rest, +c, g, k, j, q, and x, and so we have 18 consonantes borrowed of the +latines. + +8. These they borrow al from the greekes, saving j and v, quhilk our age +soundes other wayes then it seemes the romanes did; for Plutarch, more +then 100 yeeres after Christ, expressing the sound q_uhi_lk they had in +his tyme, symbolizes them neerar the sound of the vouales quherof they +are maed then now we sound them in latin, for in Galba he symbolizes +junius vindex, ἰόυνιος ὀύινδεξ, q_uhi_lk, if then it had sounded as +now we sound it, he sould rather have written it with _gamma_ and +_beta_, γόυνιος βίνδεξ. + +9. We have in our use the sam soundes q_uhi_lk it seemes these +consonantes had in Plutarch’s dayes, as in yallou, winter. Quhilk, +seeing now they are worn out of the latin use, my counsel is that we +leave the sound of them q_uhi_lk now is in the latin use to the latines, +and take as our’s the sound q_uhi_lk they have left, and geve to the +sound, q_uhi_lk now we use in latin, the latin symbol; as, jolie jhon; +vertue is not vain; and to the soundes quhilk they have left the +symboles q_uhi_lk we have usurped to that end; as, yallou, youk; +water, wyne. + +10. And heer, to put our men af their errour quho had wont to symboliz +yallou with an ȝ, and to put noe difference betueen v and w, ȝ is +a dental consonant, broaken betueen the top of the tongue and root of +the teeth; yal, a guttural sound, made be a mynt of the tongue to the +roofe of the mouth, and therfoer the organes being so far distant, and +the tuich so diverse, this symbol can be no reason serve that sound, nor +nane of that kynd. + +11. As for v and w, seeing we have in our idiom, besyd the latin sound, +an other never hard in latin, as now it is pronu_n_ced, I can not but +com_m_end the wisdom of the south, q_uhi_lk gave the latin sound their +awn symbol, and took to our sound a symbol quhilk they use not. Lyke was +their wisdom in j and y; for as the latines usurped the voual i for a +consonant in their use, q_uhi_lk the greekes had not, so they usurped y, +a voual not mikle different from i, for the correspondent sound, not +used in the latin as now it is pronu_n_ced. + +12. Heerfoer, for distinctiones of both sound and symbol, I wald commend +the symbol and name of i and u to the voual sound; as, indifferent, +unthankful; the symbols of j and v to the latin consonantes, and their +names to be jod and vau; as, vain jestes; and the symboles y and w to +our English soundes, and their names to be ye and we, or yod and wau; +as, yonder, wel, yallou, wool. + +13. Now remaineth h, q_uhi_lk we have called a noat of aspiration, cap. +2, sect. 2, and is, in deed, noe voual, because with a consonant it +makes noe sound; as, ch; nor consonant, because it is pronu_n_ced +without the tuich of the mouth; as, ha. + +14. It may affect al vouales _and_ diphthonges; as, hand, hen, hind, +hose, hurt, hail, hautie, health, heel, heifer, _etc._ But behind the +voual in our tong (so far as yet I can fynd) it hath no use. Of +consonantes, it affecteth g beyond the voual; as, laugh; p befoer the +voual; as, phason; s and t also befoer the voual; as, think, shame. +With c we spil the aspiration, tur_n_ing it into an Italian chirt; as, +charitie, cherrie, of quhilk hereafter. + + + + +OF OUR ABUSING SUM CONSONANTES. + +Cap. 5. + + +1. Now I am cum to a knot that I have noe wedg to cleave, and wald be +glaed if I cold hoep for help. Ther sould be for everie sound that can +occur one symbol, and of everie symbol but one onlie sound. This reason +and nature craveth; and I can not but trow but that the worthie +inventoures of this divyne facultie shot at this mark. + +2. But, contrarie to this sure ground, I waet not be quhat corruption, +we see, not onelie in our idiom, but in the latin alsoe, one symbol to +have sundrie soundes, ye, and that in one word; as, lego, legis. + +3. First, to begin with c, it appeeres be the greekes, quho ever had +occasion to use anie latin word, quharein now we sound c as s, in their +tymes it sounded k; for Cicero, thei wryt Kikero; for Cæsar, Kaisar; and +Plut., in Galba, symbolizes principia, πρινκιπια. + +4. This sound of it we, as the latines, also keepe befoer a, o, and u; +as, canker, conduit, cumber. But, befoer e and i, sum tymes we sound it, +with the latin, lyke an s; as, cellar, certan, cease, citie, circle, +_et_c. + +5. Behind the voual, if a consonant kep it, we sound it alwayes as a k; +as, occur, accuse, succumb, acquyre. If it end the syllab, we ad e, and +sound it as an s; as, peace, vice, solace, temperance; but nether for +the idle e, nor the sound of the s, have we anie reason; nether daer I, +with al the oares of reason, row against so strang a tyde. I hald it +better to erre with al, then to stryve with al and mend none. + +6. This consonant, evin quher in the original it hes the awne sound, we +turn into the chirt we spak of, cap. 4, sect. 14, quhilk, indeed, can be +symbolized with none, neither greek nor latin letteres; as, from cano, +chant; from canon, chanon; from castus, chast; from κυριακὴ, a church, +of q_uhi_lk I hard doctour Laurence, the greek professour in Oxfoord, a +man bothe of great learni_n_g and judgement, utter his opinion to this +sense, and (excep my memorie fael me) in these wordes: κυριακὴ ut +βασιλικὴ suppresso substantivo ὀικία domus domini est. Unde nostrum +derivatur, quod Scoti et Angli boreales recte, pronu_n_ciant a kyrk, nos +corrupte a church. + +7. Yet, notwithstanding that it is barbarouse, seing it is more usual in +our tongue then can be mended befoer the voual, as chance, and behind +the voual, as such, let it be symbolized, as it is symbolized with ch, +hou beit nether the c nor the h hath anie affinitie with that sound; +1, because it hath bene lang soe used; and 2, because we have no other +mean to symbolize it, except it wer with a new symbol, q_uhi_lk it will +be hard to bring in use. + +8. Now, quheras ch in nature is c asperat, as it soundes in charus and +chorus; and seing we have that sound also in use, as licht, micht; if I +had bene at the first counsel, my vote wald have bene to have geven ch +the awn sound. But as now the case standes, ne quid novandum sit, quod +non sit necesse, I not onlie consent, but also com_m_end the wisdom of +the south, quho, for distinction, wrytes light, might, with gh and +referres ch to the other sound, how be it improperlie, and this +distinction I com_m_end to our men, quho yet hes not satis attente +observed it. + +9. Next cumes g, howbe it not so deformed as c; for, althogh we see it +evin in latin, and that, in one word (as is said cap. 5, sect. 2), +distorted to tuo sonndes, yet both may stand with the nature of the +symbol and differ not in the instrumentes of the mouth, but in the form +of the tuich, as the judiciouse ear may mark in ago, agis; agam, ages. + +10. This consonant, in latin, never followes the voual; befoer a, o, u, +it keepes alwayes the awn sound, and befoer e and i breakes it. + +11. But with us it may both begin and end the syllab; as, gang; it may, +both behind and befoer, have either sound; as, get, gist, gin, giant. + +12. These the south hath providentlie minted to distinguish tuo wayes, +but hes in deed distinguished noe way, for the first sum hath used tuo +gg; as, egg, legg, bigg, bagg; for the other dg; as, hedge, edge, +bridge; but these ar not κατὰ πάντος. Gyles, nomen viri, can not be +written dgiles; nor giles doli, ggiles; nether behind the voual ar they +general; age, rage, suage, are never wrytten with dg. Quherfoer I +conclud that, seeing nether the sound nor the symbol hath anie reason to +be sundrie, without greater auctoritie, nor the reach of a privat wit, +this falt is incorrigible. + +13. Here I am not ignorant quhat a doe the learned make about the +symboles of c, g, k and q, that they be al symboles, but of one sound; +but I wil not medle in that question, being besyde my purpose, q_uhi_lk +is not to correct the latin symboles, but to fynd the best use of them +in our idiom. + +14. T, the last of these misused souldioures, keepes alwayes it’s aun +nature, excep it be befoer tio; as, oration, declamation, narration; for +we pronunce not tia and tiu as it is in latin. Onelie let it be heer +observed that if an s preceed tio, the t keepes the awn nature, as in +question, suggestion, _et_c. + +15. Thus have I breeflie handled the letteres and their soundes, quhilk, +to end this parte, I wald wish the printeres, in their a, b, c, to +expresse thus:--a, ae, ai, au, ea, b, c, d, e, ee, ei, eu, f, g, h, i, +j, k, l, m, n, o, oa, oo, ou, p, q, r, s, t, u, ui, v, w, x, y, z, and +the masteres teaching their puples to sound the diphthonges, not be the +vouales quharof they be made, but be the sound quhilk they mak in +speaking; lykwayes I wald have them name w, not duble u nor v, singl u, +as now they doe; but the last, vau or ve, and the first, wau or we; and +j, for difference of the voual i, written with a long tail, I wald wish +to to be called jod or je. + + + + +OF THE SYLLAB. + +Cap. 6. + + +1. Now followes the syllab, quhilk is a ful sound symbolized with +convenient letteres, and consistes of ane or moe. + +2. A syllab of ane letter is symbolized with a voual onelie; as, a in +able, e in ever, i in idle, o in over, u in unitie, for a consonant can +make no syllab alane. + +3. A syllab of moe letteres is made of vouales onelie, or els of vouales +and consonantes. Of onlie vouales the syllab is called a diphthong, of +quhilk we have spoaken in the vouales quherof they ar composed. + +4. A syllab of vouales and consonantes either begin_n_es at the +voual, as al, il, el; or at one consona_n_t, as tal man; or at tuo +consona_n_tes, as stand, sleep; or els at thre at the maest, as strand, +stryp. It endes either at a voual, as fa, fo; or at one consonant, as +ar, er; or at tuo, as best, dart; or at thre at the maest, as durst, +worst. + +5. Heer is to be noated, that in divyding syllabes, the consonantes, one +or moe, that may begin a syllab anie way in the middes of a word belong +to the voual following, as in que-stion, qua-rel, fi-shar, sa-fron, +ba-stard, de-scrib, re-scue. + +6. It is alsoe heer to be observed in printing and wryting, that quhen a +word fales to be divyded at the end of a lyne, that the partition must +be made at the end of a syllab, soe that the one lyne end at the end of +the whol syllab, and the other begin the next lyne. As, for exemple, if +this word magistrat fel to be divided at the first syllab, it behoved to +be ma-gistrat; if at the second, it behoved to be magi-strat; but no +wayes to parte the m from the a, nor the g from the i, nor the s from t, +nor the t from r. + + + + +OF THE RULES TO SYMBOLIZE. + +Cap. 7. + + +1. To symboliz right, the sound of the voual is first to be observed, +quhither it be a simple voual or a compound, and quhilk of them is to be +chosen, for quhilk no rule can be geven but the judgeme_n_t of the ear. + +2. Next the consonantes are to be marked; and first, quhither they break +the voual befoer or behind; then quhither they be one or moe; and +lastlie, w_i_th quhat organes of the mouth they be broaken. + +3. For be the organes of the mouth, quherwith the syllab is broaken, the +consonantes are discerned be quhilk the syllab must be symbolized, +quhilk we have said, cap 1, sect. 5. + +4. The consonantes may differ in hammar (as we called it, cap. 4, sect +3) and stiddie, as b and d. Or they may agre in ham_m_er and differ in +stiddie, as b and v. Or they may agre in both and differ in the tuich, +as f and v, m and p, t and g. + +5. The tuich befoer the voual is be lifting the ham_m_er af the stiddie; +as da, la, pa; and behind, be stryking the hammer on the stiddie; as ad, +al, ap. And quhen the hammer and the stiddie are ane, the difference is +in the hardnes and softnes of the tuich; as may be seen in ca and ga, ta +and da. But w and y maekes sae soft a mynt that it is hard to perceave, +and therfoer did the latines symboliz them with the symbol of the +vouales. They are never used but befoer the voual; as we, ye, wil, you; +behynd the voual thei mak noe consonant sound, nor sould be written, and +therfore now and vow, with sik otheres, are not [to] be written w_i_th +w, as is said befoer. + +6. Of this q_uhi_lk now is said may be gathered that general, q_uhi_lk I +called the keie of orthographie, cap. 1 sect. 5, that is the congruence +of the symbol and sound symbolized; that is, that bathe must belang to +the same organes and be tuiched after the same form. + +7. And, be the contrarie, here it is clere that soundes pronu_n_ced with +this organ can not be written with symboles of that; as, for exemple, a +labiel symbol can not serve a dental nor a guttural sound; nor a +guttural symbol a dental nor a labiel sound. + +8. To clere this point, and alsoe to reform an errour bred in the south, +and now usurped be our ignorant printeres, I wil tel quhat befel my self +quhen I was in the south with a special gud frende of myne. Ther rease, +upon sum accident, quhither quho, quhen, quhat, _et_c., sould be +symbolized with q or w, a hoat disputation betuene him and me. After +manie conflictes (for we ofte encountered), we met be chance, in the +citie of Baeth, w_i_th a Doctour of divinitie of both our acquentance. +He invited us to denner. At table my antagonist, to bring the question +on foot ama_n_gs his awn condisciples, began that I was becum an +heretik, and the doctour spering how, ansuered that I denyed quho to be +spelled with a w, but with qu. Be quhat reason? quod the D_octour_. +Here, I beginni_n_g to lay my gru_n_des of labial, dental, and guttural +soundes and symboles, he snapped me on this hand and he on that, that +the d_octour_ had mikle a doe to win me room for a syllogisme. Then +(said I) a labial letter can not symboliz a guttural syllab. But w is a +labial letter, quho a guttural sound. And therfoer w can not symboliz +quho, nor noe syllab of that nature. Here the d_octour_ staying them +again (for al barked at ones), the proposition, said he, I understand; +the assumption is Scottish, and the conclusion false. Quherat al +laughed, as if I had bene dryven from al replye, and I fretted to see a +frivolouse jest goe for a solid ansuer. My proposition is grounded on +the 7 sectio of this same cap., q_uhi_lk noe man, I trow, can denye that +ever suked the paepes of reason. And soe the question must rest on the +assumption quhither w be a labial letter and quho a guttural syllab. As +for w, let the exemples of wil, wel, wyne, juge quhilk are sounded +befoer the voual with a mint of the lippes, as is said the same cap., +sect. 5. As for quho, besydes that it differres from quo onelie be +aspiration, and that w, being noe perfect consonant, can not be +aspirated, I appele to al judiciouse eares, to q_uhi_lk Cicero +attributed mikle, quhither the aspiration in quho be not ex imo gutture, +and therfoer not labial. + + + + +OF RULES FROM THE LATIN. + +Cap. 7. (_sic._) + + +1. Heer, seeing we borrow mikle from the latin, it is reason that we +either follow them in symbolizing their’s, or deduce from them the +groundes of our orthographie. + +2. Imprimis, then, quhatever we derive from them written with c we sould +alsoe wryte with c, howbeit it sound as an s to the ignorant; as +conceave, receave, perceave, from concipio, recipio, percipio; concern, +discern, from concerno, discerno; accesse, successe, recesse, from +accedo, succedo, recedo, w_i_th manie moe, q_uhi_lk I com_m_end to the +attention of the wryter. + +3. Also quhat they wryte w_i_th s we sould alsoe wryte with s; as +servant, from servus; sense, from sensus; session from sessio; passion, +from passio. + +4. Neither is the c joined w_i_th s here to be omitted; as science and +conscience, from scientia, conscientia; ascend and descend, from +ascendo, descendo; rescind and abscind, from rescindo and abscindo. + +4 (_sic_). This difference of c and s is the more attentivelie to be +marked for that wordes of one sound and diverse signification are many +tymes distinguished be these symboles; as, the kinges secrete council, +and the faithful counsil of a frende; concent in musik, and consent of +myndes; to duel in a cel, and to sel a horse; a decent weed, and descent +of a noble house. These tuo last differres alsoe in accent. + +5. Lykwayes, that we derive from latin verbales in tio, sould also be +wrytten with t; as oration, visitation, education, vocation, +proclamation, admonition, _et_c. + +6. Wordes deryved from the latin in tia and tium we wryte with ce; as +justice, from justitia; intelligence, from intelligentia; vice, from +vitium; service, from servitium. In al q_uhi_lk, houbeit the e behind +the c be idle, yet use hes made it tollerable to noat the breaking of +the c, for al tongues bear with sum slippes that can not abyde the tuich +stone of true orthographie. + +7. C is alsoe written in our wordes deryved from x in latin; as peace, +from pax; fornace, from fornax; matrice, from matrix; nurice, from +nutrix, q_uhi_lk the south calles nurse, not without a falt both in +sound and symbol; be this we wryte felicitie, audacitie, tenacitie, +_et_c. + +8. Lykwayes we sould keep the vouales of the original, quherin the north +warres the south; from retineo, the north retine, the south retain; from +foras, the north foran, the south forain; from regnu_m_, the north +regne, the south raigne; from cor, the north corage, the south courage; +from devoro, the north devore, the south devour; from vox, the north +voce, the south voice; from devoveo, the north devote, the south +devoute; from guerrum, the north were, the south war; from gigas, +gigantis, the north gyant, the south giaunt; from mons, montis, the +north mont, the south mount. Of this I cold reckon armies, but wil not +presume to judge farther then the compasse of my awn cap, for howbeit we +keep nearar the original, yet al tongues have their idiom in borrowing +from the latin, or other foran tongues. + + + + +OF SUM IDIOMES IN OUR ORTHOGRAPHIE. + +Cap. 8. + + +1. In our tongue we have some particles q_uhi_lk can not be symbolized +with roman symboles, nor rightlie pronunced but be our awn, for we in +manye places soe absorb l and n behynd a consonant, quher they can not +move without a voual intervening, that the ear can hardlie judge +quhither their intervenes a voual or noe. + +2. In this case sum, to avoid the pronu_n_ciation of the voual befoer +the l and n, wrytes it behind; as litle, mikle, muttne, eatne. Quhilk +houbeit it incurres in an other inconvenience of pronu_n_cing the voual +behind the l or n, yet I dar not presume to reprove, because it passeth +my wit how to avoid both inconveniences, and therfoer this I leave to +the wil of the wryter. + +3. Sum of our men hes taken up sum unusual formes of symbolizing, +q_uhi_lk I wald wish to be reformed, yet if I bring not reason, let no +man change for my phantasie. + +4. First, for peple they wryte people, I trow because it cumes from +populus; but if that be a reason, I wald understand a reason quhy they +speak not soe alsoe. Or gif they speak not soe, I wald understand quhy +they wryte not as they speak. I knawe they have the exemple of France to +speak ane way and wryte an other; but that exemple is as gud to absorb +the s in the end of everie word. Al exemples are not imitable. + +5. They use alsoe to wryte logicque, musicque, rhetoricque, and other of +that sorte, with cque. If this be doon to make the c in logica, _et_c., +subsist, quhy wer it not better to supply a k in the place of it, then +to hedge it in with a whol idle syllab; it wer both more orthographical +and easier for the learner, for c and k are sa sib, _tha_t the ane is a +greek and the other a latin symbol of one sound. In this art it is alyke +absurd to wryte that thou reades not, as to read that thou wrytes not. + +6. We use alsoe, almost at the end of everie word, to wryte an idle e. +This sum defend not to be idle, because it affectes the voual before the +consonant, the sound quherof many tymes alteres the signification; as, +hop is altero tantu_m_ pede saltare, hope is sperare; fir, abies, fyre, +ignis; a fin, pinna, fine, probatus; bid, jubere, bide, manere; with +many moe. It is true that the sound of the voual befoer the consonant +many tymes doth change the signification; but it is as untrue that the +voual e behind the consonant doth change the sound of the voual before +it. A voual devyded from a voual be a consonant can be noe possible +means return thorough the consonant into the former voual. Consonantes +betuene vouales are lyke partition walles betuen roomes. Nothing can +change the sound of a voual but an other voual coalescing with it into +one sound, of q_uhi_lk we have spoaken sufficientlie, cap. 3, to +illustrat this be the same exemples, saltare is to hop; sperare to hoep; +abies is fir; ignis, fyr, or, if you wil, fier; jubere is bid; manere, +byd or bied. + +7. Yet in sum case we are forced to tolerat this idle e; 1. in wordes +ending in c, to break the sound of it; as peace, face, lace, justice, +_et_c.; 2. behind s, in wordes wryten with this s; as false, ise, case, +muse, use, _et_c.; 3. behind a broaken g; as knawlege, savage, suage, +ald age. Ther may be moe, and these I yeld because I ken noe other waye +to help this necessitie, rather then that I can think anye idle symbol +tolerable in just orthographie. + + + + +OF THE ACCENTES OF OUR TONGUE. + +Cap. 9. + + +1. Seing that we fynd not onelie the south and north to differ more in +accent then symbol, but alsoe one word with a sundrie accent to have a +diverse signification, I com_m_end this to him quho hes auctoritie, to +com_m_and al printeres and wryteres to noat the accented syllab in +everie word with noe lesse diligence then we see the grecianes to noat +their’s. + +2. Cicero, in his buik de Oratore ad Brutum, makes it a natural harmonie +that everie word pronunced be the mouth of man have one acute syllab, +and that never farther from the end then the third syllab, quhilk the +grammareanes cales to the same end the antepenult. Quhilk observation of +so noble a wit is most true in tongues q_uhi_lk he understud, the greek +and latin. But if Cicero had understud our tongue, he sould have hard +the accent in the fourth syllab from the end; as in mátrimonie, +pátrimonie, vádimonie, intóllerable, intélligences, and whole garrisones +of lyke liverie. This anie eare may if he accent the antepenult +matrímonie, or the penult matrimónie, or the last as matrimoníe. + +3. Then to the purpose we have the same accentes q_uhi_lk the latin and +the greek hath, acute, circu_m_flex, and grave. + +4. The acute raiseth the syllab quheron it sittes; as profésse, prófit, +ímpudent. + +5. It may possesse the last syllab: as supprést, preténce, sincére; the +penult: as súbject, cándle, cráftie; the antepenult: as diffícultie, +mínister, fínallie; and the fourth also from the end, as is said sect. +2; as spéciallie, insátiable, díligentlie. In al q_uhi_lk, if a man +change the acce_n_t, he sall spill the sound of the word. + +6. The grave accent is never noated, but onelie understood in al +syllabes quherin the acute and circumflex is not. Onlie, for difference, +sum wordes ar marked with it, thus `, leaning contrarie to the acute. + +7. The circumflex accent both liftes and felles the syllab that it +possesseth, and combynes the markes of other tuae, thus ˆ. Of this we, +as the latines, hes almost no use. But the south hath great use of it, +and in that their dialect differes more from our’s then in other soundes +or symboles. + +8. The use of the accent wil be of good importance for the right +pronu_n_ciation of our tongue, quhilk now we doe forte, non arte, and +conforming of the dialectes, q_uhi_lk, as I have said, differes most in +this. + + + + +OF THE APOSTROPHUS AND HYPHEN. + +Cap. 10. + + +1. The learned printeres uses to symboliz apostrophus and hyphen as wel +as a, b, c. + +2. Apostrophus is the ejecting of a letter or a syllab out of one word +or out betuene tuae, and is alwayes marked above the lyne, as it wer a +com_m_a, thus ’. + +3. Out of one word the apostrophus is most usual in poesie; as Ps. 73, +v. 3, for quhen I sau such foolish men, I grug’d, and did disdain; and +v. 19, They are destroy’d, dispatch’d, consum’d. + +4. Betuene tuae wordes we abate either from the end of the former or the +beginni_n_g of the later. + +5. We abate from the end of the former quhen it endes in a voual and the +next beginnes at a voual; as, th’ ingrate; th’ one parte; I s’ it, for I +see it. + +6. In abating from the word following, we, in the north, use a +mervelouse libertie; as, he’s a wyse man, for he is a wyse man; I’l meet +with him, for I wil meet with him; a ship ’l of fooles, for a ship ful +of fooles; and this we use in our com_m_on language. And q_uhil_k is +stranger, we manie tymes cut of the end of the word; as, he’s tel the, +for he sal tel the. + +7. This for apostrophus. Hyphen is, as it wer, a band uniting whol +wordes joined in composition; as, a hand-maed, a heard-man, tongue-tyed, +out-rage, foer-warned, mis-reported, fals-deemed. + + + + + OF THE CONGRUITIE + + OF OUR BRITAN + + TONGUE. + + LIB. 2. + + + + +OF THE PERSON. + +Cap. 1. + + +1. Al wordes q_uhi_lk we use to expresse our mynde are personal or +impersonal. + +2. A personal word is q_uhi_lk admittes diversitie of person. + +3. Person is the face of a word, quhilk in diverse formes of speach it +diverselie putes on; as, I, Peter, say that thou art the son of God. +Thou, Peter, sayes that I am the son of God. Peter said that I am the +son of God. + +4. Quherupon person is first, second, and third. + +5. The first person is of him that speakes; as, I wryte. + +6. The second person is of him that is spoaken to; as, thou wrytes. + +7. The third person is of him that is spoaken of; as, Peter wrytes. + + + + +OF NU_M_BER. + +Cap. 2. + + +1. Number is distinction of person be one and moe; and soe is singular +and plural. + +2. The singular speakes of one; as, a hand, a tree, a sheep, a horse, a +man. + +3. The plural speakes of moe then one; as, handes, trees, sheep, horses, +men, tuo, three, foure, or moe, or how manie soever. + +4. This difference is com_m_onlie noted with es at the end of the word +singular; as, a house, houses; a windoe, windoes; a doore, tuo doores. + +5. Sum tymes it is noated be changing a letter; as, a man, men; a woman, +wemen; a goose, geese. + +6. Sum tyme be changing noe thing; as, a sheep, a thousand sheep; a +horse, an hundred horse; a noute, ten noute. + + + + +OF THE DETERMINATION OF THE PERSON. + +Cap. 3. + + +1. A personal word is a noun or a verb. A noun is a word of one person +w_i_th gender and case; as, I is onelie of the first person; thou is +onelie of the second; and al other nounes are onelie the third person; +as, thou, Thomas, head, hand, stone, blok, except they be joined with I +or thou. + +2. The person of a noun singular is determined or undetermined. + +3. The determined person is noated with the, and it is determined either +be an other substantive; as, the king of Britan; or be an adjective; as, +the best king in Europ; or be a relative; as, God preserve the king +quhom he hath geven us. + +4. The undetermined noun is noated with an befoer a voual; as, an ald +man sould be wyse; and with a befoer a consonant; as, a father sould +com_m_and his son. + + + + +OF THE GENDER OF A NOUN. + +Cap. 4. + + +1. Gender is the affection of a noun for distinction of sex. + +2. Sex is a distinction of a noun be male and female, and these are +distinguished the one from the other, or both from thinges without sex. + +3. The one is distinguished from the other be he and she. + +4. He is the noat of the male; as, he is a gud judge; he is a wyse man; +he is a speedie horse; he is a crouse cock; he is a fat wether. + +5. She is the noate of the femal sex; as, she is a chast matron; she is +a stud meer; she is a fat hen; she is a milk cowe. + +6. Nounes that want sex are noated with it; as, it is a tale tree; it is +a sueet aple; it is a hard flint; it is a faer day; it is a foul way. + +7. In the plural number they are not distinguished; as, they are honest +men; they are vertueouse ladies; they are highe montanes. + + + + +OF THE CASE OF THE NOUN. + +Cap. 5. + + +1. Case is an affection of a noun for distinction of person; as, the +corner stone fel on me; stone is the nominative case. The corner of a +stone hurt me; stone is the genitive case. Quhat can you doe to a stone; +stone is the dative case. He brak the stones; it is the accusative case. +Quhy standes thou stone; it is the vocative. And he hurt me with a +stone; it is the ablative case. + +2. This difference we declyne, not as doth the latines and greekes, be +terminationes, but with noates, after the maner of the hebrues, quhilk +they cal particles. + +3. The nominative hath no other noat but the particle of determination; +as, the peple is a beast with manie heades; a horse serves man to manie +uses; men in auctoritie sould be lanternes of light. + +4. Our genitive is alwayes joyned with an other noun, and is noated with +of, or s. + +5. With of, it followes the noun quhar w_i_th it is joined; as, the +house of a good man is wel governed. + +6. With s it preceedes the word quherof it is governed, and s is devyded +from it with an apostrophus; as, a gud man’s house is wel governed. + +7. This s sum haldes to be a segment of his, and therfoer now almost al +wrytes his for it, as if it wer a corruption. But it is not a segment of +his; 1. because his is the masculin gender, and this may be fœminin; +as, a mother’s love is tender; 2. because his is onelie singular, and +this may be plural; as, al men’s vertues are not knawen. + +8. The dative is noated w_i_th to, and for; as, geve libertie evin to +the best youth and it wil luxuriat. Al men doeth for them selves; few +for a frende. + +9. The accusative hath noe other noat then the nominative; as, the head +governes the bodie. + +10. The vocative is the person to quhom the speach is directed; as, +quhence cumes thou Æneas. + +11. The ablative is noated w_i_th prepositiones in, with, be, and sik +lyke; as, be god al thinges wer made; God w_i_th his word his warkes +began; in my father’s house are manie mansiones. + + + + +OF THE DEGREES OF COMPARISON. + +Cap. 6. + + +1. Al nounes that wil join with a substantive ar called adjectives; as, +gud, high, hard, sueet, sour. + +2. These, and al that wil admit mare and mast, are compared be degrees; +as, sueet, more sueet, most sueet. + +3. Of comparison ther be thre degrees: the positive, comparative, and +superlative, if the first may be called a degre. + +4. The positive is the first position of the noun; as, soft, hard; +quhyte, blak; hoat, cald. + +5. The comparative excedes the positive be more, and is formed of the +positive be adding er; as, softer, harder; quhiter, blaker; hoater, +calder. + +6. The superlative excedes the positive be most, and is formed of the +positive be adding est; as, softest, hardest; quhytest, blakest; +hoatest, caldest. + + + + +OF THE VERB’S PERSON AND NUMBER. + +Cap. 7. + + +1. This for the noun. The verb is a word of al persones declyned with +mood and tyme; as, I wryte, thou wrytes, he wrytes. + +2. We declyne not the persones and nu_m_beres of the verb, as doth the +latine, but noat them be the person of the noun. + +3. They are noated w_i_th I, thou, and he in the singular number; we, +ye, and they in the plural. + +4. The nu_m_ber is noated with I and we; thou and ye; he and they. + + + + +OF THE MOOD OF THE VERB. + +Cap. 8. + + +1. The mood is an affection of the verb serving the varietie of +utterance. + +2. We utter the being of thinges or our awn wil. + +3. The being of thinges is uttered be inquyring or avouing. + +4. We inquyre of that we wald knaw; as, made God man w_i_thout synne; +and in this the supposit of the verb followes the verb. + +5. We avoue that q_uhi_lk we knaw; as, God made man without sinne; and +in this the supposit preceedes the verb. + +6. We utter our wil be verbes signifying the form of our wil, or +postposing the supposit. + +7. We wish be wald god, god grant, and god nor; as, wald god I knew the +secretes of nature. + +8. We permit the will of otheres be letting; as, let God aryse; let +everie man have his awn wyfe. + +9. We bid our inferioures, and pray our superioures, be postponing the +supposit to the verb; as, goe ye and teach al nationes; here me, my God. + + + + +OF THE TYME OF THE VERB. + +Cap. 9. + + +1. Tyme is an affection of the verb noating the differences of tyme, and +is either present, past, or to cum. + +2. Tyme present is that q_uhi_lk now is; as, I wryte, or am wryting. + +3. Tyme past is that q_uhi_lk was, and it is passing befoer, past els, +or past befoer. + +4. Tyme passing befoer, q_uhi_lk we cal imperfectlie past, is of a thing +that was doeing but not done; as, at four hoores I was wryting; Quhen +you spak to me I was wryting, or did wryte, as Lillie expoundes it. + +5. Tyme past els is of a thing now past, q_uhi_lk we cal perfectlie +past; as, I have written. + +6. Tyme past befoer is of a thing befoer done and ended; as, at four +hoores, or quhen you spak to me, I had written. + +7. Tyme to cum is of that q_uhi_lk is not yet begun; as, at four houres +I wil wryte. + + + + +OF THE POWER OF THE VERB. + +Cap. 10. + + +1. A verb signifies being or doeing. Of being ther is onelie one, I am, +and is thus varyed. + +2. In the present tyme, I am, thou art, he is; we are, ye are, they are. + +3. In tyme passing befoer, I was, thou was, he was; we wer, ye wer, they +wer. + +4. In tyme past els, I have bene, thou hes bene, he hes bene; we have +bene, ye have bene, they have bene. + +5. In tyme past befoer, I had bene, thou had bene, he had bene; we had +bene, ye had bene, they had bene. + +6. In tyme to cum, I wil be, thou wilt be, he wil be; we wil be, ye wil +be, they wil be. + +7. Verbes of doing are actives or passives. + +8. The active verb adheres to the person of the agent; as, Christ hath +conquered hel and death. + +9. The passive verb adheres to the person of the patient; as, hel and +death are conquered be Christ. + +10. These our idiom conjugates onelie in tuo tymes, the tyme present and +tym past; as, I wryte, I wrote; I speak, I spak; I here, I hard; I se, I +saw; I fele, I felt. + +11. The other differences of tyme ar expressed be the notes of the verb +of being, or be the verb of being it self, and a participle; as, I was +wryting; I have written; I had written; I wil wryte. + + + + +OF THE ADVERB. + +Cap. 11. + + +1. A word impersonal is q_uhi_lk in al formes of speach keepes one face, +and this is adverb or conjunction. + +2. An adverb is a word adhering mast com_m_onlie w_i_th a verb with one +face in al moodes, tymes, nu_m_beres and persones; as, I leve hardlie, +thou leves hardlie; I did leve hardlie; I have leved hardlie; I had +leved hardlie; I wil leave hardlie; leve he hardlie; God forbid he leve +hardlie. + +3. Our men confoundes adverbes of place, q_uhi_lk the south +distinguishes as wel as the latin, and therfoer let us not shame to +learne. + +4. They use quher, heer, ther, for the place in q_uhi_lk; quhence, +hence, thence, for the place from quhilk; quhither, hither, thither, for +the place to q_uhi_lk; as, quher dwel you? quhence cum you? quhither goe +you? + +5. They also distinguish wel in, into, and unto: in, they use with the +place quher; into, with the thing quhither; and unto, for how far; as, +our father, q_uhi_lk art in heavin, admit us into heavin, and lift us +from the earth unto heavin. + +6. Heer, becaus sum nounes incurre into adverbes, let us alsoe noat +their differences. + +7. First no and not. Noe is a noun, nullus in latin, and in our tongue +alwayes precedes the substantive quhilk it nulleth; as, noe man, noe +angle, noe god. + +8. Not is an adverb, non in latin, and in our tong followes the verb +that it nulleth; as, heer not, grant not; I heer not, I grant not; I wil +not heer, I wil not grant. + +9. Ane, in our idiom, and an. Ane is a noun of nu_m_ber, in latin unus; +an a particule of determination preceding a voual, as we have said cap. +3, sect. 4. + +10. Thee and the. Thee is the accusative of thou; as, thou loves God, +and God loves thee. The is the determined not of a noun, of q_uhi_lk we +spak cap. 3, sect. 3. + + + + +OF THE CONJUNCTION. + +Cap. 12. + + +1. Conjunction is a word impersonal serving to cople diverse senses. And +of it ther be tuoe sortes, the one enu_n_ciative, and the other +ratiocinative. + +2. The conjunction enunciative copies the partes of a period, and are +copulative, as and; connexive, as if; disjunctive, as or; or discretive, +as howbe it. + +3. The ratiocinative coples the partes of a ratiocination, and it either +inferres the conclusion or the reason. + +4. Therfoer inferres the conclusion; as, noe man can keep the law in +thought, word, and deed: and therfoer noe man befoer the judg of the +hart, word, and deed, can be justifyed be the law. + +5. Because inferres the reason; as, I wil spew the out, because thou art +nether hoat nor cald. + + + + +OF DISTINCTIONES. + +Cap. 13. + + +1. A distinction is quherbe sentences are distinguished in wryting and +reading. And this is perfect or imperfect. + +2. A perfect distinction closes a perfect sense, and is marked with a +round punct, thus . or a tailed punct, thus ? + +3. The round punct concludes an assertion; as, if Abraham was justifyed +be workes, he had quherof to glorie. + +4. The tailed punct concludes an interrogation; as, sal we, quha are +dead to syn, leve to it? + +5. The imperfect distinction divydes the partes of a period, and is +marked with tuoe punctes, the one under the other, thus : and is red +with half the pause of a perfect punct; as, al have synned, and fallen +from the glorie of god: but are justifyed frelie be his grace. + +6. The com_m_a divydes the least partes of the period, and is pronunced +in reading with a short sob. + +7. The parenthesis divydes in the period a sentence interlaced on sum +occurrences q_uhi_lk coheres be noe syntax w_i_th that q_uhi_lk +preceedes and followes; as, for exemple of beath, and to conclud this +treatesse: + + Bless, guyd, advance, preserve, prolong Lord (if thy pleasur be) + Our King _and_ Queen, and keep their seed thy name to magnifie. + + * * * * * + + +NOTES. + + +The foregoing Tract is one of great interest, not only on account of its +intrinsic merit, but also for the racy style of writing adopted by its +author. We find him continually garnishing his language with such +idiomatic and colloquial expressions as the following:--“Quhae’s sillie +braine will reache no farther then the compas of their cap” (page 2); +and again, “but will not presume to judge farther then the compasse of +my awn cap” (p. 20). He observes of the printers and writers of his age +that they care “for noe more arte then may win the pennie” (p. 2), and +on the same page he says, “quhiles I stack in this claye,” which appears +to be equivalent to our term “stuck in the mud.” At p. 3 he says, “and +it wer but a clod;” at p. 14, “neither daer I, with al the oares of +reason, row against so strang a tyde;” and again, on p. 18, we find +reason under another aspect, thus, “noe man I trow can denye that ever +suked the paepes of reason.” + +It seems that the expression, _Queen’s English_, is by no means of +modern date, as we have it as the _king’s language_ at p. 2. + +Hume laments, in his Dedication, the uncertainty of the orthography +prevailing at the time he writes, and yet we find him spelling words +several different ways, even within the compass of a single sentence, +without being able to lay the blame upon the printers; thus we find him +writing ju_d_gement on p. 11, ju_d_ge p. 8, and ju_d_g p. 33, but juge +p. 18; and there are numberless other instances that it would be tedious +to enumerate. Again, the author uses a mixture of Scotch and English, so +we have sometimes ane and sometimes one; nae on page 1 and noe on p. 2; +mare and mast, and more and most, even in the same sentence (p. 30); and +two is spelt in three different ways, tuae, tuo, and tuoe. + +Our author’s stay in England appears to have drawn his attention to the +differences between the two languages of Scotland and England, which he +distinguishes as North and South. He certainly shows, in some instances, +the greater correctness of the Scotch with regard to the spelling of +words derived from the Latin; as, retine instead of retain, corage +instead of courage, etc. (p. 20), in which words the redundant letters +that we Southerners have introduced are thrown out. He is, however, by +no means partial, and gives us praise when he thinks we deserve it. + + Page 9. The arguments in favour of the sound given by the English + Universities to the Latin _i_ are curious: it is stated to have its + value in the Greek ει; but the author seems to have been in error as + to the English sounding mihi and tibi alike, or our pronunciation must + have changed since his time. + + P. 10. The author speaks of the letter _y_ as being used by the South + for the sound now symbolized by _i_ with a final _e_ following the + succeeding consonant, as _will_ with an _i_, and _wile_ with a _y_ in + place of the _i_ and final _e_; thus in the same way he spells write, + _wryt_. + + P. 11 (7). He gives food, good, blood, as examples of the same sound, + thus inferring that the English pronounced the two latter so as to + rhyme with food. + + P. 11 (8). He objects to the use of _w_ for _u_ in the diphthongal + sound of _ou_, and therefore spells _how_, _now_, etc., _hou_, _nou_. + + P. 11 (10). It is difficult here to see what the pronunciation of + _buu_ would be, which the author gives as the sound of bow (to bow). + Probably the sound he meant would be better represented by _boo_. + + P. 13 (12). The author here recommends the distinction both of sound + and symbol of _j_ and _v_ as consonants, and _i_ and _u_ as vowels, + and proposes that we should call _j_ _jod_ or _je_, and _v_ _vau_ or + _ve_, and not single _u_, “as now they doe” (p. 16), and _w_ he would + call _wau_ or _we_, and moreover he places them in his alphabet on the + same page. If this proposal was originally his own, it is curious that + the name _ve_ should have been adopted, though not the _we_ for _w_. + Ben Jonson points out the double power of _i_ and _v_ as both + consonant and vowel, but he does not attempt to make them into + separate letters as Hume does. + + P. 15 (12). He gives as an anomaly of the South that while the _d_ is + inserted before _g_ in hedge, bridge, etc., it is omitted in age, + suage, etc. He does not see that the short vowel requires a double + consonant to prevent it from being pronounced long. + + P. 21 (6). He disputes the possibility of a final _e_, separated from + a preceding vowel by a consonant, having any effect whatever in + altering the sound of the preceding vowel, and recommends the use of a + diphthong to express the sound required; as, hoep for hope, fier for + fire, bied for bide, befoer for before, maed for made, etc. He + uniformly throughout follows this rule. + + P. 22 (5). Hume here accents difficultie on the antepenultimate + instead of the first syllable. + + P. 23 (7). He puts down outrage as an instance of two distinct words + joined by a hyphen, which is the derivation given by Ash in his + dictionary, in strange obliviousness of the French word _outrage_. + + P. 27 (1, 6). _T_ is omitted after _s_ in the second person singular + of the verb, and so no distinction is made between the second and the + third persons; thus, thou wrytes, and at p. 32 thou was, and thou hes. + + P. 29 (7). The supposition that the apostrophe ’s as a mark of the + possessive case is a segment of his, a question which has been lately + revived, is here denied. + + P. 34. In this last chapter on Punctuation, which the author styles + “of Distinctiones,” no mention whatever is made of the “semicolon,” + though it occurs frequently in the MS., as, for instance, p. 30, cap. + 6. This stop, according to Herbert, was first used by Richard Grafton + in _The Byble_ printed in 1537: it occurs in the Dedication. Henry + Denham, an English printer who flourished towards the close of the + sixteenth century, was the first to use it with propriety. + + P. 34 (6). The explanation of the mode of pronouncing the comma “with + a short _sob_” is odd.[5] + + [Footnote 5: It will be here as well to mention that as the + punctuation in the MS. is extremely unsystematic, it has been + dispensed with whenever the meaning was confused by it.] + +The author continually uses a singular verb to a plural noun; for +instance, “of this we, as the latines, hes almost no use” (p. 22), +though on p. 20 he writes, “in our tongue we have some particles.” + +With regard to the Manuscript, there are two corrections in it worth +noting. At p. 10 (6), in the phrase, “the auctours _whole_ drift,” the +word had been originally written _hael_, but is marked through, and +_whole_ substituted for it in the same handwriting. At p. 21 (4), the +word _frensh_ has been inserted before _exemples_, but has been +afterwards struck through. + +The numbering is wrong in three places, but it has not been corrected. +At p. 8 there are no sections 12 and 13, at pp. 17, 19, there are two +cap. 7, and at p. 19 there are two sections 4. + + + + +GLOSSARIAL INDEX. + + +[The words in the present Tract that really required to be glossed are +but few; I have, however, inserted in the following list most of the +variations from ordinary modern usage, in order that it may serve as an +Index.] + +Af = of, p. 9. + Af = off, p. 12. +Ald = old, pp. 3, 21, 28. +Amangs = amongst, p. 18. +Ane = a, one. +Angle = angel, p. 33. +Auctoritie = authority, pp. 22, 29. +Aun = own, pp. 2, 3, 7, 8, 11, 15. +Awn = own, pp. 11, 18, 20, 30, 31. +Awn = proper, pp. 9, 11, 13, 15. +Awne = proper, p. 14. +Awne = own, p. 10. + +Baeth = both, pp. 8, 34. +Bathe = both, p. 17. +Be = by. +Britan = British. + +Cald = cold, pp. 30, 33; + caldest, p. 30. +Cales = calls, pp. 10, 22. +Chirt = a squirt, or a squeeze through the teeth, pp. 13, 14. + See Ruddiman’s Glossary to G. Douglas (_chirtand_). +Cold = could, p. 20. +Coples = couples, p. 33. +Corage = courage, p. 20. +Crouse = brisk, p. 28. +Cum = come, pp. 11, 31; + cumes = comes, p. 29. + +Devore = devour, p. 20. +Devote = devout, p. 20. +Distinctiones = punctuation, p. 34. +Doon = done, p. 21. +Doting = giving, p. 3. + +Earand = errand, p. 8. +Evin = even, p. 29. + +Faer = fair, p. 28. +Falt = fault, pp. 15, 20. +Fand = found, p. 1. +Fele = feel, p. 32. +Felles = lowers, p. 22. +Finnes = fineness, p. 2. +Fontan = fountain, p. 11. +Foran = foreign, p. 20. +Frelie = freely, p. 34. + +Geve = give, pp. 7, 8, 9, 12, 28, 29. +Gif = if, p. 21. +Glim = glimpse, p. 2. +Gud = good, pp. 2, 18, 21, 28, 29. + +Hael = hail, p. 10. +Hald = hold, p. 14; + haldes, p. 29. +Hame = home, p. 2. +Hard = heard, pp. 2, 3, 13, 14, 22, 32. +Hart = heart, p. 33. +Heal = whole, p. 10. +Heer = hear, p. 33. +Here = hear, pp. 31, 32. +Hes = has, pp. 3, 14, 15, 19, 22, 32. +Hes = hast, p. 32. +Hes = have, pp. 20, 22. +Hoat = hot, pp. 18, 30, 33; + hoater, p. 30. +Hoores = hours, p. 31. + +Ida, Scotland or Edinburgh, p. 2. +Incurre, _v._ = to run into. Lat. _incurro_, pp. 20, 33. + +Ken = know, p. 21. +Kep, _v._ = to intercept, p. 14. +Kepping = receiving in the act of falling, p. 12. _Jamieson._ +Knau = know, p. 2. +Knaulege = knowledge, pp. 3, 10; + knawlege, pp. 11, 21. +Knaw = know, pp. 7, 30; + knawe, p. 21; + knawen = known, p. 29. + +Laggared = loitered or rested, p. 2. +Lang = long, pp. 9, 14. +Leave = live, p. 32. +Leve = live, pp. 32, 34. +Leving = living, p. 11. +Louse = loose, p. 9. +Lykwayes = likewise, p. 19. + +Maer = more, pp. 2, 10. +Maest = most, pp. 1, 2, 16. +Man = must, p. 8. +Mare = more, p. 30. +Mast = most, pp. 30, 32. +Meer = mare, p. 28. +Middes = middle, p. 16. +Mikle = much, pp. 13, 18, 19, 20. +Mint = aim, pressure, p. 18. +Minted = attempted, p. 15. +Moat, probably _moot_, discussion, chat, etc., p. 2. A.S. _mót_. +Moe = more, pp. 16, 19, 21, 27. +Moien = means for attaining an end, p. 2. _Jamieson._ Fr. _moyen_. +Mont = mount, p. 24. +Montan = mountain, pp. 3, 11, 28. +Mynt = aim, pp. 12, 17. + +Nae = no, pp. 1, 8. +Nane = none, p. 13. +Noat, _v._ = note, pp. 19, 22, 27, 28, 29, 30, 31, 33. +Noat = note, pp. 7, 13, 28, 29; + noate, p. 28; + noates = notes, p. 29. +Nor = than, p. 3. +Nor, God nor, p. 31. + This most probably means God comfort or nourish us, connected with + _norice_, a nurse, and _norie_, a foster-child. There is also a + substantive _nore_ in Chaucer, meaning comfort. _Norne_ is to + entreat, ask (see _Alliterative Poems_ Glossary), and may have + something to do with this expression, but it is hardly so probable + as the above. +Noute = black cattle, p. 27; + connected with _neat_, as in neat-cattle, neat-herd. +Nulleth = negatives, p. 33. +Nurice = nurse, p. 19. + +Of = off, p. 23. +Ones, at ones = at once, p. 18. + +Paen = trouble, p. 2. +Paert = part, p. 10. +Peple = people, pp. 20, 29. +Phason = pheasant (?), p. 13. +Pover = poor, p. 3. +Punct = stop, p. 34. + +Qu. + At p. 18 the author gives his reasons for making use of the guttural + _qu_ in the place of the labial _w_. The following are the words in + which it is thus used:-- +Quha = who, pp. 2, 3, 34. +Quhae = who, pp. 1, 10; + quhae’s = whose, p. 2. +Quhaer = where, p. 2. +Quhar = where, p. 29. +Quharein = wherein, p. 14. +Quharof = whereof, p. 16. +Quhat = what, pp. 2, 8, 15, 17, 18, 28. +Quhatever = whatever, p. 19. +Quhen = when, pp. 2, 9, 11, 23, 31. +Quhence = whence, pp. 29, 32. +Quher = where, pp. 2, 14, 20, 32. +Quheras = whereas, p. 14. +Quherat = whereat, p. 18. +Quherbe = whereby, pp. 11, 34. +Quherfoer, quherforr = wherefore, pp. 7, 8, 10, 15. +Quherin = wherein, pp. 20, 22. +Quherof = whereof, pp. 29, 34. +Quheron = whereon, p. 22. +Quherupon = whereupon, pp. 8, 27. +Quherwith = wherewith, p. 2. +Quhil, quhiles = while, p. 2. +Quhilk = which. +Quhither = whether, pp. 11, 17, 18, 20, 32. +Quho = who, pp. 12, 14, 15, 18, 22. +Quhom = whom. +Quhy = why, pp. 20, 21, 29. +Quhyte = white, p. 30; + quhiter, p. 30; + quhytest, p. 30. +Quod = quoth, p. 18. + +Rease = rose, p. 18. +Red = read, p. 34. +Regne = reign, p. 20. +Retine = retain, p. 20. +Ryseth = ariseth, p. 9. + +Sa = so, p. 21; + sae = so, p. 17. +Sal = shall, pp. 9, 11, 23, 34. +Sall = shall, pp. 8, 22. +Shaued = showed, p. 7. +Shour = shower, p. 10. +Sib = related, p. 21. +Sik = such, pp. 1, 2, 8, 9, 11, 17, 29. +Sillie = wretched, poor, p. 2. +Skuiographie, + probably an invented word, the intention of the author being to + oppose skew or askew to ορθος, straight. It has been suggested + that it may be intended for sciagraphy, σκιαγραφία, also spelt + sciography; but this is improbable, as the meaning of that word, + viz., the art of shadows, including dialling, is so inappropriate + in this passage, p. 2. +Sould = should, pp. 7, 8, 11, 12, 13, 17, 18, 19, 22, 28, 29. +Spering = inquiring, p. 18. +Spil = destroy, spoil(?), p. 13; + spill, p. 22. +Spilt = corrupted, spoilt(?), p. 2. +Stack = stuck, p. 2. +Stean = stone, p. 8. +Stiddie = anvil, pp. 12, 17. + “And my imaginations are as foul + As Vulcan’s stithy.” + _Hamlet_, Act iii., sc. 2. + +Strang = strong, p. 14. +Sum = some, pp. 8, 9, 10, 21, 34. +Supposit = subject, pp. 30, 31. +Syllab = syllable, pp. 14, 15, 16, 18, 21, 22; + syllabes, p. 8. + Ben Jonson spells this word _syllabe_ in his English Grammar. +Syne = since, p. 1. + +Tal = tale, p. 9. +Tal = tail, p. 9. +Tale = tall, p. 28. +Trow = believe, pp. 13, 18. +Tuae = two, pp. 1, 8, 9, 10, 22, 23. +Tuelfe = twelve, p. 3. +Tuich = touch, pp. 7, 13, 15, 17; + tuiches, p. 11. +Tuiched = touched, pp. 3, 17. +Tuich stone = touchstone, p. 19. +Tyme passing befoer = imperfect tense, pp. 31, 32. +Tyme past befoer = pluperfect tense, pp. 31, 32. +Tyme past els = perfect tense, pp. 31, 32. + +Vadimonie = recognisance, p. 22. Lat. _Vadimonium._ +Voce = voice, p. 20. + +Waet = know, p. 14. +Wait = know, p. 11. +Wald = would, pp. 1, 2, 9, 10, 13, 14, 16, 20, 21, 30, 31. +Warkes = works, p. 29. +Weer = war, p. 3. +Were = war, p. 20. +Whither = whether, p. 2. + The author in this place uses the letter _w_ instead of _qu_, + although at p. 18 he is so strenuous against its use. +Wrang = wrong, pp. 2, 9, 11. + +Ye = yea, p. 14. +Yeld = yield, p. 21. + + + + +Early English Text Society. + +_Report of the Committee, January, 1865._ + + +The close of the first year of the Society’s operations affords the +Committee the welcome opportunity of congratulating the members on the +Society’s success. Instead of two Texts, which the first Circular to the +Society suggested might perhaps be issued, the Committee have been +enabled to publish four, and these four such as will bear comparison, as +to rareness and intrinsic value, with the publications of any of the +longest established societies of the kingdom. The _Arthur_ was edited +for the first time from a unique MS., wholly unknown to even the latest +writers on the subject, and exhibits our national hero’s life in a +simpler form than even Geoffrey of Monmouth, or Layamon. The _Early +English Alliterative Poems_, though noticed long ago by Dr. Guest and +Sir F. Madden, for their great philological and poetical value, had been +inaccessible to all but students of the difficult and faded MS. in the +British Museum: they have been now made public by the Society’s edition, +with their large additions to our vocabulary, and their interesting +dialectal formations. The _Sir Gawayne_, from the same MS., could only +have been had before in Sir Frederick Madden’s rare and costly edition, +printed by the Bannatyne Club. And the _Lauder_ has restored, as it +were, to Scotland, a Poet whose name had found no place in the standard +History of Scottish Poetry, and the Biographical Dictionaries. + +Though the Society started late in the past year, these four Texts were +published within a fortnight of its close; and before that time the +first Text for the second year was in the printer’s hands. The Committee +pledge themselves to continue their exertions to render the Texts issued +worthy of the Society, and to complete the issue of each set within the +year assigned to it. They rely with confidence on the Subscribers to use +their best endeavours to increase the list of Members, in order that +funds may not be wanting to print the material that editors place at +their service. The aim of the Committee is, on the one hand, to print +all that is most valuable of the yet unprinted MSS. in English, and, on +the other, to re-edit and reprint all that is most valuable in printed +English books, which from their scarcity or price are not within the +reach of the student of moderate means.[6] Those relating to KING ARTHUR +will be the Committee’s first care; those relating to our Language and +its Dialects the second; while in due proportion with these, will be +mixed others of general interest, though with no one special common +design. The Committee hope that no year will pass without the issue of +one Text in the Northern dialect, as well in acknowledgment of the +support that the Society has received in Scotland, as to obviate the +hitherto limited circulation of the works of the early Scotch writers +among students south of the Humber. + + [Footnote 6: “A vast mass of our early literature is still + unprinted, and much that has been printed has, as the late Herbert + Coleridge remarked, ‘been brought out by Printing Clubs of + exclusive constitution, or for private circulation only, and + might, for all that the public in general is the better for them, + just as well have remained in manuscript, being, of course, + utterly unprocurable, except in great libraries, and not always + there.’ It is well known that the Hon. G. P. Marsh, the author of + ‘The Origin and History of the English Language,’ could not + procure for use in his work a copy of ‘Havelok’ for love or money; + and the usual catalogue-price of ‘William and the Werwolf,’ or + ‘The Early English Gesta Romanorum,’ etc., etc., is six guineas, + when the book should be obtainable for less than a pound. + Notwithstanding the efforts of the Percy, Camden, and other + Societies and Printing Clubs, more than half our early printed + literature--including the Romances relating to our national hero, + Arthur--is still inaccessible to the student of moderate means; + and it is a scandal that this state of things should be allowed to + continue.... Those who would raise any objection to these + re-editions--as a few have raised them--are asked to consider the + absurdity and injustice of debarring a large number of readers + from the enjoyment of an old author, because a living editor has + once printed his works, when the feeling of the editor himself is + well expressed in the words of one of the class, ‘You are heartily + welcome to all I have ever done. I should rejoice to see my books + in the hands of a hundred, where they are now on the shelves of + one.’”--_Extract from the first Prospectus._] + +The publications for 1864 are:-- + +1. Early English Alliterative Poems in the West Midland Dialect of the + fourteenth century (ab. 1320-30 A.D.). Edited for the first time + from a unique MS. in the British Museum, with Notes and Glossarial + Index, by Richard Morris, Esq. 16_s._ + +2. Arthur. Edited for the first time from the Marquis of Bath’s MS. + (ab. 1440 A.D.), by F. J. Furnivall, Esq., M.A. 4_s._ + +3. Ane compendious and breve Tractate, concernyng ye office and dewtie + of Kyngis, Spirituall Pastoris, and temporall Jugis; laitlie + compylit be William Lauder. Reprinted from the edition of 1556, and + edited by Prof. Fitz-Edward Hall, D.C.L. 4_s._ + +4. Sir Gawayne and the Green Knight. Edited by R. Morris, Esq., from the + Cottonian MS., Nero, A x. (ab. 1320-30 A.D.) 10_s._ + +The publications for the present year (1865) will comprise Texts from at +least four unique MSS., two of which will be edited for the first time. + +5. Of the Orthographie and Congruitie of the Britan Tongue, a treates + noe shorter then necessarie, be Alexander Hume. Edited for the first + time from the MS. in the British Museum (ab. 1617 A.D.), by Henry B. + Wheatley, Esq. 4_s._ + +6. Syr Lancelot du Lak. Edited from the MS. in the Cambridge University + Library (15th century), by the Rev. Walter W. Skeat, M.A. + [_In the Press._ + +7. Morte Arthure: the Alliterative Version. Edited from Robert + Thorntone’s MS. (ab. 1440 A.D.) at Lincoln, by the Rev. F. C. + Massingberd, M.A. + +8. Various Poems relating to Sir Gawayne. Edited from the MSS. by + Richard Morris, Esq. + +9. Merlin, or the Early History of Arthur. Edited for the first time + from the MS. in the Cambridge University Library (ab. 1450 A.D.), by + F. J. Furnivall, Esq. Part I. + +Also, the following, if the amount of subscriptions will justify the +Committee in issuing them:-- + +Animadversions uppon the Annotacions and Corrections of some + imperfections of Impressiones of Chaucer’s Workes reprinted in 1598, + by Francis Thynne. Edited from the MS. in the Bridgewater Library, + by Henry B. Wheatley, Esq. + +The Story of Genesis and Exodus in English verse of about 1300 A.D. To + be edited for the first time from the unique MS. in the Library of + Corpus Christi Coll., Cambridge, by F. J. Furnivall and R. Morris, + Esqrs. + +The Harrowing of Hell. To be edited from the MS. in the Bodleian + Library, by R. F. Weymouth, Esq. + + +The following is a list of Texts, which it is proposed to print (among +others) in future years:-- + +The Romance of Arthour and Merlin. To be edited from the Auchinleck MS. + (ab. 1320-30 A.D.) + +Mirk’s Duties of a Parish Priest. To be edited for the first time from + the MSS. in the British Museum and Bodleian Libraries (ab. 1420 + A.D.), by E. Peacock, Esq. + +The Romance of William and the Werwolf. To be edited from the unique MS. + in the Library of King’s Coll., Cambridge. + +The Gospel of Nicodemus in the Northumbrian Dialect. To be edited for + the first time from Harl. MS. 4196, &c., Cotton-Galba E ix., by R. + Morris, Esq. + +The Romance of Melusine. To be edited for the first time from the unique + MS. in the Library of Trinity College, Cambridge. + +Syr Thomas Maleor’s Mort d’Arthur. To be edited from Caxton’s edition + (1485 A.D.) with a new Preface, Notes, and a Glossary. + +The Arthur Ballads. + +The Romance of Sir Tristrem. To be edited from the Auchinleck MS. + +The English Charlemagne Romances. To be edited from the Auchinleck MS. + +The Early English Version of the Gesta Romanorum. To be edited from the + MSS. in the British Museum and other Libraries. + +The two different Versions of Piers Plowman, in parallel columns. + +Gawain Douglas’s Æneis. To be edited from the Cambridge MS. by Professor + Fitz-Edward Hall, D.C.L. + +The Romance of Kyng Horn. To be edited from the MS. in the Library of + the University of Cambridge. + +Roberd of Brunne’s Handlyng Synne, a treatise on the sins, and sketches + of the manners, of English men and women in A.D. 1303. To be + re-edited from the MSS. in the British Museum and Bodleian Libraries + by F. J. Furnivall, Esq., M.A. + +Cursor Mundi, the best dialectal version. To be edited from the MS. by + Richard Morris, Esq. + +The History of the Saint Graal or Sank Ryal. By Henry Lonelich, Skynner + (ab. 1440 A.D.). To be re-edited from the unique MS. in the Library + of Corpus Christi Coll., Cambridge, by F. J. Furnivall, Esq., M.A. + +Dan Michel’s Ayenbite of Inwyt, the most valuable specimen of the + Kentish dialect, 1340 A.D. To be edited from the MS. in the British + Museum by Richard Morris, Esq. + +Froissart’s Chronicles translated out of Frenche into our maternall + Englyshe Tonge, by Johan Bourchier Knight, Lord Berners. To be + edited by Henry B. Wheatley, Esq. + +Skelton’s Translation of Diodorus Siculus, oute of freshe Latin, that is + of Poggius Florentinus, containing six books. To be edited for the + first time from the unique MS. in the Library of Corpus Christi + Coll., Cambridge. + +Sir David Lyndesay’s Monarche. Edited by Prof. Fitz-Edward Hall, D.C.L., + from the first edition by Jhone Skott. + +Some of the earliest English Dictionaries, as-- + Abecedarium Anglico-latinum, by Richard Huloet (1552); and Baret’s + Alvearie or Quadruple Dictionarie, to be edited from the editions of + 1573 and 1580 by Henry B. Wheatley, Esq. + + + + +The Subscription is £1 1_s._ a year, due in advance on the 1st of +January, and should be paid either to the Society’s Account at the Union +Bank of London, 14, Argyll Place, W., or by Post Office Order to the +Hon. Secretary, 53, Berners Street, London, W.; to whom Subscribers’ +names and addresses should be sent. + +The Committee wish to draw the attention of the Subscribers to the fact +that the Society’s Account has been transferred from the London and +Birmingham Bank to the Regent Street Branch of the Union Bank of London. + +The Committee invite offers of voluntary assistance from those who may +be willing to edit or copy Texts, or to lend them books for reprinting +or for re-reading with the original MSS. + +The Honorary Secretary’s Cash Account is annexed. + + +_Abstract of the Income and Expenditure of the_ EARLY ENGLISH TEXT +SOCIETY _for the Year ending December 31st, 1864._ + +RECEIPTS. + +1864. £ _s._ _d._ +One hundred Subscriptions, at 1_l._ 1_s._ 105 0 0 +Forty-five ditto (through Agents), at 1_l._ 45 0 0 +1865. +Two Subscriptions, at 1_l._ 1_s._ 2 2 0 + + + £152 2 0 + ============= + +PAYMENTS. + +1864. £ _s._ _d._ +Printing Account (Austin)-- + Alliterative Poems 62 7 6 + Arthur 8 14 0 + Lauder’s Tractate 15 14 0 + Sir Gawayne 35 16 0 + 3,500 Prospectuses 5 5 0 + Packing, Postage, &c., of + Alliterative Poems and Arthur 1 16 6 + ------------- + 129 13 0 + Less Discount 6 9 0 + ------------- + 123 4 0 +Petty Expenses-- + Purchase of Books for Re-editing 5 18 0 + Stationery, &c. 0 18 6 + Postages (Circulars, &c.) 4 4 6 + Deduction on Country Cheque 0 0 7 + Balance in the hands of the Hon. Secretary 0 13 0 + Balance at the Bankers 17 3 5 + ------------- + £152 2 0 + ============= + +We have examined this Account with the Books and Vouchers, and certify +that it is correct. + +Wm. CUNNINGHAM GLEN, +REGINALD HANSON, B.A., Auditors. + + + + +LIST OF SUBSCRIBERS. + + +COMMITTEE OF MANAGEMENT: + +DANBY P. FRY, ESQ. +FREDERICK J. FURNIVALL, ESQ. +Professor FITZ-EDWARD HALL. +RICHARD MORRIS, ESQ. +H. T. PARKER, ESQ. + +(_With power to add Workers to their number._) + + +HONORARY SECRETARY: + +HENRY B. WHEATLEY, ESQ., 53, Berners Street, London. W. + + +BANKERS: + +THE UNION BANK OF LONDON, REGENT STREET BRANCH, +14, Argyll Place, W. + + +THE ROYAL LIBRARY, Windsor Castle. + +ADAMS, Dr. Ernest, Victoria Park, Manchester. +ALEXANDER, George Russell, Esq., Glasgow. +ALEXANDER, John, Esq., 43, Campbell Street, Glasgow. +AMHURST, Wm. A. Tyssen, Esq., Didlington Park, Brandon, Norfolk. +ASHER & CO., Messrs., 13, Bedford Street, Covent Garden. W.C. (10 sets.) +ATKINSON, Rev. J. C., Danby Parsonage, Grosmont, York. +AUFRECHT, Professor, 12, Cumin Place, Grange, Edinburgh. +AUSTIN, Stephen, Hertford. + +BACKHOUSE, John G., Esq., Blackwell, Darlington. +BAIN, J., Esq., Haymarket. +BAKER, Charles, Esq., 11, Sackville Street, W. +BEARD, James, Esq., The Grange, Burnage Lane, near Manchester +BLACKMAN, Frederick, Esq., 4, York Road. S. +BLADON, James, Esq., Albion House, Pont y Pool. +BOHN, Henry G., Esq., York Street, Covent Garden, W.C. +BOSWORTH, Rev. Professor, D.D., 20, Beaumont Street, Oxford. +BRADSHAW, Henry, Esq., King’s College, Cambridge. +BUXTON, Charles, Esq., M.P., 7, Grosvenor Crescent, S.W. + +CHAPPELL, William, Esq., 30, Upper Harley Street. W. +CHEETHAM, Rev. S., King’s College, London. W.C. +CLARK, Rev. Samuel, The Vicarage, Bredwardine, Hereford. +CLARK, E. C., Esq., Trinity College, Cambridge. +COHEN, A., Esq., 6, King’s Bench Walk, Temple, E.C. +COLERIDGE, Miss Edith, Hanwell Rectory, Middlesex. +COLERIDGE, J. Duke, Esq., Q.C., 1, Brick Court, Temple, E.C. +COSENS, Frederick, Esq., Larkbere Lodge, Clapham Park. +COWPER, J. Meadows, Esq., Davington, Faversham. +CRAIK, Professor George L., 2, Chlorina Place, Belfast. +CRAIK, George L., Esq., Glasgow. + +DAVIES, Rev. John, Walsoken Rectory, near Wisbeach. +DE LA RUE, Warren, Esq., Bunhill Row. +DE LA RUE, Wm. Frederick, Esq., 110, Bunhill Road, E.C. +DICKINSON, F. H., Esq., Kingweston House, Somerton, Somerset. +DODDS, Rev. James, St. Stephen’s, Glasgow. +DONALDSON, David, Esq., Free Normal Seminary, Glasgow. +D’ORSEY, Rev. A. J., B.D., 8, Lancaster Terrace, Regent’s Park. N.W. +DOWDEN, Edward, Esq., 8, Montenotte, Cork. +DUBLIN, Right Rev. Richard C. Trench, Archbishop of, Dublin. +DYKES, Rev. J. Oswald, Free St. George’s Church, Edinburgh. + +EARLE, Rev. J., Swanswick Rectory, Bath. +EDINBURGH UNIVERSITY LIBRARY. +EISDELL, Miss S. L., Colchester. +EUING, William, Esq., 209, West George Street, Glasgow. + +FIELD, Hamilton, Esq., New Park Road, Brixton Hill. +FREETHY, Mr. Frederick, Working Men’s College, London. +FRY, Danby P., Esq., Poor Law Board, Whitehall. +FRY, Frederick, Esq., Wellington Street, Islington. +FURNIVALL, F. J., Esq., 3, Old Square, Lincoln’s Inn., W.C. + +GEE, William, Esq., High Street, Boston. +GIBBS, Captain Charles, 2nd Regiment, Devonport. +GIBBS, H. H., Esq., St. Dunstan’s, Regent’s Park. +GLEN, W. Cunningham, Esq., Poor Law Board, Whitehall. +GOLDSTÜCKER, Professor, 14, St. George’s Square. N.W. +GORDON, Rev. Robert, 14, Northumberland St., Edinburgh. +GUILD, J. Uylie, Esq., Glasgow. + +HALES, J. W., Esq., Christ’s College, Cambridge. +HALKETT, Samuel, Esq., Advocates’ Library, Edinburgh. +HALL, Professor Fitz-Edward, D.C.L., 18, Provost Road, Haverstock + Hill. N.W. +HAMLEN, Charles, Esq., 27, Virginia Street, Glasgow. +HANSON, Reginald, Esq., 43, Upper Harley Street. W. +HEATH, N., Esq., Rector, The Academy, Alloa. +HODGSON, Shadworth H., Esq., 45, Conduit Street, Regent’s Street. W. +HOOPER, Rev. Richard, Aston Upthorpe. +HORWOOD, Alfred S., Esq., New Court, Middle Temple. E.C. +HOWARD, Hon. Richard E., D.C.L., Stamp Office, Manchester. + +INDIA OFFICE LIBRARY, Cannon Row. + +JACKSON, E. Steane, Esq., Walthamstow House, Essex. +JOHNSON, W., Esq., Eton College, Windsor. +JONES, C. W., Esq., Gateacre, near Liverpool. +JONES, E. B., Esq., 62, Great Russell Street, Bloomsbury. +JONES, Thomas, Esq., Chetham Library, Manchester. + +KING, W. Warwick, Esq., 29, Queen Street, Cannon Street West. E.C. + +LAING, David, Esq., Signet Library, Edinburgh. +LAMONT, Colin D., Esq., Union Bank of Scotland, Greenock. +LECKIE, Thomas, Esq., M.D., 60, Cambridge Terrace, Hyde Park. W. +LEIGH, John, Esq., 26, St. John’s Street, Manchester. +LODGE, Rev. Barton, Colchester. +LONDON LIBRARY, St. James’s Square. S.W. +LUARD, Rev. Henry Richard, 4, St. Peter’s Terrace, Cambridge. +LUSHINGTON, E. L., Esq., Park House, Maidstone. + +MACDONALD, George, Esq., 12, Earles Terrace, Kensington. W. +MACDOUALL, Professor Charles, LL.D., Queen’s College, Belfast. +MACKENZIE, John Whitefoord, Esq., 16, Royal Circus, Edinburgh. +MACMILLAN, A., Esq., Bedford Street, Covent Garden. W.C. +MADDEN, Sir Frederick, K. H., British Museum. W.C. +MANCHESTER, The Duke of. +MELBOURNE PUBLIC LIBRARY, Victoria. +MORRIS, Richard, Esq., Christ Church School, St. George’s East. E. +MUIR, John, Esq., 16, Regent’s Terrace, Edinburgh. +MULLER, Professor Max, 64, High Street, Oxford. +MURDOCH, James Barclay, Esq., 33, Lyndoch Street, Glasgow. + +NAPIER, George W., Esq., Alderley Edge, near Manchester. +NASH, D. M., Esq., 21, Bentinck Street, Manchester Square. W. +NEAVES, Lord, 7, Charlotte Square, Edinburgh. +NICHOL, Professor, University, Glasgow. +NICHOLS, John Gough, Esq., 25, Parliament Street, Westminster. +NORRIS, Edwin, Esq., 6, Michael’s Grove, Brompton. S.W. + +OGLE, Messrs. Maurice & Co., Glasgow. +OWEN’S COLLEGE LIBRARY, Manchester. + +PAINE, Cornelius, Jun., Esq., Surbiton Hill, Surrey. +PANTON, Rev. George A., Crown Circus, Dowanhill, Glasgow. (2 sets.) +PARKER, H. T., Esq., 3, Ladbroke Gardens. W. (10 sets). +PEILE, John, Esq., Christ’s College, Cambridge. +PERCEVAL, Charles Spencer, Esq., 64, Eccleston Square. S.W. +PRIAULX, Osw. De Beauvoir, Esq., 8, Cavendish Square. W. + +RAINE, Rev. James, York. +REGENT’S PARK COLLEGE. N.W. +REILLY, Francis S., Esq., 22, Old Buildings, Lincoln’s Inn. W.C. +RICHARDSON, Sir John, Lancrigg, Grasmere. +ROSSETTI, Wm., Esq., 160, Albany Street. N.W. +RUSKIN, John, Esq., Denmark Hill, Camberwell (10 sets). + +ST. DAVID’S, Right Rev. Connop Thirlwall, Bishop of, Abergwili Palace, + Carmarthen. +SION COLLEGE, President and Fellows of, London Wall. +SKEAT, Rev. Walter W., Christ’s College, Cambridge. +SLATTER, Rev. John, Streatley Vicarage, Reading. +SMITH, Charles, Esq., Faversham. +SMITH, J. Guthrie, Esq., Glasgow. +SPRANGE, A. D., Esq., 12, Princes Street, Bayswater. W. +STEPHENS, Professor George, University of Copenhagen, Denmark. +STEVENSON, Rev. Prof., D.D., 37, Royal Terrace, Edinburgh. +STEWART, Alexander B., Esq., Glasgow. +STRATHEARN, Sheriff, County Buildings, Glasgow. + +TENNYSON, Alfred, Esq., D.C.L., Faringford, Isle of Wight. +TRÜBNER, Nicholas, Esq., 60, Paternoster Row (19 sets). +TUCKER, Stephen, Esq., 11, St. Petersburgh Place. W. +TYSSEN, John R. D., Esq., Didlington Park, Brandon, Norfolk. + +WARD, Harry, Esq., British Museum. W.C. +WATTS, Thomas, Esq., British Museum. W.C. +WEDGWOOD, Hensleigh, Esq., 1, Cumberland Place, Regent’s Park. +WEYMOUTH, R. F., Esq., Portland Grammar School, Plymouth. +WHEATLEY, Henry B., Esq., 53, Berners Street. W.--_Hon. Sec._ +WILLIAMS, Sydney, Esq., 14, Henrietta Street, Covent Garden, W.C. + (2 sets.) +WILLIAMSON, Stephen, Esq., 13, Virginia Street, Glasgow. +WILSON, Edward J., Esq., 6, Whitefriars Gate, Hull. +WRIGHT, W. Aldis, Esq., Trinity College, Cambridge. + +YOUNG, Alexander, Esq., 38, Elm Bank Crescent, Glasgow. + + + + +STEPHEN AUSTIN, Printer, Hertford. + + + + + +End of the Project Gutenberg EBook of Of the Orthographie and Congruitie of +the Britan Tongue, by Alexander Hume + +*** END OF THIS PROJECT GUTENBERG EBOOK ORTHOGRAPHIE OF THE BRITAN TONGUE *** + +***** This file should be named 17000-0.txt or 17000-0.zip ***** +This and all associated files of various formats will be found in: + https://www.gutenberg.org/1/7/0/0/17000/ + +Produced by Louise Hope, David Starner and the Online +Distributed Proofreading Team at https://www.pgdp.net + + +Updated editions will replace the previous one--the old editions +will be renamed. + +Creating the works from public domain print editions means that no +one owns a United States copyright in these works, so the Foundation +(and you!) can copy and distribute it in the United States without +permission and without paying copyright royalties. Special rules, +set forth in the General Terms of Use part of this license, apply to +copying and distributing Project Gutenberg-tm electronic works to +protect the PROJECT GUTENBERG-tm concept and trademark. Project +Gutenberg is a registered trademark, and may not be used if you +charge for the eBooks, unless you receive specific permission. If you +do not charge anything for copies of this eBook, complying with the +rules is very easy. You may use this eBook for nearly any purpose +such as creation of derivative works, reports, performances and +research. They may be modified and printed and given away--you may do +practically ANYTHING with public domain eBooks. Redistribution is +subject to the trademark license, especially commercial +redistribution. + + + +*** START: FULL LICENSE *** + +THE FULL PROJECT GUTENBERG LICENSE +PLEASE READ THIS BEFORE YOU DISTRIBUTE OR USE THIS WORK + +To protect the Project Gutenberg-tm mission of promoting the free +distribution of electronic works, by using or distributing this work +(or any other work associated in any way with the phrase "Project +Gutenberg"), you agree to comply with all the terms of the Full Project +Gutenberg-tm License (available with this file or online at +https://gutenberg.org/license). + + +Section 1. General Terms of Use and Redistributing Project Gutenberg-tm +electronic works + +1.A. By reading or using any part of this Project Gutenberg-tm +electronic work, you indicate that you have read, understand, agree to +and accept all the terms of this license and intellectual property +(trademark/copyright) agreement. If you do not agree to abide by all +the terms of this agreement, you must cease using and return or destroy +all copies of Project Gutenberg-tm electronic works in your possession. +If you paid a fee for obtaining a copy of or access to a Project +Gutenberg-tm electronic work and you do not agree to be bound by the +terms of this agreement, you may obtain a refund from the person or +entity to whom you paid the fee as set forth in paragraph 1.E.8. + +1.B. "Project Gutenberg" is a registered trademark. It may only be +used on or associated in any way with an electronic work by people who +agree to be bound by the terms of this agreement. There are a few +things that you can do with most Project Gutenberg-tm electronic works +even without complying with the full terms of this agreement. See +paragraph 1.C below. There are a lot of things you can do with Project +Gutenberg-tm electronic works if you follow the terms of this agreement +and help preserve free future access to Project Gutenberg-tm electronic +works. See paragraph 1.E below. + +1.C. The Project Gutenberg Literary Archive Foundation ("the Foundation" +or PGLAF), owns a compilation copyright in the collection of Project +Gutenberg-tm electronic works. Nearly all the individual works in the +collection are in the public domain in the United States. If an +individual work is in the public domain in the United States and you are +located in the United States, we do not claim a right to prevent you from +copying, distributing, performing, displaying or creating derivative +works based on the work as long as all references to Project Gutenberg +are removed. Of course, we hope that you will support the Project +Gutenberg-tm mission of promoting free access to electronic works by +freely sharing Project Gutenberg-tm works in compliance with the terms of +this agreement for keeping the Project Gutenberg-tm name associated with +the work. You can easily comply with the terms of this agreement by +keeping this work in the same format with its attached full Project +Gutenberg-tm License when you share it without charge with others. + +1.D. The copyright laws of the place where you are located also govern +what you can do with this work. Copyright laws in most countries are in +a constant state of change. If you are outside the United States, check +the laws of your country in addition to the terms of this agreement +before downloading, copying, displaying, performing, distributing or +creating derivative works based on this work or any other Project +Gutenberg-tm work. The Foundation makes no representations concerning +the copyright status of any work in any country outside the United +States. + +1.E. Unless you have removed all references to Project Gutenberg: + +1.E.1. The following sentence, with active links to, or other immediate +access to, the full Project Gutenberg-tm License must appear prominently +whenever any copy of a Project Gutenberg-tm work (any work on which the +phrase "Project Gutenberg" appears, or with which the phrase "Project +Gutenberg" is associated) is accessed, displayed, performed, viewed, +copied or distributed: + +This eBook is for the use of anyone anywhere at no cost and with +almost no restrictions whatsoever. You may copy it, give it away or +re-use it under the terms of the Project Gutenberg License included +with this eBook or online at www.gutenberg.org + +1.E.2. If an individual Project Gutenberg-tm electronic work is derived +from the public domain (does not contain a notice indicating that it is +posted with permission of the copyright holder), the work can be copied +and distributed to anyone in the United States without paying any fees +or charges. If you are redistributing or providing access to a work +with the phrase "Project Gutenberg" associated with or appearing on the +work, you must comply either with the requirements of paragraphs 1.E.1 +through 1.E.7 or obtain permission for the use of the work and the +Project Gutenberg-tm trademark as set forth in paragraphs 1.E.8 or +1.E.9. + +1.E.3. If an individual Project Gutenberg-tm electronic work is posted +with the permission of the copyright holder, your use and distribution +must comply with both paragraphs 1.E.1 through 1.E.7 and any additional +terms imposed by the copyright holder. Additional terms will be linked +to the Project Gutenberg-tm License for all works posted with the +permission of the copyright holder found at the beginning of this work. + +1.E.4. Do not unlink or detach or remove the full Project Gutenberg-tm +License terms from this work, or any files containing a part of this +work or any other work associated with Project Gutenberg-tm. + +1.E.5. Do not copy, display, perform, distribute or redistribute this +electronic work, or any part of this electronic work, without +prominently displaying the sentence set forth in paragraph 1.E.1 with +active links or immediate access to the full terms of the Project +Gutenberg-tm License. + +1.E.6. You may convert to and distribute this work in any binary, +compressed, marked up, nonproprietary or proprietary form, including any +word processing or hypertext form. However, if you provide access to or +distribute copies of a Project Gutenberg-tm work in a format other than +"Plain Vanilla ASCII" or other format used in the official version +posted on the official Project Gutenberg-tm web site (www.gutenberg.org), +you must, at no additional cost, fee or expense to the user, provide a +copy, a means of exporting a copy, or a means of obtaining a copy upon +request, of the work in its original "Plain Vanilla ASCII" or other +form. Any alternate format must include the full Project Gutenberg-tm +License as specified in paragraph 1.E.1. + +1.E.7. Do not charge a fee for access to, viewing, displaying, +performing, copying or distributing any Project Gutenberg-tm works +unless you comply with paragraph 1.E.8 or 1.E.9. + +1.E.8. You may charge a reasonable fee for copies of or providing +access to or distributing Project Gutenberg-tm electronic works provided +that + +- You pay a royalty fee of 20% of the gross profits you derive from + the use of Project Gutenberg-tm works calculated using the method + you already use to calculate your applicable taxes. The fee is + owed to the owner of the Project Gutenberg-tm trademark, but he + has agreed to donate royalties under this paragraph to the + Project Gutenberg Literary Archive Foundation. Royalty payments + must be paid within 60 days following each date on which you + prepare (or are legally required to prepare) your periodic tax + returns. Royalty payments should be clearly marked as such and + sent to the Project Gutenberg Literary Archive Foundation at the + address specified in Section 4, "Information about donations to + the Project Gutenberg Literary Archive Foundation." + +- You provide a full refund of any money paid by a user who notifies + you in writing (or by e-mail) within 30 days of receipt that s/he + does not agree to the terms of the full Project Gutenberg-tm + License. You must require such a user to return or + destroy all copies of the works possessed in a physical medium + and discontinue all use of and all access to other copies of + Project Gutenberg-tm works. + +- You provide, in accordance with paragraph 1.F.3, a full refund of any + money paid for a work or a replacement copy, if a defect in the + electronic work is discovered and reported to you within 90 days + of receipt of the work. + +- You comply with all other terms of this agreement for free + distribution of Project Gutenberg-tm works. + +1.E.9. If you wish to charge a fee or distribute a Project Gutenberg-tm +electronic work or group of works on different terms than are set +forth in this agreement, you must obtain permission in writing from +both the Project Gutenberg Literary Archive Foundation and Michael +Hart, the owner of the Project Gutenberg-tm trademark. Contact the +Foundation as set forth in Section 3 below. + +1.F. + +1.F.1. Project Gutenberg volunteers and employees expend considerable +effort to identify, do copyright research on, transcribe and proofread +public domain works in creating the Project Gutenberg-tm +collection. Despite these efforts, Project Gutenberg-tm electronic +works, and the medium on which they may be stored, may contain +"Defects," such as, but not limited to, incomplete, inaccurate or +corrupt data, transcription errors, a copyright or other intellectual +property infringement, a defective or damaged disk or other medium, a +computer virus, or computer codes that damage or cannot be read by +your equipment. + +1.F.2. LIMITED WARRANTY, DISCLAIMER OF DAMAGES - Except for the "Right +of Replacement or Refund" described in paragraph 1.F.3, the Project +Gutenberg Literary Archive Foundation, the owner of the Project +Gutenberg-tm trademark, and any other party distributing a Project +Gutenberg-tm electronic work under this agreement, disclaim all +liability to you for damages, costs and expenses, including legal +fees. YOU AGREE THAT YOU HAVE NO REMEDIES FOR NEGLIGENCE, STRICT +LIABILITY, BREACH OF WARRANTY OR BREACH OF CONTRACT EXCEPT THOSE +PROVIDED IN PARAGRAPH F3. YOU AGREE THAT THE FOUNDATION, THE +TRADEMARK OWNER, AND ANY DISTRIBUTOR UNDER THIS AGREEMENT WILL NOT BE +LIABLE TO YOU FOR ACTUAL, DIRECT, INDIRECT, CONSEQUENTIAL, PUNITIVE OR +INCIDENTAL DAMAGES EVEN IF YOU GIVE NOTICE OF THE POSSIBILITY OF SUCH +DAMAGE. + +1.F.3. LIMITED RIGHT OF REPLACEMENT OR REFUND - If you discover a +defect in this electronic work within 90 days of receiving it, you can +receive a refund of the money (if any) you paid for it by sending a +written explanation to the person you received the work from. If you +received the work on a physical medium, you must return the medium with +your written explanation. The person or entity that provided you with +the defective work may elect to provide a replacement copy in lieu of a +refund. If you received the work electronically, the person or entity +providing it to you may choose to give you a second opportunity to +receive the work electronically in lieu of a refund. If the second copy +is also defective, you may demand a refund in writing without further +opportunities to fix the problem. + +1.F.4. Except for the limited right of replacement or refund set forth +in paragraph 1.F.3, this work is provided to you 'AS-IS' WITH NO OTHER +WARRANTIES OF ANY KIND, EXPRESS OR IMPLIED, INCLUDING BUT NOT LIMITED TO +WARRANTIES OF MERCHANTIBILITY OR FITNESS FOR ANY PURPOSE. + +1.F.5. Some states do not allow disclaimers of certain implied +warranties or the exclusion or limitation of certain types of damages. +If any disclaimer or limitation set forth in this agreement violates the +law of the state applicable to this agreement, the agreement shall be +interpreted to make the maximum disclaimer or limitation permitted by +the applicable state law. The invalidity or unenforceability of any +provision of this agreement shall not void the remaining provisions. + +1.F.6. INDEMNITY - You agree to indemnify and hold the Foundation, the +trademark owner, any agent or employee of the Foundation, anyone +providing copies of Project Gutenberg-tm electronic works in accordance +with this agreement, and any volunteers associated with the production, +promotion and distribution of Project Gutenberg-tm electronic works, +harmless from all liability, costs and expenses, including legal fees, +that arise directly or indirectly from any of the following which you do +or cause to occur: (a) distribution of this or any Project Gutenberg-tm +work, (b) alteration, modification, or additions or deletions to any +Project Gutenberg-tm work, and (c) any Defect you cause. + + +Section 2. Information about the Mission of Project Gutenberg-tm + +Project Gutenberg-tm is synonymous with the free distribution of +electronic works in formats readable by the widest variety of computers +including obsolete, old, middle-aged and new computers. It exists +because of the efforts of hundreds of volunteers and donations from +people in all walks of life. + +Volunteers and financial support to provide volunteers with the +assistance they need, is critical to reaching Project Gutenberg-tm's +goals and ensuring that the Project Gutenberg-tm collection will +remain freely available for generations to come. In 2001, the Project +Gutenberg Literary Archive Foundation was created to provide a secure +and permanent future for Project Gutenberg-tm and future generations. +To learn more about the Project Gutenberg Literary Archive Foundation +and how your efforts and donations can help, see Sections 3 and 4 +and the Foundation web page at https://www.pglaf.org. + + +Section 3. Information about the Project Gutenberg Literary Archive +Foundation + +The Project Gutenberg Literary Archive Foundation is a non profit +501(c)(3) educational corporation organized under the laws of the +state of Mississippi and granted tax exempt status by the Internal +Revenue Service. The Foundation's EIN or federal tax identification +number is 64-6221541. Its 501(c)(3) letter is posted at +https://pglaf.org/fundraising. Contributions to the Project Gutenberg +Literary Archive Foundation are tax deductible to the full extent +permitted by U.S. federal laws and your state's laws. + +The Foundation's principal office is located at 4557 Melan Dr. S. +Fairbanks, AK, 99712., but its volunteers and employees are scattered +throughout numerous locations. Its business office is located at +809 North 1500 West, Salt Lake City, UT 84116, (801) 596-1887, email +business@pglaf.org. Email contact links and up to date contact +information can be found at the Foundation's web site and official +page at https://pglaf.org + +For additional contact information: + Dr. Gregory B. Newby + Chief Executive and Director + gbnewby@pglaf.org + + +Section 4. Information about Donations to the Project Gutenberg +Literary Archive Foundation + +Project Gutenberg-tm depends upon and cannot survive without wide +spread public support and donations to carry out its mission of +increasing the number of public domain and licensed works that can be +freely distributed in machine readable form accessible by the widest +array of equipment including outdated equipment. Many small donations +($1 to $5,000) are particularly important to maintaining tax exempt +status with the IRS. + +The Foundation is committed to complying with the laws regulating +charities and charitable donations in all 50 states of the United +States. Compliance requirements are not uniform and it takes a +considerable effort, much paperwork and many fees to meet and keep up +with these requirements. We do not solicit donations in locations +where we have not received written confirmation of compliance. To +SEND DONATIONS or determine the status of compliance for any +particular state visit https://pglaf.org + +While we cannot and do not solicit contributions from states where we +have not met the solicitation requirements, we know of no prohibition +against accepting unsolicited donations from donors in such states who +approach us with offers to donate. + +International donations are gratefully accepted, but we cannot make +any statements concerning tax treatment of donations received from +outside the United States. U.S. laws alone swamp our small staff. + +Please check the Project Gutenberg Web pages for current donation +methods and addresses. Donations are accepted in a number of other +ways including including checks, online payments and credit card +donations. To donate, please visit: https://pglaf.org/donate + + +Section 5. General Information About Project Gutenberg-tm electronic +works. + +Professor Michael S. Hart was the originator of the Project Gutenberg-tm +concept of a library of electronic works that could be freely shared +with anyone. For thirty years, he produced and distributed Project +Gutenberg-tm eBooks with only a loose network of volunteer support. + + +Project Gutenberg-tm eBooks are often created from several printed +editions, all of which are confirmed as Public Domain in the U.S. +unless a copyright notice is included. Thus, we do not necessarily +keep eBooks in compliance with any particular paper edition. + + +Most people start at our Web site which has the main PG search facility: + + https://www.gutenberg.org + +This Web site includes information about Project Gutenberg-tm, +including how to make donations to the Project Gutenberg Literary +Archive Foundation, how to help produce our new eBooks, and how to +subscribe to our email newsletter to hear about new eBooks. diff --git a/17000-0.zip b/17000-0.zip Binary files differnew file mode 100644 index 0000000..3d5ddea --- /dev/null +++ b/17000-0.zip diff --git a/17000-8.txt b/17000-8.txt new file mode 100644 index 0000000..a6950cb --- /dev/null +++ b/17000-8.txt @@ -0,0 +1,2842 @@ +The Project Gutenberg EBook of Of the Orthographie and Congruitie of the +Britan Tongue, by Alexander Hume + +This eBook is for the use of anyone anywhere at no cost and with +almost no restrictions whatsoever. You may copy it, give it away or +re-use it under the terms of the Project Gutenberg License included +with this eBook or online at www.gutenberg.org + + +Title: Of the Orthographie and Congruitie of the Britan Tongue + A Treates, noe shorter than necessarie, for the Schooles + +Author: Alexander Hume + +Editor: Henry B. Wheatley + +Release Date: November 4, 2005 [EBook #17000] + +Language: English + +Character set encoding: ISO-8859-1 + +*** START OF THIS PROJECT GUTENBERG EBOOK ORTHOGRAPHIE OF THE BRITAN TONGUE *** + + + + +Produced by Louise Hope, David Starner and the Online +Distributed Proofreading Team at https://www.pgdp.net + + + + + +{Transcriber's Note: + +All material in parentheses () or square brackets [], including the +(_sic_) notations, is from the 1865 original. Material added by the +transcriber is in braces {}. + Greek words have been transliterated and shown between +symbols+. + Single Greek letters are identified by name: _eta_, _alpha_. + "i" represents upside-down i (used in I.3.6). + {gh} represents yogh (used in I.4.10). +Irregularities in chapter numbering are explained at the end of the +editor's Notes.} + + + OF THE + + ORTHOGRAPHIE AND CONGRUITIE + + OF THE BRITAN TONGUE + + + A Treates, noe shorter then necessarie, + + for the Schooles, + + Be + + ALEXANDER HUME. + + +Edited from the Original MS. in the British Museum, + by + HENRY B. WHEATLEY. + + + + +LONDON: +Published for the Early English Text Society, +by Trbner & Co., 60, Paternoster Row. +MDCCCLXV. + +HERTFORD: +Printed by Stephen Austin. + + + + +PREFACE. + + +The following Tract is now printed for the first time from the original +Manuscript in the old Royal Collection in the Library of the British +Museum (Bibl. Reg. 17 A. xi). It is written on paper, and consists of +forty-five leaves, the size of the pages being 5-3/4 in. by 3-3/4 in. +The dedication, the titles, and the last two lines, are written with a +different coloured ink from that employed in the body of the MS., and +appear to be in a different handwriting. It is probable that the tract +was copied for the author, but that he himself wrote the dedication to +the King. + +The Manuscript is undated, and we have no means of ascertaining the +exact time when it was written; but from a passage in the dedication to +James I. of England, it is fair to infer that it was written shortly +after the visit of that monarch to Scotland, subsequent to his accession +to the throne of the southern kingdom, that is, in the year 1617. This +would make it contemporaneous with Ben Jonson's researches on the +English Grammar; for we find, in 1629, James Howell (Letters, Sec. V. +27) writing to Jonson that he had procured Davies' Welch Grammar for +him, "to add to those many you have." The grammar that Jonson had +prepared for the press was destroyed in the conflagration of his study; +so that the posthumous work we now possess consists merely of materials, +which were printed for the first time in 1640, three years after the +author's death. + +The Dedication of this Tract is merely signed _Alexander Hume_, and +contains no other clue to the authorship. Curiously enough there were +four Alexander Humes living about the same time, and three of them were +educated at St. Mary's College, St. Andrew's; only two, however, became +authors, the first of whom was Minister of Logie, and wrote _Hymnes or +Sacred Songes_. There can be little doubt, however, that the present +grammar was written by the Alexander Hume who was at one time Head +Master of the High School, Edinburgh, and author of _Grammatica Nova_. + +From Dr. Steven's History of the High School, Edinburgh, and from +M'Crie's Life of Melville, I have been enabled to extract and put +together the following scanty particulars of our author's life:--The +time and place both of his birth and of his death are alike unknown; +but he himself, on the title of one of his works, tells us that he was +distantly connected with the ancient and noble family of Home, in the +county of Berwick. He was educated at the school of Dunbar, under the +celebrated Andrew Simson, and in due time was enrolled a student in St. +Mary's College, St. Andrew's, and then took the degree of Bachelor of +Arts in 1574. He came to England, and was incorporated at Oxford January +26, 1580-81, as "M. of A. of St. Andrew's, in Scotland."[1] He spent +sixteen years in England, partly engaged in studying and partly in +teaching. During the latter part of this term he was a schoolmaster at +Bath, as appears from Dr. Hill's answer to him, published in 1592; and +the fact of his residence in this city is corroborated at page 18 of +the present treatise. He then returned to Scotland, having gained a +reputation for the excellence of his learning and for the power he +possessed of communicating it to others. On the dismissal of Hercules +Rollock, Rector of the High School, Edinburgh, from his office, Hume was +unanimously chosen to succeed him, and his appointment was dated 23rd +April, 1596. During his incumbency the High School underwent many +changes, and received the form which it retains to the present day. In +March, 1606, Hume resigned his office to become principal master in the +grammar school founded a short time previously, at Prestonpans, by the +munificent John Davidson, minister of the parish. The following document +gives an account of Hume's admission to this school:-- + + {Transcriber's Note: + In the following passage, {-e} represents e with overline. + Caret ^ means that the following single letter, or bracketed group + of letters, was printed in superscript.} + + "At hadintoun y^e 25 of Junij 1606. The q^{lk} day M^r Jo^n ker + minister of y^e panis producit y^e pr{-e}ntat^one of M^r Alex^r + hoome to be schoolm^r of y^e schoole of y^e panis foundit be M^r J^o + Davedsone for instructioune of the youth in hebrew, greek and latine + subscryvet be yais to quhome M^r Jo^n davedsone gave power to noit + y^e man q^{lk} pr{-e}ntat^one y^e pr{-e}brie allowit and ordenit y^e + moderator & clerk to subscrive y^e samine in y^r names q^{lk} yay + ded. As also ordeanit y^t y^e said kirk of y^e panis suld be visited + upon y^e eight day of Julij next to come for admissione of y^e said + M^r Alex^r to y^e said office. The visitors wer appoyntit M^r Ar^d + oswald M^r Robert Wallace M^r George greir M^r andro blackhall & M^r + andro Maghye to teach."----"At Saltprestoun July 8, 1606. The haill + parischoners being poisit how yay lyckit of y^e said M^r Alex^r w^t + vniforme consent being particularly inqwyrit schew y^r guid lycking + of him and y^r willingnes to accept and receiv him to y^e said + office Q^rupon y^e said M^r Alex^r wes admittit to y^e said + office & in token of y^e approba^one both of visitors & of y^e + parischon{-e}s p^rnt both y^e ane and y^e vother tuik y^e said M^r + Alex^r be y^e hand & y^e haill magistratis gentlemen and reman{-e}t + parischoners p^rnt faithfullie p^rmisit to ccurre for y^e + furtherce of y^e work y^t yit restis to be done to y^e said schoole + as also to keipt y^e said M^r Alex^r and his scholleris skaithlis + finallie for farther authorizing of y^e said (_sic_) it wes thought + meitt y^t y^e haill visitors & parichon{-e}s p^rnt suld enter y^e + said M^r Alex^r into y^e said schoole & y^r heir him teache q^{lk} + also wes doone." (Rec. of Presb. of Haddington).[2] + + [Footnote 1: Wood's Fasti Oxonienses, by Bliss, I., 217.] + + [Footnote 2: M'Crie's Life of Melville, vol. ii., p. 509.] + +The school rapidly rose to distinction under Hume, but in 1615 he +relinquished his position, and accepted the Mastership of the Grammar +School of Dunbar, then in high repute, and the very same school in which +he had commenced his own education. When occupied at Dunbar, Hume had +the honour of being the first who, in a set speech, welcomed James VI. +back to his Scottish dominions, after an absence of fourteen years. The +King stopped on his way northward from Berwick on the 13th of May, 1617, +at Dunglass Castle the residence of the Earl of Home, and Hume, as the +orator of the day, delivered a Latin address. + +The date of Hume's death is not known; but he was witness to a deed on +the 27th of November, 1627; and later still, in the records of the Privy +Council of Scotland, 8th and 16th July, 1630, Mr. D. Laing tells me that +there is a memorandum of the King's letter anent the Grammar of Mr. +Alexander Hume, "schoolmaster at Dunbar." With regard to his private +life, we know that he was married to Helen Rutherford, and had two sons +and a daughter born to him in Edinburgh between the years 1601 and 1606. +He was the father of three more children, also two sons and a daughter, +between 1608 and 1610, in the county of East Lothian. + +Hume was a master in controversy, and wrote on subjects of polemical +divinity; but his mind was principally drawn towards language and the +rules of its construction. He especially gave much of his time to the +study of Latin grammar, and feeling dissatisfied with the elementary +books which were then in use, he drew up one himself, which he submitted +to the correction of Andrew Melville and other learned friends, and +published in 1612 under the title of _Grammatica Nova_. The object he +proposed to himself was to exclude from the schools the grammar of the +Priscian of the Netherlands, the celebrated John Van Pauteren, but his +work did not give the satisfaction which he had expected. He succeeded, +however, in his wishes after many reverses, by the help of Alexander +Seton, Earl of Dunfermline, Chancellor of Scotland, and by authority +both of Parliament and of the Privy Council his grammar was enjoined to +be used in all the schools of the kingdom. But through the interest of +the bishops, and the steady opposition of Ray, his successor at the High +School, the injunction was rendered of no effect. He would not, however, +be beaten, and we find that in 1623 he was again actively engaged in +adopting measures to secure the introduction of his grammar into every +school in North Britain where the Latin language was taught. + +The following is a list of our author's works:-- + +A Reioynder to Doctor Hil concerning the Descense of Christ into Hell. + By Alexander Hume Maister of Artes. 4o. + + No place of printing, printer's name, or date, but apparently + printed at London in 1592 or 1593. Dedicated to Robert Earl of + Essex. Although this is the first work that I can find attributed + to Alexander Hume, yet there is no doubt that there must have been + a former one of which we have no record, and the title and + contents of Dr. Hill's book would lead us to this conclusion--"The + Defence of the Article. Christ descended into Hell. With arguments + obiected against the truth of the same doctrine of one Alexander + Humes. By Adam Hyll, D of Divinity. London 1592. 4o. This little + volume consists of two parts; 1st, the original sermon preached by + Hill 28th February, 1589; 2nd, the reply to Hume. At p. 33, the + end of the sermon, is this note, "This sermon ... was answered by + one Alexander Huns, Schoolemaester of Bath, whose answere wholy + foloweth, with a replye of the author" ... At p. 33, "The reply of + Adam Hill to the answere made by Alexander Humes to a sermon," + etc. + +A Diduction of the true and Catholik meaning of our Sauiour his words, + _this is my bodie_, in the institution of his laste Supper through + the ages of the Church from Christ to our owne dayis. Whereunto is + annexed a Reply to M. William Reynolds in defence of M. Robert Bruce + his arguments on this subject: displaying M. John Hammilton's + ignorance and contradictions: with sundry absurdities following upon + the Romane interpretation of these words. Compiled by Alexander + Hume, Maister of the high Schoole of Edinburgh. Edinburgh, Printed + by Robert Waldegrave, Printer to the King's Maiestie, 1602. Cum + Privilegio Regis. 8o. + +Prima Elementa Grammatic in usum juventutis Scotic digesta. Edinburgi, + 1612. 8o. + +Grammatica Nova in usum juventutis Scotic ad methodum revocata. + Edinburgi, 1612. 8o. + +Bellum Grammaticale, ad exemplar Mri. Alexandri Humii. Edinburgi, + excud. Gideon Lithgo, Anno Dom. 1658 8o. Several later editions. + + This humorous Grammatical Tragi-Comedy was not written by Hume, + but only revised by him. + +King James's Progresses, collected and Published by John Adamson + afterwards Principal of the University of Edinburgh, entitled-- + +TA TN MOUSN EISODIA+: + The Muses Welcome to the High and Mighty Prince James &c. At his + Majesties happie Returne to Scotland In Anno 1617. Edinburgh 1618, + folio. + + At page 1: "His Majestie came from Bervik to Dunglas the xiij day + of Maye, where was delivered this [latin] speach following by A. + Hume."--At page 16, there is also a couple of Latin verses signed + "Alexander Humius." + +MS. in the British Museum. The present work. + +MS. in the Advocates' Library:-- + + Rerum Scoticarum Compendium, in usum Scholarum. Per Alexandrum + Humium ex antiqua et nobili gente Humiorum in Scotia, a prim stirpe + quinta sobole oriundum. This work is dated October 1660, and is + therefore merely a transcript. It is an epitome of Buchanan's + History, and Chr. Irvine in Histor. Scot. Nomenclatura, calls it + Clavis in Buchananum, and Bishop Nicholson (Scottish Hist. Lib.) + praises its Latin style. + +The following three works are inserted by Dr. Steven in his list of +Hume's writings, and have been supposed to be his by M'Crie and others; +but Mr. D. Laing believes "there can be no doubt, from internal +evidence, that the true author was Alexander Hume, the poet, who became +minister of Logie, near Stirling, in 1597, and who died in December, +1609." In Wood's Athen Oxonienses, by Bliss, i., 624, it is stated that +all three of them "were printed in London in 1594, in October," but this +must, I think, be a mistake. + +Ane Treatise of Conscience, quhairin divers secreits concerning that + subject are discovered. At Edinburgh, printed by Robert Walde-grave, + Printer to the King's Maiestie 1594. 8o. + +Of the Felicitie of the world to come, unsavorie to the obstinate, + alluring to such as are gone astray, and to the faithfull full of + consolation. Edinb. 1594. 8o. + +Four Discourses, of Praises unto God, to wit, 1 in Praise of the Mercy + and Goodness of God. 2 of his justice. 3 of his Power. 4 of his + Providence. Edinb. 1594. 8o. + +In conclusion, my acknowledgments are due to David Laing, Esq., who +has kindly suggested some corrections in the list of Hume's works, in +addition to what is noted above. + + London, February, 1865. + + * * * * * + + + To the maest excellent + in all princelie wisdom, + learning, and heroical + artes, JAMES, + of Great Britan, + France, and + Ireland, + King, + Defender of the faeth, + grace, mercie, peace, + honoure here and + glorie hereafter. + + +May it please your maest excellent M_ajestie_, I, your grace's humble +servant, seeing sik uncertentie in our men's wryting, as if a man wald +indyte one letter to tuentie of our best wryteres, nae tuae of the +tuentie, without conference, wald agree; and that they quhae might +perhapes agree, met rather be custom then knawlege, set my selfe, about +a yeer syne, to seek a remedie for that maladie. Quhen I had done, +refyning it, I fand in Barret's Alvearie,[3] quhilk is a dictionarie +Anglico-latinum, that Sr. Thomas Smith,[4] a man of nae less worth +then learning, Secretarie to Queen Elizabeth, had left a learned and +judiciouse monument on the same subject. Heer consydering my aun +weaknes, and meannes of my person, began to fear quhat might betyed my +sillie boat in the same seas quhaer sik a man's ship was sunck in the +gulf of oblivion. For the printeres and wryteres of this age, caring for +noe more arte then may win the pennie, wil not paen them selfes to knau +whither it be orthographie or skuiographie that doeth the turne: _and_ +schoolmasteres, quhae's sillie braine will reach no farther then the +compas of their cap, content them selfes with +autos eph+ my master +said it. Quhil I thus hovered betueen hope _and_ despare, the same +Barret, in the letter E, myndes me of a star _and_ constellation to calm +al the tydes of these seaes, if it wald please the supreme Majestie to +command the universitie to censure and ratifie, and the schooles to +teach the future age right and wrang, if the present will not rectius +sapere. Heere my harte laggared on the hope of your M_ajesties_ +judgement, quhom God hath indeued with light in a sorte supernatural, if +the way might be found to draue your eie, set on high materes of state, +to take a glim of a thing of so mean contemplation, and yet necessarie. +Quhiles I stack in this claye, it pleased God to bring your M_ajestie_ +hame to visit your aun Ida. Quher I hard that your G_race_, in the +disputes of al purposes quherwith, after the exemple of _th_e wyse in +former ages, you use to season your moat, ne quid tibi temporis sine +fructu fluat, fel sundrie tymes on this subject reproving your +courteoures, quha on a new conceat of finnes sum tymes spilt (as they +cal it) the king's language. Quhilk thing it is reported that your +M_ajestie_ not onlie refuted with impregnable reasones, but alsoe fel +on Barret's opinion that you wald cause the universities mak an Inglish +gra_m_mar to repres the insolencies of sik green heades. This, quhen I +hard it, soe secunded my hope, that in continent I maed moien hou to +convoy this litle treates to your M_ajesties_ sight, to further (if +perhapes it may please your G_race_) that gud motion. In school materes, +the least are not the least, because to erre in them is maest absurd. +If the fundation be not sure, the maer gorgiouse the edifice the grosser +the falt. Neither is it the least parte of a prince's praise, curasse +rem literariam, and be his auctoritie to mend the misses that ignorant +custom hath bred. Julius Csar was noe less diligent to eternize his +name be the pen then be the suord. Neither thought he it unworthie of +his paines to wryte a grammar in the heat of the civil weer, quhilk was +to them as the English gram_m_ar is to us; _and_, as it seemes noe less +then necessarie, nor our's is now. Manie kinges since that tyme have +advanced letteres be erecting schooles, and doting revennues to their +ma_in_tenance; but few have had the knaulege them selfes to mend, or +be tuiched with, the defectes or faltes crept into the boueles of +learning, among quhom JAMES the first, ane of your M_ajesties_ worthie +progenitoures, houbeit repressed be the iniquitie of the tyme, deserved +noe smal praise; and your M_ajesties_ self noe less, co_m_manding, at +your first entrie to your Roial scepter, to reform the grammar, and to +teach Aristotle in his aun tongue, quhilk hes maed the greek almaest as +common in Scotland as the latine. In this alsoe, if it please your +M_ajestie_ to put to your hand, you have al the windes of favour in your +sail; account, that al doe follow; judgement, that al doe reverence; +wisdom, that al admire; learning, that stupified our scholes hearing +a king borne, from tuelfe yeeres ald alwayes occupyed in materes of +state, moderat in theological and philosophical disputationes, to the +admiration of all that hard him, and speciallie them quha had spent al +their dayes in those studies. + + [Footnote 3: "An Alvearie or Quadruple Dictionarie, containing + four sundrie tongues, namelie, English, Latine, Greeke and French + ... by Jo. Baret. _London_, 1580." Folio. An edition was published + in 1573, with three languages only, the Greek not being included.] + + [Footnote 4: "De recta et emendata Lingu Anglic Scriptione + Dialogus. _Luteti_, 1568." 4to.] + +Accept, dred Soveragne, your pover servantes myte. If it can confer anie +thing to the montan of your Majesties praise, and it wer but a clod, use +it _and_ the auctour as your's. Thus beseeking your grace to accep my +mint, and pardon my miss, commites your grace to the king of grace, to +grace your grace with al graces spiritual _and_ temporal. + +Your M_ajesties_ + humble servant, + Alexander Hume. + + + + + OF THE ORTHOGRAPHIE + + OF THE BRITAN TONGUE; + + A TREATES, NOE + + SHORTER + + THEN NECESSARIE, FOR + + THE SCHOOLES. + + + + +OF THE GROUNDES OF ORTHOGRAPHIE. + +Cap. 1. + + +1. To wryte orthographicallie ther are to be considered the symbol, the +thing symbolized, and their congruence. Geve me leave, gentle reader, +in a new art, to borrow termes incident to the purpose, quhilk, being +defyned, wil further understanding. + +2. The symbol, then, I cal the written letter, quhilk representes to the +eie the sound that the mouth sould utter. + +3. The thing symbolized I cal the sound quhilk the mouth utteres quhen +the eie sees the symbol. + +4. The congruence between them I cal the instrument of the mouth, +quhilk, when the eie sees the symbol, utteres the sound. + +5. This is the ground of al orthographie, leading the wryter from the +sound to the symbol, and the reader from the symbol to the sound. As, +for exemple, if I wer to wryte God, the tuich of the midle of the tongue +on the roofe of the mouth befoer the voual, and the top of the tongue on +the teeth behind the voual, myndes me to wryte it g_o_d. The voual is +judged be the sound, as shal be shaued hereafter. This is the hardest +lesson in this treates, and may be called the key of orthographie. + + + + +OF THE LATINE VOUALES. + +Cap. 2. + + +1. We, as almaest al Europ, borrow our symboles from the Romanes. +Quherforr, to rectefie our aun, first it behoves us to knaw their's. +Thei are in nu_m_ber 23: a, b, c, d, e, f, g, h, i, k, l, m, n, o, p, q, +r, s, t, u, x, y, and z. + +2. To omit the needless questiones of their order and formes; of them, +five be vouales, ane a noat of aspiration, and all the rest consonantes. + +3. A voual is the symbol of a sound maed without the tuiches of the +mouth. + +4. They are distinguished the ane from the other be delating and +contracting the mouth, and are a, e, i, o, u. + +5. Quhat was the right roman sound of them is hard to judge, seeing now +we heer nae romanes; and other nationes sound them after their aun +idiomes, and the latine as they sound them. + +6. But seeing our earand is with our aun britan, we purpose to omit +curiosities, _et_ qu nihil nostra intersunt. Our aun, hou-be it +dialectes of ane tong, differing in the sound of them, differ alsoe in +pronuncing the latine. Quherfoer, to make a conformitie baeth in latine +and English, we man begin with the latine. + +7. A, the first of them, the south soundes as beath thei and we sound it +in bare, nudus; and we, as beath thei and we sound it in bar, obex. + +8. But without partialitie (for in this earand I have set my compas to +the loadstar of reason), we pronunce it better. If I am heer deceaved, +reason sall deceave me. + +9. For we geve it alwaies ane sound beath befoer and behind the +consonant: thei heer ane and ther an other. As in amabant, in the first +tuae syllabes they sound it as it soundes in bare, and in the last as it +sounds in bar. Quherupon I ground this argument. That is the better +sound, not onelie of this, but alsoe of al other letteres, q_uhi_lk is +alwayes ane. But we sound it alwayes ane, and therfoer better. Ad that +their sound of it is not far unlyke the sheepes bae, q_uhi_lk the greek +symbolizes be _eta_ not _alpha_, +b+ not +ba+. See Eustat. in Homer. + +10. Of this letter the latines themselfes had tuae other sounds +differing the ane from the other, and beath from this, quhilk they +symbolized be adding an other voual, and au. And these they called +diphthonges. + +11. The diphthong they defyne to be the sound of tuae vouales coalescing +into ane sound, quhilk definition in au is plaen, in obscurer as now +we pronunce it, for now we sound it generallie lyke the voual e, without +sound of the a, q_uhi_lk, notwithstanding is the principal voual in this +diphthong sound. Questionles at the first it semes to have had sum +differing sound from a, sik as we pronunce in stean, or the south in +stain. But this corruption is caryed with a stronger tyde then reason +can resist, and we wil not stryve with the stream. + +14. E followes, q_uhi_lk in reason sould have but ane sound, for without +doubt the first intent was to geve everie sound the awn symbol, and +everie symbol the awn sound. But as now we sound it in quies and +quiesco, the judiciouse ear may discern tuae soundes. But because +heer we differ not, I wil acquiess. My purpose is not to deal with +impossibilities, nor to mend al crookes, but to conform (if reason wil +conform us) the south and north beath in latine and in English. + +15. Af this voual ryseth tuae diphthonges, ei and eu, quhilk beath +standes wel with the definition, sect. 11. + +16. Of the next, i, we differ farder, and the knot harder to louse, +for nether syde wantes sum reason. Thei in mihi, tibi, and sik otheres, +pronunce it as it soundes in bide, manere; we as it soundes in bid, +jubere. + +17. Among the ancientes I fynd sum groundes for their sound. Cic. epist. +fam. lib. 9, epis. 22, avoues that bini, in latin, and +binei+ in Greek, +had ane sound. And Varro, with sundrie ancientes, wrytes domineis and +serveis, for dominis and servis, quhilk is more lyke the sound of bide +then bid. If this argument reached as wel to i short as i lang, and if +we wer sure how +ei+ was pronunced in those dayes, this auctoritie wald +over-weegh our reason; but seing i, in mihi, _et_c., in the first is +short, and in the last co_m_mon, and the sound of ei uncertan, I stand +at my reason, sect. 9, q_uhi_lk is as powerful heer for i as ther for a. +They pronunce not i in is and quis, id and quid, in and quin, as they +pronunce it in mihi, tibi, sibi, ibi, _et_c., and therfoer not right. + +18. As for o, in latin, we differ not; u, the south pronu_n_ces quhen +the syllab beginnes or endes at it, as eu, teu for tu, and eunum meunus +for unum munus, q_uhi_lk, because it is a diphthong sound, and because +they them selfes, quhen a consonant followes it, pronunce it other +wayes, I hoep I sal not need argumentes to prove it wrang, and not be +a pure voual. + + + + +OF THE BRITAN VOUALES. + +Cap. 3. + + +1. Of a, in our tongue we have four soundes, al so differing ane from an +other, that they distinguish the verie signification of wordes, as, a +tal man, a gud tal, a horse tal. + +2. Quherfoer in this case I wald co_m_mend to our men the imitation of +the greek and latin, quho, to mend this crook, devysed diphthongs. Let +the simplest of these four soundes, or that q_uhi_lk is now in use, +stand with the voual, and supplie the rest with diphthonges; as, for +exemple, I wald wryte the king's hal with the voual a; a shour of hael, +with ae; hail marie, with ai; and a heal head, as we cal it, quhilk the +English cales a whole head, with ea. And so, besydes the voual, we have +of this thre diphthonges, tuae with a befoer, ae and ai, and ane w_i_th +the e befoer, ea. Ad to them au, howbeit of a distinct sound; as, +knaulege with us, in the south knowlege. + +3. These and al other diphthonges I wald counsel the teacheres not to +name be the vouales quherof they are maed, but be the sound q_uhi_lk +they maek, for learneres wil far maer easelie take the sound from the +mouth of the teacher, then maek it them selves of the vouales +ingredient. + +4. Of e, we have tuae soundes, q_uhi_lk it is hard to judge q_uhi_lk is +simplest; as, an el, ulna; and an el, anguilla; hel, infernus; and an +hel, calx pedis. Heer I wald com_m_end to our men quhae confoundes these +the imitation of the south, q_uhi_lk doth wel distinguish these soundes, +wryting the el, ulna, with the voual e, and eel, anguilla, with the +diphthong ee. I am not ignorant that sum symbolizes this sound w_i_th a +diphthong made of ie; eie, oculus; hiel, fiel, miel, _et_c. Here I am +indifferent, and onelie wishes that the ane be used; let the advysed +judge make choise of q_uhi_lk, for my awne paert I lyke the last best; +1. becaus eie, oculus, can not wel be symbolized ee; 2. because the +greekes expresse _eta_ be +ee+, q_uhi_lk, as appeares be the Ioneanes +and Doreanes, drawes neerar to _alpha_, than _epsilon_. + +5. Of i, also, our idiom receaves tuae soundes, as in a man's wil, and +the wil of a fox. Heer, also, I wald have our men learne of the south, +for these soundes they wel distinguish, wryting wil, fil, mil, stil, +with i; and wyl, fyl, myl, styl, with y. + +6. Heer I see be Barrat, in his Alvearie, that sum wald be at +symbolizing these soundes, the ane with the greek diphthong +ei+, and +the other with "i" inverted; as, r+ei+d, equitare; b+ei+d, manere; +r"i"d, legere; h"i"d, cavere. In this opinion I se an eye of judgement, +and therfoer wil not censure it, except I saw the auctour's whole drift. +Onelie for my awn parte I will avoid al novelties, and content my self +with the letteres q_uhi_lk we have in use. And seeing we have no other +use of y distinguished from i, condiscend to the opinion of the south +using i for ane, and y for the other. + +7. O, we sound al alyk. But of it we have sundrie diphthonges: oa, as +to roar, a boar, a boat, a coat; oi, as coin, join, foil, soil; oo, as +food, good, blood; ou, as house, mouse, &c. Thus, we com_m_onlie wryt +mountan, fountan, q_uhi_lk it wer more etymological to wryt montan, +fontan, according to the original. + +8. In this diphthong we co_m_mit a grosse errour, saving better +judgement, spelling how, now, and siklyk with w, for if w be (as it sal +appear, quhen we cum to the awn place of it) a consonant, it can noe +wayes coalesse into a diphthong sound, sik as this out of controversie +is. + +9. U, the last of this rank, the south, as I have said in the latin +sound of it, pronu_n_ces eu, we ou, both, in my simple judgement, wrang, +for these be diphthong soundes, and the sound of a voual sould be +simple. If I sould judge, the frensh sound is neerest the voual sound +as we pronu_n_ce it in mule and muse. + +10. Of it we have a diphthong not yet, to my knawlege, observed of anie; +and, for my awn parte, I am not wel resolved neither how to spel it, nor +name it. Onelie I see it in this, to bou, a bow. I wait not quhither I +sould spel the first buu, or the last boau. As, for exemple, if Roben +Hud wer nou leving, he wer not able to buu his aun bou, or to bou his +aun boau. And therfoer this with al the rest, hou be it in other I have +more for me, I leave to the censure of better judgement. + + + + +OF CONSONANTES. + +Cap. 4. + + +1. This for the vouales, and diphthonges made of them without the +tuiches of the mouth. Now followe the consonantes. + +2. A consonant is a letter symbolizing a sound articulat that is broaken +with the tuiches of the mouth. + +3. The instrumentes of the mouth, quherbe the vocal soundes be broaken, +be in number seven. The nether lip, the upper lip, the outward teeth, +the inward teeth, the top of the tongue, the midle tong, and roof of the +mouth. Of these, thre be, as it were, ha_m_meres stryking, and the rest +stiddies, kepping the strakes of the ha_m_meres. + +4. The ham_m_eres are the nether lip, the top of the tongue, and the +midle tongue. The stiddies the overlip, the outward teeth, the inward +teeth, and the roofe of the mouth. + +5. The nether lip stryking on the overlip makes b, m, p, and on the +teeth it makes f and v. + +6. The top of the tongue stryking on the inward teeth formes d, l, n, r, +s, t, and z. + +7. The midle tongue stryking on the rouf of the mouth formes the rest, +c, g, k, j, q, and x, and so we have 18 consonantes borrowed of the +latines. + +8. These they borrow al from the greekes, saving j and v, quhilk our age +soundes other wayes then it seemes the romanes did; for Plutarch, more +then 100 yeeres after Christ, expressing the sound q_uhi_lk they had in +his tyme, symbolizes them neerar the sound of the vouales quherof they +are maed then now we sound them in latin, for in Galba he symbolizes +junius vindex, +iounios ouindex+, q_uhi_lk, if then it had sounded as +now we sound it, he sould rather have written it with _gamma_ and +_beta_, +gounios bindex+. + +9. We have in our use the sam soundes q_uhi_lk it seemes these +consonantes had in Plutarch's dayes, as in yallou, winter. Quhilk, +seeing now they are worn out of the latin use, my counsel is that we +leave the sound of them q_uhi_lk now is in the latin use to the latines, +and take as our's the sound q_uhi_lk they have left, and geve to the +sound, q_uhi_lk now we use in latin, the latin symbol; as, jolie jhon; +vertue is not vain; and to the soundes quhilk they have left the +symboles q_uhi_lk we have usurped to that end; as, yallou, youk; +water, wyne. + +10. And heer, to put our men af their errour quho had wont to symboliz +yallou with an {gh}, and to put noe difference betueen v and w, {gh} is +a dental consonant, broaken betueen the top of the tongue and root of +the teeth; yal, a guttural sound, made be a mynt of the tongue to the +roofe of the mouth, and therfoer the organes being so far distant, and +the tuich so diverse, this symbol can be no reason serve that sound, nor +nane of that kynd. + +11. As for v and w, seeing we have in our idiom, besyd the latin sound, +an other never hard in latin, as now it is pronu_n_ced, I can not but +com_m_end the wisdom of the south, q_uhi_lk gave the latin sound their +awn symbol, and took to our sound a symbol quhilk they use not. Lyke was +their wisdom in j and y; for as the latines usurped the voual i for a +consonant in their use, q_uhi_lk the greekes had not, so they usurped y, +a voual not mikle different from i, for the correspondent sound, not +used in the latin as now it is pronu_n_ced. + +12. Heerfoer, for distinctiones of both sound and symbol, I wald commend +the symbol and name of i and u to the voual sound; as, indifferent, +unthankful; the symbols of j and v to the latin consonantes, and their +names to be jod and vau; as, vain jestes; and the symboles y and w to +our English soundes, and their names to be ye and we, or yod and wau; +as, yonder, wel, yallou, wool. + +13. Now remaineth h, q_uhi_lk we have called a noat of aspiration, cap. +2, sect. 2, and is, in deed, noe voual, because with a consonant it +makes noe sound; as, ch; nor consonant, because it is pronu_n_ced +without the tuich of the mouth; as, ha. + +14. It may affect al vouales _and_ diphthonges; as, hand, hen, hind, +hose, hurt, hail, hautie, health, heel, heifer, _etc._ But behind the +voual in our tong (so far as yet I can fynd) it hath no use. Of +consonantes, it affecteth g beyond the voual; as, laugh; p befoer the +voual; as, phason; s and t also befoer the voual; as, think, shame. +With c we spil the aspiration, tur_n_ing it into an Italian chirt; as, +charitie, cherrie, of quhilk hereafter. + + + + +OF OUR ABUSING SUM CONSONANTES. + +Cap. 5. + + +1. Now I am cum to a knot that I have noe wedg to cleave, and wald be +glaed if I cold hoep for help. Ther sould be for everie sound that can +occur one symbol, and of everie symbol but one onlie sound. This reason +and nature craveth; and I can not but trow but that the worthie +inventoures of this divyne facultie shot at this mark. + +2. But, contrarie to this sure ground, I waet not be quhat corruption, +we see, not onelie in our idiom, but in the latin alsoe, one symbol to +have sundrie soundes, ye, and that in one word; as, lego, legis. + +3. First, to begin with c, it appeeres be the greekes, quho ever had +occasion to use anie latin word, quharein now we sound c as s, in their +tymes it sounded k; for Cicero, thei wryt Kikero; for Csar, Kaisar; and +Plut., in Galba, symbolizes principia, +prinkipia+. + +{Transcriber's Note: +The word is written with nu, not gamma.} + +4. This sound of it we, as the latines, also keepe befoer a, o, and u; +as, canker, conduit, cumber. But, befoer e and i, sum tymes we sound it, +with the latin, lyke an s; as, cellar, certan, cease, citie, circle, +_et_c. + +5. Behind the voual, if a consonant kep it, we sound it alwayes as a k; +as, occur, accuse, succumb, acquyre. If it end the syllab, we ad e, and +sound it as an s; as, peace, vice, solace, temperance; but nether for +the idle e, nor the sound of the s, have we anie reason; nether daer I, +with al the oares of reason, row against so strang a tyde. I hald it +better to erre with al, then to stryve with al and mend none. + +6. This consonant, evin quher in the original it hes the awne sound, we +turn into the chirt we spak of, cap. 4, sect. 14, quhilk, indeed, can be +symbolized with none, neither greek nor latin letteres; as, from cano, +chant; from canon, chanon; from castus, chast; from +kyriak+, a church, +of q_uhi_lk I hard doctour Laurence, the greek professour in Oxfoord, a +man bothe of great learni_n_g and judgement, utter his opinion to this +sense, and (excep my memorie fael me) in these wordes: +kyriak+ ut ++basilik+ suppresso substantivo +oikia+ domus domini est. Unde nostrum +derivatur, quod Scoti et Angli boreales recte, pronu_n_ciant a kyrk, nos +corrupte a church. + +7. Yet, notwithstanding that it is barbarouse, seing it is more usual in +our tongue then can be mended befoer the voual, as chance, and behind +the voual, as such, let it be symbolized, as it is symbolized with ch, +hou beit nether the c nor the h hath anie affinitie with that sound; +1, because it hath bene lang soe used; and 2, because we have no other +mean to symbolize it, except it wer with a new symbol, q_uhi_lk it will +be hard to bring in use. + +8. Now, quheras ch in nature is c asperat, as it soundes in charus and +chorus; and seing we have that sound also in use, as licht, micht; if I +had bene at the first counsel, my vote wald have bene to have geven ch +the awn sound. But as now the case standes, ne quid novandum sit, quod +non sit necesse, I not onlie consent, but also com_m_end the wisdom of +the south, quho, for distinction, wrytes light, might, with gh and +referres ch to the other sound, how be it improperlie, and this +distinction I com_m_end to our men, quho yet hes not satis attente +observed it. + +9. Next cumes g, howbe it not so deformed as c; for, althogh we see it +evin in latin, and that, in one word (as is said cap. 5, sect. 2), +distorted to tuo sonndes, yet both may stand with the nature of the +symbol and differ not in the instrumentes of the mouth, but in the form +of the tuich, as the judiciouse ear may mark in ago, agis; agam, ages. + +10. This consonant, in latin, never followes the voual; befoer a, o, u, +it keepes alwayes the awn sound, and befoer e and i breakes it. + +11. But with us it may both begin and end the syllab; as, gang; it may, +both behind and befoer, have either sound; as, get, gist, gin, giant. + +12. These the south hath providentlie minted to distinguish tuo wayes, +but hes in deed distinguished noe way, for the first sum hath used tuo +gg; as, egg, legg, bigg, bagg; for the other dg; as, hedge, edge, +bridge; but these ar not +kata pantos+. Gyles, nomen viri, can not be +written dgiles; nor giles doli, ggiles; nether behind the voual ar they +general; age, rage, suage, are never wrytten with dg. Quherfoer I +conclud that, seeing nether the sound nor the symbol hath anie reason to +be sundrie, without greater auctoritie, nor the reach of a privat wit, +this falt is incorrigible. + +13. Here I am not ignorant quhat a doe the learned make about the +symboles of c, g, k and q, that they be al symboles, but of one sound; +but I wil not medle in that question, being besyde my purpose, q_uhi_lk +is not to correct the latin symboles, but to fynd the best use of them +in our idiom. + +14. T, the last of these misused souldioures, keepes alwayes it's aun +nature, excep it be befoer tio; as, oration, declamation, narration; for +we pronunce not tia and tiu as it is in latin. Onelie let it be heer +observed that if an s preceed tio, the t keepes the awn nature, as in +question, suggestion, _et_c. + +15. Thus have I breeflie handled the letteres and their soundes, quhilk, +to end this parte, I wald wish the printeres, in their a, b, c, to +expresse thus:--a, ae, ai, au, ea, b, c, d, e, ee, ei, eu, f, g, h, i, +j, k, l, m, n, o, oa, oo, ou, p, q, r, s, t, u, ui, v, w, x, y, z, and +the masteres teaching their puples to sound the diphthonges, not be the +vouales quharof they be made, but be the sound quhilk they mak in +speaking; lykwayes I wald have them name w, not duble u nor v, singl u, +as now they doe; but the last, vau or ve, and the first, wau or we; and +j, for difference of the voual i, written with a long tail, I wald wish +to to be called jod or je. + + + + +OF THE SYLLAB. + +Cap. 6. + + +1. Now followes the syllab, quhilk is a ful sound symbolized with +convenient letteres, and consistes of ane or moe. + +2. A syllab of ane letter is symbolized with a voual onelie; as, a in +able, e in ever, i in idle, o in over, u in unitie, for a consonant can +make no syllab alane. + +3. A syllab of moe letteres is made of vouales onelie, or els of vouales +and consonantes. Of onlie vouales the syllab is called a diphthong, of +quhilk we have spoaken in the vouales quherof they ar composed. + +4. A syllab of vouales and consonantes either begin_n_es at the +voual, as al, il, el; or at one consona_n_t, as tal man; or at tuo +consona_n_tes, as stand, sleep; or els at thre at the maest, as strand, +stryp. It endes either at a voual, as fa, fo; or at one consonant, as +ar, er; or at tuo, as best, dart; or at thre at the maest, as durst, +worst. + +5. Heer is to be noated, that in divyding syllabes, the consonantes, one +or moe, that may begin a syllab anie way in the middes of a word belong +to the voual following, as in que-stion, qua-rel, fi-shar, sa-fron, +ba-stard, de-scrib, re-scue. + +6. It is alsoe heer to be observed in printing and wryting, that quhen a +word fales to be divyded at the end of a lyne, that the partition must +be made at the end of a syllab, soe that the one lyne end at the end of +the whol syllab, and the other begin the next lyne. As, for exemple, if +this word magistrat fel to be divided at the first syllab, it behoved to +be ma-gistrat; if at the second, it behoved to be magi-strat; but no +wayes to parte the m from the a, nor the g from the i, nor the s from t, +nor the t from r. + + + + +OF THE RULES TO SYMBOLIZE. + +Cap. 7. + + +1. To symboliz right, the sound of the voual is first to be observed, +quhither it be a simple voual or a compound, and quhilk of them is to be +chosen, for quhilk no rule can be geven but the judgeme_n_t of the ear. + +2. Next the consonantes are to be marked; and first, quhither they break +the voual befoer or behind; then quhither they be one or moe; and +lastlie, w_i_th quhat organes of the mouth they be broaken. + +3. For be the organes of the mouth, quherwith the syllab is broaken, the +consonantes are discerned be quhilk the syllab must be symbolized, +quhilk we have said, cap 1, sect. 5. + +4. The consonantes may differ in hammar (as we called it, cap. 4, sect +3) and stiddie, as b and d. Or they may agre in ham_m_er and differ in +stiddie, as b and v. Or they may agre in both and differ in the tuich, +as f and v, m and p, t and g. + +5. The tuich befoer the voual is be lifting the ham_m_er af the stiddie; +as da, la, pa; and behind, be stryking the hammer on the stiddie; as ad, +al, ap. And quhen the hammer and the stiddie are ane, the difference is +in the hardnes and softnes of the tuich; as may be seen in ca and ga, ta +and da. But w and y maekes sae soft a mynt that it is hard to perceave, +and therfoer did the latines symboliz them with the symbol of the +vouales. They are never used but befoer the voual; as we, ye, wil, you; +behynd the voual thei mak noe consonant sound, nor sould be written, and +therfore now and vow, with sik otheres, are not [to] be written w_i_th +w, as is said befoer. + +6. Of this q_uhi_lk now is said may be gathered that general, q_uhi_lk I +called the keie of orthographie, cap. 1 sect. 5, that is the congruence +of the symbol and sound symbolized; that is, that bathe must belang to +the same organes and be tuiched after the same form. + +7. And, be the contrarie, here it is clere that soundes pronu_n_ced with +this organ can not be written with symboles of that; as, for exemple, a +labiel symbol can not serve a dental nor a guttural sound; nor a +guttural symbol a dental nor a labiel sound. + +8. To clere this point, and alsoe to reform an errour bred in the south, +and now usurped be our ignorant printeres, I wil tel quhat befel my self +quhen I was in the south with a special gud frende of myne. Ther rease, +upon sum accident, quhither quho, quhen, quhat, _et_c., sould be +symbolized with q or w, a hoat disputation betuene him and me. After +manie conflictes (for we ofte encountered), we met be chance, in the +citie of Baeth, w_i_th a Doctour of divinitie of both our acquentance. +He invited us to denner. At table my antagonist, to bring the question +on foot ama_n_gs his awn condisciples, began that I was becum an +heretik, and the doctour spering how, ansuered that I denyed quho to be +spelled with a w, but with qu. Be quhat reason? quod the D_octour_. +Here, I beginni_n_g to lay my gru_n_des of labial, dental, and guttural +soundes and symboles, he snapped me on this hand and he on that, that +the d_octour_ had mikle a doe to win me room for a syllogisme. Then +(said I) a labial letter can not symboliz a guttural syllab. But w is a +labial letter, quho a guttural sound. And therfoer w can not symboliz +quho, nor noe syllab of that nature. Here the d_octour_ staying them +again (for al barked at ones), the proposition, said he, I understand; +the assumption is Scottish, and the conclusion false. Quherat al +laughed, as if I had bene dryven from al replye, and I fretted to see a +frivolouse jest goe for a solid ansuer. My proposition is grounded on +the 7 sectio of this same cap., q_uhi_lk noe man, I trow, can denye that +ever suked the paepes of reason. And soe the question must rest on the +assumption quhither w be a labial letter and quho a guttural syllab. As +for w, let the exemples of wil, wel, wyne, juge quhilk are sounded +befoer the voual with a mint of the lippes, as is said the same cap., +sect. 5. As for quho, besydes that it differres from quo onelie be +aspiration, and that w, being noe perfect consonant, can not be +aspirated, I appele to al judiciouse eares, to q_uhi_lk Cicero +attributed mikle, quhither the aspiration in quho be not ex imo gutture, +and therfoer not labial. + + + + +OF RULES FROM THE LATIN. + +Cap. 7. (_sic._) + + +1. Heer, seeing we borrow mikle from the latin, it is reason that we +either follow them in symbolizing their's, or deduce from them the +groundes of our orthographie. + +2. Imprimis, then, quhatever we derive from them written with c we sould +alsoe wryte with c, howbeit it sound as an s to the ignorant; as +conceave, receave, perceave, from concipio, recipio, percipio; concern, +discern, from concerno, discerno; accesse, successe, recesse, from +accedo, succedo, recedo, w_i_th manie moe, q_uhi_lk I com_m_end to the +attention of the wryter. + +3. Also quhat they wryte w_i_th s we sould alsoe wryte with s; as +servant, from servus; sense, from sensus; session from sessio; passion, +from passio. + +4. Neither is the c joined w_i_th s here to be omitted; as science and +conscience, from scientia, conscientia; ascend and descend, from +ascendo, descendo; rescind and abscind, from rescindo and abscindo. + +4 (_sic_). This difference of c and s is the more attentivelie to be +marked for that wordes of one sound and diverse signification are many +tymes distinguished be these symboles; as, the kinges secrete council, +and the faithful counsil of a frende; concent in musik, and consent of +myndes; to duel in a cel, and to sel a horse; a decent weed, and descent +of a noble house. These tuo last differres alsoe in accent. + +5. Lykwayes, that we derive from latin verbales in tio, sould also be +wrytten with t; as oration, visitation, education, vocation, +proclamation, admonition, _et_c. + +6. Wordes deryved from the latin in tia and tium we wryte with ce; as +justice, from justitia; intelligence, from intelligentia; vice, from +vitium; service, from servitium. In al q_uhi_lk, houbeit the e behind +the c be idle, yet use hes made it tollerable to noat the breaking of +the c, for al tongues bear with sum slippes that can not abyde the tuich +stone of true orthographie. + +7. C is alsoe written in our wordes deryved from x in latin; as peace, +from pax; fornace, from fornax; matrice, from matrix; nurice, from +nutrix, q_uhi_lk the south calles nurse, not without a falt both in +sound and symbol; be this we wryte felicitie, audacitie, tenacitie, +_et_c. + +8. Lykwayes we sould keep the vouales of the original, quherin the north +warres the south; from retineo, the north retine, the south retain; from +foras, the north foran, the south forain; from regnu_m_, the north +regne, the south raigne; from cor, the north corage, the south courage; +from devoro, the north devore, the south devour; from vox, the north +voce, the south voice; from devoveo, the north devote, the south +devoute; from guerrum, the north were, the south war; from gigas, +gigantis, the north gyant, the south giaunt; from mons, montis, the +north mont, the south mount. Of this I cold reckon armies, but wil not +presume to judge farther then the compasse of my awn cap, for howbeit we +keep nearar the original, yet al tongues have their idiom in borrowing +from the latin, or other foran tongues. + + + + +OF SUM IDIOMES IN OUR ORTHOGRAPHIE. + +Cap. 8. + + +1. In our tongue we have some particles q_uhi_lk can not be symbolized +with roman symboles, nor rightlie pronunced but be our awn, for we in +manye places soe absorb l and n behynd a consonant, quher they can not +move without a voual intervening, that the ear can hardlie judge +quhither their intervenes a voual or noe. + +2. In this case sum, to avoid the pronu_n_ciation of the voual befoer +the l and n, wrytes it behind; as litle, mikle, muttne, eatne. Quhilk +houbeit it incurres in an other inconvenience of pronu_n_cing the voual +behind the l or n, yet I dar not presume to reprove, because it passeth +my wit how to avoid both inconveniences, and therfoer this I leave to +the wil of the wryter. + +3. Sum of our men hes taken up sum unusual formes of symbolizing, +q_uhi_lk I wald wish to be reformed, yet if I bring not reason, let no +man change for my phantasie. + +4. First, for peple they wryte people, I trow because it cumes from +populus; but if that be a reason, I wald understand a reason quhy they +speak not soe alsoe. Or gif they speak not soe, I wald understand quhy +they wryte not as they speak. I knawe they have the exemple of France to +speak ane way and wryte an other; but that exemple is as gud to absorb +the s in the end of everie word. Al exemples are not imitable. + +5. They use alsoe to wryte logicque, musicque, rhetoricque, and other of +that sorte, with cque. If this be doon to make the c in logica, _et_c., +subsist, quhy wer it not better to supply a k in the place of it, then +to hedge it in with a whol idle syllab; it wer both more orthographical +and easier for the learner, for c and k are sa sib, _tha_t the ane is a +greek and the other a latin symbol of one sound. In this art it is alyke +absurd to wryte that thou reades not, as to read that thou wrytes not. + +6. We use alsoe, almost at the end of everie word, to wryte an idle e. +This sum defend not to be idle, because it affectes the voual before the +consonant, the sound quherof many tymes alteres the signification; as, +hop is altero tantu_m_ pede saltare, hope is sperare; fir, abies, fyre, +ignis; a fin, pinna, fine, probatus; bid, jubere, bide, manere; with +many moe. It is true that the sound of the voual befoer the consonant +many tymes doth change the signification; but it is as untrue that the +voual e behind the consonant doth change the sound of the voual before +it. A voual devyded from a voual be a consonant can be noe possible +means return thorough the consonant into the former voual. Consonantes +betuene vouales are lyke partition walles betuen roomes. Nothing can +change the sound of a voual but an other voual coalescing with it into +one sound, of q_uhi_lk we have spoaken sufficientlie, cap. 3, to +illustrat this be the same exemples, saltare is to hop; sperare to hoep; +abies is fir; ignis, fyr, or, if you wil, fier; jubere is bid; manere, +byd or bied. + +7. Yet in sum case we are forced to tolerat this idle e; 1. in wordes +ending in c, to break the sound of it; as peace, face, lace, justice, +_et_c.; 2. behind s, in wordes wryten with this s; as false, ise, case, +muse, use, _et_c.; 3. behind a broaken g; as knawlege, savage, suage, +ald age. Ther may be moe, and these I yeld because I ken noe other waye +to help this necessitie, rather then that I can think anye idle symbol +tolerable in just orthographie. + + + + +OF THE ACCENTES OF OUR TONGUE. + +Cap. 9. + + +1. Seing that we fynd not onelie the south and north to differ more in +accent then symbol, but alsoe one word with a sundrie accent to have a +diverse signification, I com_m_end this to him quho hes auctoritie, to +com_m_and al printeres and wryteres to noat the accented syllab in +everie word with noe lesse diligence then we see the grecianes to noat +their's. + +2. Cicero, in his buik de Oratore ad Brutum, makes it a natural harmonie +that everie word pronunced be the mouth of man have one acute syllab, +and that never farther from the end then the third syllab, quhilk the +grammareanes cales to the same end the antepenult. Quhilk observation of +so noble a wit is most true in tongues q_uhi_lk he understud, the greek +and latin. But if Cicero had understud our tongue, he sould have hard +the accent in the fourth syllab from the end; as in mtrimonie, +ptrimonie, vdimonie, intllerable, intlligences, and whole garrisones +of lyke liverie. This anie eare may if he accent the antepenult +matrmonie, or the penult matrimnie, or the last as matrimone. + +3. Then to the purpose we have the same accentes q_uhi_lk the latin and +the greek hath, acute, circu_m_flex, and grave. + +4. The acute raiseth the syllab quheron it sittes; as profsse, prfit, +mpudent. + +5. It may possesse the last syllab: as supprst, pretnce, sincre; the +penult: as sbject, cndle, crftie; the antepenult: as diffcultie, +mnister, fnallie; and the fourth also from the end, as is said sect. +2; as spciallie, instiable, dligentlie. In al q_uhi_lk, if a man +change the acce_n_t, he sall spill the sound of the word. + +6. The grave accent is never noated, but onelie understood in al +syllabes quherin the acute and circumflex is not. Onlie, for difference, +sum wordes ar marked with it, thus `, leaning contrarie to the acute. + +7. The circumflex accent both liftes and felles the syllab that it +possesseth, and combynes the markes of other tuae, thus . Of this we, +as the latines, hes almost no use. But the south hath great use of it, +and in that their dialect differes more from our's then in other soundes +or symboles. + +8. The use of the accent wil be of good importance for the right +pronu_n_ciation of our tongue, quhilk now we doe forte, non arte, and +conforming of the dialectes, q_uhi_lk, as I have said, differes most in +this. + + + + +OF THE APOSTROPHUS AND HYPHEN. + +Cap. 10. + + +1. The learned printeres uses to symboliz apostrophus and hyphen as wel +as a, b, c. + +2. Apostrophus is the ejecting of a letter or a syllab out of one word +or out betuene tuae, and is alwayes marked above the lyne, as it wer a +com_m_a, thus '. + +3. Out of one word the apostrophus is most usual in poesie; as Ps. 73, +v. 3, for quhen I sau such foolish men, I grug'd, and did disdain; and +v. 19, They are destroy'd, dispatch'd, consum'd. + +4. Betuene tuae wordes we abate either from the end of the former or the +beginni_n_g of the later. + +5. We abate from the end of the former quhen it endes in a voual and the +next beginnes at a voual; as, th' ingrate; th' one parte; I s' it, for I +see it. + +6. In abating from the word following, we, in the north, use a +mervelouse libertie; as, he's a wyse man, for he is a wyse man; I'l meet +with him, for I wil meet with him; a ship 'l of fooles, for a ship ful +of fooles; and this we use in our com_m_on language. And q_uhil_k is +stranger, we manie tymes cut of the end of the word; as, he's tel the, +for he sal tel the. + +7. This for apostrophus. Hyphen is, as it wer, a band uniting whol +wordes joined in composition; as, a hand-maed, a heard-man, tongue-tyed, +out-rage, foer-warned, mis-reported, fals-deemed. + + + + + OF THE CONGRUITIE + + OF OUR BRITAN + + TONGUE. + + LIB. 2. + + + + +OF THE PERSON. + +Cap. 1. + + +1. Al wordes q_uhi_lk we use to expresse our mynde are personal or +impersonal. + +2. A personal word is q_uhi_lk admittes diversitie of person. + +3. Person is the face of a word, quhilk in diverse formes of speach it +diverselie putes on; as, I, Peter, say that thou art the son of God. +Thou, Peter, sayes that I am the son of God. Peter said that I am the +son of God. + +4. Quherupon person is first, second, and third. + +5. The first person is of him that speakes; as, I wryte. + +6. The second person is of him that is spoaken to; as, thou wrytes. + +7. The third person is of him that is spoaken of; as, Peter wrytes. + + + + +OF NU_M_BER. + +Cap. 2. + + +1. Number is distinction of person be one and moe; and soe is singular +and plural. + +2. The singular speakes of one; as, a hand, a tree, a sheep, a horse, a +man. + +3. The plural speakes of moe then one; as, handes, trees, sheep, horses, +men, tuo, three, foure, or moe, or how manie soever. + +4. This difference is com_m_onlie noted with es at the end of the word +singular; as, a house, houses; a windoe, windoes; a doore, tuo doores. + +5. Sum tymes it is noated be changing a letter; as, a man, men; a woman, +wemen; a goose, geese. + +6. Sum tyme be changing noe thing; as, a sheep, a thousand sheep; a +horse, an hundred horse; a noute, ten noute. + + + + +OF THE DETERMINATION OF THE PERSON. + +Cap. 3. + + +1. A personal word is a noun or a verb. A noun is a word of one person +w_i_th gender and case; as, I is onelie of the first person; thou is +onelie of the second; and al other nounes are onelie the third person; +as, thou, Thomas, head, hand, stone, blok, except they be joined with I +or thou. + +2. The person of a noun singular is determined or undetermined. + +3. The determined person is noated with the, and it is determined either +be an other substantive; as, the king of Britan; or be an adjective; as, +the best king in Europ; or be a relative; as, God preserve the king +quhom he hath geven us. + +4. The undetermined noun is noated with an befoer a voual; as, an ald +man sould be wyse; and with a befoer a consonant; as, a father sould +com_m_and his son. + + + + +OF THE GENDER OF A NOUN. + +Cap. 4. + + +1. Gender is the affection of a noun for distinction of sex. + +2. Sex is a distinction of a noun be male and female, and these are +distinguished the one from the other, or both from thinges without sex. + +3. The one is distinguished from the other be he and she. + +4. He is the noat of the male; as, he is a gud judge; he is a wyse man; +he is a speedie horse; he is a crouse cock; he is a fat wether. + +5. She is the noate of the femal sex; as, she is a chast matron; she is +a stud meer; she is a fat hen; she is a milk cowe. + +6. Nounes that want sex are noated with it; as, it is a tale tree; it is +a sueet aple; it is a hard flint; it is a faer day; it is a foul way. + +7. In the plural number they are not distinguished; as, they are honest +men; they are vertueouse ladies; they are highe montanes. + + + + +OF THE CASE OF THE NOUN. + +Cap. 5. + + +1. Case is an affection of a noun for distinction of person; as, the +corner stone fel on me; stone is the nominative case. The corner of a +stone hurt me; stone is the genitive case. Quhat can you doe to a stone; +stone is the dative case. He brak the stones; it is the accusative case. +Quhy standes thou stone; it is the vocative. And he hurt me with a +stone; it is the ablative case. + +2. This difference we declyne, not as doth the latines and greekes, be +terminationes, but with noates, after the maner of the hebrues, quhilk +they cal particles. + +3. The nominative hath no other noat but the particle of determination; +as, the peple is a beast with manie heades; a horse serves man to manie +uses; men in auctoritie sould be lanternes of light. + +4. Our genitive is alwayes joyned with an other noun, and is noated with +of, or s. + +5. With of, it followes the noun quhar w_i_th it is joined; as, the +house of a good man is wel governed. + +6. With s it preceedes the word quherof it is governed, and s is devyded +from it with an apostrophus; as, a gud man's house is wel governed. + +7. This s sum haldes to be a segment of his, and therfoer now almost al +wrytes his for it, as if it wer a corruption. But it is not a segment of +his; 1. because his is the masculin gender, and this may be foeminin; +as, a mother's love is tender; 2. because his is onelie singular, and +this may be plural; as, al men's vertues are not knawen. + +8. The dative is noated w_i_th to, and for; as, geve libertie evin to +the best youth and it wil luxuriat. Al men doeth for them selves; few +for a frende. + +9. The accusative hath noe other noat then the nominative; as, the head +governes the bodie. + +10. The vocative is the person to quhom the speach is directed; as, +quhence cumes thou neas. + +11. The ablative is noated w_i_th prepositiones in, with, be, and sik +lyke; as, be god al thinges wer made; God w_i_th his word his warkes +began; in my father's house are manie mansiones. + + + + +OF THE DEGREES OF COMPARISON. + +Cap. 6. + + +1. Al nounes that wil join with a substantive ar called adjectives; as, +gud, high, hard, sueet, sour. + +2. These, and al that wil admit mare and mast, are compared be degrees; +as, sueet, more sueet, most sueet. + +3. Of comparison ther be thre degrees: the positive, comparative, and +superlative, if the first may be called a degre. + +4. The positive is the first position of the noun; as, soft, hard; +quhyte, blak; hoat, cald. + +5. The comparative excedes the positive be more, and is formed of the +positive be adding er; as, softer, harder; quhiter, blaker; hoater, +calder. + +6. The superlative excedes the positive be most, and is formed of the +positive be adding est; as, softest, hardest; quhytest, blakest; +hoatest, caldest. + + + + +OF THE VERB'S PERSON AND NUMBER. + +Cap. 7. + + +1. This for the noun. The verb is a word of al persones declyned with +mood and tyme; as, I wryte, thou wrytes, he wrytes. + +2. We declyne not the persones and nu_m_beres of the verb, as doth the +latine, but noat them be the person of the noun. + +3. They are noated w_i_th I, thou, and he in the singular number; we, +ye, and they in the plural. + +4. The nu_m_ber is noated with I and we; thou and ye; he and they. + + + + +OF THE MOOD OF THE VERB. + +Cap. 8. + + +1. The mood is an affection of the verb serving the varietie of +utterance. + +2. We utter the being of thinges or our awn wil. + +3. The being of thinges is uttered be inquyring or avouing. + +4. We inquyre of that we wald knaw; as, made God man w_i_thout synne; +and in this the supposit of the verb followes the verb. + +5. We avoue that q_uhi_lk we knaw; as, God made man without sinne; and +in this the supposit preceedes the verb. + +6. We utter our wil be verbes signifying the form of our wil, or +postposing the supposit. + +7. We wish be wald god, god grant, and god nor; as, wald god I knew the +secretes of nature. + +8. We permit the will of otheres be letting; as, let God aryse; let +everie man have his awn wyfe. + +9. We bid our inferioures, and pray our superioures, be postponing the +supposit to the verb; as, goe ye and teach al nationes; here me, my God. + + + + +OF THE TYME OF THE VERB. + +Cap. 9. + + +1. Tyme is an affection of the verb noating the differences of tyme, and +is either present, past, or to cum. + +2. Tyme present is that q_uhi_lk now is; as, I wryte, or am wryting. + +3. Tyme past is that q_uhi_lk was, and it is passing befoer, past els, +or past befoer. + +4. Tyme passing befoer, q_uhi_lk we cal imperfectlie past, is of a thing +that was doeing but not done; as, at four hoores I was wryting; Quhen +you spak to me I was wryting, or did wryte, as Lillie expoundes it. + +5. Tyme past els is of a thing now past, q_uhi_lk we cal perfectlie +past; as, I have written. + +6. Tyme past befoer is of a thing befoer done and ended; as, at four +hoores, or quhen you spak to me, I had written. + +7. Tyme to cum is of that q_uhi_lk is not yet begun; as, at four houres +I wil wryte. + + + + +OF THE POWER OF THE VERB. + +Cap. 10. + + +1. A verb signifies being or doeing. Of being ther is onelie one, I am, +and is thus varyed. + +2. In the present tyme, I am, thou art, he is; we are, ye are, they are. + +3. In tyme passing befoer, I was, thou was, he was; we wer, ye wer, they +wer. + +4. In tyme past els, I have bene, thou hes bene, he hes bene; we have +bene, ye have bene, they have bene. + +5. In tyme past befoer, I had bene, thou had bene, he had bene; we had +bene, ye had bene, they had bene. + +6. In tyme to cum, I wil be, thou wilt be, he wil be; we wil be, ye wil +be, they wil be. + +7. Verbes of doing are actives or passives. + +8. The active verb adheres to the person of the agent; as, Christ hath +conquered hel and death. + +9. The passive verb adheres to the person of the patient; as, hel and +death are conquered be Christ. + +10. These our idiom conjugates onelie in tuo tymes, the tyme present and +tym past; as, I wryte, I wrote; I speak, I spak; I here, I hard; I se, I +saw; I fele, I felt. + +11. The other differences of tyme ar expressed be the notes of the verb +of being, or be the verb of being it self, and a participle; as, I was +wryting; I have written; I had written; I wil wryte. + + + + +OF THE ADVERB. + +Cap. 11. + + +1. A word impersonal is q_uhi_lk in al formes of speach keepes one face, +and this is adverb or conjunction. + +2. An adverb is a word adhering mast com_m_onlie w_i_th a verb with one +face in al moodes, tymes, nu_m_beres and persones; as, I leve hardlie, +thou leves hardlie; I did leve hardlie; I have leved hardlie; I had +leved hardlie; I wil leave hardlie; leve he hardlie; God forbid he leve +hardlie. + +3. Our men confoundes adverbes of place, q_uhi_lk the south +distinguishes as wel as the latin, and therfoer let us not shame to +learne. + +4. They use quher, heer, ther, for the place in q_uhi_lk; quhence, +hence, thence, for the place from quhilk; quhither, hither, thither, for +the place to q_uhi_lk; as, quher dwel you? quhence cum you? quhither goe +you? + +5. They also distinguish wel in, into, and unto: in, they use with the +place quher; into, with the thing quhither; and unto, for how far; as, +our father, q_uhi_lk art in heavin, admit us into heavin, and lift us +from the earth unto heavin. + +6. Heer, becaus sum nounes incurre into adverbes, let us alsoe noat +their differences. + +7. First no and not. Noe is a noun, nullus in latin, and in our tongue +alwayes precedes the substantive quhilk it nulleth; as, noe man, noe +angle, noe god. + +8. Not is an adverb, non in latin, and in our tong followes the verb +that it nulleth; as, heer not, grant not; I heer not, I grant not; I wil +not heer, I wil not grant. + +9. Ane, in our idiom, and an. Ane is a noun of nu_m_ber, in latin unus; +an a particule of determination preceding a voual, as we have said cap. +3, sect. 4. + +10. Thee and the. Thee is the accusative of thou; as, thou loves God, +and God loves thee. The is the determined not of a noun, of q_uhi_lk we +spak cap. 3, sect. 3. + + + + +OF THE CONJUNCTION. + +Cap. 12. + + +1. Conjunction is a word impersonal serving to cople diverse senses. And +of it ther be tuoe sortes, the one enu_n_ciative, and the other +ratiocinative. + +2. The conjunction enunciative copies the partes of a period, and are +copulative, as and; connexive, as if; disjunctive, as or; or discretive, +as howbe it. + +3. The ratiocinative coples the partes of a ratiocination, and it either +inferres the conclusion or the reason. + +4. Therfoer inferres the conclusion; as, noe man can keep the law in +thought, word, and deed: and therfoer noe man befoer the judg of the +hart, word, and deed, can be justifyed be the law. + +5. Because inferres the reason; as, I wil spew the out, because thou art +nether hoat nor cald. + + + + +OF DISTINCTIONES. + +Cap. 13. + + +1. A distinction is quherbe sentences are distinguished in wryting and +reading. And this is perfect or imperfect. + +2. A perfect distinction closes a perfect sense, and is marked with a +round punct, thus . or a tailed punct, thus ? + +3. The round punct concludes an assertion; as, if Abraham was justifyed +be workes, he had quherof to glorie. + +4. The tailed punct concludes an interrogation; as, sal we, quha are +dead to syn, leve to it? + +5. The imperfect distinction divydes the partes of a period, and is +marked with tuoe punctes, the one under the other, thus : and is red +with half the pause of a perfect punct; as, al have synned, and fallen +from the glorie of god: but are justifyed frelie be his grace. + +6. The com_m_a divydes the least partes of the period, and is pronunced +in reading with a short sob. + +7. The parenthesis divydes in the period a sentence interlaced on sum +occurrences q_uhi_lk coheres be noe syntax w_i_th that q_uhi_lk +preceedes and followes; as, for exemple of beath, and to conclud this +treatesse: + + Bless, guyd, advance, preserve, prolong Lord (if thy pleasur be) + Our King _and_ Queen, and keep their seed thy name to magnifie. + + * * * * * + + +NOTES. + + +The foregoing Tract is one of great interest, not only on account of its +intrinsic merit, but also for the racy style of writing adopted by its +author. We find him continually garnishing his language with such +idiomatic and colloquial expressions as the following:--"Quhae's sillie +braine will reache no farther then the compas of their cap" (page 2); +and again, "but will not presume to judge farther then the compasse of +my awn cap" (p. 20). He observes of the printers and writers of his age +that they care "for noe more arte then may win the pennie" (p. 2), and +on the same page he says, "quhiles I stack in this claye," which appears +to be equivalent to our term "stuck in the mud." At p. 3 he says, "and +it wer but a clod;" at p. 14, "neither daer I, with al the oares of +reason, row against so strang a tyde;" and again, on p. 18, we find +reason under another aspect, thus, "noe man I trow can denye that ever +suked the paepes of reason." + +It seems that the expression, _Queen's English_, is by no means of +modern date, as we have it as the _king's language_ at p. 2. + +Hume laments, in his Dedication, the uncertainty of the orthography +prevailing at the time he writes, and yet we find him spelling words +several different ways, even within the compass of a single sentence, +without being able to lay the blame upon the printers; thus we find him +writing ju_d_gement on p. 11, ju_d_ge p. 8, and ju_d_g p. 33, but juge +p. 18; and there are numberless other instances that it would be tedious +to enumerate. Again, the author uses a mixture of Scotch and English, so +we have sometimes ane and sometimes one; nae on page 1 and noe on p. 2; +mare and mast, and more and most, even in the same sentence (p. 30); and +two is spelt in three different ways, tuae, tuo, and tuoe. + +Our author's stay in England appears to have drawn his attention to the +differences between the two languages of Scotland and England, which he +distinguishes as North and South. He certainly shows, in some instances, +the greater correctness of the Scotch with regard to the spelling of +words derived from the Latin; as, retine instead of retain, corage +instead of courage, etc. (p. 20), in which words the redundant letters +that we Southerners have introduced are thrown out. He is, however, by +no means partial, and gives us praise when he thinks we deserve it. + + Page 9. The arguments in favour of the sound given by the English + Universities to the Latin _i_ are curious: it is stated to have its + value in the Greek +ei+; but the author seems to have been in error as + to the English sounding mihi and tibi alike, or our pronunciation must + have changed since his time. + + P. 10. The author speaks of the letter _y_ as being used by the South + for the sound now symbolized by _i_ with a final _e_ following the + succeeding consonant, as _will_ with an _i_, and _wile_ with a _y_ in + place of the _i_ and final _e_; thus in the same way he spells write, + _wryt_. + + P. 11 (7). He gives food, good, blood, as examples of the same sound, + thus inferring that the English pronounced the two latter so as to + rhyme with food. + + P. 11 (8). He objects to the use of _w_ for _u_ in the diphthongal + sound of _ou_, and therefore spells _how_, _now_, etc., _hou_, _nou_. + + P. 11 (10). It is difficult here to see what the pronunciation of + _buu_ would be, which the author gives as the sound of bow (to bow). + Probably the sound he meant would be better represented by _boo_. + + P. 13 (12). The author here recommends the distinction both of sound + and symbol of _j_ and _v_ as consonants, and _i_ and _u_ as vowels, + and proposes that we should call _j_ _jod_ or _je_, and _v_ _vau_ or + _ve_, and not single _u_, "as now they doe" (p. 16), and _w_ he would + call _wau_ or _we_, and moreover he places them in his alphabet on the + same page. If this proposal was originally his own, it is curious that + the name _ve_ should have been adopted, though not the _we_ for _w_. + Ben Jonson points out the double power of _i_ and _v_ as both + consonant and vowel, but he does not attempt to make them into + separate letters as Hume does. + + P. 15 (12). He gives as an anomaly of the South that while the _d_ is + inserted before _g_ in hedge, bridge, etc., it is omitted in age, + suage, etc. He does not see that the short vowel requires a double + consonant to prevent it from being pronounced long. + + P. 21 (6). He disputes the possibility of a final _e_, separated from + a preceding vowel by a consonant, having any effect whatever in + altering the sound of the preceding vowel, and recommends the use of a + diphthong to express the sound required; as, hoep for hope, fier for + fire, bied for bide, befoer for before, maed for made, etc. He + uniformly throughout follows this rule. + + P. 22 (5). Hume here accents difficultie on the antepenultimate + instead of the first syllable. + + P. 23 (7). He puts down outrage as an instance of two distinct words + joined by a hyphen, which is the derivation given by Ash in his + dictionary, in strange obliviousness of the French word _outrage_. + + P. 27 (1, 6). _T_ is omitted after _s_ in the second person singular + of the verb, and so no distinction is made between the second and the + third persons; thus, thou wrytes, and at p. 32 thou was, and thou hes. + + P. 29 (7). The supposition that the apostrophe 's as a mark of the + possessive case is a segment of his, a question which has been lately + revived, is here denied. + + P. 34. In this last chapter on Punctuation, which the author styles + "of Distinctiones," no mention whatever is made of the "semicolon," + though it occurs frequently in the MS., as, for instance, p. 30, cap. + 6. This stop, according to Herbert, was first used by Richard Grafton + in _The Byble_ printed in 1537: it occurs in the Dedication. Henry + Denham, an English printer who flourished towards the close of the + sixteenth century, was the first to use it with propriety. + + P. 34 (6). The explanation of the mode of pronouncing the comma "with + a short _sob_" is odd.[5] + + [Footnote 5: It will be here as well to mention that as the + punctuation in the MS. is extremely unsystematic, it has been + dispensed with whenever the meaning was confused by it.] + +The author continually uses a singular verb to a plural noun; for +instance, "of this we, as the latines, hes almost no use" (p. 22), +though on p. 20 he writes, "in our tongue we have some particles." + +With regard to the Manuscript, there are two corrections in it worth +noting. At p. 10 (6), in the phrase, "the auctours _whole_ drift," the +word had been originally written _hael_, but is marked through, and +_whole_ substituted for it in the same handwriting. At p. 21 (4), the +word _frensh_ has been inserted before _exemples_, but has been +afterwards struck through. + +The numbering is wrong in three places, but it has not been corrected. +At p. 8 there are no sections 12 and 13, at pp. 17, 19, there are two +cap. 7, and at p. 19 there are two sections 4. + + + + +GLOSSARIAL INDEX. + + +[The words in the present Tract that really required to be glossed are +but few; I have, however, inserted in the following list most of the +variations from ordinary modern usage, in order that it may serve as an +Index.] + +Af = of, p. 9. + Af = off, p. 12. +Ald = old, pp. 3, 21, 28. +Amangs = amongst, p. 18. +Ane = a, one. +Angle = angel, p. 33. +Auctoritie = authority, pp. 22, 29. +Aun = own, pp. 2, 3, 7, 8, 11, 15. +Awn = own, pp. 11, 18, 20, 30, 31. +Awn = proper, pp. 9, 11, 13, 15. +Awne = proper, p. 14. +Awne = own, p. 10. + +Baeth = both, pp. 8, 34. +Bathe = both, p. 17. +Be = by. +Britan = British. + +Cald = cold, pp. 30, 33; + caldest, p. 30. +Cales = calls, pp. 10, 22. +Chirt = a squirt, or a squeeze through the teeth, pp. 13, 14. + See Ruddiman's Glossary to G. Douglas (_chirtand_). +Cold = could, p. 20. +Coples = couples, p. 33. +Corage = courage, p. 20. +Crouse = brisk, p. 28. +Cum = come, pp. 11, 31; + cumes = comes, p. 29. + +Devore = devour, p. 20. +Devote = devout, p. 20. +Distinctiones = punctuation, p. 34. +Doon = done, p. 21. +Doting = giving, p. 3. + +Earand = errand, p. 8. +Evin = even, p. 29. + +Faer = fair, p. 28. +Falt = fault, pp. 15, 20. +Fand = found, p. 1. +Fele = feel, p. 32. +Felles = lowers, p. 22. +Finnes = fineness, p. 2. +Fontan = fountain, p. 11. +Foran = foreign, p. 20. +Frelie = freely, p. 34. + +Geve = give, pp. 7, 8, 9, 12, 28, 29. +Gif = if, p. 21. +Glim = glimpse, p. 2. +Gud = good, pp. 2, 18, 21, 28, 29. + +Hael = hail, p. 10. +Hald = hold, p. 14; + haldes, p. 29. +Hame = home, p. 2. +Hard = heard, pp. 2, 3, 13, 14, 22, 32. +Hart = heart, p. 33. +Heal = whole, p. 10. +Heer = hear, p. 33. +Here = hear, pp. 31, 32. +Hes = has, pp. 3, 14, 15, 19, 22, 32. +Hes = hast, p. 32. +Hes = have, pp. 20, 22. +Hoat = hot, pp. 18, 30, 33; + hoater, p. 30. +Hoores = hours, p. 31. + +Ida, Scotland or Edinburgh, p. 2. +Incurre, _v._ = to run into. Lat. _incurro_, pp. 20, 33. + +Ken = know, p. 21. +Kep, _v._ = to intercept, p. 14. +Kepping = receiving in the act of falling, p. 12. _Jamieson._ +Knau = know, p. 2. +Knaulege = knowledge, pp. 3, 10; + knawlege, pp. 11, 21. +Knaw = know, pp. 7, 30; + knawe, p. 21; + knawen = known, p. 29. + +Laggared = loitered or rested, p. 2. +Lang = long, pp. 9, 14. +Leave = live, p. 32. +Leve = live, pp. 32, 34. +Leving = living, p. 11. +Louse = loose, p. 9. +Lykwayes = likewise, p. 19. + +Maer = more, pp. 2, 10. +Maest = most, pp. 1, 2, 16. +Man = must, p. 8. +Mare = more, p. 30. +Mast = most, pp. 30, 32. +Meer = mare, p. 28. +Middes = middle, p. 16. +Mikle = much, pp. 13, 18, 19, 20. +Mint = aim, pressure, p. 18. +Minted = attempted, p. 15. +Moat, probably _moot_, discussion, chat, etc., p. 2. A.S. _mt_. +Moe = more, pp. 16, 19, 21, 27. +Moien = means for attaining an end, p. 2. _Jamieson._ Fr. _moyen_. +Mont = mount, p. 24. +Montan = mountain, pp. 3, 11, 28. +Mynt = aim, pp. 12, 17. + +Nae = no, pp. 1, 8. +Nane = none, p. 13. +Noat, _v._ = note, pp. 19, 22, 27, 28, 29, 30, 31, 33. +Noat = note, pp. 7, 13, 28, 29; + noate, p. 28; + noates = notes, p. 29. +Nor = than, p. 3. +Nor, God nor, p. 31. + This most probably means God comfort or nourish us, connected with + _norice_, a nurse, and _norie_, a foster-child. There is also a + substantive _nore_ in Chaucer, meaning comfort. _Norne_ is to + entreat, ask (see _Alliterative Poems_ Glossary), and may have + something to do with this expression, but it is hardly so probable + as the above. +Noute = black cattle, p. 27; + connected with _neat_, as in neat-cattle, neat-herd. +Nulleth = negatives, p. 33. +Nurice = nurse, p. 19. + +Of = off, p. 23. +Ones, at ones = at once, p. 18. + +Paen = trouble, p. 2. +Paert = part, p. 10. +Peple = people, pp. 20, 29. +Phason = pheasant (?), p. 13. +Pover = poor, p. 3. +Punct = stop, p. 34. + +Qu. + At p. 18 the author gives his reasons for making use of the guttural + _qu_ in the place of the labial _w_. The following are the words in + which it is thus used:-- +Quha = who, pp. 2, 3, 34. +Quhae = who, pp. 1, 10; + quhae's = whose, p. 2. +Quhaer = where, p. 2. +Quhar = where, p. 29. +Quharein = wherein, p. 14. +Quharof = whereof, p. 16. +Quhat = what, pp. 2, 8, 15, 17, 18, 28. +Quhatever = whatever, p. 19. +Quhen = when, pp. 2, 9, 11, 23, 31. +Quhence = whence, pp. 29, 32. +Quher = where, pp. 2, 14, 20, 32. +Quheras = whereas, p. 14. +Quherat = whereat, p. 18. +Quherbe = whereby, pp. 11, 34. +Quherfoer, quherforr = wherefore, pp. 7, 8, 10, 15. +Quherin = wherein, pp. 20, 22. +Quherof = whereof, pp. 29, 34. +Quheron = whereon, p. 22. +Quherupon = whereupon, pp. 8, 27. +Quherwith = wherewith, p. 2. +Quhil, quhiles = while, p. 2. +Quhilk = which. +Quhither = whether, pp. 11, 17, 18, 20, 32. +Quho = who, pp. 12, 14, 15, 18, 22. +Quhom = whom. +Quhy = why, pp. 20, 21, 29. +Quhyte = white, p. 30; + quhiter, p. 30; + quhytest, p. 30. +Quod = quoth, p. 18. + +Rease = rose, p. 18. +Red = read, p. 34. +Regne = reign, p. 20. +Retine = retain, p. 20. +Ryseth = ariseth, p. 9. + +Sa = so, p. 21; + sae = so, p. 17. +Sal = shall, pp. 9, 11, 23, 34. +Sall = shall, pp. 8, 22. +Shaued = showed, p. 7. +Shour = shower, p. 10. +Sib = related, p. 21. +Sik = such, pp. 1, 2, 8, 9, 11, 17, 29. +Sillie = wretched, poor, p. 2. +Skuiographie, + probably an invented word, the intention of the author being to + oppose skew or askew to +orthos+, straight. It has been suggested + that it may be intended for sciagraphy, +skiagraphia+, also spelt + sciography; but this is improbable, as the meaning of that word, + viz., the art of shadows, including dialling, is so inappropriate + in this passage, p. 2. +Sould = should, pp. 7, 8, 11, 12, 13, 17, 18, 19, 22, 28, 29. +Spering = inquiring, p. 18. +Spil = destroy, spoil(?), p. 13; + spill, p. 22. +Spilt = corrupted, spoilt(?), p. 2. +Stack = stuck, p. 2. +Stean = stone, p. 8. +Stiddie = anvil, pp. 12, 17. + "And my imaginations are as foul + As Vulcan's stithy." + _Hamlet_, Act iii., sc. 2. + +Strang = strong, p. 14. +Sum = some, pp. 8, 9, 10, 21, 34. +Supposit = subject, pp. 30, 31. +Syllab = syllable, pp. 14, 15, 16, 18, 21, 22; + syllabes, p. 8. + Ben Jonson spells this word _syllabe_ in his English Grammar. +Syne = since, p. 1. + +Tal = tale, p. 9. +Tal = tail, p. 9. +Tale = tall, p. 28. +Trow = believe, pp. 13, 18. +Tuae = two, pp. 1, 8, 9, 10, 22, 23. +Tuelfe = twelve, p. 3. +Tuich = touch, pp. 7, 13, 15, 17; + tuiches, p. 11. +Tuiched = touched, pp. 3, 17. +Tuich stone = touchstone, p. 19. +Tyme passing befoer = imperfect tense, pp. 31, 32. +Tyme past befoer = pluperfect tense, pp. 31, 32. +Tyme past els = perfect tense, pp. 31, 32. + +Vadimonie = recognisance, p. 22. Lat. _Vadimonium._ +Voce = voice, p. 20. + +Waet = know, p. 14. +Wait = know, p. 11. +Wald = would, pp. 1, 2, 9, 10, 13, 14, 16, 20, 21, 30, 31. +Warkes = works, p. 29. +Weer = war, p. 3. +Were = war, p. 20. +Whither = whether, p. 2. + The author in this place uses the letter _w_ instead of _qu_, + although at p. 18 he is so strenuous against its use. +Wrang = wrong, pp. 2, 9, 11. + +Ye = yea, p. 14. +Yeld = yield, p. 21. + + + + +Early English Text Society. + +_Report of the Committee, January, 1865._ + + +The close of the first year of the Society's operations affords the +Committee the welcome opportunity of congratulating the members on the +Society's success. Instead of two Texts, which the first Circular to the +Society suggested might perhaps be issued, the Committee have been +enabled to publish four, and these four such as will bear comparison, as +to rareness and intrinsic value, with the publications of any of the +longest established societies of the kingdom. The _Arthur_ was edited +for the first time from a unique MS., wholly unknown to even the latest +writers on the subject, and exhibits our national hero's life in a +simpler form than even Geoffrey of Monmouth, or Layamon. The _Early +English Alliterative Poems_, though noticed long ago by Dr. Guest and +Sir F. Madden, for their great philological and poetical value, had been +inaccessible to all but students of the difficult and faded MS. in the +British Museum: they have been now made public by the Society's edition, +with their large additions to our vocabulary, and their interesting +dialectal formations. The _Sir Gawayne_, from the same MS., could only +have been had before in Sir Frederick Madden's rare and costly edition, +printed by the Bannatyne Club. And the _Lauder_ has restored, as it +were, to Scotland, a Poet whose name had found no place in the standard +History of Scottish Poetry, and the Biographical Dictionaries. + +Though the Society started late in the past year, these four Texts were +published within a fortnight of its close; and before that time the +first Text for the second year was in the printer's hands. The Committee +pledge themselves to continue their exertions to render the Texts issued +worthy of the Society, and to complete the issue of each set within the +year assigned to it. They rely with confidence on the Subscribers to use +their best endeavours to increase the list of Members, in order that +funds may not be wanting to print the material that editors place at +their service. The aim of the Committee is, on the one hand, to print +all that is most valuable of the yet unprinted MSS. in English, and, on +the other, to re-edit and reprint all that is most valuable in printed +English books, which from their scarcity or price are not within the +reach of the student of moderate means.[6] Those relating to KING ARTHUR +will be the Committee's first care; those relating to our Language and +its Dialects the second; while in due proportion with these, will be +mixed others of general interest, though with no one special common +design. The Committee hope that no year will pass without the issue of +one Text in the Northern dialect, as well in acknowledgment of the +support that the Society has received in Scotland, as to obviate the +hitherto limited circulation of the works of the early Scotch writers +among students south of the Humber. + + [Footnote 6: "A vast mass of our early literature is still + unprinted, and much that has been printed has, as the late Herbert + Coleridge remarked, 'been brought out by Printing Clubs of + exclusive constitution, or for private circulation only, and + might, for all that the public in general is the better for them, + just as well have remained in manuscript, being, of course, + utterly unprocurable, except in great libraries, and not always + there.' It is well known that the Hon. G. P. Marsh, the author of + 'The Origin and History of the English Language,' could not + procure for use in his work a copy of 'Havelok' for love or money; + and the usual catalogue-price of 'William and the Werwolf,' or + 'The Early English Gesta Romanorum,' etc., etc., is six guineas, + when the book should be obtainable for less than a pound. + Notwithstanding the efforts of the Percy, Camden, and other + Societies and Printing Clubs, more than half our early printed + literature--including the Romances relating to our national hero, + Arthur--is still inaccessible to the student of moderate means; + and it is a scandal that this state of things should be allowed to + continue.... Those who would raise any objection to these + re-editions--as a few have raised them--are asked to consider the + absurdity and injustice of debarring a large number of readers + from the enjoyment of an old author, because a living editor has + once printed his works, when the feeling of the editor himself is + well expressed in the words of one of the class, 'You are heartily + welcome to all I have ever done. I should rejoice to see my books + in the hands of a hundred, where they are now on the shelves of + one.'"--_Extract from the first Prospectus._] + +The publications for 1864 are:-- + +1. Early English Alliterative Poems in the West Midland Dialect of the + fourteenth century (ab. 1320-30 A.D.). Edited for the first time + from a unique MS. in the British Museum, with Notes and Glossarial + Index, by Richard Morris, Esq. 16_s._ + +2. Arthur. Edited for the first time from the Marquis of Bath's MS. + (ab. 1440 A.D.), by F. J. Furnivall, Esq., M.A. 4_s._ + +3. Ane compendious and breve Tractate, concernyng ye office and dewtie + of Kyngis, Spirituall Pastoris, and temporall Jugis; laitlie + compylit be William Lauder. Reprinted from the edition of 1556, and + edited by Prof. Fitz-Edward Hall, D.C.L. 4_s._ + +4. Sir Gawayne and the Green Knight. Edited by R. Morris, Esq., from the + Cottonian MS., Nero, A x. (ab. 1320-30 A.D.) 10_s._ + +The publications for the present year (1865) will comprise Texts from at +least four unique MSS., two of which will be edited for the first time. + +5. Of the Orthographie and Congruitie of the Britan Tongue, a treates + noe shorter then necessarie, be Alexander Hume. Edited for the first + time from the MS. in the British Museum (ab. 1617 A.D.), by Henry B. + Wheatley, Esq. 4_s._ + +6. Syr Lancelot du Lak. Edited from the MS. in the Cambridge University + Library (15th century), by the Rev. Walter W. Skeat, M.A. + [_In the Press._ + +7. Morte Arthure: the Alliterative Version. Edited from Robert + Thorntone's MS. (ab. 1440 A.D.) at Lincoln, by the Rev. F. C. + Massingberd, M.A. + +8. Various Poems relating to Sir Gawayne. Edited from the MSS. by + Richard Morris, Esq. + +9. Merlin, or the Early History of Arthur. Edited for the first time + from the MS. in the Cambridge University Library (ab. 1450 A.D.), by + F. J. Furnivall, Esq. Part I. + +Also, the following, if the amount of subscriptions will justify the +Committee in issuing them:-- + +Animadversions uppon the Annotacions and Corrections of some + imperfections of Impressiones of Chaucer's Workes reprinted in 1598, + by Francis Thynne. Edited from the MS. in the Bridgewater Library, + by Henry B. Wheatley, Esq. + +The Story of Genesis and Exodus in English verse of about 1300 A.D. To + be edited for the first time from the unique MS. in the Library of + Corpus Christi Coll., Cambridge, by F. J. Furnivall and R. Morris, + Esqrs. + +The Harrowing of Hell. To be edited from the MS. in the Bodleian + Library, by R. F. Weymouth, Esq. + + +The following is a list of Texts, which it is proposed to print (among +others) in future years:-- + +The Romance of Arthour and Merlin. To be edited from the Auchinleck MS. + (ab. 1320-30 A.D.) + +Mirk's Duties of a Parish Priest. To be edited for the first time from + the MSS. in the British Museum and Bodleian Libraries (ab. 1420 + A.D.), by E. Peacock, Esq. + +The Romance of William and the Werwolf. To be edited from the unique MS. + in the Library of King's Coll., Cambridge. + +The Gospel of Nicodemus in the Northumbrian Dialect. To be edited for + the first time from Harl. MS. 4196, &c., Cotton-Galba E ix., by R. + Morris, Esq. + +The Romance of Melusine. To be edited for the first time from the unique + MS. in the Library of Trinity College, Cambridge. + +Syr Thomas Maleor's Mort d'Arthur. To be edited from Caxton's edition + (1485 A.D.) with a new Preface, Notes, and a Glossary. + +The Arthur Ballads. + +The Romance of Sir Tristrem. To be edited from the Auchinleck MS. + +The English Charlemagne Romances. To be edited from the Auchinleck MS. + +The Early English Version of the Gesta Romanorum. To be edited from the + MSS. in the British Museum and other Libraries. + +The two different Versions of Piers Plowman, in parallel columns. + +Gawain Douglas's neis. To be edited from the Cambridge MS. by Professor + Fitz-Edward Hall, D.C.L. + +The Romance of Kyng Horn. To be edited from the MS. in the Library of + the University of Cambridge. + +Roberd of Brunne's Handlyng Synne, a treatise on the sins, and sketches + of the manners, of English men and women in A.D. 1303. To be + re-edited from the MSS. in the British Museum and Bodleian Libraries + by F. J. Furnivall, Esq., M.A. + +Cursor Mundi, the best dialectal version. To be edited from the MS. by + Richard Morris, Esq. + +The History of the Saint Graal or Sank Ryal. By Henry Lonelich, Skynner + (ab. 1440 A.D.). To be re-edited from the unique MS. in the Library + of Corpus Christi Coll., Cambridge, by F. J. Furnivall, Esq., M.A. + +Dan Michel's Ayenbite of Inwyt, the most valuable specimen of the + Kentish dialect, 1340 A.D. To be edited from the MS. in the British + Museum by Richard Morris, Esq. + +Froissart's Chronicles translated out of Frenche into our maternall + Englyshe Tonge, by Johan Bourchier Knight, Lord Berners. To be + edited by Henry B. Wheatley, Esq. + +Skelton's Translation of Diodorus Siculus, oute of freshe Latin, that is + of Poggius Florentinus, containing six books. To be edited for the + first time from the unique MS. in the Library of Corpus Christi + Coll., Cambridge. + +Sir David Lyndesay's Monarche. Edited by Prof. Fitz-Edward Hall, D.C.L., + from the first edition by Jhone Skott. + +Some of the earliest English Dictionaries, as-- + Abecedarium Anglico-latinum, by Richard Huloet (1552); and Baret's + Alvearie or Quadruple Dictionarie, to be edited from the editions of + 1573 and 1580 by Henry B. Wheatley, Esq. + + + + +The Subscription is 1 1_s._ a year, due in advance on the 1st of +January, and should be paid either to the Society's Account at the Union +Bank of London, 14, Argyll Place, W., or by Post Office Order to the +Hon. Secretary, 53, Berners Street, London, W.; to whom Subscribers' +names and addresses should be sent. + +The Committee wish to draw the attention of the Subscribers to the fact +that the Society's Account has been transferred from the London and +Birmingham Bank to the Regent Street Branch of the Union Bank of London. + +The Committee invite offers of voluntary assistance from those who may +be willing to edit or copy Texts, or to lend them books for reprinting +or for re-reading with the original MSS. + +The Honorary Secretary's Cash Account is annexed. + + +_Abstract of the Income and Expenditure of the_ EARLY ENGLISH TEXT +SOCIETY _for the Year ending December 31st, 1864._ + +RECEIPTS. + +1864. _s._ _d._ +One hundred Subscriptions, at 1_l._ 1_s._ 105 0 0 +Forty-five ditto (through Agents), at 1_l._ 45 0 0 +1865. +Two Subscriptions, at 1_l._ 1_s._ 2 2 0 + + + 152 2 0 + ============= + +PAYMENTS. + +1864. _s._ _d._ +Printing Account (Austin)-- + Alliterative Poems 62 7 6 + Arthur 8 14 0 + Lauder's Tractate 15 14 0 + Sir Gawayne 35 16 0 + 3,500 Prospectuses 5 5 0 + Packing, Postage, &c., of + Alliterative Poems and Arthur 1 16 6 + ------------- + 129 13 0 + Less Discount 6 9 0 + ------------- + 123 4 0 +Petty Expenses-- + Purchase of Books for Re-editing 5 18 0 + Stationery, &c. 0 18 6 + Postages (Circulars, &c.) 4 4 6 + Deduction on Country Cheque 0 0 7 + Balance in the hands of the Hon. Secretary 0 13 0 + Balance at the Bankers 17 3 5 + ------------- + 152 2 0 + ============= + +We have examined this Account with the Books and Vouchers, and certify +that it is correct. + +Wm. CUNNINGHAM GLEN, +REGINALD HANSON, B.A., Auditors. + + + + +LIST OF SUBSCRIBERS. + + +COMMITTEE OF MANAGEMENT: + +DANBY P. FRY, ESQ. +FREDERICK J. FURNIVALL, ESQ. +Professor FITZ-EDWARD HALL. +RICHARD MORRIS, ESQ. +H. T. PARKER, ESQ. + +(_With power to add Workers to their number._) + + +HONORARY SECRETARY: + +HENRY B. WHEATLEY, ESQ., 53, Berners Street, London. W. + + +BANKERS: + +THE UNION BANK OF LONDON, REGENT STREET BRANCH, +14, Argyll Place, W. + + +THE ROYAL LIBRARY, Windsor Castle. + +ADAMS, Dr. Ernest, Victoria Park, Manchester. +ALEXANDER, George Russell, Esq., Glasgow. +ALEXANDER, John, Esq., 43, Campbell Street, Glasgow. +AMHURST, Wm. A. Tyssen, Esq., Didlington Park, Brandon, Norfolk. +ASHER & CO., Messrs., 13, Bedford Street, Covent Garden. W.C. (10 sets.) +ATKINSON, Rev. J. C., Danby Parsonage, Grosmont, York. +AUFRECHT, Professor, 12, Cumin Place, Grange, Edinburgh. +AUSTIN, Stephen, Hertford. + +BACKHOUSE, John G., Esq., Blackwell, Darlington. +BAIN, J., Esq., Haymarket. +BAKER, Charles, Esq., 11, Sackville Street, W. +BEARD, James, Esq., The Grange, Burnage Lane, near Manchester +BLACKMAN, Frederick, Esq., 4, York Road. S. +BLADON, James, Esq., Albion House, Pont y Pool. +BOHN, Henry G., Esq., York Street, Covent Garden, W.C. +BOSWORTH, Rev. Professor, D.D., 20, Beaumont Street, Oxford. +BRADSHAW, Henry, Esq., King's College, Cambridge. +BUXTON, Charles, Esq., M.P., 7, Grosvenor Crescent, S.W. + +CHAPPELL, William, Esq., 30, Upper Harley Street. W. +CHEETHAM, Rev. S., King's College, London. W.C. +CLARK, Rev. Samuel, The Vicarage, Bredwardine, Hereford. +CLARK, E. C., Esq., Trinity College, Cambridge. +COHEN, A., Esq., 6, King's Bench Walk, Temple, E.C. +COLERIDGE, Miss Edith, Hanwell Rectory, Middlesex. +COLERIDGE, J. Duke, Esq., Q.C., 1, Brick Court, Temple, E.C. +COSENS, Frederick, Esq., Larkbere Lodge, Clapham Park. +COWPER, J. Meadows, Esq., Davington, Faversham. +CRAIK, Professor George L., 2, Chlorina Place, Belfast. +CRAIK, George L., Esq., Glasgow. + +DAVIES, Rev. John, Walsoken Rectory, near Wisbeach. +DE LA RUE, Warren, Esq., Bunhill Row. +DE LA RUE, Wm. Frederick, Esq., 110, Bunhill Road, E.C. +DICKINSON, F. H., Esq., Kingweston House, Somerton, Somerset. +DODDS, Rev. James, St. Stephen's, Glasgow. +DONALDSON, David, Esq., Free Normal Seminary, Glasgow. +D'ORSEY, Rev. A. J., B.D., 8, Lancaster Terrace, Regent's Park. N.W. +DOWDEN, Edward, Esq., 8, Montenotte, Cork. +DUBLIN, Right Rev. Richard C. Trench, Archbishop of, Dublin. +DYKES, Rev. J. Oswald, Free St. George's Church, Edinburgh. + +EARLE, Rev. J., Swanswick Rectory, Bath. +EDINBURGH UNIVERSITY LIBRARY. +EISDELL, Miss S. L., Colchester. +EUING, William, Esq., 209, West George Street, Glasgow. + +FIELD, Hamilton, Esq., New Park Road, Brixton Hill. +FREETHY, Mr. Frederick, Working Men's College, London. +FRY, Danby P., Esq., Poor Law Board, Whitehall. +FRY, Frederick, Esq., Wellington Street, Islington. +FURNIVALL, F. J., Esq., 3, Old Square, Lincoln's Inn., W.C. + +GEE, William, Esq., High Street, Boston. +GIBBS, Captain Charles, 2nd Regiment, Devonport. +GIBBS, H. H., Esq., St. Dunstan's, Regent's Park. +GLEN, W. Cunningham, Esq., Poor Law Board, Whitehall. +GOLDSTCKER, Professor, 14, St. George's Square. N.W. +GORDON, Rev. Robert, 14, Northumberland St., Edinburgh. +GUILD, J. Uylie, Esq., Glasgow. + +HALES, J. W., Esq., Christ's College, Cambridge. +HALKETT, Samuel, Esq., Advocates' Library, Edinburgh. +HALL, Professor Fitz-Edward, D.C.L., 18, Provost Road, Haverstock + Hill. N.W. +HAMLEN, Charles, Esq., 27, Virginia Street, Glasgow. +HANSON, Reginald, Esq., 43, Upper Harley Street. W. +HEATH, N., Esq., Rector, The Academy, Alloa. +HODGSON, Shadworth H., Esq., 45, Conduit Street, Regent's Street. W. +HOOPER, Rev. Richard, Aston Upthorpe. +HORWOOD, Alfred S., Esq., New Court, Middle Temple. E.C. +HOWARD, Hon. Richard E., D.C.L., Stamp Office, Manchester. + +INDIA OFFICE LIBRARY, Cannon Row. + +JACKSON, E. Steane, Esq., Walthamstow House, Essex. +JOHNSON, W., Esq., Eton College, Windsor. +JONES, C. W., Esq., Gateacre, near Liverpool. +JONES, E. B., Esq., 62, Great Russell Street, Bloomsbury. +JONES, Thomas, Esq., Chetham Library, Manchester. + +KING, W. Warwick, Esq., 29, Queen Street, Cannon Street West. E.C. + +LAING, David, Esq., Signet Library, Edinburgh. +LAMONT, Colin D., Esq., Union Bank of Scotland, Greenock. +LECKIE, Thomas, Esq., M.D., 60, Cambridge Terrace, Hyde Park. W. +LEIGH, John, Esq., 26, St. John's Street, Manchester. +LODGE, Rev. Barton, Colchester. +LONDON LIBRARY, St. James's Square. S.W. +LUARD, Rev. Henry Richard, 4, St. Peter's Terrace, Cambridge. +LUSHINGTON, E. L., Esq., Park House, Maidstone. + +MACDONALD, George, Esq., 12, Earles Terrace, Kensington. W. +MACDOUALL, Professor Charles, LL.D., Queen's College, Belfast. +MACKENZIE, John Whitefoord, Esq., 16, Royal Circus, Edinburgh. +MACMILLAN, A., Esq., Bedford Street, Covent Garden. W.C. +MADDEN, Sir Frederick, K. H., British Museum. W.C. +MANCHESTER, The Duke of. +MELBOURNE PUBLIC LIBRARY, Victoria. +MORRIS, Richard, Esq., Christ Church School, St. George's East. E. +MUIR, John, Esq., 16, Regent's Terrace, Edinburgh. +MULLER, Professor Max, 64, High Street, Oxford. +MURDOCH, James Barclay, Esq., 33, Lyndoch Street, Glasgow. + +NAPIER, George W., Esq., Alderley Edge, near Manchester. +NASH, D. M., Esq., 21, Bentinck Street, Manchester Square. W. +NEAVES, Lord, 7, Charlotte Square, Edinburgh. +NICHOL, Professor, University, Glasgow. +NICHOLS, John Gough, Esq., 25, Parliament Street, Westminster. +NORRIS, Edwin, Esq., 6, Michael's Grove, Brompton. S.W. + +OGLE, Messrs. Maurice & Co., Glasgow. +OWEN'S COLLEGE LIBRARY, Manchester. + +PAINE, Cornelius, Jun., Esq., Surbiton Hill, Surrey. +PANTON, Rev. George A., Crown Circus, Dowanhill, Glasgow. (2 sets.) +PARKER, H. T., Esq., 3, Ladbroke Gardens. W. (10 sets). +PEILE, John, Esq., Christ's College, Cambridge. +PERCEVAL, Charles Spencer, Esq., 64, Eccleston Square. S.W. +PRIAULX, Osw. De Beauvoir, Esq., 8, Cavendish Square. W. + +RAINE, Rev. James, York. +REGENT'S PARK COLLEGE. N.W. +REILLY, Francis S., Esq., 22, Old Buildings, Lincoln's Inn. W.C. +RICHARDSON, Sir John, Lancrigg, Grasmere. +ROSSETTI, Wm., Esq., 160, Albany Street. N.W. +RUSKIN, John, Esq., Denmark Hill, Camberwell (10 sets). + +ST. DAVID'S, Right Rev. Connop Thirlwall, Bishop of, Abergwili Palace, + Carmarthen. +SION COLLEGE, President and Fellows of, London Wall. +SKEAT, Rev. Walter W., Christ's College, Cambridge. +SLATTER, Rev. John, Streatley Vicarage, Reading. +SMITH, Charles, Esq., Faversham. +SMITH, J. Guthrie, Esq., Glasgow. +SPRANGE, A. D., Esq., 12, Princes Street, Bayswater. W. +STEPHENS, Professor George, University of Copenhagen, Denmark. +STEVENSON, Rev. Prof., D.D., 37, Royal Terrace, Edinburgh. +STEWART, Alexander B., Esq., Glasgow. +STRATHEARN, Sheriff, County Buildings, Glasgow. + +TENNYSON, Alfred, Esq., D.C.L., Faringford, Isle of Wight. +TRBNER, Nicholas, Esq., 60, Paternoster Row (19 sets). +TUCKER, Stephen, Esq., 11, St. Petersburgh Place. W. +TYSSEN, John R. D., Esq., Didlington Park, Brandon, Norfolk. + +WARD, Harry, Esq., British Museum. W.C. +WATTS, Thomas, Esq., British Museum. W.C. +WEDGWOOD, Hensleigh, Esq., 1, Cumberland Place, Regent's Park. +WEYMOUTH, R. F., Esq., Portland Grammar School, Plymouth. +WHEATLEY, Henry B., Esq., 53, Berners Street. W.--_Hon. Sec._ +WILLIAMS, Sydney, Esq., 14, Henrietta Street, Covent Garden, W.C. + (2 sets.) +WILLIAMSON, Stephen, Esq., 13, Virginia Street, Glasgow. +WILSON, Edward J., Esq., 6, Whitefriars Gate, Hull. +WRIGHT, W. Aldis, Esq., Trinity College, Cambridge. + +YOUNG, Alexander, Esq., 38, Elm Bank Crescent, Glasgow. + + + + +STEPHEN AUSTIN, Printer, Hertford. + + + + + +End of the Project Gutenberg EBook of Of the Orthographie and Congruitie of +the Britan Tongue, by Alexander Hume + +*** END OF THIS PROJECT GUTENBERG EBOOK ORTHOGRAPHIE OF THE BRITAN TONGUE *** + +***** This file should be named 17000-8.txt or 17000-8.zip ***** +This and all associated files of various formats will be found in: + https://www.gutenberg.org/1/7/0/0/17000/ + +Produced by Louise Hope, David Starner and the Online +Distributed Proofreading Team at https://www.pgdp.net + + +Updated editions will replace the previous one--the old editions +will be renamed. + +Creating the works from public domain print editions means that no +one owns a United States copyright in these works, so the Foundation +(and you!) can copy and distribute it in the United States without +permission and without paying copyright royalties. Special rules, +set forth in the General Terms of Use part of this license, apply to +copying and distributing Project Gutenberg-tm electronic works to +protect the PROJECT GUTENBERG-tm concept and trademark. Project +Gutenberg is a registered trademark, and may not be used if you +charge for the eBooks, unless you receive specific permission. If you +do not charge anything for copies of this eBook, complying with the +rules is very easy. You may use this eBook for nearly any purpose +such as creation of derivative works, reports, performances and +research. They may be modified and printed and given away--you may do +practically ANYTHING with public domain eBooks. Redistribution is +subject to the trademark license, especially commercial +redistribution. + + + +*** START: FULL LICENSE *** + +THE FULL PROJECT GUTENBERG LICENSE +PLEASE READ THIS BEFORE YOU DISTRIBUTE OR USE THIS WORK + +To protect the Project Gutenberg-tm mission of promoting the free +distribution of electronic works, by using or distributing this work +(or any other work associated in any way with the phrase "Project +Gutenberg"), you agree to comply with all the terms of the Full Project +Gutenberg-tm License (available with this file or online at +https://gutenberg.org/license). + + +Section 1. General Terms of Use and Redistributing Project Gutenberg-tm +electronic works + +1.A. By reading or using any part of this Project Gutenberg-tm +electronic work, you indicate that you have read, understand, agree to +and accept all the terms of this license and intellectual property +(trademark/copyright) agreement. If you do not agree to abide by all +the terms of this agreement, you must cease using and return or destroy +all copies of Project Gutenberg-tm electronic works in your possession. +If you paid a fee for obtaining a copy of or access to a Project +Gutenberg-tm electronic work and you do not agree to be bound by the +terms of this agreement, you may obtain a refund from the person or +entity to whom you paid the fee as set forth in paragraph 1.E.8. + +1.B. "Project Gutenberg" is a registered trademark. It may only be +used on or associated in any way with an electronic work by people who +agree to be bound by the terms of this agreement. There are a few +things that you can do with most Project Gutenberg-tm electronic works +even without complying with the full terms of this agreement. See +paragraph 1.C below. There are a lot of things you can do with Project +Gutenberg-tm electronic works if you follow the terms of this agreement +and help preserve free future access to Project Gutenberg-tm electronic +works. See paragraph 1.E below. + +1.C. The Project Gutenberg Literary Archive Foundation ("the Foundation" +or PGLAF), owns a compilation copyright in the collection of Project +Gutenberg-tm electronic works. Nearly all the individual works in the +collection are in the public domain in the United States. If an +individual work is in the public domain in the United States and you are +located in the United States, we do not claim a right to prevent you from +copying, distributing, performing, displaying or creating derivative +works based on the work as long as all references to Project Gutenberg +are removed. Of course, we hope that you will support the Project +Gutenberg-tm mission of promoting free access to electronic works by +freely sharing Project Gutenberg-tm works in compliance with the terms of +this agreement for keeping the Project Gutenberg-tm name associated with +the work. You can easily comply with the terms of this agreement by +keeping this work in the same format with its attached full Project +Gutenberg-tm License when you share it without charge with others. + +1.D. The copyright laws of the place where you are located also govern +what you can do with this work. Copyright laws in most countries are in +a constant state of change. If you are outside the United States, check +the laws of your country in addition to the terms of this agreement +before downloading, copying, displaying, performing, distributing or +creating derivative works based on this work or any other Project +Gutenberg-tm work. The Foundation makes no representations concerning +the copyright status of any work in any country outside the United +States. + +1.E. Unless you have removed all references to Project Gutenberg: + +1.E.1. The following sentence, with active links to, or other immediate +access to, the full Project Gutenberg-tm License must appear prominently +whenever any copy of a Project Gutenberg-tm work (any work on which the +phrase "Project Gutenberg" appears, or with which the phrase "Project +Gutenberg" is associated) is accessed, displayed, performed, viewed, +copied or distributed: + +This eBook is for the use of anyone anywhere at no cost and with +almost no restrictions whatsoever. You may copy it, give it away or +re-use it under the terms of the Project Gutenberg License included +with this eBook or online at www.gutenberg.org + +1.E.2. If an individual Project Gutenberg-tm electronic work is derived +from the public domain (does not contain a notice indicating that it is +posted with permission of the copyright holder), the work can be copied +and distributed to anyone in the United States without paying any fees +or charges. If you are redistributing or providing access to a work +with the phrase "Project Gutenberg" associated with or appearing on the +work, you must comply either with the requirements of paragraphs 1.E.1 +through 1.E.7 or obtain permission for the use of the work and the +Project Gutenberg-tm trademark as set forth in paragraphs 1.E.8 or +1.E.9. + +1.E.3. If an individual Project Gutenberg-tm electronic work is posted +with the permission of the copyright holder, your use and distribution +must comply with both paragraphs 1.E.1 through 1.E.7 and any additional +terms imposed by the copyright holder. Additional terms will be linked +to the Project Gutenberg-tm License for all works posted with the +permission of the copyright holder found at the beginning of this work. + +1.E.4. Do not unlink or detach or remove the full Project Gutenberg-tm +License terms from this work, or any files containing a part of this +work or any other work associated with Project Gutenberg-tm. + +1.E.5. Do not copy, display, perform, distribute or redistribute this +electronic work, or any part of this electronic work, without +prominently displaying the sentence set forth in paragraph 1.E.1 with +active links or immediate access to the full terms of the Project +Gutenberg-tm License. + +1.E.6. You may convert to and distribute this work in any binary, +compressed, marked up, nonproprietary or proprietary form, including any +word processing or hypertext form. However, if you provide access to or +distribute copies of a Project Gutenberg-tm work in a format other than +"Plain Vanilla ASCII" or other format used in the official version +posted on the official Project Gutenberg-tm web site (www.gutenberg.org), +you must, at no additional cost, fee or expense to the user, provide a +copy, a means of exporting a copy, or a means of obtaining a copy upon +request, of the work in its original "Plain Vanilla ASCII" or other +form. Any alternate format must include the full Project Gutenberg-tm +License as specified in paragraph 1.E.1. + +1.E.7. Do not charge a fee for access to, viewing, displaying, +performing, copying or distributing any Project Gutenberg-tm works +unless you comply with paragraph 1.E.8 or 1.E.9. + +1.E.8. You may charge a reasonable fee for copies of or providing +access to or distributing Project Gutenberg-tm electronic works provided +that + +- You pay a royalty fee of 20% of the gross profits you derive from + the use of Project Gutenberg-tm works calculated using the method + you already use to calculate your applicable taxes. The fee is + owed to the owner of the Project Gutenberg-tm trademark, but he + has agreed to donate royalties under this paragraph to the + Project Gutenberg Literary Archive Foundation. Royalty payments + must be paid within 60 days following each date on which you + prepare (or are legally required to prepare) your periodic tax + returns. Royalty payments should be clearly marked as such and + sent to the Project Gutenberg Literary Archive Foundation at the + address specified in Section 4, "Information about donations to + the Project Gutenberg Literary Archive Foundation." + +- You provide a full refund of any money paid by a user who notifies + you in writing (or by e-mail) within 30 days of receipt that s/he + does not agree to the terms of the full Project Gutenberg-tm + License. You must require such a user to return or + destroy all copies of the works possessed in a physical medium + and discontinue all use of and all access to other copies of + Project Gutenberg-tm works. + +- You provide, in accordance with paragraph 1.F.3, a full refund of any + money paid for a work or a replacement copy, if a defect in the + electronic work is discovered and reported to you within 90 days + of receipt of the work. + +- You comply with all other terms of this agreement for free + distribution of Project Gutenberg-tm works. + +1.E.9. If you wish to charge a fee or distribute a Project Gutenberg-tm +electronic work or group of works on different terms than are set +forth in this agreement, you must obtain permission in writing from +both the Project Gutenberg Literary Archive Foundation and Michael +Hart, the owner of the Project Gutenberg-tm trademark. Contact the +Foundation as set forth in Section 3 below. + +1.F. + +1.F.1. Project Gutenberg volunteers and employees expend considerable +effort to identify, do copyright research on, transcribe and proofread +public domain works in creating the Project Gutenberg-tm +collection. Despite these efforts, Project Gutenberg-tm electronic +works, and the medium on which they may be stored, may contain +"Defects," such as, but not limited to, incomplete, inaccurate or +corrupt data, transcription errors, a copyright or other intellectual +property infringement, a defective or damaged disk or other medium, a +computer virus, or computer codes that damage or cannot be read by +your equipment. + +1.F.2. LIMITED WARRANTY, DISCLAIMER OF DAMAGES - Except for the "Right +of Replacement or Refund" described in paragraph 1.F.3, the Project +Gutenberg Literary Archive Foundation, the owner of the Project +Gutenberg-tm trademark, and any other party distributing a Project +Gutenberg-tm electronic work under this agreement, disclaim all +liability to you for damages, costs and expenses, including legal +fees. YOU AGREE THAT YOU HAVE NO REMEDIES FOR NEGLIGENCE, STRICT +LIABILITY, BREACH OF WARRANTY OR BREACH OF CONTRACT EXCEPT THOSE +PROVIDED IN PARAGRAPH F3. YOU AGREE THAT THE FOUNDATION, THE +TRADEMARK OWNER, AND ANY DISTRIBUTOR UNDER THIS AGREEMENT WILL NOT BE +LIABLE TO YOU FOR ACTUAL, DIRECT, INDIRECT, CONSEQUENTIAL, PUNITIVE OR +INCIDENTAL DAMAGES EVEN IF YOU GIVE NOTICE OF THE POSSIBILITY OF SUCH +DAMAGE. + +1.F.3. LIMITED RIGHT OF REPLACEMENT OR REFUND - If you discover a +defect in this electronic work within 90 days of receiving it, you can +receive a refund of the money (if any) you paid for it by sending a +written explanation to the person you received the work from. If you +received the work on a physical medium, you must return the medium with +your written explanation. The person or entity that provided you with +the defective work may elect to provide a replacement copy in lieu of a +refund. If you received the work electronically, the person or entity +providing it to you may choose to give you a second opportunity to +receive the work electronically in lieu of a refund. If the second copy +is also defective, you may demand a refund in writing without further +opportunities to fix the problem. + +1.F.4. Except for the limited right of replacement or refund set forth +in paragraph 1.F.3, this work is provided to you 'AS-IS' WITH NO OTHER +WARRANTIES OF ANY KIND, EXPRESS OR IMPLIED, INCLUDING BUT NOT LIMITED TO +WARRANTIES OF MERCHANTIBILITY OR FITNESS FOR ANY PURPOSE. + +1.F.5. Some states do not allow disclaimers of certain implied +warranties or the exclusion or limitation of certain types of damages. +If any disclaimer or limitation set forth in this agreement violates the +law of the state applicable to this agreement, the agreement shall be +interpreted to make the maximum disclaimer or limitation permitted by +the applicable state law. The invalidity or unenforceability of any +provision of this agreement shall not void the remaining provisions. + +1.F.6. INDEMNITY - You agree to indemnify and hold the Foundation, the +trademark owner, any agent or employee of the Foundation, anyone +providing copies of Project Gutenberg-tm electronic works in accordance +with this agreement, and any volunteers associated with the production, +promotion and distribution of Project Gutenberg-tm electronic works, +harmless from all liability, costs and expenses, including legal fees, +that arise directly or indirectly from any of the following which you do +or cause to occur: (a) distribution of this or any Project Gutenberg-tm +work, (b) alteration, modification, or additions or deletions to any +Project Gutenberg-tm work, and (c) any Defect you cause. + + +Section 2. Information about the Mission of Project Gutenberg-tm + +Project Gutenberg-tm is synonymous with the free distribution of +electronic works in formats readable by the widest variety of computers +including obsolete, old, middle-aged and new computers. It exists +because of the efforts of hundreds of volunteers and donations from +people in all walks of life. + +Volunteers and financial support to provide volunteers with the +assistance they need, is critical to reaching Project Gutenberg-tm's +goals and ensuring that the Project Gutenberg-tm collection will +remain freely available for generations to come. In 2001, the Project +Gutenberg Literary Archive Foundation was created to provide a secure +and permanent future for Project Gutenberg-tm and future generations. +To learn more about the Project Gutenberg Literary Archive Foundation +and how your efforts and donations can help, see Sections 3 and 4 +and the Foundation web page at https://www.pglaf.org. + + +Section 3. Information about the Project Gutenberg Literary Archive +Foundation + +The Project Gutenberg Literary Archive Foundation is a non profit +501(c)(3) educational corporation organized under the laws of the +state of Mississippi and granted tax exempt status by the Internal +Revenue Service. The Foundation's EIN or federal tax identification +number is 64-6221541. Its 501(c)(3) letter is posted at +https://pglaf.org/fundraising. Contributions to the Project Gutenberg +Literary Archive Foundation are tax deductible to the full extent +permitted by U.S. federal laws and your state's laws. + +The Foundation's principal office is located at 4557 Melan Dr. S. +Fairbanks, AK, 99712., but its volunteers and employees are scattered +throughout numerous locations. Its business office is located at +809 North 1500 West, Salt Lake City, UT 84116, (801) 596-1887, email +business@pglaf.org. Email contact links and up to date contact +information can be found at the Foundation's web site and official +page at https://pglaf.org + +For additional contact information: + Dr. Gregory B. Newby + Chief Executive and Director + gbnewby@pglaf.org + + +Section 4. Information about Donations to the Project Gutenberg +Literary Archive Foundation + +Project Gutenberg-tm depends upon and cannot survive without wide +spread public support and donations to carry out its mission of +increasing the number of public domain and licensed works that can be +freely distributed in machine readable form accessible by the widest +array of equipment including outdated equipment. Many small donations +($1 to $5,000) are particularly important to maintaining tax exempt +status with the IRS. + +The Foundation is committed to complying with the laws regulating +charities and charitable donations in all 50 states of the United +States. Compliance requirements are not uniform and it takes a +considerable effort, much paperwork and many fees to meet and keep up +with these requirements. We do not solicit donations in locations +where we have not received written confirmation of compliance. To +SEND DONATIONS or determine the status of compliance for any +particular state visit https://pglaf.org + +While we cannot and do not solicit contributions from states where we +have not met the solicitation requirements, we know of no prohibition +against accepting unsolicited donations from donors in such states who +approach us with offers to donate. + +International donations are gratefully accepted, but we cannot make +any statements concerning tax treatment of donations received from +outside the United States. U.S. laws alone swamp our small staff. + +Please check the Project Gutenberg Web pages for current donation +methods and addresses. Donations are accepted in a number of other +ways including including checks, online payments and credit card +donations. To donate, please visit: https://pglaf.org/donate + + +Section 5. General Information About Project Gutenberg-tm electronic +works. + +Professor Michael S. Hart was the originator of the Project Gutenberg-tm +concept of a library of electronic works that could be freely shared +with anyone. For thirty years, he produced and distributed Project +Gutenberg-tm eBooks with only a loose network of volunteer support. + + +Project Gutenberg-tm eBooks are often created from several printed +editions, all of which are confirmed as Public Domain in the U.S. +unless a copyright notice is included. Thus, we do not necessarily +keep eBooks in compliance with any particular paper edition. + + +Most people start at our Web site which has the main PG search facility: + + https://www.gutenberg.org + +This Web site includes information about Project Gutenberg-tm, +including how to make donations to the Project Gutenberg Literary +Archive Foundation, how to help produce our new eBooks, and how to +subscribe to our email newsletter to hear about new eBooks. diff --git a/17000-8.zip b/17000-8.zip Binary files differnew file mode 100644 index 0000000..df7ee00 --- /dev/null +++ b/17000-8.zip diff --git a/17000-h.zip b/17000-h.zip Binary files differnew file mode 100644 index 0000000..541a9fc --- /dev/null +++ b/17000-h.zip diff --git a/17000-h/17000-h.htm b/17000-h/17000-h.htm new file mode 100644 index 0000000..9078f86 --- /dev/null +++ b/17000-h/17000-h.htm @@ -0,0 +1,3910 @@ +<!DOCTYPE HTML PUBLIC "-//W3C//DTD HTML 4.01 Transitional//EN"> +<html> +<head> +<title>The Britan Tongue</title> +<meta http-equiv = "Content-Type" content = "text/html; charset=utf-8"> + +<style type = "text/css"> +body {margin-left: 10%; margin-right: 10%;} +hr {width: 80%; margin-top: 1em; margin-bottom: 1em;} +hr.smaller {width: 50%;} +hr.tiny {width: 20%;} +sup {line-height: 0em;} +blockquote {line-height: 1.2em;} + +h1, h2, h3, h4, h5, h6 {text-align: center; font-weight: normal; +font-style: normal; margin-top: .5em; margin-bottom: 1em; padding: 0em; +line-height: 1.5em;} + +h1 {font-size: 200%;} +h2 {font-size: 150%;} +h3 {font-size: 125%;} +h4 {font-variant: small-caps; font-size: 100%; margin-top: 2em;} +h5 {font-size: 100%;} +h6 {font-size: 90%;} + +p, div {margin-top: 0em; margin-bottom: .5em;} + +table {margin-bottom: 1em;} +td.glossary {padding-right: 1em; vertical-align: top; width: 50%;} +td.price {vertical-align: bottom; text-align: right; font-size: 95%; +padding-bottom: .7em;} /* to match div.worktitle */ +td.acct, td.accright {padding-top: 0em; padding-bottom: 0em; +padding-left: 0em; font-size: 95%; margin: 0em; vertical-align: top;} +td.acct {text-align: left; padding-right: 1.5em;} +td.accright {text-align: right; padding-right: .2em;} +.line {border-bottom: thin solid;} +td.management {font-size: 90%;} + +a.tag {text-decoration: none; font-size: 90%; line-height: .1em;} + +.italhead {font-size: 120%; font-style: italic; text-align: center; +margin-bottom: 1em; line-height: 1.3em;} + +p.footnote {font-size: 95%; margin-left: 4em; margin-right: 2em;} +p.pagenotes {margin-left: 2em;} +p.index {font-size: 90%; margin-left: 1em; text-indent: -1em; +margin-bottom: 0em;} +.skip {margin-top: .8em;} + +.worktitle {margin-left: 2em; text-indent: -2em; font-size: 95%;} +.workdesc {margin-left: 2em; font-size: 90%;} +.namelist {margin-left: 2em; text-indent: -2em; margin-bottom: .1em; +font-size: 95%;} +.hanging, .hanging2 {margin-bottom: 0em;text-indent: -1em; +font-size: 95%;} +.hanging {margin-left: 1em;} +.hanging2 {margin-left: 2em;} + +.smallcaps {font-variant: small-caps; font-style: normal;} +.plainital {font-variant: normal; font-style: italic;} +.inset {margin-left: 4em;} +.inset2 {margin-left: 6em;} +.inset3 {margin-left: 8em;} +.smalltype {font-size: 95%;} +.sans {font-family: sans-serif;} + +.translit {border-bottom: thin solid #CCC;} + +.pagenum {position: absolute; right: 95%; font-size: 95%; +font-weight: normal; font-style: normal; text-align: right; +color: #666; background-color: inherit; text-indent: 0em;} +.mynote {background-color: #DDE; color: #000; padding: .5em; +margin: 0em 5%; font-family: sans-serif; font-size: 90%;} +ins.correction {text-decoration: none; border-bottom: thin dotted red;} +.contents {font-size: 95%; font-family: sans-serif; line-height: 1.2em; +margin-left: 6em; text-indent: -2em;} + +</style> +</head> + +<body> + + +<pre> + +The Project Gutenberg EBook of Of the Orthographie and Congruitie of the +Britan Tongue, by Alexander Hume + +This eBook is for the use of anyone anywhere at no cost and with +almost no restrictions whatsoever. You may copy it, give it away or +re-use it under the terms of the Project Gutenberg License included +with this eBook or online at www.gutenberg.org + + +Title: Of the Orthographie and Congruitie of the Britan Tongue + A Treates, noe shorter than necessarie, for the Schooles + +Author: Alexander Hume + +Editor: Henry B. Wheatley + +Release Date: November 4, 2005 [EBook #17000] + +Language: English + +Character set encoding: UTF-8 + +*** START OF THIS PROJECT GUTENBERG EBOOK ORTHOGRAPHIE OF THE BRITAN TONGUE *** + + + + +Produced by Louise Hope, David Starner and the Online +Distributed Proofreading Team at https://www.pgdp.net + + + + + + +</pre> + +<div class = "mynote"> +All material in parentheses ( ) or square brackets [ ], +including the (sic) notations, is from the 1865 original.<br> +Unusual characters such as<span class = "translit" title = "yogh"> ȝ +</span>are identified with mouse-hover <span class = "translit" title = +"like this">popups</span>, and greek words are transliterated in the +same way.<br> +Irregularities in chapter numbering are explained at the end of the +editor’s Notes. +</div> + +<br> + +<h5>Of the</h5> + +<h1>Orthographie and Congruitie<br> +of the Britan Tongue;</h1> + +<h3>A Treates, noe shorter then necessarie,<br> +for the Schooles,</h3> + +<h6><ins class = "correction" title = +"normal spelling for this author">Be</ins></h6> + +<h2>Alexander Hume.</h2> + + +<h6>EDITED FROM THE ORIGINAL MS. IN THE BRITISH MUSEUM,<br> +BY</h6> + +<h5>HENRY B. WHEATLEY.</h5> + +<br> +<br> +<h6>LONDON:<br> +PUBLISHED FOR THE EARLY ENGLISH TEXT SOCIETY,<br> +BY TRÜBNER & CO., 60, PATERNOSTER ROW.<br> +MDCCCLXV.</h6> + +<br> +<br> + +<h6>HERTFORD:<br> +Printed by <span class = "smallcaps">Stephen Austin</span>.</h6> + +<hr> +<div class = "contents"><a href = "#preface"> +Preface</a></div> +<div class = "contents"><a href = "#orthographie"> +Of the Orthographie of the Britan Tongue</a><br> +<a href = "#chap1_1">1. Of the Groundes of Orthographie.</a><br> +<a href = "#chap1_2">2. Of the Latine Vouales.</a><br> +<a href = "#chap1_3">3. Of the Britan Vouales.</a><br> +<a href = "#chap1_4">4. Of Consonantes.</a><br> +<a href = "#chap1_5">5. Of Our Abusing Sum Consonantes.</a><br> +<a href = "#chap1_6">6. Of the Syllab.</a><br> +<a href = "#chap1_7a">7. Of the Rules to Symbolize.</a><br> +<a href = "#chap1_7b">7. Of Rules from the Latin.</a><br> +<a href = "#chap1_8">8. Of Sum Idiomes in our Orthographie.</a><br> +<a href = "#chap1_9">9. Of the Accentes of our Tongue.</a><br> +<a href = "#chap1_10">10. Of the Apostrophus and Hyphen.</a><br> +</div> +<div class = "contents"><a href = "#congruitie"> +Of the Congruitie of Our Britan Tongue</a><br> +<a href = "#chap2_1">1. Of the Person.</a><br> +<a href = "#chap2_2">2. Of Number.</a><br> +<a href = "#chap2_3">3. Of the Determination of the Person.</a><br> +<a href = "#chap2_4">4. Of the Gender of a Noun.</a><br> +<a href = "#chap2_5">5. Of the Case of the Noun.</a><br> +<a href = "#chap2_6">6. Of the Degrees of Comparison.</a><br> +<a href = "#chap2_7">7. Of the Verb’s Person and Number.</a><br> +<a href = "#chap2_8">8. Of the Mood of the Verb.</a><br> +<a href = "#chap2_9">9. Of the Tyme of the Verb.</a><br> +<a href = "#chap2_10">10. Of the Power of the Verb.</a><br> +<a href = "#chap2_11">11. Of the Adverb.</a><br> +<a href = "#chap2_12">12. Of the Conjunction.</a><br> +<a href = "#chap2_13">13. Of Distinctiones.</a><br> +</div> +<div class = "contents"><a href = "#notes"> +Editor’s Notes</a></div> +<div class = "contents"><a href = "#index"> +Glossarial Index</a></div> +<div class = "contents"><a href = "#report"> +EETS: Report of the Committee</a></div> +<div class = "contents"><a href = "#subscribers"> +List of Subscribers</a></div> +<div class = "contents"><a href = "#footnotes"> +Footnotes</a></div> + +<hr> + +<span class = "pagenum">v</span> +<h2><a name = "preface">PREFACE.</a></h2> +<hr class = "tiny"> + +<p>The following Tract is now printed for the first time from the original +Manuscript in the old Royal Collection in the Library of the British Museum +(Bibl. Reg. 17 A. xi). It is written on paper, and consists of forty-five +leaves, the size of the pages being 5¾ in. by 3¾ in. The dedication, the +titles, and the last two lines, are written with a different coloured ink +from that employed in the body of the MS., and appear to be in a different +handwriting. It is probable that the tract was copied for the author, but +that he himself wrote the dedication to the King.</p> + +<p>The Manuscript is undated, and we have no means of ascertaining the +exact time when it was written; but from a passage in the dedication to +James I. of England, it is fair to infer that it was written shortly after +the visit of that monarch to Scotland, subsequent to his accession to the +throne of the southern kingdom, that is, in the year 1617. This would make +it contemporaneous with Ben Jonson’s researches on the English Grammar; for +we find, in 1629, James Howell (Letters, Sec. V. 27) writing to Jonson that +he had procured Davies’ Welch Grammar for him, “to add to those many you +have.” The grammar that Jonson had prepared for the press was destroyed in +the conflagration of his study; so that the posthumous +<span class = "pagenum">vi</span> +work we now possess consists merely of materials, which were printed for +the first time in 1640, three years after the author’s death.</p> + +<p>The Dedication of this Tract is merely signed <i>Alexander Hume</i>, and +contains no other clue to the authorship. Curiously enough there were four +Alexander Humes living about the same time, and three of them were educated +at St. Mary’s College, St. Andrew’s; only two, however, became authors, the +first of whom was Minister of Logie, and wrote <i>Hymnes or Sacred +Songes</i>. There can be little doubt, however, that the present grammar +was written by the Alexander Hume who was at one time Head Master of the +High School, Edinburgh, and author of <i>Grammatica Nova</i>.</p> + +<p>From Dr. Steven’s History of the High School, Edinburgh, and from +M’Crie’s Life of Melville, I have been enabled to extract and put together +the following scanty particulars of our author’s life:—The time and +place both of his birth and of his death are alike unknown; but he himself, +on the title of one of his works, tells us that he was distantly connected +with the ancient and noble family of Home, in the county of Berwick. He was +educated at the school of Dunbar, under the celebrated Andrew Simson, and +in due time was enrolled a student in St. Mary’s College, St. Andrew’s, and +then took the degree of Bachelor of Arts in 1574. He came to England, and +was incorporated at Oxford January 26, 1580-81, as “M. of A. of St. +Andrew’s, in Scotland.”<a class = "tag" href = "#note1" name = +"tag1"><sup>1</sup></a> He spent sixteen years in England, partly engaged +in studying and partly in teaching. During the latter part of this term he +was a schoolmaster at Bath, as appears from Dr. Hill’s answer to him, +published in 1592; and +<span class = "pagenum">vii</span> +the fact of his residence in this city is corroborated at page <a href = +"#page18">18</a> of the present treatise. He then returned to Scotland, +having gained a reputation for the excellence of his learning and for the +power he possessed of communicating it to others. On the dismissal of +Hercules Rollock, Rector of the High School, Edinburgh, from his office, +Hume was unanimously chosen to succeed him, and his appointment was dated +23rd April, 1596. During his incumbency the High School underwent many +changes, and received the form which it retains to the present day. In +March, 1606, Hume resigned his office to become principal master in the +grammar school founded a short time previously, at Prestonpans, by the +munificent John Davidson, minister of the parish. The following document +gives an account of Hume’s admission to this school:—</p> + +<blockquote>“At hadintoun y<sup>e</sup> 25 of Junij 1606. The +q<sup>lk</sup> day M<sup>r</sup> Jo<sup>n</sup> ker minister of +y<sup>e</sup> panis producit y<sup>e</sup> prēntat<sup>one</sup> of +M<sup>r</sup> Alex<sup>r</sup> hoome to be schoolm<sup>r</sup> of +y<sup>e</sup> schoole of y<sup>e</sup> panis foundit be M<sup>r</sup> +J<sup>o</sup> Davedsone for instructioune of the youth in hebrew, greek and +latine subscryvet be yais to quhome M<sup>r</sup> Jo<sup>n</sup> davedsone +gave power to noiãt y<sup>e</sup> man q<sup>lk</sup> prēntat<sup>one</sup> +y<sup>e</sup> prēbrie allowit and ordenit y<sup>e</sup> moderator & +clerk to subscrive y<sup>e</sup> samine in y<sup>r</sup> names +q<sup>lk</sup> yay ded. As also ordeanit y<sup>t</sup> y<sup>e</sup> said +kirk of y<sup>e</sup> panis suld be visited upon y<sup>e</sup> eight day of +Julij next to come for admissione of y<sup>e</sup> said M<sup>r</sup> +Alex<sup>r</sup> to y<sup>e</sup> said office. The visitors wer appoyntit +M<sup>r</sup> Ar<sup>d</sup> oswald M<sup>r</sup> Robert Wallace +M<sup>r</sup> George greir M<sup>r</sup> andro blackhall & +M<sup>r</sup> andro Maghye to teach.”——“At Saltprestoun July 8, +1606. The haill parischoners being poisit how yay lyckit of y<sup>e</sup> +said M<sup>r</sup> Alex<sup>r</sup> w<sup>t</sup> vniforme consent being +particularly inqwyrit schew y<sup>r</sup> guid lycking of him and +y<sup>r</sup> willingnes to accept and receiv him to y<sup>e</sup> said +office Q<sup>r</sup>upon y<sup>e</sup> said M<sup>r</sup> Alex<sup>r</sup> +wes admittit to y<sup>e</sup> said office & in token of y<sup>e</sup> +approba<sup>one</sup> both of visitors & of y<sup>e</sup> parischonēs +p<sup>rnt</sup> both y<sup>e</sup> ane and y<sup>e</sup> vother tuik +y<sup>e</sup> said M<sup>r</sup> Alex<sup>r</sup> be y<sup>e</sup> hand +& y<sup>e</sup> haill magistratis gentlemen and remanēt parischoners +p<sup>rnt</sup> faithfullie p<sup>r</sup>misit to cõcurre for y<sup>e</sup> +furtherãce of y<sup>e</sup> work y<sup>t</sup> yit restis to be done +<span class = "pagenum">viii</span> +to y<sup>e</sup> said schoole as also to keipt y<sup>e</sup> said +M<sup>r</sup> Alex<sup>r</sup> and his scholleris skaithlis finallie for +farther authorizing of y<sup>e</sup> said (<i>sic</i>) it wes thought meitt +y<sup>t</sup> y<sup>e</sup> haill visitors & parichonēs p<sup>r</sup>nt +suld enter y<sup>e</sup> said M<sup>r</sup> Alex<sup>r</sup> into +y<sup>e</sup> said schoole & y<sup>r</sup> heir him teache +q<sup>lk</sup> also wes doone.” (Rec. of Presb. of Haddington).<a class = +"tag" href = "#note2" name = "tag2"><sup>2</sup></a> +</blockquote> + +<p>The school rapidly rose to distinction under Hume, but in 1615 he +relinquished his position, and accepted the Mastership of the Grammar +School of Dunbar, then in high repute, and the very same school in which he +had commenced his own education. When occupied at Dunbar, Hume had the +honour of being the first who, in a set speech, welcomed James VI. back to +his Scottish dominions, after an absence of fourteen years. The King +stopped on his way northward from Berwick on the 13th of May, 1617, at +Dunglass Castle the residence of the Earl of Home, and Hume, as the orator +of the day, delivered a Latin address.</p> + +<p>The date of Hume’s death is not known; but he was witness to a deed on +the 27th of November, 1627; and later still, in the records of the Privy +Council of Scotland, 8th and 16th July, 1630, Mr. D. Laing tells me that +there is a memorandum of the King’s letter anent the Grammar of Mr. +Alexander Hume, “schoolmaster at Dunbar.” With regard to his private life, +we know that he was married to Helen Rutherford, and had two sons and a +daughter born to him in Edinburgh between the years 1601 and 1606. He was +the father of three more children, also two sons and a daughter, between +1608 and 1610, in the county of East Lothian.</p> + +<p>Hume was a master in controversy, and wrote on subjects of polemical +divinity; but his mind was principally drawn +<span class = "pagenum">ix</span> +towards language and the rules of its construction. He especially gave much +of his time to the study of Latin grammar, and feeling dissatisfied with +the elementary books which were then in use, he drew up one himself, which +he submitted to the correction of Andrew Melville and other learned +friends, and published in 1612 under the title of <i>Grammatica Nova</i>. +The object he proposed to himself was to exclude from the schools the +grammar of the Priscian of the Netherlands, the celebrated John Van +Pauteren, but his work did not give the satisfaction which he had expected. +He succeeded, however, in his wishes after many reverses, by the help of +Alexander Seton, Earl of Dunfermline, Chancellor of Scotland, and by +authority both of Parliament and of the Privy Council his grammar was +enjoined to be used in all the schools of the kingdom. But through the +interest of the bishops, and the steady opposition of Ray, his successor at +the High School, the injunction was rendered of no effect. He would not, +however, be beaten, and we find that in 1623 he was again actively engaged +in adopting measures to secure the introduction of his grammar into every +school in North Britain where the Latin language was taught.</p> + +<p>The following is a list of our author’s works:— + +<div class = "worktitle"> +A Reioynder to Doctor Hil concerning the Descense of Christ into Hell. By +Alexander Hume Maister of Artes. 4<sup>o</sup>.</div> + +<div class = "workdesc"> +No place of printing, printer’s name, or date, but apparently printed at +London in 1592 or 1593. Dedicated to Robert Earl of Essex. Although this is +the first work that I can find attributed to Alexander Hume, yet there is +no doubt that there must have been a former one of which we have no record, +and the title and contents of Dr. Hill’s book would lead us to this +conclusion—“The Defence of the Article. Christ descended into Hell. +With arguments obiected against the truth of the same doctrine +of one Alexander Humes<span class = "translit" title = +"no close quote in original">.”</span> +By Adam Hyll, D of Divinity. London 1592. 4<sup>o</sup>. +This little volume consists of two parts; 1st, the original sermon preached +by Hill 28th February, 1589; 2nd, the reply to Hume. At p. 33, the end of +the sermon, is +<span class = "pagenum">x</span> +this note, “This sermon ... was answered by one Alexander Huns, +Schoolemaester of Bath, whose answere wholy foloweth, with a replye of the +author” ... At p. 33, “The reply of Adam Hill to the answere made by +Alexander Humes to a sermon,” etc.</div> + +<div class = "worktitle"> +A Diduction of the true and Catholik meaning of our Sauiour his words, +<i>this is my bodie</i>, in the institution of his laste Supper through the +ages of the Church from Christ to our owne dayis. Whereunto is annexed a +Reply to M. William Reynolds in defence of M. Robert Bruce his arguments on +this subject: displaying M. John Hammilton’s ignorance and contradictions: +with sundry absurdities following upon the Romane interpretation of these +words. Compiled by Alexander Hume, Maister of the high Schoole of +Edinburgh. Edinburgh, Printed by Robert Waldegrave, Printer to the King’s +Maiestie, 1602. Cum Privilegio Regis. 8<sup>o</sup>.</div> + +<div class = "worktitle"> +Prima Elementa Grammaticæ in usum juventutis Scoticæ digesta. Edinburgi, +1612. 8<sup>o</sup>.</div> + +<div class = "worktitle"> +Grammatica Nova in usum juventutis Scoticæ ad methodum revocata. Edinburgi, +1612. 8<sup>o</sup>.</div> + +<div class = "worktitle"> +Bellum Grammaticale, ad exemplar M<sup>ri</sup> Alexandri Humii. Edinburgi, +excud. Gideon Lithgo, Anno Dom. 1658 8<sup>o</sup>. Several later +editions.</div> + +<div class = "workdesc"> +This humorous Grammatical Tragi-Comedy was not written by Hume, but only +revised by him.</div> + +<div class = "worktitle"> +King James’s Progresses, collected and Published by John Adamson afterwards +Principal of the University of Edinburgh, entitled—<br> + +<span class = "smallcaps inset" title = "TA TÔN MOUSÔN EISODIA">τα των +μουσων εισοδια:</span><br> + +The Muses Welcome to the High and Mighty Prince James &<sup>c</sup>. At +his Majesties happie Returne to Scotland In Anno 1617. Edinburgh 1618, +folio.</div> + +<div class = "workdesc"> +At page 1: “His Majestie came from Bervik to Dunglas the xiij day of Maye, +where was delivered this [latin] speach following by A. Hume.”—At +page 16, there is also a couple of Latin verses signed “Alexander +Humius.”</div> + +<div class = "worktitle"> +MS. in the British Museum. The present work.</div> + +<div class = "worktitle"> +MS. in the Advocates’ Library:—</div> + +<div class = "workdesc"> +Rerum Scoticarum Compendium, in usum Scholarum. Per Alexandrum Humium ex +antiqua et nobili gente Humiorum in Scotia, +<span class = "pagenum">xi</span> +a primâ stirpe quinta sobole oriundum. This work is dated October 1660, and +is therefore merely a transcript. It is an epitome of Buchanan’s History, +and Chr. Irvine in Histor. Scot. Nomenclatura, calls it Clavis in +Buchananum, and Bishop Nicholson (Scottish Hist. Lib.) praises its Latin +style.</div> + +<p>The following three works are inserted by Dr. Steven in his list of +Hume’s writings, and have been supposed to be his by M’Crie and others; but +Mr. D. Laing believes “there can be no doubt, from internal evidence, that +the true author was Alexander Hume, the poet, who became minister of Logie, +near Stirling, in 1597, and who died in December, 1609.” In Wood’s Athenæ +Oxonienses, by Bliss, i., 624, it is stated that all three of them “were +printed in London in 1594, in October,” but this must, I think, be a +mistake.</p> + +<div class = "worktitle"> +Ane Treatise of Conscience, quhairin divers secreits concerning that +subject are discovered. At Edinburgh, printed by Robert Walde-grave, +Printer to the King’s Maiestie 1594. 8<sup>o</sup>.</div> + +<div class = "worktitle"> +Of the Felicitie of the world to come, unsavorie to the obstinate, alluring +to such as are gone astray, and to the faithfull full of consolation. +Edinb. 1594. 8<sup>o</sup>.</div> + +<div class = "worktitle"> +Four Discourses, of Praises unto God, to wit, 1 in Praise of the Mercy and +Goodness of God. 2 of his justice. 3 of his Power. 4 of his Providence. +Edinb. 1594. 8<sup>o</sup>.</div> + +<p>In conclusion, my acknowledgments are due to David Laing, Esq., who has +kindly suggested some corrections in the list of Hume’s works, in addition +to what is noted above.</p> + +<p><span class = "smallcaps">London, February, 1865.</span></p> + +<hr> + +<span class = "pagenum">1</span> +<a name = "page1"> </a> +<div class = "italhead">To the maest excellent<br> +in all princelie wis-<br> +dom, learning, and he-<br> +roical artes, JAMES,<br> +of Great Britan,<br> +France, and<br> +Ireland,<br> +King,<br> +Defender of the faeth,<br> +grace, mercie, peace,<br> +honoure here and<br> +glorie hereafter.</div> + +<p>May it please your maest excellent M<i>ajestie</i>, I, your grace’s +humble servant, seeing sik uncertentie in our men’s wryting, as if a man +wald indyte one letter to tuentie of our best wryteres, nae tuae of the +tuentie, without conference, wald agree; and that they quhae might perhapes +agree, met rather be custom then knawlege, set my selfe, about a yeer syne, +to seek a remedie for that maladie. Quhen I had done, refyning it, I fand +in Barret’s Alvearie,<a class = "tag" href = "#note3" name = +"tag3"><sup>3</sup></a> quhilk is a dictionarie Anglico-latinum, that Sr. +Thomas Smith,<a class = "tag" href = "#note4" name = +"tag4"><sup>4</sup></a> a man of nae less worth then learning, Secretarie +to Queen Elizabeth, had left a learned and +<span class = "pagenum">2</span> +<a name = "page2"> </a> +judiciouse monument on the same subject. Heer consydering my aun weaknes, +and meannes of my person, began to fear quhat might betyed my sillie boat +in the same seas quhaer sik a man’s ship was sunck in the gulf of oblivion. +For the printeres and wryteres of this age, caring for noe more arte then +may win the pennie, wil not paen them selfes to knau whither it be +orthographie or skuiographie that doeth the turne: <i>and</i> +schoolmasteres, quhae’s sillie braine will reach no farther then the compas +of their cap, content them selfes with <span class = "translit" title = +"autos ephê">αὐτὸς ἔφη</span> my master said it. +Quhil I thus hovered betueen hope <i>and</i> +despare, the same Barret, in the letter E, myndes me of a star <i>and</i> +constellation to calm al the tydes of these seaes, if it wald please the +supreme Majestie to command the universitie to censure and ratifie, and the +schooles to teach the future age right and wrang, if the present will not +rectius sapere. Heere my harte laggared on the hope of your +M<i>ajesties</i> judgement, quhom God hath indeued with light in a sorte +supernatural, if the way might be found to draue your eie, set on high +materes of state, to take a glim of a thing of so mean contemplation, and +yet necessarie. Quhiles I stack in this claye, it pleased God to bring your +M<i>ajestie</i> hame to visit your aun Ida. Quher I hard that your +G<i>race</i>, in the disputes of al purposes quherwith, after the exemple +of <i>th</i>e wyse in former ages, you use to season your moat, ne quid +tibi temporis sine fructu fluat, fel sundrie tymes on this subject +reproving your courteoures, quha on a new conceat of finnes sum tymes spilt +(as they cal it) the king’s language. Quhilk thing it is reported that your +M<i>ajestie</i> not onlie refuted with impregnable reasones, but alsoe fel +on Barret’s opinion that you wald cause the universities mak an Inglish +gra<i>m</i>mar to repres the insolencies of sik green heades. This, quhen I +hard it, soe secunded my hope, that in continent I maed moien hou to convoy +this litle treates to your M<i>ajesties</i> sight, to further (if perhapes +it may please your G<i>race</i>) that gud motion. In school materes, the +least are not the least, because to erre in them is maest absurd. If the +fundation be not sure, the maer gorgiouse the edifice the grosser the falt. +Neither is it the least parte of a prince’s praise, curasse rem literariam, +and be his auctoritie to mend the misses that ignorant custom hath bred. +Julius Cæsar was noe less diligent to eternize his name be the pen then be +the suord. Neither thought he it unworthie +<span class = "pagenum">3</span> +<a name = "page3"> </a> +of his paines to wryte a grammar in the heat of the civil weer, quhilk was +to them as the English gram<i>m</i>ar is to us; <i>and</i>, as it seemes +noe less then necessarie, nor our’s is now. Manie kinges since that tyme +have advanced letteres be erecting schooles, and doting revennues to their +ma<i>in</i>tenance; but few have had the knaulege them selfes to mend, or +be tuiched with, the defectes or faltes crept into the boueles of learning, +among quhom <span class = "smallcaps">James</span> the first, ane of your +M<i>ajesties</i> worthie progenitoures, houbeit repressed be the iniquitie +of the tyme, deserved noe smal praise; and your M<i>ajesties</i> self noe +less, co<i>m</i>manding, at your first entrie to your Roial scepter, to +reform the grammar, and to teach Aristotle in his aun tongue, quhilk hes +maed the greek almaest as common in Scotland as the latine. In this alsoe, +if it please your M<i>ajestie</i> to put to your hand, you have al the +windes of favour in your sail; account, that al doe follow; judgement, that +al doe reverence; wisdom, that al admire; learning, that stupified our +scholes hearing a king borne, from tuelfe yeeres ald alwayes occupyed in +materes of state, moderat in theological and philosophical disputationes, +to the admiration of all that hard him, and speciallie them quha had spent +al their dayes in those studies.</p> + +<p>Accept, dred Soveragne, your pover servantes myte. If it can confer anie +thing to the montan of your Majesties praise, and it wer but a clod, use it +<i>and</i> the auctour as your’s. Thus beseeking your grace to accep my +mint, and pardon my miss, commites your grace to the king of grace, to +grace your grace with al graces spiritual <i>and</i> temporal.</p> + +<p><span class = "inset">Your M<i>ajesties</i></span></p> +<p><span class = "inset2">humble servant,</span></p> +<p><span class = "inset3">Alexander Hume.</span></p> + +<hr class = "smaller"> + +<h3><i><a name = "orthographie">OF THE ORTHOGRAPHIE</a><br> + +OF THE BRITAN TONGUE;<br> + +A TREATES, NOE<br> + +SHORTER<br> + +THEN NECESSARIE, FOR<br> + +THE SCHOOLES.</i></h3> + +<hr class = "smaller"> + +<span class = "pagenum">7</span> +<a name = "page7"> </a> +<h4><a name = "chap1_1"> +OF THE GROUNDES OF ORTHOGRAPHIE.</a><br> +Cap. 1.</h4> + +<p>1. To wryte orthographicallie ther are to be considered the symbol, the +thing symbolized, and their congruence. Geve me leave, gentle reader, in a +new art, to borrow termes incident to the purpose, quhilk, being defyned, +wil further understanding.</p> + +<p>2. The symbol, then, I cal the written letter, quhilk representes to the +eie the sound that the mouth sould utter.</p> + +<p>3. The thing symbolized I cal the sound quhilk the mouth utteres quhen +the eie sees the symbol.</p> + +<p>4. The congruence between them I cal the instrument of the mouth, +quhilk, when the eie sees the symbol, utteres the sound.</p> + +<p>5. This is the ground of al orthographie, leading the wryter from the +sound to the symbol, and the reader from the symbol to the sound. As, for +exemple, if I wer to wryte God, the tuich of the midle of the tongue on the +roofe of the mouth befoer the voual, and the top of the tongue on the teeth +behind the voual, myndes me to wryte it g o d. The voual is +judged be the sound, as shal be shaued hereafter. This is the hardest +lesson in this treates, and may be called the key of orthographie.</p> + + + + +<h4><a name = "chap1_2"> +OF THE LATINE VOUALES.</a><br> +Cap. 2.</h4> + +<p>1. We, as almaest al Europ, borrow our symboles from the Romanes. +Quherforr, to rectefie our aun, first it behoves us to knaw their’s. Thei +are in nu<i>m</i>ber 23: a, b, c, d, e, f, g, h, i, k, l, m, n, o, p, q, r, +s, t, u, x, y, and z.</p> + +<p>2. To omit the needless questiones of their order and formes; of them, +five be vouales, ane a noat of aspiration, and all the rest +consonantes.</p> + +<p>3. A voual is the symbol of a sound maed without the tuiches of the +mouth.</p> + +<p>4. They are distinguished the ane from the other be delating and +contracting the mouth, and are a, e, i, o, u.</p> + +<p><span class = "pagenum">8</span> +<a name = "page8"> </a> +5. Quhat was the right roman sound of them is hard to judge, seeing now we +heer nae romanes; and other nationes sound them after their aun idiomes, +and the latine as they sound them.</p> + +<p>6. But seeing our earand is with our aun britan, we purpose to omit +curiosities, <i>et</i> quæ nihil nostra intersunt. Our aun, hou-be it +dialectes of ane tong, differing in the sound of them, differ alsoe in +pronuncing the latine. Quherfoer, to make a conformitie baeth in latine and +English, we man begin with the latine.</p> + +<p>7. A, the first of them, the south soundes as beath thei and we sound it +in bare, nudus; and we, as beath thei and we sound it in bar, obex.</p> + +<p>8. But without partialitie (for in this earand I have set my compas to +the loadstar of reason), we pronunce it better. If I am heer deceaved, +reason sall deceave me.</p> + +<p>9. For we geve it alwaies ane sound beath befoer and behind the +consonant: thei heer ane and ther an other. As in amabant, in the first +tuae syllabes they sound it as it soundes in bare, and in the last as it +sounds in bar. Quherupon I ground this argument. That is the better sound, +not onelie of this, but alsoe of al other letteres, q<i>uhi</i>lk is +alwayes ane. But we sound it alwayes ane, and therfoer better. Ad that +their sound of it is not far unlyke the sheepes bae, q<i>uhi</i>lk the +greek symbolizes be η not α, <span class = "translit" +title = "bê">βη</span> not <span class = "translit" title = +"ba">βα</span>. See Eustat. in Homer.</p> + +<p>10. Of this letter the latines themselfes had tuae other sounds +differing the ane from the other, and beath from this, quhilk they +symbolized be adding an other voual, æ and au. And these they called +diphthonges.</p> + +<p>11. The diphthong they defyne to be the sound of tuae vouales coalescing +into ane sound, quhilk definition in au is plaen, in æ obscurer as now we +pronunce it, for now we sound it generallie lyke the voual e, without sound +of the a, q<i>uhi</i>lk, notwithstanding is the principal voual in this +diphthong sound. Questionles at the first it semes to have had sum +differing sound from a, sik as we pronunce in stean, or the south in stain. +But this corruption is caryed with a stronger tyde then reason can resist, +and we wil not stryve with the stream.</p> + +<p>14. E followes, q<i>uhi</i>lk in reason sould have but ane sound, for +<span class = "pagenum">9</span> +<a name = "page9"> </a> +without doubt the first intent was to geve everie sound the awn symbol, and +everie symbol the awn sound. But as now we sound it in quies and quiesco, +the judiciouse ear may discern tuae soundes. But because heer we differ +not, I wil acquiess. My purpose is not to deal with impossibilities, nor to +mend al crookes, but to conform (if reason wil conform us) the south and +north beath in latine and in English.</p> + +<p>15. Af this voual ryseth tuae diphthonges, ei and eu, quhilk beath +standes wel with the definition, sect. 11.</p> + +<p>16. Of the next, i, we differ farder, and the knot harder to louse, for +nether syde wantes sum reason. Thei in mihi, tibi, and sik otheres, +pronunce it as it soundes in bide, manere; we as it soundes in bid, +jubere.</p> + +<p>17. Among the ancientes I fynd sum groundes for their sound. Cic. epist. +fam. lib. 9, epis. 22, avoues that bini, in latin, and +<span class = "translit" title = +"binei">βίνει</span> in Greek, had ane sound. And Varro, with sundrie +ancientes, wrytes domineis and serveis, for dominis and servis, quhilk is +more lyke the sound of bide then bid. If this argument reached as wel to i +short as i lang, and if we wer sure how ει was pronunced in those dayes, +this auctoritie wald over-weegh our reason; but seing i, in mihi, +<i>et</i>c., in the first is short, and in the last co<i>m</i>mon, and the +sound of ei uncertan, I stand at my reason, sect. 9, q<i>uhi</i>lk is as +powerful heer for i as ther for a. They pronunce not i in is and quis, id +and quid, in and quin, as they pronunce it in mihi, tibi, sibi, ibi, +<i>et</i>c., and therfoer not right.</p> + +<p>18. As for o, in latin, we differ not; u, the south pronu<i>n</i>ces +quhen the syllab beginnes or endes at it, as eu, teu for tu, and eunum +meunus for unum munus, q<i>uhi</i>lk, because it is a diphthong sound, and +because they them selfes, quhen a consonant followes it, pronunce it other +wayes, I hoep I sal not need argumentes to prove it wrang, and not be a +pure voual.</p> + + + + +<h4><a name = "chap1_3"> +OF THE BRITAN VOUALES.</a><br> +Cap. 3.</h4> + +<p>1. Of a, in our tongue we have four soundes, al so differing ane from an +other, that they distinguish the verie signification of wordes, as, a tal +man, a gud tal, a horse tal.</p> + +<p><span class = "pagenum">10</span> +<a name = "page10"> </a> +2. Quherfoer in this case I wald co<i>m</i>mend to our men the imitation of +the greek and latin, quho, to mend this crook, devysed diphthongs. Let the +simplest of these four soundes, or that q<i>uhi</i>lk is now in use, stand +with the voual, and supplie the rest with diphthonges; as, for exemple, I +wald wryte the king’s hal with the voual a; a shour of hael, with ae; hail +marie, with ai; and a heal head, as we cal it, quhilk the English cales a +whole head, with ea. And so, besydes the voual, we have of this thre +diphthonges, tuae with a befoer, ae and ai, and ane w<i>i</i>th the e +befoer, ea. Ad to them au, howbeit of a distinct sound; as, knaulege with +us, in the south knowlege.</p> + +<p>3. These and al other diphthonges I wald counsel the teacheres not to +name be the vouales quherof they are maed, but be the sound q<i>uhi</i>lk +they maek, for learneres wil far maer easelie take the sound from the mouth +of the teacher, then maek it them selves of the vouales ingredient.</p> + +<p>4. Of e, we have tuae soundes, q<i>uhi</i>lk it is hard to judge +q<i>uhi</i>lk is simplest; as, an el, ulna; and an el, anguilla; hel, +infernus; and an hel, calx pedis. Heer I wald com<i>m</i>end to our men +quhae confoundes these the imitation of the south, q<i>uhi</i>lk doth wel +distinguish these soundes, wryting the el, ulna, with the voual e, and eel, +anguilla, with the diphthong ee. I am not ignorant that sum symbolizes this +sound w<i>i</i>th a diphthong made of ie; eie, oculus; hiel, fiel, miel, +<i>et</i>c. Here I am indifferent, and onelie wishes that the ane be used; +let the advysed judge make choise of q<i>uhi</i>lk, for my awne paert I +lyke the last best; 1. becaus eie, oculus, can not wel be symbolized ee; 2. +because the greekes expresse η be εε, q<i>uhi</i>lk, as appeares be the +Ioneanes and Doreanes, drawes neerar to α, than ε.</p> + +<p>5. Of i, also, our idiom receaves tuae soundes, as in a man’s wil, and +the wil of a fox. Heer, also, I wald have our men learne of the south, for +these soundes they wel distinguish, wryting wil, fil, mil, stil, with i; +and wyl, fyl, myl, styl, with y.</p> + +<p>6. Heer I see be Barrat, in his Alvearie, that sum wald be at +symbolizing these soundes, the ane with the greek diphthong ει, and the +other with<span class = "translit" title = "inverted i"> ᴉ +</span>inverted; as, rειd, equitare; bειd, manere; <span class = +"translit" title = "inverted i">rᴉd</span>, legere; <span class = +"translit" title = "inverted i">hᴉd</span>, cavere. In this opinion I se +an eye of judgement, and therfoer wil not censure it, except I saw the +auctour’s whole drift. Onelie for +<span class = "pagenum">11</span> +<a name = "page11"> </a> +my awn parte I will avoid al novelties, and content my self with the +letteres q<i>uhi</i>lk we have in use. And seeing we have no other use of +y distinguished from i, condiscend to the opinion of the south using i +for ane, and y for the other.</p> + +<p>7. O, we sound al alyk. But of it we have sundrie diphthonges: oa, as to +roar, a boar, a boat, a coat; oi, as coin, join, foil, soil; oo, as food, +good, blood; ou, as house, mouse, &c. Thus, we com<i>m</i>onlie wryt +mountan, fountan, q<i>uhi</i>lk it wer more etymological to wryt montan, +fontan, according to the original.</p> + +<p>8. In this diphthong we co<i>m</i>mit a grosse errour, saving better +judgement, spelling how, now, and siklyk with w, for if w be (as it sal +appear, quhen we cum to the awn place of it) a consonant, it can noe wayes +coalesse into a diphthong sound, sik as this out of controversie is.</p> + +<p>9. U, the last of this rank, the south, as I have said in the latin +sound of it, pronu<i>n</i>ces eu, we ou, both, in my simple judgement, +wrang, for these be diphthong soundes, and the sound of a voual sould be +simple. If I sould judge, the frensh sound is neerest the voual sound as we +pronu<i>n</i>ce it in mule and muse.</p> + +<p>10. Of it we have a diphthong not yet, to my knawlege, observed of anie; +and, for my awn parte, I am not wel resolved neither how to spel it, nor +name it. Onelie I see it in this, to bou, a bow. I wait not quhither I +sould spel the first buu, or the last boau. As, for exemple, if Roben Hud +wer nou leving, he wer not able to buu his aun bou, or to bou his aun boau. +And therfoer this with al the rest, hou be it in other I have more for me, +I leave to the censure of better judgement.</p> + + + + +<h4><a name = "chap1_4"> +OF CONSONANTES.</a><br> +Cap. 4.</h4> + +<p>1. This for the vouales, and diphthonges made of them without the +tuiches of the mouth. Now followe the consonantes.</p> + +<p>2. A consonant is a letter symbolizing a sound articulat that is broaken +with the tuiches of the mouth.</p> + +<p>3. The instrumentes of the mouth, quherbe the vocal soundes be +<span class = "pagenum">12</span> +<a name = "page12"> </a> +broaken, be in number seven. The nether lip, the upper lip, the outward +teeth, the inward teeth, the top of the tongue, the midle tong, and roof of +the mouth. Of these, thre be, as it were, ha<i>m</i>meres stryking, and the +rest stiddies, kepping the strakes of the ha<i>m</i>meres.</p> + +<p>4. The ham<i>m</i>eres are the nether lip, the top of the tongue, and +the midle tongue. The stiddies the overlip, the outward teeth, the inward +teeth, and the roofe of the mouth.</p> + +<p>5. The nether lip stryking on the overlip makes b, m, p, and on the +teeth it makes f and v.</p> + +<p>6. The top of the tongue stryking on the inward teeth formes d, l, n, r, +s, t, and z.</p> + +<p>7. The midle tongue stryking on the rouf of the mouth formes the rest, +c, g, k, j, q, and x, and so we have 18 consonantes borrowed of the +latines.</p> + +<p>8. These they borrow al from the greekes, saving j and v, quhilk our age +soundes other wayes then it seemes the romanes did; for Plutarch, more then +100 yeeres after Christ, expressing the sound q<i>uhi</i>lk they had in his +tyme, symbolizes them neerar the sound of the vouales quherof they are maed +then now we sound them in latin, for in Galba he symbolizes junius vindex, +<span class = "translit" title = "iounios ouindex">ἰόυνιος ὀύινδεξ</span>, +q<i>uhi</i>lk, if then it had sounded as now we sound it, he sould rather +have written it with γ and β, <span class = "translit" title = +"gounios bindex">γόυνιος βίνδεξ</span>.</p> + +<p>9. We have in our use the sam soundes q<i>uhi</i>lk it seemes these +consonantes had in Plutarch’s dayes, as in yallou, winter. Quhilk, seeing +now they are worn out of the latin use, my counsel is that we leave the +sound of them q<i>uhi</i>lk now is in the latin use to the latines, and +take as our’s the sound q<i>uhi</i>lk they have left, and geve to the +sound, q<i>uhi</i>lk now we use in latin, the latin symbol; as, jolie jhon; +vertue is not vain; and to the soundes quhilk they have left the symboles +q<i>uhi</i>lk we have usurped to that end; as, yallou, youk; water, +wyne.</p> + +<p>10. And heer, to put our men af their errour quho had wont to symboliz +yallou with an <span class = "translit" title = "yogh">ȝ</span>, +and to put noe difference betueen v and w, <span class = "translit" +title = "yogh">ȝ</span> is a dental consonant, broaken betueen the top +of the tongue and root of the teeth; yal, a guttural sound, made be a +mynt of the tongue to the roofe of the mouth, and therfoer the organes +being so +<span class = "pagenum">13</span> +<a name = "page13"> </a> +far distant, and the tuich so diverse, this symbol can be no reason serve +that sound, nor nane of that kynd.</p> + +<p>11. As for v and w, seeing we have in our idiom, besyd the latin sound, +an other never hard in latin, as now it is pronu<i>n</i>ced, I can not but +com<i>m</i>end the wisdom of the south, q<i>uhi</i>lk gave the latin sound +their awn symbol, and took to our sound a symbol quhilk they use not. Lyke +was their wisdom in j and y; for as the latines usurped the voual i for a +consonant in their use, q<i>uhi</i>lk the greekes had not, so they usurped +y, a voual not mikle different from i, for the correspondent sound, not +used in the latin as now it is pronu<i>n</i>ced.</p> + +<p>12. Heerfoer, for distinctiones of both sound and symbol, I wald commend +the symbol and name of i and u to the voual sound; as, indifferent, +unthankful; the symbols of j and v to the latin consonantes, and their +names to be jod and vau; as, vain jestes; and the symboles y and w to our +English soundes, and their names to be ye and we, or yod and wau; as, +yonder, wel, yallou, wool.</p> + +<p>13. Now remaineth h, q<i>uhi</i>lk we have called a noat of aspiration, +<a href = "#chap1_2">cap. 2</a>, sect. 2, and is, in deed, noe voual, because with a consonant it +makes noe sound; as, ch; nor consonant, because it is pronu<i>n</i>ced +without the tuich of the mouth; as, ha.</p> + +<p>14. It may affect al vouales <i>and</i> diphthonges; as, hand, hen, +hind, hose, hurt, hail, hautie, health, heel, heifer, <i>etc.</i> But +behind the voual in our tong (so far as yet I can fynd) it hath no use. Of +consonantes, it affecteth g beyond the voual; as, laugh; p befoer the +voual; as, phason; s and t also befoer the voual; as, think, shame. With c +we spil the aspiration, tur<i>n</i>ing it into an Italian chirt; as, +charitie, cherrie, of quhilk hereafter.</p> + + + + +<h4><a name = "chap1_5"> +OF OUR ABUSING SUM CONSONANTES.</a><br> +Cap. 5.</h4> + +<p>1. Now I am cum to a knot that I have noe wedg to cleave, and wald be +glaed if I cold hoep for help. Ther sould be for everie sound that can +occur one symbol, and of everie symbol but one onlie sound. This reason and +nature craveth; and I can not but trow but that the worthie inventoures of +this divyne facultie shot at this mark.</p> + +<p><span class = "pagenum">14</span> +<a name = "page14"> </a> +2. But, contrarie to this sure ground, I waet not be quhat corruption, we +see, not onelie in our idiom, but in the latin alsoe, one symbol to have +sundrie soundes, ye, and that in one word; as, lego, legis.</p> + +<p>3. First, to begin with c, it appeeres be the greekes, quho ever had +occasion to use anie latin word, quharein now we sound c as s, in their +tymes it sounded k; for Cicero, thei wryt Kikero; for Cæsar, Kaisar; and +Plut., in Galba, symbolizes principia, <span class = "translit" title = +"prinkipia">πρινκιπια</span>.</p> + +<p>4. This sound of it we, as the latines, also keepe befoer a, o, and u; +as, canker, conduit, cumber. But, befoer e and i, sum tymes we sound it, +with the latin, lyke an s; as, cellar, certan, cease, citie, circle, +<i>et</i>c.</p> + +<p>5. Behind the voual, if a consonant kep it, we sound it alwayes as a k; +as, occur, accuse, succumb, acquyre. If it end the syllab, we ad e, and +sound it as an s; as, peace, vice, solace, temperance; but nether for the +idle e, nor the sound of the s, have we anie reason; nether daer I, with al +the oares of reason, row against so strang a tyde. I hald it better to erre +with al, then to stryve with al and mend none.</p> + +<p>6. This consonant, evin quher in the original it hes the awne sound, we +turn into the chirt we spak of, <a href = "#chap1_4">cap. 4</a>, sect. 14, quhilk, indeed, can be +symbolized with none, neither greek nor latin letteres; as, from cano, +chant; from canon, chanon; from castus, chast; from <span class = +"translit" title = "kyriakê">κυριακὴ</span>, a church, of q<i>uhi</i>lk +I hard doctour Laurence, the greek professour in Oxfoord, a man bothe of +great learni<i>n</i>g and judgement, utter his opinion to this sense, and +(excep my memorie fael me) in these wordes: <span class = "translit" +title = "kyriakê">κυριακὴ</span> ut <span class = "translit" title = +"basilikê">βασιλικὴ</span> suppresso substantivo <span class = "translit" +title = "oikia">ὀικία</span> domus domini est. Unde nostrum derivatur, +quod Scoti et Angli boreales recte, pronu<i>n</i>ciant a kyrk, +nos corrupte a church.</p> + +<p>7. Yet, notwithstanding that it is barbarouse, seing it is more usual in +our tongue then can be mended befoer the voual, as chance, and behind the +voual, as such, let it be symbolized, as it is symbolized with ch, hou beit +nether the c nor the h hath anie affinitie with that sound; 1, because it +hath bene lang soe used; and 2, because we have no other mean to symbolize +it, except it wer with a new symbol, q<i>uhi</i>lk it will be hard to bring +in use.</p> + +<p>8. Now, quheras ch in nature is c asperat, as it soundes in charus and +chorus; and seing we have that sound also in use, as licht, micht; if I had +bene at the first counsel, my vote wald have bene to have geven +<span class = "pagenum">15</span> +<a name = "page15"> </a> +ch the awn sound. But as now the case standes, ne quid novandum sit, quod +non sit necesse, I not onlie consent, but also com<i>m</i>end the wisdom of +the south, quho, for distinction, wrytes light, might, with gh and referres +ch to the other sound, how be it improperlie, and this distinction I +com<i>m</i>end to our men, quho yet hes not satis attente observed it.</p> + +<p>9. Next cumes g, howbe it not so deformed as c; for, althogh we see it +evin in latin, and that, in one word (as is said <a href = "#chap1_5">cap. 5</a>, sect. 2), +distorted to tuo sonndes, yet both may stand with the nature of the symbol +and differ not in the instrumentes of the mouth, but in the form of the +tuich, as the judiciouse ear may mark in ago, agis; agam, ages.</p> + +<p>10. This consonant, in latin, never followes the voual; befoer a, o, u, +it keepes alwayes the awn sound, and befoer e and i breakes it.</p> + +<p>11. But with us it may both begin and end the syllab; as, gang; it may, +both behind and befoer, have either sound; as, get, gist, gin, giant.</p> + +<p>12. These the south hath providentlie minted to distinguish tuo wayes, +but hes in deed distinguished noe way, for the first sum hath used tuo gg; +as, egg, legg, bigg, bagg; for the other dg; as, hedge, edge, bridge; but +these ar not <span class = "translit" title = +"kata pantos">κατὰ πάντος</span>. Gyles, nomen +viri, can not be written dgiles; nor giles doli, ggiles; nether behind the +voual ar they general; age, rage, suage, are never wrytten with dg. +Quherfoer I conclud that, seeing nether the sound nor the symbol hath anie +reason to be sundrie, without greater auctoritie, nor the reach of a privat +wit, this falt is incorrigible.</p> + +<p>13. Here I am not ignorant quhat a doe the learned make about the +symboles of c, g, k and q, that they be al symboles, but of one sound; but +I wil not medle in that question, being besyde my purpose, q<i>uhi</i>lk is +not to correct the latin symboles, but to fynd the best use of them in our +idiom.</p> + +<p>14. T, the last of these misused souldioures, keepes alwayes it’s aun +nature, excep it be befoer tio; as, oration, declamation, narration; for we +pronunce not tia and tiu as it is in latin. Onelie let it be heer observed +that if an s preceed tio, the t keepes the awn nature, as in question, +suggestion, <i>et</i>c.</p> + +<p><span class = "pagenum">16</span> +<a name = "page16"> </a> +15. Thus have I breeflie handled the letteres and their soundes, quhilk, to +end this parte, I wald wish the printeres, in their a, b, c, to expresse +thus:—a, ae, ai, au, ea, b, c, d, e, ee, ei, eu, f, g, h, i, j, k, l, +m, n, o, oa, oo, ou, p, q, r, s, t, u, ui, v, w, x, y, z, and the masteres +teaching their puples to sound the diphthonges, not be the vouales quharof +they be made, but be the sound quhilk they mak in speaking; lykwayes I wald +have them name w, not duble u nor v, singl u, as now they doe; but the +last, vau or ve, and the first, wau or we; and j, for difference of the +voual i, written with a long tail, I wald wish to to be called jod or +je.</p> + + + + +<h4><a name = "chap1_6"> +OF THE SYLLAB.</a><br> +Cap. 6.</h4> + +<p>1. Now followes the syllab, quhilk is a ful sound symbolized with +convenient letteres, and consistes of ane or moe.</p> + +<p>2. A syllab of ane letter is symbolized with a voual onelie; as, a in +able, e in ever, i in idle, o in over, u in unitie, for a consonant can +make no syllab alane.</p> + +<p>3. A syllab of moe letteres is made of vouales onelie, or els of vouales +and consonantes. Of onlie vouales the syllab is called a diphthong, of +quhilk we have spoaken in the vouales quherof they ar composed.</p> + +<p>4. A syllab of vouales and consonantes either begin<i>n</i>es at the +voual, as al, il, el; or at one consona<i>n</i>t, as tal man; or at tuo +consona<i>n</i>tes, as stand, sleep; or els at thre at the maest, as +strand, stryp. It endes either at a voual, as fa, fo; or at one consonant, +as ar, er; or at tuo, as best, dart; or at thre at the maest, as durst, +worst.</p> + +<p>5. Heer is to be noated, that in divyding syllabes, the consonantes, one +or moe, that may begin a syllab anie way in the middes of a word belong to +the voual following, as in que-stion, qua-rel, fi-shar, sa-fron, ba-stard, +de-scrib, re-scue.</p> + +<p>6. It is alsoe heer to be observed in printing and wryting, that quhen a +word fales to be divyded at the end of a lyne, that the partition must be +made at the end of a syllab, soe that the one lyne end at the end of the +whol syllab, and the other begin the next lyne. As, +<span class = "pagenum">17</span> +<a name = "page17"> </a> +for exemple, if this word magistrat fel to be divided at the first syllab, +it behoved to be ma-gistrat; if at the second, it behoved to be magi-strat; +but no wayes to parte the m from the a, nor the g from the i, nor the s +from t, nor the t from r.</p> + + + + +<h4><a name = "chap1_7a"> +OF THE RULES TO SYMBOLIZE.</a><br> +Cap. 7.</h4> + +<p>1. To symboliz right, the sound of the voual is first to be observed, +quhither it be a simple voual or a compound, and quhilk of them is to be +chosen, for quhilk no rule can be geven but the judgeme<i>n</i>t of the +ear.</p> + +<p>2. Next the consonantes are to be marked; and first, quhither they break +the voual befoer or behind; then quhither they be one or moe; and lastlie, +w<i>i</i>th quhat organes of the mouth they be broaken.</p> + +<p>3. For be the organes of the mouth, quherwith the syllab is broaken, the +consonantes are discerned be quhilk the syllab must be symbolized, quhilk +we have said, cap 1, sect. 5.</p> + +<p>4. The consonantes may differ in hammar (as we called it, <a href = "#chap1_4">cap. 4</a>, sect +3) and stiddie, as b and d. Or they may agre in ham<i>m</i>er and differ in +stiddie, as b and v. Or they may agre in both and differ in the tuich, as f +and v, m and p, t and g.</p> + +<p>5. The tuich befoer the voual is be lifting the ham<i>m</i>er af the +stiddie; as da, la, pa; and behind, be stryking the hammer on the stiddie; +as ad, al, ap. And quhen the hammer and the stiddie are ane, the difference +is in the hardnes and softnes of the tuich; as may be seen in ca and ga, ta +and da. But w and y maekes sae soft a mynt that it is hard to perceave, and +therfoer did the latines symboliz them with the symbol of the vouales. They +are never used but befoer the voual; as we, ye, wil, you; behynd the voual +thei mak noe consonant sound, nor sould be written, and therfore now and +vow, with sik otheres, are not [to] be written w<i>i</i>th w, as is said +befoer.</p> + +<p>6. Of this q<i>uhi</i>lk now is said may be gathered that general, +q<i>uhi</i>lk I called the keie of orthographie, <a href = "#chap1_1">cap. 1</a> sect. 5, that is +the congruence of the symbol and sound symbolized; that is, that bathe must +belang to the same organes and be tuiched after the same form.</p> + +<p><span class = "pagenum">18</span> +<a name = "page18"> </a> +7. And, be the contrarie, here it is clere that soundes pronu<i>n</i>ced +with this organ can not be written with symboles of that; as, for exemple, +a labiel symbol can not serve a dental nor a guttural sound; nor a guttural +symbol a dental nor a labiel sound.</p> + +<p>8. To clere this point, and alsoe to reform an errour bred in the south, +and now usurped be our ignorant printeres, I wil tel quhat befel my self +quhen I was in the south with a special gud frende of myne. Ther rease, +upon sum accident, quhither quho, quhen, quhat, <i>et</i>c., sould be +symbolized with q or w, a hoat disputation betuene him and me. After manie +conflictes (for we ofte encountered), we met be chance, in the citie of +Baeth, w<i>i</i>th a Doctour of divinitie of both our acquentance. He +invited us to denner. At table my antagonist, to bring the question on foot +ama<i>n</i>gs his awn condisciples, began that I was becum an heretik, and +the doctour spering how, ansuered that I denyed quho to be spelled with a +w, but with qu. Be quhat reason? quod the D<i>octour</i>. Here, I +beginni<i>n</i>g to lay my gru<i>n</i>des of labial, dental, and guttural +soundes and symboles, he snapped me on this hand and he on that, that the +d<i>octour</i> had mikle a doe to win me room for a syllogisme. Then (said +I) a labial letter can not symboliz a guttural syllab. But w is a labial +letter, quho a guttural sound. And therfoer w can not symboliz quho, nor +noe syllab of that nature. Here the d<i>octour</i> staying them again (for +al barked at ones), the proposition, said he, I understand; the assumption +is Scottish, and the conclusion false. Quherat al laughed, as if I had bene +dryven from al replye, and I fretted to see a frivolouse jest goe for a +solid ansuer. My proposition is grounded on the 7 sectio of this same cap., +q<i>uhi</i>lk noe man, I trow, can denye that ever suked the paepes of +reason. And soe the question must rest on the assumption quhither w be a +labial letter and quho a guttural syllab. As for w, let the exemples of +wil, wel, wyne, juge quhilk are sounded befoer the voual with a mint of the +lippes, as is said the same cap., sect. 5. As for quho, besydes that it +differres from quo onelie be aspiration, and that w, being noe perfect +consonant, can not be aspirated, I appele to al judiciouse eares, to +q<i>uhi</i>lk Cicero attributed mikle, quhither the aspiration in quho be +not ex imo gutture, and therfoer not labial.</p> + + + + +<span class = "pagenum">19</span> +<a name = "page19"> </a> +<h4><a name = "chap1_7b"> +OF RULES FROM THE LATIN.</a><br> +Cap. 7. (<span class = "plainital">sic.</span>)</h4> + + +<p>1. Heer, seeing we borrow mikle from the latin, it is reason that we +either follow them in symbolizing their’s, or deduce from them the +groundes of our orthographie.</p> + +<p>2. Imprimis, then, quhatever we derive from them written with c we sould +alsoe wryte with c, howbeit it sound as an s to the ignorant; as conceave, +receave, perceave, from concipio, recipio, percipio; concern, discern, from +concerno, discerno; accesse, successe, recesse, from accedo, succedo, +recedo, w<i>i</i>th manie moe, q<i>uhi</i>lk I com<i>m</i>end to the +attention of the wryter.</p> + +<p>3. Also quhat they wryte w<i>i</i>th s we sould alsoe wryte with s; as +servant, from servus; sense, from sensus; session from sessio; passion, +from passio.</p> + +<p>4. Neither is the c joined w<i>i</i>th s here to be omitted; as science +and conscience, from scientia, conscientia; ascend and descend, from +ascendo, descendo; rescind and abscind, from rescindo and abscindo.</p> + +<p>4 (<i>sic</i>). This difference of c and s is the more attentivelie to +be marked for that wordes of one sound and diverse signification are many +tymes distinguished be these symboles; as, the kinges secrete council, and +the faithful counsil of a frende; concent in musik, and consent of myndes; +to duel in a cel, and to sel a horse; a decent weed, and descent of a noble +house. These tuo last differres alsoe in accent.</p> + +<p>5. Lykwayes, that we derive from latin verbales in tio, sould also be +wrytten with t; as oration, visitation, education, vocation, proclamation, +admonition, <i>et</i>c.</p> + +<p>6. Wordes deryved from the latin in tia and tium we wryte with ce; as +justice, from justitia; intelligence, from intelligentia; vice, from +vitium; service, from servitium. In al q<i>uhi</i>lk, houbeit the e behind +the c be idle, yet use hes made it tollerable to noat the breaking of the +c, for al tongues bear with sum slippes that can not abyde the tuich stone +of true orthographie.</p> + +<p>7. C is alsoe written in our wordes deryved from x in latin; as peace, +from pax; fornace, from fornax; matrice, from matrix; nurice, from +<span class = "pagenum">20</span> +<a name = "page20"> </a> +nutrix, q<i>uhi</i>lk the south calles nurse, not without a falt both in +sound and symbol; be this we wryte felicitie, audacitie, tenacitie, +<i>et</i>c.</p> + +<p>8. Lykwayes we sould keep the vouales of the original, quherin the north +warres the south; from retineo, the north retine, the south retain; from +foras, the north foran, the south forain; from regnu<i>m</i>, the north +regne, the south raigne; from cor, the north corage, the south courage; +from devoro, the north devore, the south devour; from vox, the north voce, +the south voice; from devoveo, the north devote, the south devoute; from +guerrum, the north were, the south war; from gigas, gigantis, the north +gyant, the south giaunt; from mons, montis, the north mont, the south +mount. Of this I cold reckon armies, but wil not presume to judge farther +then the compasse of my awn cap, for howbeit we keep nearar the original, +yet al tongues have their idiom in borrowing from the latin, or other +foran tongues.</p> + + + + +<h4><a name = "chap1_8"> +OF SUM IDIOMES IN OUR ORTHOGRAPHIE.</a><br> +Cap. 8.</h4> + +<p>1. In our tongue we have some particles q<i>uhi</i>lk can not be +symbolized with roman symboles, nor rightlie pronunced but be our awn, for +we in manye places soe absorb l and n behynd a consonant, quher they can +not move without a voual intervening, that the ear can hardlie judge +quhither their intervenes a voual or noe.</p> + +<p>2. In this case sum, to avoid the pronu<i>n</i>ciation of the voual +befoer the l and n, wrytes it behind; as litle, mikle, muttne, eatne. +Quhilk houbeit it incurres in an other inconvenience of pronu<i>n</i>cing +the voual behind the l or n, yet I dar not presume to reprove, because it +passeth my wit how to avoid both inconveniences, and therfoer this I leave +to the wil of the wryter.</p> + +<p>3. Sum of our men hes taken up sum unusual formes of symbolizing, +q<i>uhi</i>lk I wald wish to be reformed, yet if I bring not reason, let no +man change for my phantasie.</p> + +<p>4. First, for peple they wryte people, I trow because it cumes from +populus; but if that be a reason, I wald understand a reason quhy +<span class = "pagenum">21</span> +<a name = "page21"> </a> +they speak not soe alsoe. Or gif they speak not soe, I wald understand quhy +they wryte not as they speak. I knawe they have the exemple of France to +speak ane way and wryte an other; but that exemple is as gud to absorb the +s in the end of everie word. Al exemples are not imitable.</p> + +<p>5. They use alsoe to wryte logicque, musicque, rhetoricque, and other of +that sorte, with cque. If this be doon to make the c in logica, +<i>et</i>c., subsist, quhy wer it not better to supply a k in the place of +it, then to hedge it in with a whol idle syllab; it wer both more +orthographical and easier for the learner, for c and k are sa sib, +<i>tha</i>t the ane is a greek and the other a latin symbol of one sound. +In this art it is alyke absurd to wryte that thou reades not, as to read +that thou wrytes not.</p> + +<p>6. We use alsoe, almost at the end of everie word, to wryte an idle e. +This sum defend not to be idle, because it affectes the voual before the +consonant, the sound quherof many tymes alteres the signification; as, hop +is altero tantu<i>m</i> pede saltare, hope is sperare; fir, abies, fyre, +ignis; a fin, pinna, fine, probatus; bid, jubere, bide, manere; with many +moe. It is true that the sound of the voual befoer the consonant many tymes +doth change the signification; but it is as untrue that the voual e behind +the consonant doth change the sound of the voual before it. A voual devyded +from a voual be a consonant can be noe possible means return thorough the +consonant into the former voual. Consonantes betuene vouales are lyke +partition walles betuen roomes. Nothing can change the sound of a voual but +an other voual coalescing with it into one sound, of q<i>uhi</i>lk we have +spoaken sufficientlie, <a href = "#chap1_3">cap. 3</a>, to illustrat this be the same exemples, +saltare is to hop; sperare to hoep; abies is fir; ignis, fyr, or, if you +wil, fier; jubere is bid; manere, byd or bied.</p> + +<p>7. Yet in sum case we are forced to tolerat this idle e; 1. in wordes +ending in c, to break the sound of it; as peace, face, lace, justice, +<i>et</i>c.; 2. behind s, in wordes wryten with this s; as false, ise, +case, muse, use, <i>et</i>c.; 3. behind a broaken g; as knawlege, savage, +suage, ald age. Ther may be moe, and these I yeld because I ken noe other +waye to help this necessitie, rather then that I can think anye idle symbol +tolerable in just orthographie.</p> + + + + +<span class = "pagenum">22</span> +<a name = "page22"> </a> +<h4><a name = "chap1_9"> +OF THE ACCENTES OF OUR TONGUE.</a><br> +Cap. 9.</h4> + +<p>1. Seing that we fynd not onelie the south and north to differ more in +accent then symbol, but alsoe one word with a sundrie accent to have a +diverse signification, I com<i>m</i>end this to him quho hes auctoritie, to +com<i>m</i>and al printeres and wryteres to noat the accented syllab in +everie word with noe lesse diligence then we see the grecianes to noat +their’s.</p> + +<p>2. Cicero, in his buik de Oratore ad Brutum, makes it a natural harmonie +that everie word pronunced be the mouth of man have one acute syllab, and +that never farther from the end then the third syllab, quhilk the +grammareanes cales to the same end the antepenult. Quhilk observation of so +noble a wit is most true in tongues q<i>uhi</i>lk he understud, the greek +and latin. But if Cicero had understud our tongue, he sould have hard the +accent in the fourth syllab from the end; as in mátrimonie, pátrimonie, +vadimonie, intóllerable, intélligences, and whole garrisones of lyke +liverie. This anie eare may if he accent the antepenult matrímonie, or the +penult matrimónie, or the last as matrimoníe.</p> + +<p>3. Then to the purpose we have the same accentes q<i>uhi</i>lk the latin +and the greek hath, acute, circu<i>m</i>flex, and grave.</p> + +<p>4. The acute raiseth the syllab quheron it sittes; as profésse, prófit, +ímpudent.</p> + +<p>5. It may possesse the last syllab: as supprést, preténce, sincere; the +penult: as súbject, cándle, cráftie; the antepenult: as diffícultie, +mínister, fínallie; and the fourth also from the end, as is said sect. 2; +as spéciallie, insátiable, díligentlie. In al q<i>uhi</i>lk, if a man +change the acce<i>n</i>t, he sall spill the sound of the word.</p> + +<p>6. The grave accent is never noated, but onelie understood in al +syllabes quherin the acute and circumflex is not. Onlie, for difference, +sum wordes ar marked with it, thus `, leaning contrarie to the acute.</p> + +<p>7. The circumflex accent both liftes and felles the syllab that it +possesseth, and combynes the markes of other tuae, thus ˆ. Of this we, as +the latines, hes almost no use. But the south hath great use +<span class = "pagenum">23</span> +<a name = "page23"> </a> +of it, and in that their dialect differes more from our’s then in other +soundes or symboles.</p> + +<p>8. The use of the accent wil be of good importance for the right +pronu<i>n</i>ciation of our tongue, quhilk now we doe forte, non arte, and +conforming of the dialectes, q<i>uhi</i>lk, as I have said, differes most +in this.</p> + + + + +<h4><a name = "chap1_10"> +OF THE APOSTROPHUS AND HYPHEN.</a><br> +Cap. 10.</h4> + +<p>1. The learned printeres uses to symboliz apostrophus and hyphen as wel +as a, b, c.</p> + +<p>2. Apostrophus is the ejecting of a letter or a syllab out of one word +or out betuene tuae, and is alwayes marked above the lyne, as it wer a +com<i>m</i>a, thus ‘.</p> + +<p>3. Out of one word the apostrophus is most usual in poesie; as Ps. 73, +v. 3, for quhen I sau such foolish men, I grug’d, and did disdain; and v. +19, They are destroy’d, dispatch’d, consum’d.</p> + +<p>4. Betuene tuae wordes we abate either from the end of the former or the +beginni<i>n</i>g of the later.</p> + +<p>5. We abate from the end of the former quhen it endes in a voual and the +next beginnes at a voual; as, th’ ingrate; th’ one parte; I s’ it, for I +see it.</p> + +<p>6. In abating from the word following, we, in the north, use a +mervelouse libertie; as, he’s a wyse man, for he is a wyse man; I’l meet +with him, for I wil meet with him; a ship ’l of fooles, for a ship ful of +fooles; and this we use in our com<i>m</i>on language. And q<i>uhil</i>k is +stranger, we manie tymes cut of the end of the word; as, he’s tel the, for +he sal tel the.</p> + +<p>7. This for apostrophus. Hyphen is, as it wer, a band uniting whol +wordes joined in composition; as, a hand-maed, a heard-man, tongue-tyed, +out-rage, foer-warned, mis-reported, fals-deemed.</p> + +<hr class = "smaller"> + +<h3><i><a name = "congruitie">OF THE CONGRUITIE</a><br> + +OF OUR BRITAN<br> + +TONGUE.</i></h3> + +<h4><i>LIB. 2.</i></h4> + +<hr class = "smaller"> + +<span class = "pagenum">27</span> +<a name = "page27"> </a> +<h4><a name = "chap2_1"> +OF THE PERSON.</a><br> +Cap. 1.</h4> + +<p>1. Al wordes q<i>uhi</i>lk we use to expresse our mynde are personal or +impersonal.</p> + +<p>2. A personal word is q<i>uhi</i>lk admittes diversitie of person.</p> + +<p>3. Person is the face of a word, quhilk in diverse formes of speach it +diverselie putes on; as, I, Peter, say that thou art the son of God. Thou, +Peter, sayes that I am the son of God. Peter said that I am the son of +God.</p> + +<p>4. Quherupon person is first, second, and third.</p> + +<p>5. The first person is of him that speakes; as, I wryte.</p> + +<p>6. The second person is of him that is spoaken to; as, thou wrytes.</p> + +<p>7. The third person is of him that is spoaken of; as, Peter wrytes.</p> + + + + +<h4><a name = "chap2_2"> +OF NU<i>M</i>BER.</a><br> +Cap. 2.</h4> + +<p>1. Number is distinction of person be one and moe; and soe is singular +and plural.</p> + +<p>2. The singular speakes of one; as, a hand, a tree, a sheep, a horse, a +man.</p> + +<p>3. The plural speakes of moe then one; as, handes, trees, sheep, horses, +men, tuo, three, foure, or moe, or how manie soever.</p> + +<p>4. This difference is com<i>m</i>onlie noted with es at the end of the +word singular; as, a house, houses; a windoe, windoes; a doore, tuo +doores.</p> + +<p>5. Sum tymes it is noated be changing a letter; as, a man, men; a woman, +wemen; a goose, geese.</p> + +<p>6. Sum tyme be changing noe thing; as, a sheep, a thousand sheep; a +horse, an hundred horse; a noute, ten noute.</p> + + + + +<h4><a name = "chap2_3"> +OF THE DETERMINATION OF THE PERSON.</a><br> +Cap. 3.</h4> + +<p>1. A personal word is a noun or a verb. A noun is a word of one person +w<i>i</i>th gender and case; as, I is onelie of the first person; thou +<span class = "pagenum">28</span> +<a name = "page28"> </a> +is onelie of the second; and al other nounes are onelie the third person; +as, thou, Thomas, head, hand, stone, blok, except they be joined with I or +thou.</p> + +<p>2. The person of a noun singular is determined or undetermined.</p> + +<p>3. The determined person is noated with the, and it is determined either +be an other substantive; as, the king of Britan; or be an adjective; as, +the best king in Europ; or be a relative; as, God preserve the king quhom +he hath geven us.</p> + +<p>4. The undetermined noun is noated with an befoer a voual; as, an ald +man sould be wyse; and with a befoer a consonant; as, a father sould +com<i>m</i>and his son.</p> + + + + +<h4><a name = "chap2_4"> +OF THE GENDER OF A NOUN.</a><br> +Cap. 4.</h4> + +<p>1. Gender is the affection of a noun for distinction of sex.</p> + +<p>2. Sex is a distinction of a noun be male and female, and these are +distinguished the one from the other, or both from thinges without sex.</p> + +<p>3. The one is distinguished from the other be he and she.</p> + +<p>4. He is the noat of the male; as, he is a gud judge; he is a wyse man; +he is a speedie horse; he is a crouse cock; he is a fat wether.</p> + +<p>5. She is the noate of the femal sex; as, she is a chast matron; she is +a stud meer; she is a fat hen; she is a milk cowe.</p> + +<p>6. Nounes that want sex are noated with it; as, it is a tale tree; it is +a sueet aple; it is a hard flint; it is a faer day; it is a foul way.</p> + +<p>7. In the plural number they are not distinguished; as, they are honest +men; they are vertueouse ladies; they are highe montanes.</p> + + + + +<h4><a name = "chap2_5"> +OF THE CASE OF THE NOUN.</a><br> +Cap. 5.</h4> + +<p>1. Case is an affection of a noun for distinction of person; as, the +corner stone fel on me; stone is the nominative case. The corner of a stone +hurt me; stone is the genitive case. Quhat can you doe to a stone; stone is +the dative case. He brak the stones; it is the accusative +<span class = "pagenum">29</span> +<a name = "page29"> </a> +case. Quhy standes thou stone; it is the vocative. And he hurt me with a +stone; it is the ablative case.</p> + +<p>2. This difference we declyne, not as doth the latines and greekes, be +terminationes, but with noates, after the maner of the hebrues, quhilk they +cal particles.</p> + +<p>3. The nominative hath no other noat but the particle of determination; +as, the peple is a beast with manie heades; a horse serves man to manie +uses; men in auctoritie sould be lanternes of light.</p> + +<p>4. Our genitive is alwayes joyned with an other noun, and is noated with +of, or s.</p> + +<p>5. With of, it followes the noun quhar w<i>i</i>th it is joined; as, the +house of a good man is wel governed.</p> + +<p>6. With s it preceedes the word quherof it is governed, and s is devyded +from it with an apostrophus; as, a gud man’s house is wel governed.</p> + +<p>7. This s sum haldes to be a segment of his, and therfoer now almost al +wrytes his for it, as if it wer a corruption. But it is not a segment of +his; 1. because his is the masculin gender, and this may be fœminin; +as, a mother’s love is tender; 2. because his is onelie singular, and this +may be plural; as, al men’s vertues are not knawen.</p> + +<p>8. The dative is noated w<i>i</i>th to, and for; as, geve libertie evin +to the best youth and it wil luxuriat. Al men doeth for them selves; few +for a frende.</p> + +<p>9. The accusative hath noe other noat then the nominative; as, the head +governes the bodie.</p> + +<p>10. The vocative is the person to quhom the speach is directed; as, +quhence cumes thou Æneas.</p> + +<p>11. The ablative is noated w<i>i</i>th prepositiones in, with, be, and +sik lyke; as, be god al thinges wer made; God w<i>i</i>th his word his +warkes began; in my father’s house are manie mansiones.</p> + + + + +<h4><a name = "chap2_6"> +OF THE DEGREES OF COMPARISON.</a><br> +Cap. 6.</h4> + +<p>1. Al nounes that wil join with a substantive ar called adjectives; as, +gud, high, hard, sueet, sour.</p> + +<p><span class = "pagenum">30</span> +<a name = "page30"> </a> +2. These, and al that wil admit mare and mast, are compared be degrees; as, +sueet, more sueet, most sueet.</p> + +<p>3. Of comparison ther be thre degrees: the positive, comparative, and +superlative, if the first may be called a degre.</p> + +<p>4. The positive is the first position of the noun; as, soft, hard; +quhyte, blak; hoat, cald.</p> + +<p>5. The comparative excedes the positive be more, and is formed of the +positive be adding er; as, softer, harder; quhiter, blaker; hoater, +calder.</p> + +<p>6. The superlative excedes the positive be most, and is formed of the +positive be adding est; as, softest, hardest; quhytest, blakest; hoatest, +caldest.</p> + + + + +<h4><a name = "chap2_7"> +OF THE VERB’S PERSON AND NUMBER.</a><br> +Cap. 7.</h4> + +<p>1. This for the noun. The verb is a word of al persones declyned with +mood and tyme; as, I wryte, thou wrytes, he wrytes.</p> + +<p>2. We declyne not the persones and nu<i>m</i>beres of the verb, as doth +the latine, but noat them be the person of the noun.</p> + +<p>3. They are noated w<i>i</i>th I, thou, and he in the singular number; +we, ye, and they in the plural.</p> + +<p>4. The nu<i>m</i>ber is noated with I and we; thou and ye; he and +they.</p> + + + + +<h4><a name = "chap2_8"> +OF THE MOOD OF THE VERB.</a><br> +Cap. 8.</h4> + +<p>1. The mood is an affection of the verb serving the varietie of +utterance.</p> + +<p>2. We utter the being of thinges or our awn wil.</p> + +<p>3. The being of thinges is uttered be inquyring or avouing.</p> + +<p>4. We inquyre of that we wald knaw; as, made God man w<i>i</i>thout +synne; and in this the supposit of the verb followes the verb.</p> + +<p>5. We avoue that q<i>uhi</i>lk we knaw; as, God made man without sinne; +and in this the supposit preceedes the verb.</p> + +<p><span class = "pagenum">31</span> +<a name = "page31"> </a> +6. We utter our wil be verbes signifying the form of our wil, or postposing +the supposit.</p> + +<p>7. We wish be wald god, god grant, and god nor; as, wald god I knew the +secretes of nature.</p> + +<p>8. We permit the will of otheres be letting; as, let God aryse; let +everie man have his awn wyfe.</p> + +<p>9. We bid our inferioures, and pray our superioures, be postponing the +supposit to the verb; as, goe ye and teach al nationes; here me, my +God.</p> + + + + +<h4><a name = "chap2_9"> +OF THE TYME OF THE VERB.</a><br> +Cap. 9.</h4> + +<p>1. Tyme is an affection of the verb noating the differences of tyme, and +is either present, past, or to cum.</p> + +<p>2. Tyme present is that q<i>uhi</i>lk now is; as, I wryte, or am +wryting.</p> + +<p>3. Tyme past is that q<i>uhi</i>lk was, and it is passing befoer, past +els, or past befoer.</p> + +<p>4. Tyme passing befoer, q<i>uhi</i>lk we cal imperfectlie past, is of a +thing that was doeing but not done; as, at four hoores I was wryting; Quhen +you spak to me I was wryting, or did wryte, as Lillie expoundes it.</p> + +<p>5. Tyme past els is of a thing now past, q<i>uhi</i>lk we cal perfectlie +past; as, I have written.</p> + +<p>6. Tyme past befoer is of a thing befoer done and ended; as, at four +hoores, or quhen you spak to me, I had written.</p> + +<p>7. Tyme to cum is of that q<i>uhi</i>lk is not yet begun; as, at four +houres I wil wryte.</p> + + + + +<h4><a name = "chap2_10"> +OF THE POWER OF THE VERB.</a><br> +Cap. 10.</h4> + +<p>1. A verb signifies being or doeing. Of being ther is onelie one, I am, +and is thus varyed.</p> + +<p>2. In the present tyme, I am, thou art, he is; we are, ye are, they +are.</p> + +<p><span class = "pagenum">32</span> +<a name = "page32"> </a> +3. In tyme passing befoer, I was, thou was, he was; we wer, ye wer, they +wer.</p> + +<p>4. In tyme past els, I have bene, thou hes bene, he hes bene; we have +bene, ye have bene, they have bene.</p> + +<p>5. In tyme past befoer, I had bene, thou had bene, he had bene; we had +bene, ye had bene, they had bene.</p> + +<p>6. In tyme to cum, I wil be, thou wilt be, he wil be; we wil be, ye wil +be, they wil be.</p> + +<p>7. Verbes of doing are actives or passives.</p> + +<p>8. The active verb adheres to the person of the agent; as, Christ hath +conquered hel and death.</p> + +<p>9. The passive verb adheres to the person of the patient; as, hel and +death are conquered be Christ.</p> + +<p>10. These our idiom conjugates onelie in tuo tymes, the tyme present and +tym past; as, I wryte, I wrote; I speak, I spak; I here, I hard; I se, I +saw; I fele, I felt.</p> + +<p>11. The other differences of tyme ar expressed be the notes of the verb +of being, or be the verb of being it self, and a participle; as, I was +wryting; I have written; I had written; I wil wryte.</p> + + + + +<h4><a name = "chap2_11"> +OF THE ADVERB.</a><br> +Cap. 11.</h4> + +<p>1. A word impersonal is q<i>uhi</i>lk in al formes of speach keepes one +face, and this is adverb or conjunction.</p> + +<p>2. An adverb is a word adhering mast com<i>m</i>onlie w<i>i</i>th a verb +with one face in al moodes, tymes, nu<i>m</i>beres and persones; as, I leve +hardlie, thou leves hardlie; I did leve hardlie; I have leved hardlie; I +had leved hardlie; I wil leave hardlie; leve he hardlie; God forbid he leve +hardlie.</p> + +<p>3. Our men confoundes adverbes of place, q<i>uhi</i>lk the south +distinguishes as wel as the latin, and therfoer let us not shame to +learne.</p> + +<p>4. They use quher, heer, ther, for the place in q<i>uhi</i>lk; quhence, +hence, thence, for the place from quhilk; quhither, hither, thither, for +the place to q<i>uhi</i>lk; as, quher dwel you? quhence cum you? quhither +goe you?</p> + +<p><span class = "pagenum">33</span> +<a name = "page33"> </a> +5. They also distinguish wel in, into, and unto: in, they use with the +place quher; into, with the thing quhither; and unto, for how far; as, our +father, q<i>uhi</i>lk art in heavin, admit us into heavin, and lift us from +the earth unto heavin.</p> + +<p>6. Heer, becaus sum nounes incurre into adverbes, let us alsoe noat +their differences.</p> + +<p>7. First no and not. Noe is a noun, nullus in latin, and in our tongue +alwayes precedes the substantive quhilk it nulleth; as, noe man, noe angle, +noe god.</p> + +<p>8. Not is an adverb, non in latin, and in our tong followes the verb +that it nulleth; as, heer not, grant not; I heer not, I grant not; I wil +not heer, I wil not grant.</p> + +<p>9. Ane, in our idiom, and an. Ane is a noun of nu<i>m</i>ber, in latin +unus; an a particule of determination preceding a voual, as we have said +<a href = "#chap1_3">cap. 3</a>, sect. 4.</p> + +<p>10. Thee and the. Thee is the accusative of thou; as, thou loves God, +and God loves thee. The is the determined not of a noun, of q<i>uhi</i>lk +we spak <a href = "#chap1_3">cap. 3</a>, sect. 3.</p> + + + + +<h4><a name = "chap2_12"> +OF THE CONJUNCTION.</a><br> +Cap. 12.</h4> + +<p>1. Conjunction is a word impersonal serving to cople diverse senses. And +of it ther be tuoe sortes, the one enu<i>n</i>ciative, and the other +ratiocinative.</p> + +<p>2. The conjunction enunciative copies the partes of a period, and are +copulative, as and; connexive, as if; disjunctive, as or; or discretive, as +howbe it.</p> + +<p>3. The ratiocinative coples the partes of a ratiocination, and it either +inferres the conclusion or the reason.</p> + +<p>4. Therfoer inferres the conclusion; as, noe man can keep the law in +thought, word, and deed: and therfoer noe man befoer the judg of the hart, +word, and deed, can be justifyed be the law.</p> + +<p>5. Because inferres the reason; as, I wil spew the out, because thou art +nether hoat nor cald.</p> + + + + +<span class = "pagenum">34</span> +<a name = "page34"> </a> +<h4><a name = "chap2_13"> +OF DISTINCTIONES.</a><br> +Cap. 13.</h4> + +<p>1. A distinction is quherbe sentences are distinguished in wryting and +reading. And this is perfect or imperfect.</p> + +<p>2. A perfect distinction closes a perfect sense, and is marked with a +round punct, thus . or a tailed punct, thus ?</p> + +<p>3. The round punct concludes an assertion; as, if Abraham was justifyed +be workes, he had quherof to glorie.</p> + +<p>4. The tailed punct concludes an interrogation; as, sal we, quha are +dead to syn, leve to it?</p> + +<p>5. The imperfect distinction divydes the partes of a period, and is +marked with tuoe punctes, the one under the other, thus : and is red with +half the pause of a perfect punct; as, al have synned, and fallen from the +glorie of god: but are justifyed frelie be his grace.</p> + +<p>6. The com<i>m</i>a divydes the least partes of the period, and is +pronunced in reading with a short sob.</p> + +<p>7. The parenthesis divydes in the period a sentence interlaced on sum +occurrences q<i>uhi</i>lk coheres be noe syntax w<i>i</i>th that +q<i>uhi</i>lk preceedes and followes; as, for exemple of beath, and to +conclud this treatesse:</p> + +<br> + +<p><span class = "inset"> +Bless, guyd, advance, preserve, prolong Lord (if thy pleasur be)</span><br> +<span class = "inset"> +Our King <i>and</i> Queen, and keep their seed thy name to magnifie. +</span></p> + +<hr> + +<span class = "pagenum">35</span> +<a name = "page35"> </a> +<h2><a name = "notes">NOTES.</a></h2> +<hr class = "tiny"> + +<p>The foregoing Tract is one of great interest, not only on account of its +intrinsic merit, but also for the racy style of writing adopted by its +author. We find him continually garnishing his language with such idiomatic +and colloquial expressions as the following:—“Quhae’s sillie braine +will reache no farther then the compas of their cap” (page <a href = +"#page2">2</a>); and again, “but will not presume to judge farther then the +compasse of my awn cap” (p. <a href = "#page20">20</a>). He observes of the +printers and writers of his age that they care “for noe more arte then may +win the pennie” (p. <a href = "#page2">2</a>), and on the same page he +says, “quhiles I stack in this claye,” which appears to be equivalent to +our term “stuck in the mud.” At p. <a href = "#page3">3</a> he says, “and +it wer but a clod;” at p. <a href = "#page14">14</a>, “neither daer I, with +al the oares of reason, row against so strang a tyde;” and again, on p. <a +href = "#page18">18</a>, we find reason under another aspect, thus, “noe +man I trow can denye that ever suked the paepes of reason.”</p> + +<p>It seems that the expression, <i>Queen’s English</i>, is by no means of +modern date, as we have it as the <i>king’s language</i> at p. <a href = +"#page2">2</a>.</p> + +<p>Hume laments, in his Dedication, the uncertainty of the orthography +prevailing at the time he writes, and yet we find him spelling words +several different ways, even within the compass of a single sentence, +without being able to lay the blame upon the printers; thus we find him +writing ju<i>d</i>gement on p. <a href = "#page11">11</a>, ju<i>d</i>ge p. +<a href = "#page8">8</a>, and ju<i>d</i>g p. <a href = "#page33">33</a>, +but juge p. <a href = "#page18">18</a>; and there are numberless other +instances that it would be tedious to enumerate. Again, the author uses a +mixture of Scotch and English, so we have sometimes ane and sometimes one; +nae on page <a href = "#page1">1</a> and noe on p. <a href = +"#page2">2</a>; mare and mast, and more and most, even in the same sentence +(p. <a href = "#page30">30</a>); and two is spelt in three different ways, +tuae, tuo, and tuoe.</p> + +<p>Our author’s stay in England appears to have drawn his attention to the +differences between the two languages of Scotland and England, which he +distinguishes as North and South. He certainly shows, in some instances, +the greater correctness of the Scotch with regard to the +<span class = "pagenum">36</span> +<a name = "page36"> </a> +spelling of words derived from the Latin; as, retine instead of retain, +corage instead of courage, etc. (p. <a href = "#page20">20</a>), in which +words the redundant letters that we Southerners have introduced are thrown +out. He is, however, by no means partial, and gives us praise when he +thinks we deserve it.</p> + +<p class = "#pagenotes"> +Page <a href = "#page9">9</a>. The arguments in favour of the sound given +by the English Universities to the Latin <i>i</i> are curious: it is stated +to have its value in the Greek ει; but the author seems to +have been in error as to the English sounding mihi and tibi alike, or our +pronunciation must have changed since his time.</p> + +<p class = "#pagenotes"> +P. <a href = "#page10">10</a>. The author speaks of the letter <i>y</i> as +being used by the South for the sound now symbolized by <i>i</i> with a +final <i>e</i> following the succeeding consonant, as <i>will</i> with an +<i>i</i>, and <i>wile</i> with a <i>y</i> in place of the <i>i</i> and +final <i>e</i>; thus in the same way he spells write, <i>wryt</i>.</p> + +<p class = "#pagenotes"> +P. <a href = "#page11">11</a> (7). He gives food, good, blood, as examples +of the same sound, thus inferring that the English pronounced the two +latter so as to rhyme with food.</p> + +<p class = "#pagenotes"> +P. <a href = "#page11">11</a> (8). He objects to the use of <i>w</i> for +<i>u</i> in the diphthongal sound of <i>ou</i>, and therefore spells +<i>how</i>, <i>now</i>, etc., <i>hou</i>, <i>nou</i>.</p> + +<p class = "#pagenotes"> +P. <a href = "#page11">11</a> (10). It is difficult here to see what the +pronunciation of <i>buu</i> would be, which the author gives as the sound +of bow (to bow). Probably the sound he meant would be better represented by +<i>boo</i>.</p> + +<p class = "#pagenotes"> +P. <a href = "#page13">13</a> (12). The author here recommends the +distinction both of sound and symbol of <i>j</i> and <i>v</i> as +consonants, and <i>i</i> and <i>u</i> as vowels, and proposes that we +should call <i>j</i> <i>jod</i> or <i>je</i>, and <i>v</i> <i>vau</i> or +<i>ve</i>, and not single <i>u</i>, “as now they doe” (p. <a href = +"#page16">16</a>), and <i>w</i> he would call <i>wau</i> or <i>we</i>, and +moreover he places them in his alphabet on the same page. If this proposal +was originally his own, it is curious that the name <i>ve</i> should have +been adopted, though not the <i>we</i> for <i>w</i>. Ben Jonson points out +the double power of <i>i</i> and <i>v</i> as both consonant and vowel, but +he does not attempt to make them into separate letters as Hume does.</p> + +<p class = "#pagenotes"> +P. <a href = "#page15">15</a> (12). He gives as an anomaly of the South +that while the <i>d</i> is inserted before <i>g</i> in hedge, bridge, etc., +it is omitted in age, suage, etc. He does not see that the short vowel +requires a double consonant to prevent it from being pronounced long.</p> + +<p class = "#pagenotes"> +P. <a href = "#page21">21</a> (6). He disputes the possibility of a final +<i>e</i>, separated from a preceding vowel by a consonant, having any +effect whatever in altering the sound of the preceding vowel, and +recommends the use of a diphthong to express the sound required; as, hoep +for hope, fier for fire, bied for bide, befoer for before, maed for made, +etc. He uniformly throughout follows this rule.</p> + +<p class = "#pagenotes"> +<span class = "pagenum">37</span> +<a name = "page37"> </a> +P. <a href = "#page22">22</a> (5). Hume here accents difficultie on the +antepenultimate instead of the first syllable.</p> + +<p class = "#pagenotes"> +P. <a href = "#page23">23</a> (7). He puts down outrage as an instance of +two distinct words joined by a hyphen, which is the derivation given by Ash +in his dictionary, in strange obliviousness of the French word +<i>outrage</i>.</p> + +<p class = "#pagenotes"> +P. <a href = "#page27">27</a> (1, 6). <i>T</i> is omitted after <i>s</i> in +the second person singular of the verb, and so no distinction is made +between the second and the third persons; thus, thou wrytes, and at p. <a +href = "#page32">32</a> thou was, and thou hes.</p> + +<p class = "#pagenotes"> +P. <a href = "#page29">29</a> (7). The supposition that the apostrophe ’s +as a mark of the possessive case is a segment of his, a question which has +been lately revived, is here denied.</p> + +<p class = "#pagenotes"> +P. <a href = "#page34">34</a>. In this last chapter on Punctuation, which +the author styles “of Distinctiones,” no mention whatever is made of the +“semicolon,” though it occurs frequently in the MS., as, for instance, p. +<a href = "#page30">30</a>, cap. 6. This stop, according to Herbert, was +first used by Richard Grafton in <i>The Byble</i> printed in 1537: it +occurs in the Dedication. Henry Denham, an English printer who flourished +towards the close of the sixteenth century, was the first to use it with +propriety.</p> + +<p class = "#pagenotes"> +P. <a href = "#page34">34</a> (6). The explanation of the mode of +pronouncing the comma “with a short <i>sob</i>” is odd.<a class = "tag" +href = "#note5" name = "tag5"><sup>5</sup></a></p> + +<p>The author continually uses a singular verb to a plural noun; for +instance, “of this we, as the latines, hes almost no use” (p. <a href = +"#page22">22</a>), though on p. <a href = "#page20">20</a> he writes, “in +our tongue we have some particles.”</p> + +<p>With regard to the Manuscript, there are two corrections in it worth +noting. At p. <a href = "#page10">10</a> (6), in the phrase, “the auctours +<i>whole</i> drift,” the word had been originally written <i>hael</i>, but +is marked through, and <i>whole</i> substituted for it in the same +handwriting. At p. <a href = "#page21">21</a> (4), the word <i>frensh</i> +has been inserted before <i>exemples</i>, but has been afterwards struck +through.</p> + +<p>The numbering is wrong in three places, but it has not been corrected. +At p. <a href = "#page8">8</a> there are no sections 12 and 13, at pp. <a +href = "#page17">17</a>, <a href = "#page19">19</a>, there are two cap. 7, +and at p. <a href = "#page19">19</a> there are two sections 4.</p> + +<hr class = "smaller"> + +<span class = "pagenum">38</span> +<a name = "page38"> </a> +<h2><a name = "index">GLOSSARIAL INDEX.</a></h2> + + +<p><span class = "smalltype"> +[The words in the present Tract that really required to be glossed are but +few; I have, however, inserted in the following list most of the variations +from ordinary modern usage, in order that it may serve as an +Index.]</span></p> + +<table summary = "vocabulary list"> +<tr> +<td class = "glossary"> +<p class = "index"> +Af = of, p. <a href = "#page9">9</a>.<br> +Af = off, p. <a href = "#page12">12</a></p> +<p class = "index"> +Ald = old, pp. <a href = "#page3">3</a>, <a href = "#page21">21</a>, <a href += "#page28">28</a></p> +<p class = "index"> +Amangs = amongst, p. <a href = "#page18">18</a></p> +<p class = "index"> +Ane = a, one</p> +<p class = "index"> +Angle = angel, p. <a href = "#page33">33</a></p> +<p class = "index"> +Auctoritie = authority, pp. <a href = "#page22">22</a>, <a href = +"#page29">29</a></p> +<p class = "index"> +Aun = own, pp. <a href = "#page2">2</a>, <a href = "#page3">3</a>, <a href = +"#page7">7</a>, <a href = "#page8">8</a>, <a href = "#page11">11</a>, <a href += "#page15">15</a></p> +<p class = "index"> +Awn = own, pp. <a href = "#page11">11</a>, <a href = "#page18">18</a>, <a +href = "#page20">20</a>, <a href = "#page30">30</a>, <a href = +"#page31">31</a></p> +<p class = "index"> +Awn = proper, pp. <a href = "#page9">9</a>, <a href = "#page11">11</a>, <a +href = "#page13">13</a>, <a href = "#page15">15</a></p> +<p class = "index"> +Awne = proper, p. <a href = "#page14">14</a></p> +<p class = "index"> +Awne = own, p. <a href = "#page10">10</a></p> + +<p class = "index skip"> +Baeth = both, pp. <a href = "#page8">8</a>, <a href = "#page34">34</a></p> +<p class = "index"> +Bathe = both, p. <a href = "#page17">17</a></p> +<p class = "index"> +Be = by</p> +<p class = "index"> +Britan = British</p> + +<p class = "index skip"> +Cald = cold, pp. <a href = "#page30">30</a>, <a href = "#page33">33</a>;<br> +caldest, p. <a href = "#page30">30</a></p> +<p class = "index"> +Cales = calls, pp. <a href = "#page10">10</a>, <a href = +"#page22">22</a></p> +<p class = "index"> +Chirt = a squirt, or a squeeze through the teeth, pp. <a href = +"#page13">13</a>, <a href = "#page14">14</a>. See Ruddiman’s Glossary to G. +Douglas (<i>chirtand</i>)</p> +<p class = "index"> +Cold = could, p. <a href = "#page20">20</a></p> +<p class = "index"> +Coples = couples, p. <a href = "#page33">33</a></p> +<p class = "index"> +Corage = courage, p. <a href = "#page20">20</a></p> +<p class = "index"> +Crouse = brisk, p. <a href = "#page28">28</a></p> +<p class = "index"> +Cum = come, pp. <a href = "#page11">11</a>, <a href = "#page31">31</a>;<br> +cumes = comes, p. <a href = "#page29">29</a></p> + +<p class = "index skip"> +Devore = devour, p. <a href = "#page20">20</a></p> +<p class = "index"> +Devote = devout, p. <a href = "#page20">20</a></p> +<p class = "index"> +Distinctiones = punctuation, p. <a href = "#page34">34</a></p> +<p class = "index"> +Doon = done, p. <a href = "#page21">21</a></p> +<p class = "index"> +Doting = giving, p. <a href = "#page3">3</a></p> + +<p class = "index skip"> +Earand = errand, p. <a href = "#page8">8</a></p> +<p class = "index"> +Evin = even, p. <a href = "#page29">29</a></p> + +<p class = "index skip"> +Faer = fair, p. <a href = "#page28">28</a></p> +<p class = "index"> +Falt = fault, pp. <a href = "#page15">15</a>, <a href = "#page20">20</a></p> +<p class = "index"> +Fand = found, p. <a href = "#page1">1</a></p> +<p class = "index"> +Fele = feel, p. <a href = "#page32">32</a></p> +<p class = "index"> +Felles = lowers, p. <a href = "#page22">22</a></p> +<p class = "index"> +Finnes = fineness, p. <a href = "#page2">2</a></p> +<p class = "index"> +Fontan = fountain, p. <a href = "#page11">11</a></p> +<p class = "index"> +Foran = foreign, p. <a href = "#page20">20</a></p> +<p class = "index"> +Frelie = freely, p. <a href = "#page34">34</a></p> + +<p class = "index skip"> +Geve = give, pp. <a href = "#page7">7</a>, <a href = "#page8">8</a>, <a href += "#page9">9</a>, <a href = "#page12">12</a>, <a href = "#page28">28</a>, <a +href = "#page29">29</a></p> +<p class = "index"> +Gif = if, p. <a href = "#page21">21</a></p> +<p class = "index"> +Glim = glimpse, p. <a href = "#page2">2</a></p> +<p class = "index"> +Gud = good, pp. <a href = "#page2">2</a>, <a href = "#page18">18</a>, <a +href = "#page21">21</a>, <a href = "#page28">28</a>, <a href = +"#page29">29</a></p> + +<p class = "index skip"> +Hael = hail, p. <a href = "#page10">10</a></p> +<p class = "index"> +Hald = hold, p. <a href = "#page14">14</a>;<br> +haldes, p. <a href = "#page29">29</a></p> +<p class = "index"> +Hame = home, p. <a href = "#page2">2</a></p> +<p class = "index"> +Hard = heard, pp. <a href = "#page2">2</a>, <a href = "#page3">3</a>, <a +href = "#page13">13</a>, <a href = "#page14">14</a>, <a href = +"#page22">22</a>, <a href = "#page32">32</a></p> +<p class = "index"> +Hart = heart, p. <a href = "#page33">33</a></p> +<p class = "index"> +Heal = whole, p. <a href = "#page10">10</a></p> +<p class = "index"> +Heer = hear, p. <a href = "#page33">33</a></p> +<p class = "index"> +Here = hear, pp. <a href = "#page31">31</a>, <a href = "#page32">32</a></p> +<p class = "index"> +Hes = has, pp. <a href = "#page3">3</a>, <a href = "#page14">14</a>, <a href += "#page15">15</a>, <a href = "#page19">19</a>, <a href = "#page22">22</a>, <a +href = "#page32">32</a></p> +<p class = "index"> +Hes = hast, p. <a href = "#page32">32</a></p> +<p class = "index"> +Hes = have, pp. <a href = "#page20">20</a>, <a href = "#page22">22</a></p> +<p class = "index"> +Hoat = hot, pp. <a href = "#page18">18</a>, <a href = "#page30">30</a>, <a +href = "#page33">33</a>;<br> +hoater, p. <a href = "#page30">30</a></p> +<p class = "index"> +Hoores = hours, p. <a href = "#page31">31</a></p> + +<p class = "index skip"> +Ida, Scotland or Edinburgh, p. <a href = "#page2">2</a></p> +<p class = "index"> +Incurre, <i>v.</i> = to run into. Lat. <i>incurro</i>, pp. <a href = +"#page20">20</a>, <a href = "#page33">33</a></p> + +<p class = "index skip"> +<span class = "pagenum">39</span> +<a name = "page39"> </a> +Ken = know, p. <a href = "#page21">21</a></p> +<p class = "index"> +Kep, <i>v.</i> = to intercept, p. <a href = "#page14">14</a></p> +<p class = "index"> +Kepping = receiving in the act of falling, p. <a href = "#page12">12</a>. +<i>Jamieson.</i> +<p class = "index"> +Knau = know, p. <a href = "#page2">2</a></p> +<p class = "index"> +Knaulege = knowledge, pp. <a href = "#page3">3</a>, <a href = +"#page10">10</a>;<br> +knawlege, pp. <a href = "#page11">11</a>, <a href = "#page21">21</a></p> +<p class = "index"> +Knaw = know, pp. <a href = "#page7">7</a>, <a href = "#page30">30</a>;<br> +knawe, p. <a href = "#page21">21</a>;<br> +knawen = known, p. <a href = "#page29">29</a></p> + +<p class = "index skip"> +Laggared = loitered or rested, p. <a href = "#page2">2</a></p> +<p class = "index"> +Lang = long, pp. <a href = "#page9">9</a>, <a href = "#page14">14</a></p> +<p class = "index"> +Leave = live, p. <a href = "#page32">32</a></p> +<p class = "index"> +Leve = live, pp. <a href = "#page32">32</a>, <a href = "#page34">34</a></p> +<p class = "index"> +Leving = living, p. <a href = "#page11">11</a></p> +<p class = "index"> +Louse = loose, p. <a href = "#page9">9</a></p> +<p class = "index"> +Lykwayes = likewise, p. <a href = "#page19">19</a></p> + +<p class = "index skip"> +Maer = more, pp. <a href = "#page2">2</a>, <a href = "#page10">10</a></p> +<p class = "index"> +Maest = most, pp. <a href = "#page1">1</a>, <a href = "#page2">2</a>, <a +href = "#page16">16</a></p> +<p class = "index"> +Man = must, p. <a href = "#page8">8</a></p> +<p class = "index"> +Mare = more, p. <a href = "#page30">30</a></p> +<p class = "index"> +Mast = most, pp. <a href = "#page30">30</a>, <a href = "#page32">32</a></p> +<p class = "index"> +Meer = mare, p. <a href = "#page28">28</a></p> +<p class = "index"> +Middes = middle, p. <a href = "#page16">16</a></p> +<p class = "index"> +Mikle = much, pp. <a href = "#page13">13</a>, <a href = "#page18">18</a>, <a +href = "#page19">19</a>, <a href = "#page20">20</a></p> +<p class = "index"> +Mint = aim, pressure, p. <a href = "#page18">18</a></p> +<p class = "index"> +Minted = attempted, p. <a href = "#page15">15</a></p> +<p class = "index"> +Moat, probably <i>moot</i>, discussion, chat, etc., p. <a href = +"#page2">2</a>. A.S. <i>mót</i></p> +<p class = "index"> +Moe = more, pp. <a href = "#page16">16</a>, <a href = "#page19">19</a>, <a +href = "#page21">21</a>, <a href = "#page27">27</a></p> +<p class = "index"> +Moien = means for attaining an end, p. <a href = "#page2">2</a>. +<i>Jamieson.</i> Fr. <i>moyen</i></p> +<p class = "index"> +Mont = mount, p. <a href = "#page20"><ins class = "correction" title = "text reads '24'">20</ins></a></p> +<p class = "index"> +Montan = mountain, pp. <a href = "#page3">3</a>, <a href = "#page11">11</a>, +<a href = "#page28">28</a></p> +<p class = "index"> +Mynt = aim, pp. <a href = "#page12">12</a>, <a href = "#page17">17</a></p> + +<p class = "index skip"> +Nae = no, pp. <a href = "#page1">1</a>, <a href = "#page8">8</a></p> +<p class = "index"> +Nane = none, p. <a href = "#page13">13</a></p> +<p class = "index"> +Noat, <i>v.</i> = note, pp. <a href = "#page19">19</a>, <a href = +"#page22">22</a>, <a href = "#page27">27</a>, <a href = "#page28">28</a>, <a +href = "#page29">29</a>, <a href = "#page30">30</a>, <a href = +"#page31">31</a>, <a href = "#page33">33</a></p> +<p class = "index"> +Noat = note, pp. <a href = "#page7">7</a>, <a href = "#page13">13</a>, <a +href = "#page28">28</a>, <a href = "#page29">29</a>;<br> +noate, p. <a href = "#page28">28</a>;<br> +noates = notes, p. <a href = "#page29">29</a></p> +<p class = "index"> +Nor = than, p. <a href = "#page3">3</a></p> +<p class = "index"> +Nor, God nor, p. <a href = "#page31">31</a>.<br> +This most probably means God comfort or nourish us, connected with +<i>norice</i>, a nurse, and <i>norie</i>, a foster-child. There is also a +substantive <i>nore</i> in Chaucer, meaning comfort. <i>Norne</i> is to +entreat, ask (see <i>Alliterative Poems</i> Glossary), and may have +something to do with this expression, but it is hardly so probable as the +above</p> +<p class = "index"> +Noute = black cattle, p. <a href = "#page27">27</a>;<br> +connected with <i>neat</i>, as in neat-cattle, neat-herd</p> +<p class = "index"> +Nulleth = negatives, p. <a href = "#page33">33</a></p> +<p class = "index"> +Nurice = nurse, p. <a href = "#page19">19</a></p> +</td> + +<td class = "glossary"> +<p class = "index"> +Of = off, p. <a href = "#page23">23</a></p> +<p class = "index"> +Ones, at ones = at once, p. <a href = "#page18">18</a></p> + +<p class = "index skip"> +Paen = trouble, p. <a href = "#page2">2</a></p> +<p class = "index"> +Paert = part, p. <a href = "#page10">10</a></p> +<p class = "index"> +Peple = people, pp. <a href = "#page20">20</a>, <a href = +"#page29">29</a></p> +<p class = "index"> +Phason = pheasant (?), p. <a href = "#page13">13</a></p> +<p class = "index"> +Pover = poor, p. <a href = "#page3">3</a></p> +<p class = "index"> +Punct = stop, p. <a href = "#page34">34</a></p> + +<p class = "index skip"> +Qu.<br> +At p. <a href = "#page18">18</a> the author gives his reasons for making +use of the guttural <i>qu</i> in the place of the labial <i>w</i>. The +following are the words in which it is thus used:—</p> +<p class = "index"> +Quha = who, pp. <a href = "#page2">2</a>, <a href = "#page3">3</a>, <a href += "#page34">34</a></p> +<p class = "index"> +Quhae = who, pp. <a href = "#page1">1</a>, <a href = "#page10">10</a>;<br> +quhae’s = whose, p. <a href = "#page2">2</a></p> +<p class = "index"> +Quhaer = where, p. <a href = "#page2">2</a></p> +<p class = "index"> +Quhar = where, p. <a href = "#page29">29</a></p> +<p class = "index"> +Quharein = wherein, p. <a href = "#page14">14</a></p> +<p class = "index"> +Quharof = whereof, p. <a href = "#page16">16</a></p> +<p class = "index"> +Quhat = what, pp. <a href = "#page2">2</a>, <a href = "#page8">8</a>, <a +href = "#page15">15</a>, <a href = "#page17">17</a>, <a href = +"#page18">18</a>, <a href = "#page28">28</a></p> +<p class = "index"> +Quhatever = whatever, p. <a href = "#page19">19</a></p> +<p class = "index"> +Quhen = when, pp. <a href = "#page2">2</a>, <a href = "#page9">9</a>, <a +href = "#page11">11</a>, <a href = "#page23">23</a>, <a href = +"#page31">31</a></p> +<p class = "index"> +Quhence = whence, pp. <a href = "#page29">29</a>, <a href = +"#page32">32</a></p> +<p class = "index"> +Quher = where, pp. <a href = "#page2">2</a>, <a href = "#page14">14</a>, <a +href = "#page20">20</a>, <a href = "#page32">32</a></p> +<p class = "index"> +Quheras = whereas, p. <a href = "#page14">14</a></p> +<p class = "index"> +Quherat = whereat, p. <a href = "#page18">18</a></p> +<p class = "index"> +Quherbe = whereby, pp. <a href = "#page11">11</a>, <a href = +"#page34">34</a></p> +<p class = "index"> +Quherfoer, quherforr = wherefore, pp. <a href = "#page7">7</a>, <a href = +"#page8">8</a>, <a href = "#page10">10</a>, <a href = "#page15">15</a></p> +<p class = "index"> +Quherin = wherein, pp. <a href = "#page20">20</a>, <a href = +"#page22">22</a>.</p> +<p class = "index"> +Quherof = whereof, pp. <a href = "#page29">29</a>, <a href = +"#page34">34</a></p> +<p class = "index"> +Quheron = whereon, p. <a href = "#page22">22</a></p> +<p class = "index"> +Quherupon = whereupon, pp. <a href = "#page8">8</a>, <a href = +"#page27">27</a></p> +<p class = "index"> +<span class = "pagenum">40</span> +<a name = "page40"> </a> +Quherwith = wherewith, p. <a href = "#page2">2</a></p> +<p class = "index"> +Quhil, quhiles = while, p. <a href = "#page2">2</a></p> +<p class = "index"> +Quhilk = which</p> +<p class = "index"> +Quhither = whether, pp. <a href = "#page11">11</a>, <a href = +"#page17">17</a>, <a href = "#page18">18</a>, <a href = "#page20">20</a>, <a +href = "#page32">32</a></p> +<p class = "index"> +Quho = who, pp. <a href = "#page12">12</a>, <a href = "#page14">14</a>, <a +href = "#page15">15</a>, <a href = "#page18">18</a>, <a href = +"#page22">22</a></p> +<p class = "index"> +Quhom = whom</p> +<p class = "index"> +Quhy = why, pp. <a href = "#page20">20</a>, <a href = "#page21">21</a>, <a +href = "#page29">29</a></p> +<p class = "index"> +Quhyte = white, p. <a href = "#page30">30</a>;<br> +quhiter, p. <a href = "#page30">30</a>;<br> +quhytest, p. <a href = "#page30">30</a></p> +<p class = "index"> +Quod = quoth, p. <a href = "#page18">18</a></p> + +<p class = "index skip"> +Rease = rose, p. <a href = "#page18">18</a></p> +<p class = "index"> +Red = read, p. <a href = "#page34">34</a></p> +<p class = "index"> +Regne = reign, p. <a href = "#page20">20</a></p> +<p class = "index"> +Retine = retain, p. <a href = "#page20">20</a></p> +<p class = "index"> +Ryseth = ariseth, p. <a href = "#page9">9</a></p> + +<p class = "index skip"> +Sa = so, p. <a href = "#page21">21</a>;<br> +sae = so, p. <a href = "#page17">17</a></p> +<p class = "index"> +Sal = shall, pp. <a href = "#page9">9</a>, <a href = "#page11">11</a>, <a +href = "#page23">23</a>, <a href = "#page34">34</a></p> +<p class = "index"> +Sall = shall, pp. <a href = "#page8">8</a>, <a href = "#page22">22</a></p> +<p class = "index"> +Shaued = showed, p. <a href = "#page7">7</a></p> +<p class = "index"> +Shour = shower, p. <a href = "#page10">10</a></p> +<p class = "index"> +Sib = related, p. <a href = "#page21">21</a></p> +<p class = "index"> +Sik = such, pp. <a href = "#page1">1</a>, <a href = "#page2">2</a>, <a href += "#page8">8</a>, <a href = "#page9">9</a>, <a href = "#page11">11</a>, <a +href = "#page17">17</a>, <a href = "#page29">29</a></p> +<p class = "index"> +Sillie = wretched, poor, p. <a href = "#page2">2</a></p> +<p class = "index"> +Skuiographie,<br> +probably an invented word, the intention of the author being to oppose skew +or askew to <span class = "translit" title = "orthos">ορθος</span>, +straight. It has been suggested that it may be intended for sciagraphy, +<span class = "translit" title = "skiagraphia">σκιαγραφία</span>, +also spelt sciography; but this is improbable, as the meaning of that +word, viz., the art of shadows, including dialling, is so inappropriate +in this passage, p. <a href = "#page2">2</a></p> +<p class = "index"> +Sould = should, pp. <a href = "#page7">7</a>, <a href = "#page8">8</a>, <a +href = "#page11">11</a>, <a href = "#page12">12</a>, <a href = +"#page13">13</a>, <a href = "#page17">17</a>, <a href = "#page18">18</a>, <a +href = "#page19">19</a>, <a href = "#page22">22</a>, <a href = +"#page28">28</a>, <a href = "#page29">29</a></p> +<p class = "index"> +Spering = inquiring, p. <a href = "#page18">18</a></p> +<p class = "index"> +Spil = destroy, spoil(?), p. <a href = "#page13">13</a>;<br> +spill, p. <a href = "#page22">22</a></p> +<p class = "index"> +Spilt = corrupted, spoilt(?), p. <a href = "#page2">2</a></p> +<p class = "index"> +Stack = stuck, p. <a href = "#page2">2</a></p> +<p class = "index"> +Stean = stone, p. <a href = "#page8">8</a></p> +<p class = "index"> +Stiddie = anvil, pp. <a href = "#page12">12</a>, <a href = +"#page17">17</a><br> +“And my imaginations are as foul<br> +As Vulcan’s stithy.”<br> +<span class = "inset"><i>Hamlet</i>, Act iii., sc. 2</span></p> +<p class = "index"> +Strang = strong, p. <a href = "#page14">14</a></p> +<p class = "index"> +Sum = some, pp. <a href = "#page8">8</a>, <a href = "#page9">9</a>, <a href += "#page10">10</a>, <a href = "#page21">21</a>, <a href = "#page34">34</a></p> +<p class = "index"> +Supposit = subject, pp. <a href = "#page30">30</a>, <a href = +"#page31">31</a></p> +<p class = "index"> +Syllab = syllable, pp. <a href = "#page14">14</a>, <a href = +"#page15">15</a>, <a href = "#page16">16</a>, <a href = "#page18">18</a>, <a +href = "#page21">21</a>, <a href = "#page22">22</a>;<br> +syllabes, p. <a href = "#page8">8</a>.<br> +Ben Jonson spells this word <i>syllabe</i> in his English Grammar</p> +<p class = "index"> +Syne = since, p. <a href = "#page1">1</a></p> + +<p class = "index skip"> +Tal = tale, p. <a href = "#page9">9</a></p> +<p class = "index"> +Tal = tail, p. <a href = "#page9">9</a></p> +<p class = "index"> +Tale = tall, p. <a href = "#page28">28</a></p> +<p class = "index"> +Trow = believe, pp. <a href = "#page13">13</a>, <a href = +"#page18">18</a></p> +<p class = "index"> +Tuae = two, pp. <a href = "#page1">1</a>, <a href = "#page8">8</a>, <a href += "#page9">9</a>, <a href = "#page10">10</a>, <a href = "#page22">22</a>, <a +href = "#page23">23</a></p> +<p class = "index"> +Tuelfe = twelve, p. <a href = "#page3">3</a></p> +<p class = "index"> +Tuich = touch, pp. <a href = "#page7">7</a>, <a href = "#page13">13</a>, <a +href = "#page15">15</a>, <a href = "#page17">17</a>;<br> +tuiches, p. <a href = "#page11">11</a></p> +<p class = "index"> +Tuiched = touched, pp. <a href = "#page3">3</a>, <a href = +"#page17">17</a></p> +<p class = "index"> +Tuich stone = touchstone, p. <a href = "#page19">19</a></p> +<p class = "index"> +Tyme passing befoer = imperfect tense, pp. <a href = "#page31">31</a>, <a +href = "#page32">32</a></p> +<p class = "index"> +Tyme past befoer = pluperfect tense, pp. <a href = "#page31">31</a>, <a +href = "#page32">32</a></p> +<p class = "index"> +Tyme past els = perfect tense, pp. <a href = "#page31">31</a>, <a href = +"#page32">32</a></p> + +<p class = "index skip"> +Vadimonie = recognisance, p. <a href = "#page22">22</a>. Lat. +<i>Vadimonium.</i></p> +<p class = "index"> +Voce = voice, p. <a href = "#page20">20</a></p> + +<p class = "index skip"> +Waet = know, p. <a href = "#page14">14</a></p> +<p class = "index"> +Wait = know, p. <a href = "#page11">11</a></p> +<p class = "index"> +Wald = would, pp. <a href = "#page1">1</a>, <a href = "#page2">2</a>, <a +href = "#page9">9</a>, <a href = "#page10">10</a>, <a href = "#page13">13</a>, +<a href = "#page14">14</a>, <a href = "#page16">16</a>, <a href = +"#page20">20</a>, <a href = "#page21">21</a>, <a href = "#page30">30</a>, <a +href = "#page31">31</a></p> +<p class = "index"> +Warkes = works, p. <a href = "#page29">29</a></p> +<p class = "index"> +Weer = war, p. <a href = "#page3">3</a></p> +<p class = "index"> +Were = war, p. <a href = "#page20">20</a></p> +<p class = "index"> +Whither = whether, p. <a href = "#page2">2</a>.<br> +The author in this place uses the letter <i>w</i> instead of <i>qu</i>, +although at p. <a href = "#page18">18</a> he is so strenuous against its +use</p> +<p class = "index"> +Wrang = wrong, pp. <a href = "#page2">2</a>, <a href = "#page9">9</a>, <a +href = "#page11">11</a></p> + +<p class = "index skip"> +Ye = yea, p. <a href = "#page14">14</a></p> +<p class = "index"> +Yeld = yield, p. <a href = "#page21">21</a></p> +</td> +</tr> +</table> + +<hr class = "smaller"> + +<span class = "pagenum">.1.</span> + +<h3><a name = "report">Early English Text Society.</a></h3> + +<div class = "italhead">Report of the Committee, January, 1865.</div> + + +<p>The close of the first year of the Society’s operations affords the +Committee the welcome opportunity of congratulating the members on the +Society’s success. Instead of two Texts, which the first Circular to the +Society suggested might perhaps be issued, the Committee have been enabled +to publish four, and these four such as will bear comparison, as to +rareness and intrinsic value, with the publications of any of the longest +established societies of the kingdom. The <i>Arthur</i> was edited for the +first time from a unique MS., wholly unknown to even the latest writers on +the subject, and exhibits our national hero’s life in a simpler form than +even Geoffrey of Monmouth, or Layamon. The <i>Early English Alliterative +Poems</i>, though noticed long ago by Dr. Guest and Sir F. Madden, for +their great philological and poetical value, had been inaccessible to all +but students of the difficult and faded MS. in the British Museum: they +have been now made public by the Society’s edition, with their large +additions to our vocabulary, and their interesting dialectal formations. +The <i>Sir Gawayne</i>, from the same MS., could only have been had before +in Sir Frederick Madden’s rare and costly edition, printed by the Bannatyne +Club. And the <i>Lauder</i> has restored, as it were, to Scotland, a Poet +whose name had found no place in the standard History of Scottish Poetry, +and the Biographical Dictionaries.</p> + +<p> +<span class = "pagenum">.2.</span> +Though the Society started late in the past year, these four Texts were +published within a fortnight of its close; and before that time the first +Text for the second year was in the printer’s hands. The Committee pledge +themselves to continue their exertions to render the Texts issued worthy of +the Society, and to complete the issue of each set within the year assigned +to it. They rely with confidence on the Subscribers to use their best +endeavours to increase the list of Members, in order that funds may not be +wanting to print the material that editors place at their service. The aim +of the Committee is, on the one hand, to print all that is most valuable of +the yet unprinted MSS. in English, and, on the other, to re-edit and +reprint all that is most valuable in printed English books, which from +their scarcity or price are not within the reach of the student of moderate +means.<a class = "tag" href = "#note6" name = "tag6"><sup>6</sup></a> Those +relating to <span class = "smallcaps">King Arthur</span> will be the +Committee’s first care; those relating to our Language and its Dialects the +second; while in due proportion with these, will be mixed others of general +interest, though with no one special common design. The Committee hope that +no year will pass without +<span class = "pagenum">.3.</span> +the issue of one Text in the Northern dialect, as well in acknowledgment of +the support that the Society has received in Scotland, as to obviate the +hitherto limited circulation of the works of the early Scotch writers among +students south of the Humber.</p> + +<p>The publications for 1864 are:—</p> + +<table> +<tr> +<td> +<div class = "worktitle"> +1. Early English Alliterative Poems in the West Midland Dialect of the +fourteenth century (ab. 1320-30 <span class = "smallcaps">a.d.</span>). +Edited for the first time from a unique MS. in the British Museum, with +Notes and Glossarial Index, by Richard Morris, Esq.</div> +</td> +<td class = "price">16<i>s.</i></td> +</tr> +<tr> +<td> +<div class = "worktitle"> +2. Arthur. Edited for the first time from the Marquis of Bath’s MS. (ab. +1440 <span class = "smallcaps">a.d.</span>), by F. J. Furnivall, Esq., +M.A.</div> +</td> +<td class = "price">4<i>s.</i></td> +</tr> +<tr> +<td> +<div class = "worktitle"> +3. Ane compendious and breve Tractate, concernyng ye office and dewtie of +Kyngis, Spirituall Pastoris, and temporall Jugis; laitlie compylit be +William Lauder. Reprinted from the edition of 1556, and edited by Prof. +Fitz-Edward Hall, D.C.L.</div> +</td> +<td class = "price">4<i>s.</i></td> +</tr> +<tr> +<td> +<div class = "worktitle"> +4. Sir Gawayne and the Green Knight. Edited by R. Morris, Esq., from the +Cottonian MS., Nero, A x. (ab. 1320-30 <span class = +"smallcaps">a.d.</span>)</div> +</td> +<td class = "price">10<i>s.</i></td> +</tr> +</table> + +<p>The publications for the present year (1865) will comprise Texts from at +least four unique MSS., two of which will be edited for the first time.</p> + +<table> +<tr> +<td> +<div class = "worktitle"> +5. Of the Orthographie and Congruitie of the Britan Tongue, a treates noe +shorter then necessarie, be Alexander Hume. Edited for the first time from +the MS. in the British Museum (ab. 1617 <span class = +"smallcaps">a.d.</span>), by Henry B. Wheatley, Esq.</div> +</td> +<td class = "price">4<i>s.</i></td> +</tr> +<tr> +<td> +<div class = "worktitle"> +6. Syr Lancelot du Lak. Edited from the MS. in the Cambridge University +Library (15th century), by the Rev. Walter W. Skeat, M.A.</div> +</td> +<td class = "price">[<i>In the Press.</i></td> +</tr> +<tr> +<td> +<div class = "worktitle"> +7. Morte Arthure: the Alliterative Version. Edited from Robert Thorntone’s +MS. (ab. 1440 <span class = "smallcaps">a.d.</span>) at Lincoln, by the +Rev. F. C. Massingberd, M.A.</div> +</td> +<td></td> +</tr> +<tr> +<td> +<div class = "worktitle"> +<span class = "pagenum">.4.</span> +8. Various Poems relating to Sir Gawayne. Edited from the MSS. by Richard +Morris, Esq.</div> +</td> +<td></td> +</tr> +<tr> +<td> +<div class = "worktitle"> +9. Merlin, or the Early History of Arthur. Edited for the first time from +the MS. in the Cambridge University Library (ab. 1450 <span class = +"smallcaps">a.d.</span>), by F. J. Furnivall, Esq. Part I.</div> +</td> +<td></td> +</tr> +</table> + +<p>Also, the following, if the amount of subscriptions will justify the +Committee in issuing them:—</p> + +<div class = "worktitle"> +Animadversions uppon the Annotacions and Corrections of some imperfections +of Impressiones of Chaucer’s Workes reprinted in 1598, by Francis Thynne. +Edited from the MS. in the Bridgewater Library, by Henry B. Wheatley, +Esq.</div> + +<div class = "worktitle"> +The Story of Genesis and Exodus in English verse of about 1300 <span class += "smallcaps">a.d.</span> To be edited for the first time from the unique +MS. in the Library of Corpus Christi Coll., Cambridge, by F. J. +Furnivall and R. Morris, Esqrs.</div> + +<div class = "worktitle"> +The Harrowing of Hell. To be edited from the MS. in the Bodleian Library, +by R. F. Weymouth, Esq.</div> + +<hr class = "smaller"> + +<p>The following is a list of Texts, which it is proposed to print (among +others) in future years:—</p> + +<div class = "worktitle"> +The Romance of Arthour and Merlin. To be edited from the Auchinleck MS. +(ab. 1320-30 <span class = "smallcaps">a.d.</span>)</div> + +<div class = "worktitle"> +Mirk’s Duties of a Parish Priest. To be edited for the first time from the +MSS. in the British Museum and Bodleian Libraries (ab. 1420 <span class = +"smallcaps">a.d.</span>), by E. Peacock, Esq.</div> + +<div class = "worktitle"> +The Romance of William and the Werwolf. To be edited from the unique MS. in +the Library of King’s Coll., Cambridge.</div> + +<div class = "worktitle"> +The Gospel of Nicodemus in the Northumbrian Dialect. To be edited for the +first time from Harl. MS. 4196, &c., Cotton-Galba <span class = +"smallcaps">e</span> ix., by R. Morris, Esq.</div> + +<div class = "worktitle"> +<span class = "pagenum">.5.</span> +The Romance of Melusine. To be edited for the first time from the unique +MS. in the Library of Trinity College, Cambridge.</div> + +<div class = "worktitle"> +Syr Thomas Maleor’s Mort d’Arthur. To be edited from Caxton’s edition (1485 +<span class = "smallcaps">a.d.</span>) with a new Preface, Notes, and a +Glossary.</div> + +<div class = "worktitle"> +The Arthur Ballads.</div> + +<div class = "worktitle"> +The Romance of Sir Tristrem. To be edited from the Auchinleck MS.</div> + +<div class = "worktitle"> +The English Charlemagne Romances. To be edited from the Auchinleck +MS.</div> + +<div class = "worktitle"> +The Early English Version of the Gesta Romanorum. To be edited from the +MSS. in the British Museum and other Libraries.</div> + +<div class = "worktitle"> +The two different Versions of Piers Plowman, in parallel columns.</div> + +<div class = "worktitle"> +Gawain Douglas’s Æneis. To be edited from the Cambridge MS. by Professor +Fitz-Edward Hall, D.C.L.</div> + +<div class = "worktitle"> +The Romance of Kyng Horn. To be edited from the MS. in the Library of the +University of Cambridge.</div> + +<div class = "worktitle"> +Roberd of Brunne’s Handlyng Synne, a treatise on the sins, and sketches of +the manners, of English men and women in <span class = +"smallcaps">a.d.</span> 1303. To be re-edited from the MSS. in the British +Museum and Bodleian Libraries by F. J. Furnivall, Esq., M.A.</div> + +<div class = "worktitle"> +Cursor Mundi, the best dialectal version. To be edited from the MS. by +Richard Morris, Esq.</div> + +<div class = "worktitle"> +The History of the Saint Graal or Sank Ryal. By Henry Lonelich, Skynner +(ab. 1440 <span class = "smallcaps">a.d.</span>). To be re-edited from the +unique MS. in the Library of Corpus Christi Coll., Cambridge, by F. J. +Furnivall, Esq., M.A.</div> + +<div class = "worktitle"> +Dan Michel’s Ayenbite of Inwyt, the most valuable specimen of the Kentish +dialect, 1340 <span class = "smallcaps">a.d.</span> To be edited from the +MS. in the British Museum by Richard Morris, Esq.</div> + +<div class = "worktitle"> +<span class = "pagenum">.6.</span> +Froissart’s Chronicles translated out of Frenche into our maternall +Englyshe Tonge, by Johan Bourchier Knight, Lord Berners. To be edited by +Henry B. Wheatley, Esq.</div> + +<div class = "worktitle"> +Skelton’s Translation of Diodorus Siculus, oute of freshe Latin, that is of +Poggius Florentinus, containing six books. To be edited for the first time +from the unique MS. in the Library of Corpus Christi Coll., +Cambridge.</div> + +<div class = "worktitle"> +Sir David Lyndesay’s Monarche. Edited by Prof. Fitz-Edward Hall, D.C.L., +from the first edition by Jhone Skott.</div> + +<div class = "worktitle"> +Some of the earliest English Dictionaries, as—Abecedarium +Anglico-latinum, by Richard Huloet (1552); and Baret’s Alvearie or +Quadruple Dictionarie, to be edited from the editions of 1573 and 1580 by +Henry B. Wheatley, Esq.</div> + +<hr class = "smaller"> + +<p>The Subscription is £1 1<i>s.</i> a year, due in advance on the 1st of +January, and should be paid either to the Society’s Account at the Union +Bank of London, 14, Argyll Place, W., or by Post Office Order to the Hon. +Secretary, 53, Berners Street, London, W.; to whom Subscribers’ names and +addresses should be sent.</p> + +<p>The Committee wish to draw the attention of the Subscribers to the fact +that the Society’s Account has been transferred from the London and +Birmingham Bank to the Regent Street Branch of the Union Bank of +London.</p> + +<p>The Committee invite offers of voluntary assistance from those who may +be willing to edit or copy Texts, or to lend them books for reprinting or +for re-reading with the original MSS.</p> + +<p>The Honorary Secretary’s Cash Account is annexed.</p> + +<hr class = "smaller"> + +<p><span class = "pagenum">.7.</span> +<i>Abstract of the Income and Expenditure of the</i> <span class = +"smallcaps">Early English Text Society</span> <i>for the Year ending +December 31st, 1864.</i></p> + +<table summary = "receipts and payments"> +<tr> +<td colspan = "7"><h5>RECEIPTS</h5></td> +</tr> +<tr> +<td class = "acct">1864.</td> +<td class = "accright">£</td> +<td class = "accright"><i>s.</i></td> +<td class = "accright"><i>d.</i></td> +<td colspan = "3"></td> +</tr> +<tr> +<td class = "acct"><div class = "hanging"> +One hundred Subscriptions, at 1<i>l.</i> 1<i>s.</i></div></td> +<td class = "accright">105</td> +<td class = "accright">0</td> +<td class = "accright">0</td> +<td colspan = "3"></td> +</tr> +<tr> +<td class = "acct"><div class = "hanging"> +Forty-five ditto (through Agents), at 1<i>l.</i></div></td> +<td class = "accright">45</td> +<td class = "accright">0</td> +<td class = "accright">0</td> +<td colspan = "3"></td> +</tr> +<tr> +<td class = "acct">1865.</td> +<td class = "acct" colspan = "3"> +</tr> +<tr> +<td class = "acct"><div class = "hanging"> +Two Subscriptions, at 1<i>l.</i> 1<i>s.</i></div></td> +<td class = "accright">2</td> +<td class = "accright">2</td> +<td class = "accright">0</td> +<td colspan = "3"></td> +</tr> +<tr> +<td class = "acct"></td> +<td class = "accright line">£152</td> +<td class = "accright line">2</td> +<td class = "accright line">0</td> +<td colspan = "3"></td> +</tr> +<tr> +<td colspan = "3"><br></td> +</tr> + +<tr> +<td colspan = "7"><h5>PAYMENTS</h5></td> +</tr> +<tr> +<td class = "acct">1864.</td> +<td class = "accright">£</td> +<td class = "accright"><i>s.</i></td> +<td class = "accright"><i>d.</i></td> +<td class = "accright">£</td> +<td class = "accright"><i>s.</i></td> +<td class = "accright"><i>d.</i></td> +</tr> + +<tr> +<td class = "acct">Printing Account (Austin)—</td> +<td class = "acct" colspan = "6"></td> +</tr> + +<tr> +<td class = "acct"><div class = "hanging2"> +Alliterative Poems</div></td> +<td class = "accright">62</td> +<td class = "accright">7</td> +<td class = "accright">6</td> +<td class = "acct" colspan = "3"></td> +</tr> + +<tr> +<td class = "acct"><div class = "hanging2"> +Arthur</div></td> +<td class = "accright">8</td> +<td class = "accright">14</td> +<td class = "accright">0</td> +<td class = "acct" colspan = "3"></td> +</tr> + +<tr> +<td class = "acct"><div class = "hanging2"> +Lauder’s Tractate</div></td> +<td class = "accright">15</td> +<td class = "accright">14</td> +<td class = "accright">0</td> +<td class = "acct" colspan = "3"></td> +</tr> + +<tr> +<td class = "acct"><div class = "hanging2"> +Sir Gawayne</div></td> +<td class = "accright">35</td> +<td class = "accright">16</td> +<td class = "accright">0</td> +<td class = "acct" colspan = "3"></td> +</tr> +<tr> +<td class = "acct"><div class = "hanging2"> +3,500 Prospectuses</div></td> +<td class = "accright">5</td> +<td class = "accright">5</td> +<td class = "accright">0</td> +<td class = "acct" colspan = "3"></td> +</tr> +<tr> +<td class = "acct"><div class = "hanging2"> +Packing, Postage, &c., of Alliterative Poems and Arthur</div></td> +<td class = "accright line">1</td> +<td class = "accright line">16</td> +<td class = "accright line">6</td> +<td class = "acct" colspan = "3"></td> +</tr> +<tr> +<td class = "acct"></td> +<td class = "accright">129</td> +<td class = "accright">13</td> +<td class = "accright">0</td> +<td class = "acct" colspan = "3"></td> +</tr> +<tr> +<td class = "acct">Less Discount</td> +<td class = "accright line">6</td> +<td class = "accright line">9</td> +<td class = "accright line">0</td> +<td class = "acct" colspan = "3"></td> +</tr> +<tr> +<td></td> +<td class = "acct" colspan = "3"></td> +<td class = "accright">123</td> +<td class = "accright">4</td> +<td class = "accright">0</td> +</tr> +<tr> +<td class = "acct" colspan = "4">Petty Expenses—</td> +<td class = "acct" colspan = "3"></td> +</tr> +<tr> +<td class = "acct" colspan = "4"><div class = "hanging2"> +Purchase of Books for Re-editing</div></td> +<td class = "accright">5</td> +<td class = "accright">18</td> +<td class = "accright">0</td> +</tr> +<tr> +<td class = "acct" colspan = "4"><div class = "hanging2"> +Stationery, &c.</div></td> +<td class = "accright">0</td> +<td class = "accright">18</td> +<td class = "accright">6</td> +</tr> +<tr> +<td class = "acct" colspan = "4"><div class = "hanging2"> +Postages (Circulars, &c.)</div></td> +<td class = "accright">4</td> +<td class = "accright">4</td> +<td class = "accright">6</td> +</tr> +<tr> +<td class = "acct" colspan = "4"><div class = "hanging2"> +Deduction on Country Cheque</div></td> +<td class = "accright">0</td> +<td class = "accright">0</td> +<td class = "accright">7</td> +</tr> +<tr> +<td class = "acct" colspan = "4"><div class = "hanging2"> +Balance in the hands of the Hon. Secretary</div></td> +<td class = "accright">0</td> +<td class = "accright">13</td> +<td class = "accright">0</td> +</tr> +<tr> +<td class = "acct" colspan = "4"><div class = "hanging2"> +Balance at the Bankers</div></td> +<td class = "accright line">17</td> +<td class = "accright line">3</td> +<td class = "accright line">5</td> +</tr> +<tr> +<td class = "acct" colspan = "4"></td> +<td class = "accright line">£152</td> +<td class = "accright line">2</td> +<td class = "accright line">0</td> +</tr> +</table> + +<p>We have examined this Account with the Books and Vouchers, and certify +that it is correct.</p> + +<p><span class = "smallcaps">Wm. CUNNINGHAM GLEN</span>,<br> +<span class = "smallcaps">REGINALD HANSON, B.A., Auditors</span>.</p> + +<hr class = "smaller"> + +<span class = "pagenum">.8.</span> +<h3><a name = "subscribers">LIST OF SUBSCRIBERS.</a></h3> + +<table align = "center"> +<tr> +<td class = "management" colspan = "2" align = "center"> +<span class = "sans">COMMITTEE OF MANAGEMENT:</span><br> +</td> +</tr> +<tr> +<td class = "management"> +DANBY P. FRY, ESQ.<br> +FREDERICK J. FURNIVALL, ESQ. +</td> +<td class = "management"> +<span class = "smallcaps">Professor</span> FITZ-EDWARD HALL.<br> +RICHARD MORRIS, ESQ. +</td> +</tr> +<tr> +<td class = "management" colspan = "2" align = "center"> +H. T. PARKER, ESQ.<br> +<br> +<i>(With power to add Workers to their number.)</i><br> +<br> +<span class = "sans">HONORARY SECRETARY:</span><br> +<br> +HENRY B. WHEATLEY, ESQ., 53, <span class = "smallcaps">Berners Street, +London. W.</span> +<br> +<br> +<span class = "sans">BANKERS:</span><br> +<br> +THE UNION BANK OF LONDON, REGENT STREET BRANCH,<br> +<span class = "smallcaps">14, Argyll Place, W.</span> +</td> +</tr> +</table> + +<hr class = "smaller"> + +<div class = "namelist"> +<span class = "smallcaps">The Royal Library</span>, Windsor Castle.</div> +<div class = "namelist"> +<span class = "smallcaps">Adams</span>, Dr. Ernest, Victoria Park, +Manchester.</div> +<div class = "namelist"> +<span class = "smallcaps">Alexander</span>, George Russell, Esq., +Glasgow.</div> +<div class = "namelist"> +<span class = "smallcaps">Alexander</span>, John, Esq., 43, Campbell +Street, Glasgow.</div> +<div class = "namelist"> +<span class = "smallcaps">Amhurst</span>, Wm. A. Tyssen, Esq., Didlington +Park, Brandon, Norfolk.</div> +<div class = "namelist"> +<span class = "smallcaps">Asher & Co.</span>, Messrs., 13, Bedford +Street, Covent Garden. W.C. (10 sets.)</div> +<div class = "namelist"> +<span class = "smallcaps">Atkinson</span>, Rev. J. C., Danby +Parsonage, Grosmont, York.</div> +<div class = "namelist"> +<span class = "smallcaps">Aufrecht</span>, Professor, 12, Cumin Place, +Grange, Edinburgh.</div> +<div class = "namelist"> +<span class = "smallcaps">Austin</span>, Stephen, Hertford.</div> + +<div class = "namelist skip"> +<span class = "smallcaps">Backhouse</span>, John G., Esq., Blackwell, +Darlington.</div> +<div class = "namelist"> +<span class = "smallcaps">Bain</span>, J., Esq., Haymarket.</div> +<div class = "namelist"> +<span class = "smallcaps">Baker</span>, Charles, Esq., 11, Sackville +Street, W.</div> +<div class = "namelist"> +<span class = "smallcaps">Beard</span>, James, Esq., The Grange, Burnage +Lane, near Manchester</div> +<div class = "namelist"> +<span class = "smallcaps">Blackman</span>, Frederick, <span class = +"smallcaps">Esq.</span>, 4, York Road. S.</div> +<div class = "namelist"> +<span class = "smallcaps">Bladon</span>, James, Esq., Albion House, Pont y +Pool.</div> +<div class = "namelist"> +<span class = "pagenum">.9.</span> +<span class = "smallcaps">Bohn</span>, Henry G., Esq., York Street, Covent +Garden, W.C.</div> +<div class = "namelist"> +<span class = "smallcaps">Bosworth</span>, Rev. Professor, D.D., 20, +Beaumont Street, Oxford.</div> +<div class = "namelist"> +<span class = "smallcaps">Bradshaw</span>, Henry, Esq., King’s College, +Cambridge.</div> +<div class = "namelist"> +<span class = "smallcaps">Buxton</span>, Charles, Esq., M.P., 7, Grosvenor +Crescent, S.W.</div> + +<div class = "namelist skip"> +<span class = "smallcaps">Chappell</span>, William, Esq., 30, Upper Harley +Street. W.</div> +<div class = "namelist"> +<span class = "smallcaps">Cheetham</span>, Rev. S., King’s College, London. +W.C.</div> +<div class = "namelist"> +<span class = "smallcaps">Clark</span>, Rev. Samuel, The Vicarage, +Bredwardine, Hereford.</div> +<div class = "namelist"> +<span class = "smallcaps">Clark</span>, E. C., Esq., Trinity College, +Cambridge.</div> +<div class = "namelist"> +<span class = "smallcaps">Cohen</span>, A., Esq., 6, King’s Bench Walk, +Temple, E.C.</div> +<div class = "namelist"> +<span class = "smallcaps">Coleridge</span>, Miss Edith, Hanwell Rectory, +Middlesex.</div> +<div class = "namelist"> +<span class = "smallcaps">Coleridge</span>, J. Duke, Esq., Q.C., 1, Brick +Court, Temple, E.C.</div> +<div class = "namelist"> +<span class = "smallcaps">Cosens</span>, Frederick, Esq., Larkbere Lodge, +Clapham Park.</div> +<div class = "namelist"> +<span class = "smallcaps">Cowper</span>, J. Meadows, Esq., Davington, +Faversham.</div> +<div class = "namelist"> +<span class = "smallcaps">Craik</span>, Professor George L., 2, Chlorina +Place, Belfast.</div> +<div class = "namelist"> +<span class = "smallcaps">Craik</span>, George L., Esq., Glasgow.</div> + +<div class = "namelist skip"> +<span class = "smallcaps">Davies</span>, Rev. John, Walsoken Rectory, near +Wisbeach.</div> +<div class = "namelist"> +<span class = "smallcaps">De la Rue</span>, Warren, Esq., Bunhill +Row.</div> +<div class = "namelist"> +<span class = "smallcaps">De la Rue</span>, Wm. Frederick, Esq., 110, +Bunhill Road, E.C.</div> +<div class = "namelist"> +<span class = "smallcaps">Dickinson</span>, F. H., Esq., Kingweston +House, Somerton, Somerset.</div> +<div class = "namelist"> +<span class = "smallcaps">Dodds</span>, Rev. James, St. Stephen’s, +Glasgow.</div> +<div class = "namelist"> +<span class = "smallcaps">Donaldson</span>, David, Esq., Free Normal +Seminary, Glasgow.</div> +<div class = "namelist"> +<span class = "smallcaps">D’Orsey</span>, Rev. A. J., B.D., 8, +Lancaster Terrace, Regent’s Park. N.W.</div> +<div class = "namelist"> +<span class = "smallcaps">Dowden</span>, Edward, Esq., 8, Montenotte, +Cork.</div> +<div class = "namelist"> +<span class = "smallcaps">Dublin</span>, Right Rev. Richard C. Trench, +Archbishop of, Dublin.</div> +<div class = "namelist"> +<span class = "smallcaps">Dykes</span>, Rev. J. Oswald, Free St. George’s +Church, Edinburgh.</div> + +<div class = "namelist skip"> +<span class = "smallcaps">Earle</span>, Rev. J., Swanswick Rectory, +Bath.</div> +<div class = "namelist"> +<span class = "smallcaps">Edinburgh University Library.</span></div> +<div class = "namelist"> + +<span class = "smallcaps">Eisdell</span>, Miss S. L., +Colchester.</div> +<div class = "namelist"> +<span class = "smallcaps">Euing</span>, William, Esq., 209, West George +Street, Glasgow.</div> + +<div class = "namelist skip"> +<span class = "smallcaps">Field</span>, Hamilton, Esq., New Park Road, +Brixton Hill.</div> +<div class = "namelist"> +<span class = "smallcaps">Freethy</span>, Mr. Frederick, Working Men’s +College, London.</div> +<div class = "namelist"> +<span class = "smallcaps">Fry</span>, Danby P., Esq., Poor Law Board, +Whitehall.</div> +<div class = "namelist"> +<span class = "smallcaps">Fry</span>, Frederick, Esq., Wellington Street, +Islington.</div> +<div class = "namelist"> +<span class = "smallcaps">Furnivall</span>, F. J., Esq., 3, Old +Square, Lincoln’s Inn., W.C.</div> + +<div class = "namelist skip"> +<span class = "pagenum">.10.</span> +<span class = "smallcaps">Gee</span>, William, Esq., High Street, +Boston.</div> +<div class = "namelist"> +<span class = "smallcaps">Gibbs</span>, Captain Charles, 2nd Regiment, +Devonport.</div> +<div class = "namelist"> +<span class = "smallcaps">Gibbs</span>, H. H., Esq., St. Dunstan’s, +Regent’s Park.</div> +<div class = "namelist"> +<span class = "smallcaps">Glen</span>, W. Cunningham, Esq., Poor Law Board, +Whitehall.</div> +<div class = "namelist"> +<span class = "smallcaps">Goldstücker</span>, Professor, 14, St. George’s +Square. N.W.</div> +<div class = "namelist"> +<span class = "smallcaps">Gordon</span>, Rev. Robert, 14, Northumberland +St., Edinburgh.</div> +<div class = "namelist"> +<span class = "smallcaps">Guild</span>, J. Uylie, Esq., Glasgow.</div> + +<div class = "namelist skip"> +<span class = "smallcaps">Hales</span>, J. W., Esq., Christ’s College, +Cambridge.</div> +<div class = "namelist"> +<span class = "smallcaps">Halkett</span>, Samuel, Esq., Advocates’ Library, +Edinburgh.</div> +<div class = "namelist"> +<span class = "smallcaps">Hall</span>, Professor Fitz-Edward, D.C.L., 18, +Provost Road, Haverstock Hill. N.W.</div> +<div class = "namelist"> +<span class = "smallcaps">Hamlen</span>, Charles, Esq., 27, Virginia +Street, Glasgow.</div> +<div class = "namelist"> +<span class = "smallcaps">Hanson</span>, Reginald, Esq., 43, Upper Harley +Street. W.</div> +<div class = "namelist"> +<span class = "smallcaps">Heath</span>, N., Esq., Rector, The Academy, +Alloa.</div> +<div class = "namelist"> +<span class = "smallcaps">Hodgson</span>, Shadworth H., Esq., 45, Conduit +Street, Regent’s Street. W.</div> +<div class = "namelist"> +<span class = "smallcaps">Hooper</span>, Rev. Richard, Aston +Upthorpe.</div> +<div class = "namelist"> +<span class = "smallcaps">Horwood</span>, Alfred S., Esq., New Court, +Middle Temple. E.C.</div> +<div class = "namelist"> +<span class = "smallcaps">Howard</span>, Hon. Richard E., D.C.L., Stamp +Office, Manchester.</div> + +<div class = "namelist skip"> +<span class = "smallcaps">India Office Library</span>, Cannon Row.</div> + +<div class = "namelist skip"> +<span class = "smallcaps">Jackson</span>, E. Steane, Esq., Walthamstow +House, Essex.</div> +<div class = "namelist"> +<span class = "smallcaps">Johnson</span>, W., Esq., Eton College, +Windsor.</div> +<div class = "namelist"> +<span class = "smallcaps">Jones</span>, C. W., Esq., Gateacre, near +Liverpool.</div> +<div class = "namelist"> +<span class = "smallcaps">Jones</span>, E. B., Esq., 62, Great Russell +Street, Bloomsbury.</div> +<div class = "namelist"> +<span class = "smallcaps">Jones</span>, Thomas, Esq., Chetham Library, +Manchester.</div> + +<div class = "namelist skip"> +<span class = "smallcaps">King</span>, W. Warwick, Esq., 29, Queen Street, +Cannon Street West. E.C.</div> + +<div class = "namelist skip"> +<span class = "smallcaps">Laing</span>, David, Esq., Signet Library, +Edinburgh.</div> +<div class = "namelist"> +<span class = "smallcaps">Lamont</span>, Colin D., Esq., Union Bank of +Scotland, Greenock.</div> +<div class = "namelist"> +<span class = "smallcaps">Leckie</span>, Thomas, Esq., M.D., 60, Cambridge +Terrace, Hyde Park. W.</div> +<div class = "namelist"> +<span class = "smallcaps">Leigh</span>, John, Esq., 26, St. John’s Street, +Manchester.</div> +<div class = "namelist"> +<span class = "smallcaps">Lodge</span>, Rev. Barton, Colchester.</div> +<div class = "namelist"> +<span class = "smallcaps">London Library</span>, St. James’s Square. +S.W.</div> +<div class = "namelist"> +<span class = "pagenum">.11.</span> +<span class = "smallcaps">Luard</span>, Rev. Henry Richard, 4, St. Peter’s +Terrace, Cambridge.</div> +<div class = "namelist"> +<span class = "smallcaps">Lushington</span>, E. L., Esq., Park House, +Maidstone.</div> + +<div class = "namelist skip"> +<span class = "smallcaps">MacDonald</span>, George, Esq., 12, Earles +Terrace, Kensington. W.</div> +<div class = "namelist"> +<span class = "smallcaps">MacDouall</span>, Professor Charles, LL.D., +Queen’s College, Belfast.</div> +<div class = "namelist"> +<span class = "smallcaps">Mackenzie</span>, John Whitefoord, Esq., 16, +Royal Circus, Edinburgh.</div> +<div class = "namelist"> +<span class = "smallcaps">Macmillan</span>, A., Esq., Bedford Street, +Covent Garden. W.C.</div> +<div class = "namelist"> +<span class = "smallcaps">Madden</span>, Sir Frederick, K.H., British +Museum. W.C.</div> +<div class = "namelist"> +<span class = "smallcaps">Manchester</span>, The Duke of.</div> +<div class = "namelist"> +<span class = "smallcaps">Melbourne Public Library</span>, Victoria.</div> +<div class = "namelist"> +<span class = "smallcaps">Morris</span>, Richard, Esq., Christ Church +School, St. George’s East. E.</div> +<div class = "namelist"> +<span class = "smallcaps">Muir</span>, John, Esq., 16, Regent’s Terrace, +Edinburgh.</div> +<div class = "namelist"> +<span class = "smallcaps">Muller</span>, Professor Max, 64, High Street, +Oxford.</div> +<div class = "namelist"> +<span class = "smallcaps">Murdoch</span>, James Barclay, Esq., 33, Lyndoch +Street, Glasgow.</div> + +<div class = "namelist skip"> +<span class = "smallcaps">Napier</span>, George W., Esq., Alderley Edge, +near Manchester.</div> +<div class = "namelist"> +<span class = "smallcaps">Nash</span>, D. M., Esq., 21, Bentinck +Street, Manchester Square. W.</div> +<div class = "namelist"> +<span class = "smallcaps">Neaves</span>, Lord, 7, Charlotte Square, +Edinburgh.</div> +<div class = "namelist"> +<span class = "smallcaps">Nichol</span>, Professor, University, +Glasgow.</div> +<div class = "namelist"> +<span class = "smallcaps">Nichols</span>, John Gough, Esq., 25, Parliament +Street, Westminster.</div> +<div class = "namelist"> +<span class = "smallcaps">Norris</span>, Edwin, Esq., 6, Michael’s Grove, +Brompton. S.W.</div> + +<div class = "namelist skip"> +<span class = "smallcaps">Ogle</span>, Messrs. Maurice & Co., +Glasgow.</div> +<div class = "namelist"> +<span class = "smallcaps">Owen’s College Library</span>, Manchester.</div> + +<div class = "namelist skip"> +<span class = "smallcaps">Paine</span>, Cornelius, Jun., Esq., Surbiton +Hill, Surrey.</div> +<div class = "namelist"> +<span class = "smallcaps">Panton</span>, Rev. George A., Crown Circus, +Dowanhill, Glasgow. (2 sets.)</div> +<div class = "namelist"> +<span class = "smallcaps">Parker</span>, H. T., Esq., 3, Ladbroke +Gardens. W. (10 sets).</div> +<div class = "namelist"> +<span class = "smallcaps">Peile</span>, John, Esq., Christ’s College, +Cambridge.</div> +<div class = "namelist"> +<span class = "smallcaps">Perceval</span>, Charles Spencer, Esq., 64, +Eccleston Square. S.W.</div> +<div class = "namelist"> +<span class = "smallcaps">Priaulx</span>, Osw. De Beauvoir, Esq., 8, +Cavendish Square. W.</div> + +<div class = "namelist skip"> +<span class = "smallcaps">Raine</span>, Rev. James, York.</div> +<div class = "namelist"> +<span class = "smallcaps">Regent’s Park College</span>. N.W.</div> +<div class = "namelist"> +<span class = "smallcaps">Reilly</span>, Francis S., Esq., 22, Old +Buildings, Lincoln’s Inn. W.C.</div> +<div class = "namelist"> +<span class = "smallcaps">Richardson</span>, Sir John, Lancrigg, +Grasmere.</div> +<div class = "namelist"> +<span class = "pagenum">.12.</span> +<span class = "smallcaps">Rossetti</span>, Wm., Esq., 160, Albany Street. +N.W.</div> +<div class = "namelist"> +<span class = "smallcaps">Ruskin</span>, John, Esq., Denmark Hill, +Camberwell (10 sets).</div> + +<div class = "namelist skip"> +<span class = "smallcaps">St. David’s</span>, Right Rev. Connop Thirlwall, +Bishop of, Abergwili Palace, Carmarthen.</div> +<div class = "namelist"> +<span class = "smallcaps">Sion College</span>, President and Fellows of, +London Wall.</div> +<div class = "namelist"> +<span class = "smallcaps">Skeat</span>, Rev. Walter W., Christ’s College, +Cambridge.</div> +<div class = "namelist"> +<span class = "smallcaps">Slatter</span>, Rev. John, Streatley Vicarage, +Reading.</div> +<div class = "namelist"> +<span class = "smallcaps">Smith</span>, Charles, Esq., Faversham.</div> +<div class = "namelist"> +<span class = "smallcaps">Smith</span>, J. Guthrie, Esq., Glasgow.</div> +<div class = "namelist"> +<span class = "smallcaps">Sprange</span>, A. D., Esq., 12, Princes +Street, Bayswater. W.</div> +<div class = "namelist"> +<span class = "smallcaps">Stephens</span>, Professor George, University of +Copenhagen, Denmark.</div> +<div class = "namelist"> +<span class = "smallcaps">Stevenson</span>, Rev. Prof., D.D., 37, Royal +Terrace, Edinburgh.</div> +<div class = "namelist"> +<span class = "smallcaps">Stewart</span>, Alexander B., Esq., +Glasgow.</div> +<div class = "namelist"> +<span class = "smallcaps">Strathearn</span>, Sheriff, County Buildings, +Glasgow.</div> + +<div class = "namelist skip"> +<span class = "smallcaps">Tennyson</span>, Alfred, Esq., D.C.L., +Faringford, Isle of Wight.</div> +<div class = "namelist"> +<span class = "smallcaps">Trübner</span>, Nicholas, Esq., 60, Paternoster +Row (19 sets).</div> +<div class = "namelist"> +<span class = "smallcaps">Tucker</span>, Stephen, Esq., 11, St. Petersburgh +Place. W.</div> +<div class = "namelist"> +<span class = "smallcaps">Tyssen</span>, John R. D., Esq., Didlington +Park, Brandon, Norfolk.</div> + +<div class = "namelist skip"> +<span class = "smallcaps">Ward</span>, Harry, Esq., British Museum. +W.C.</div> +<div class = "namelist"> +<span class = "smallcaps">Watts</span>, Thomas, Esq., British Museum. +W.C.</div> +<div class = "namelist"> +<span class = "smallcaps">Wedgwood</span>, Hensleigh, Esq., 1, Cumberland +Place, Regent’s Park.</div> +<div class = "namelist"> +<span class = "smallcaps">Weymouth</span>, R. F., Esq., Portland +Grammar School, Plymouth.</div> +<div class = "namelist"> +<span class = "smallcaps">Wheatley</span>, Henry B., Esq., 53, Berners +Street. W.—<i>Hon. Sec.</i></div> +<div class = "namelist"> +<span class = "smallcaps">Williams</span>, Sydney, Esq., 14, Henrietta +Street, Covent Garden, W.C. (2 sets.)</div> +<div class = "namelist"> +<span class = "smallcaps">Williamson</span>, Stephen, Esq., 13, Virginia +Street, Glasgow.</div> +<div class = "namelist"> +<span class = "smallcaps">Wilson</span>, Edward J., Esq., 6, Whitefriars +Gate, Hull.</div> +<div class = "namelist"> +<span class = "smallcaps">Wright</span>, W. Aldis, Esq., Trinity College, +Cambridge.</div> + +<div class = "namelist skip"> +<span class = "smallcaps">Young</span>, Alexander, Esq., 38, Elm Bank +Crescent, Glasgow.</div> + +<hr class = "smaller"> + +<h6>STEPHEN AUSTIN, PRINTER, HERTFORD.</h6> + +<hr> + +<h3><a name = "footnotes">FOOTNOTES</a></h3> + +<p class = "footnote"> +<a href = "#tag1" name = "note1">1.</a> Wood’s Fasti Oxonienses, by Bliss, +I., 217.</p> + +<p class = "footnote"> +<a href = "#tag2" name = "note2">2.</a> M’Crie’s Life of Melville, vol. +ii., p. 509.</p> + +<p class = "footnote"> +<a href = "#tag3" name = "note3">3.</a> “An Alvearie or Quadruple +Dictionarie, containing four sundrie tongues, namelie, English, Latine, +Greeke and French ... by Jo. Baret. <i>London</i>, 1580.” Folio. An edition +was published in 1573, with three languages only, the Greek not being +included.</p> + +<p class = "footnote"> +<a href = "#tag4" name = "note4">4.</a> “De recta et emendata Linguæ +Anglicæ Scriptione Dialogus. <i>Lutetiæ</i>, 1568.” 4to.</p> + +<p class = "footnote"> +<a href = "#tag5" name = "note5">5.</a> It will be here as well to mention +that as the punctuation in the MS. is extremely unsystematic, it has been +dispensed with whenever the meaning was confused by it.</p> + +<p class = "footnote"> +<a href = "#tag6" name = "note6">6.</a> “A vast mass of our early +literature is still unprinted, and much that has been printed has, as the +late Herbert Coleridge remarked, ‘been brought out by Printing Clubs of +exclusive constitution, or for private circulation only, and might, for all +that the public in general is the better for them, just as well have +remained in manuscript, being, of course, utterly unprocurable, except in +great libraries, and not always there.’ It is well known that the Hon. +G. P. Marsh, the author of ‘The Origin and History of the English +Language,’ could not procure for use in his work a copy of ‘Havelok’ for +love or money; and the usual catalogue-price of ‘William and the Werwolf,’ +or ‘The Early English Gesta Romanorum,’ etc., etc., is six guineas, when +the book should be obtainable for less than a pound. Notwithstanding the +efforts of the Percy, Camden, and other Societies and Printing Clubs, more +than half our early printed literature—including the Romances +relating to our national hero, Arthur—is still inaccessible to the +student of moderate means; and it is a scandal that this state of things +should be allowed to continue.... Those who would raise any objection to +these re-editions—as a few have raised them—are asked to +consider the absurdity and injustice of debarring a large number of readers +from the enjoyment of an old author, because a living editor has once +printed his works, when the feeling of the editor himself is well expressed +in the words of one of the class, ‘You are heartily welcome to all I have +ever done. I should rejoice to see my books in the hands of a hundred, +where they are now on the shelves of one.’”—<i>Extract from the first +Prospectus.</i></p> + + + + + + + + +<pre> + + + + + +End of the Project Gutenberg EBook of Of the Orthographie and Congruitie of +the Britan Tongue, by Alexander Hume + +*** END OF THIS PROJECT GUTENBERG EBOOK ORTHOGRAPHIE OF THE BRITAN TONGUE *** + +***** This file should be named 17000-h.htm or 17000-h.zip ***** +This and all associated files of various formats will be found in: + https://www.gutenberg.org/1/7/0/0/17000/ + +Produced by Louise Hope, David Starner and the Online +Distributed Proofreading Team at https://www.pgdp.net + + +Updated editions will replace the previous one--the old editions +will be renamed. + +Creating the works from public domain print editions means that no +one owns a United States copyright in these works, so the Foundation +(and you!) can copy and distribute it in the United States without +permission and without paying copyright royalties. Special rules, +set forth in the General Terms of Use part of this license, apply to +copying and distributing Project Gutenberg-tm electronic works to +protect the PROJECT GUTENBERG-tm concept and trademark. Project +Gutenberg is a registered trademark, and may not be used if you +charge for the eBooks, unless you receive specific permission. If you +do not charge anything for copies of this eBook, complying with the +rules is very easy. You may use this eBook for nearly any purpose +such as creation of derivative works, reports, performances and +research. They may be modified and printed and given away--you may do +practically ANYTHING with public domain eBooks. Redistribution is +subject to the trademark license, especially commercial +redistribution. + + + +*** START: FULL LICENSE *** + +THE FULL PROJECT GUTENBERG LICENSE +PLEASE READ THIS BEFORE YOU DISTRIBUTE OR USE THIS WORK + +To protect the Project Gutenberg-tm mission of promoting the free +distribution of electronic works, by using or distributing this work +(or any other work associated in any way with the phrase "Project +Gutenberg"), you agree to comply with all the terms of the Full Project +Gutenberg-tm License (available with this file or online at +https://gutenberg.org/license). + + +Section 1. General Terms of Use and Redistributing Project Gutenberg-tm +electronic works + +1.A. By reading or using any part of this Project Gutenberg-tm +electronic work, you indicate that you have read, understand, agree to +and accept all the terms of this license and intellectual property +(trademark/copyright) agreement. If you do not agree to abide by all +the terms of this agreement, you must cease using and return or destroy +all copies of Project Gutenberg-tm electronic works in your possession. +If you paid a fee for obtaining a copy of or access to a Project +Gutenberg-tm electronic work and you do not agree to be bound by the +terms of this agreement, you may obtain a refund from the person or +entity to whom you paid the fee as set forth in paragraph 1.E.8. + +1.B. "Project Gutenberg" is a registered trademark. It may only be +used on or associated in any way with an electronic work by people who +agree to be bound by the terms of this agreement. There are a few +things that you can do with most Project Gutenberg-tm electronic works +even without complying with the full terms of this agreement. See +paragraph 1.C below. There are a lot of things you can do with Project +Gutenberg-tm electronic works if you follow the terms of this agreement +and help preserve free future access to Project Gutenberg-tm electronic +works. See paragraph 1.E below. + +1.C. The Project Gutenberg Literary Archive Foundation ("the Foundation" +or PGLAF), owns a compilation copyright in the collection of Project +Gutenberg-tm electronic works. Nearly all the individual works in the +collection are in the public domain in the United States. If an +individual work is in the public domain in the United States and you are +located in the United States, we do not claim a right to prevent you from +copying, distributing, performing, displaying or creating derivative +works based on the work as long as all references to Project Gutenberg +are removed. Of course, we hope that you will support the Project +Gutenberg-tm mission of promoting free access to electronic works by +freely sharing Project Gutenberg-tm works in compliance with the terms of +this agreement for keeping the Project Gutenberg-tm name associated with +the work. You can easily comply with the terms of this agreement by +keeping this work in the same format with its attached full Project +Gutenberg-tm License when you share it without charge with others. + +1.D. The copyright laws of the place where you are located also govern +what you can do with this work. Copyright laws in most countries are in +a constant state of change. If you are outside the United States, check +the laws of your country in addition to the terms of this agreement +before downloading, copying, displaying, performing, distributing or +creating derivative works based on this work or any other Project +Gutenberg-tm work. The Foundation makes no representations concerning +the copyright status of any work in any country outside the United +States. + +1.E. Unless you have removed all references to Project Gutenberg: + +1.E.1. The following sentence, with active links to, or other immediate +access to, the full Project Gutenberg-tm License must appear prominently +whenever any copy of a Project Gutenberg-tm work (any work on which the +phrase "Project Gutenberg" appears, or with which the phrase "Project +Gutenberg" is associated) is accessed, displayed, performed, viewed, +copied or distributed: + +This eBook is for the use of anyone anywhere at no cost and with +almost no restrictions whatsoever. You may copy it, give it away or +re-use it under the terms of the Project Gutenberg License included +with this eBook or online at www.gutenberg.org + +1.E.2. If an individual Project Gutenberg-tm electronic work is derived +from the public domain (does not contain a notice indicating that it is +posted with permission of the copyright holder), the work can be copied +and distributed to anyone in the United States without paying any fees +or charges. If you are redistributing or providing access to a work +with the phrase "Project Gutenberg" associated with or appearing on the +work, you must comply either with the requirements of paragraphs 1.E.1 +through 1.E.7 or obtain permission for the use of the work and the +Project Gutenberg-tm trademark as set forth in paragraphs 1.E.8 or +1.E.9. + +1.E.3. If an individual Project Gutenberg-tm electronic work is posted +with the permission of the copyright holder, your use and distribution +must comply with both paragraphs 1.E.1 through 1.E.7 and any additional +terms imposed by the copyright holder. Additional terms will be linked +to the Project Gutenberg-tm License for all works posted with the +permission of the copyright holder found at the beginning of this work. + +1.E.4. Do not unlink or detach or remove the full Project Gutenberg-tm +License terms from this work, or any files containing a part of this +work or any other work associated with Project Gutenberg-tm. + +1.E.5. Do not copy, display, perform, distribute or redistribute this +electronic work, or any part of this electronic work, without +prominently displaying the sentence set forth in paragraph 1.E.1 with +active links or immediate access to the full terms of the Project +Gutenberg-tm License. + +1.E.6. You may convert to and distribute this work in any binary, +compressed, marked up, nonproprietary or proprietary form, including any +word processing or hypertext form. However, if you provide access to or +distribute copies of a Project Gutenberg-tm work in a format other than +"Plain Vanilla ASCII" or other format used in the official version +posted on the official Project Gutenberg-tm web site (www.gutenberg.org), +you must, at no additional cost, fee or expense to the user, provide a +copy, a means of exporting a copy, or a means of obtaining a copy upon +request, of the work in its original "Plain Vanilla ASCII" or other +form. Any alternate format must include the full Project Gutenberg-tm +License as specified in paragraph 1.E.1. + +1.E.7. Do not charge a fee for access to, viewing, displaying, +performing, copying or distributing any Project Gutenberg-tm works +unless you comply with paragraph 1.E.8 or 1.E.9. + +1.E.8. You may charge a reasonable fee for copies of or providing +access to or distributing Project Gutenberg-tm electronic works provided +that + +- You pay a royalty fee of 20% of the gross profits you derive from + the use of Project Gutenberg-tm works calculated using the method + you already use to calculate your applicable taxes. The fee is + owed to the owner of the Project Gutenberg-tm trademark, but he + has agreed to donate royalties under this paragraph to the + Project Gutenberg Literary Archive Foundation. Royalty payments + must be paid within 60 days following each date on which you + prepare (or are legally required to prepare) your periodic tax + returns. Royalty payments should be clearly marked as such and + sent to the Project Gutenberg Literary Archive Foundation at the + address specified in Section 4, "Information about donations to + the Project Gutenberg Literary Archive Foundation." + +- You provide a full refund of any money paid by a user who notifies + you in writing (or by e-mail) within 30 days of receipt that s/he + does not agree to the terms of the full Project Gutenberg-tm + License. You must require such a user to return or + destroy all copies of the works possessed in a physical medium + and discontinue all use of and all access to other copies of + Project Gutenberg-tm works. + +- You provide, in accordance with paragraph 1.F.3, a full refund of any + money paid for a work or a replacement copy, if a defect in the + electronic work is discovered and reported to you within 90 days + of receipt of the work. + +- You comply with all other terms of this agreement for free + distribution of Project Gutenberg-tm works. + +1.E.9. If you wish to charge a fee or distribute a Project Gutenberg-tm +electronic work or group of works on different terms than are set +forth in this agreement, you must obtain permission in writing from +both the Project Gutenberg Literary Archive Foundation and Michael +Hart, the owner of the Project Gutenberg-tm trademark. Contact the +Foundation as set forth in Section 3 below. + +1.F. + +1.F.1. Project Gutenberg volunteers and employees expend considerable +effort to identify, do copyright research on, transcribe and proofread +public domain works in creating the Project Gutenberg-tm +collection. Despite these efforts, Project Gutenberg-tm electronic +works, and the medium on which they may be stored, may contain +"Defects," such as, but not limited to, incomplete, inaccurate or +corrupt data, transcription errors, a copyright or other intellectual +property infringement, a defective or damaged disk or other medium, a +computer virus, or computer codes that damage or cannot be read by +your equipment. + +1.F.2. LIMITED WARRANTY, DISCLAIMER OF DAMAGES - Except for the "Right +of Replacement or Refund" described in paragraph 1.F.3, the Project +Gutenberg Literary Archive Foundation, the owner of the Project +Gutenberg-tm trademark, and any other party distributing a Project +Gutenberg-tm electronic work under this agreement, disclaim all +liability to you for damages, costs and expenses, including legal +fees. YOU AGREE THAT YOU HAVE NO REMEDIES FOR NEGLIGENCE, STRICT +LIABILITY, BREACH OF WARRANTY OR BREACH OF CONTRACT EXCEPT THOSE +PROVIDED IN PARAGRAPH F3. YOU AGREE THAT THE FOUNDATION, THE +TRADEMARK OWNER, AND ANY DISTRIBUTOR UNDER THIS AGREEMENT WILL NOT BE +LIABLE TO YOU FOR ACTUAL, DIRECT, INDIRECT, CONSEQUENTIAL, PUNITIVE OR +INCIDENTAL DAMAGES EVEN IF YOU GIVE NOTICE OF THE POSSIBILITY OF SUCH +DAMAGE. + +1.F.3. LIMITED RIGHT OF REPLACEMENT OR REFUND - If you discover a +defect in this electronic work within 90 days of receiving it, you can +receive a refund of the money (if any) you paid for it by sending a +written explanation to the person you received the work from. If you +received the work on a physical medium, you must return the medium with +your written explanation. The person or entity that provided you with +the defective work may elect to provide a replacement copy in lieu of a +refund. If you received the work electronically, the person or entity +providing it to you may choose to give you a second opportunity to +receive the work electronically in lieu of a refund. If the second copy +is also defective, you may demand a refund in writing without further +opportunities to fix the problem. + +1.F.4. Except for the limited right of replacement or refund set forth +in paragraph 1.F.3, this work is provided to you 'AS-IS' WITH NO OTHER +WARRANTIES OF ANY KIND, EXPRESS OR IMPLIED, INCLUDING BUT NOT LIMITED TO +WARRANTIES OF MERCHANTIBILITY OR FITNESS FOR ANY PURPOSE. + +1.F.5. Some states do not allow disclaimers of certain implied +warranties or the exclusion or limitation of certain types of damages. +If any disclaimer or limitation set forth in this agreement violates the +law of the state applicable to this agreement, the agreement shall be +interpreted to make the maximum disclaimer or limitation permitted by +the applicable state law. The invalidity or unenforceability of any +provision of this agreement shall not void the remaining provisions. + +1.F.6. INDEMNITY - You agree to indemnify and hold the Foundation, the +trademark owner, any agent or employee of the Foundation, anyone +providing copies of Project Gutenberg-tm electronic works in accordance +with this agreement, and any volunteers associated with the production, +promotion and distribution of Project Gutenberg-tm electronic works, +harmless from all liability, costs and expenses, including legal fees, +that arise directly or indirectly from any of the following which you do +or cause to occur: (a) distribution of this or any Project Gutenberg-tm +work, (b) alteration, modification, or additions or deletions to any +Project Gutenberg-tm work, and (c) any Defect you cause. + + +Section 2. Information about the Mission of Project Gutenberg-tm + +Project Gutenberg-tm is synonymous with the free distribution of +electronic works in formats readable by the widest variety of computers +including obsolete, old, middle-aged and new computers. It exists +because of the efforts of hundreds of volunteers and donations from +people in all walks of life. + +Volunteers and financial support to provide volunteers with the +assistance they need, is critical to reaching Project Gutenberg-tm's +goals and ensuring that the Project Gutenberg-tm collection will +remain freely available for generations to come. In 2001, the Project +Gutenberg Literary Archive Foundation was created to provide a secure +and permanent future for Project Gutenberg-tm and future generations. +To learn more about the Project Gutenberg Literary Archive Foundation +and how your efforts and donations can help, see Sections 3 and 4 +and the Foundation web page at https://www.pglaf.org. + + +Section 3. Information about the Project Gutenberg Literary Archive +Foundation + +The Project Gutenberg Literary Archive Foundation is a non profit +501(c)(3) educational corporation organized under the laws of the +state of Mississippi and granted tax exempt status by the Internal +Revenue Service. The Foundation's EIN or federal tax identification +number is 64-6221541. Its 501(c)(3) letter is posted at +https://pglaf.org/fundraising. Contributions to the Project Gutenberg +Literary Archive Foundation are tax deductible to the full extent +permitted by U.S. federal laws and your state's laws. + +The Foundation's principal office is located at 4557 Melan Dr. S. +Fairbanks, AK, 99712., but its volunteers and employees are scattered +throughout numerous locations. Its business office is located at +809 North 1500 West, Salt Lake City, UT 84116, (801) 596-1887, email +business@pglaf.org. Email contact links and up to date contact +information can be found at the Foundation's web site and official +page at https://pglaf.org + +For additional contact information: + Dr. Gregory B. Newby + Chief Executive and Director + gbnewby@pglaf.org + + +Section 4. Information about Donations to the Project Gutenberg +Literary Archive Foundation + +Project Gutenberg-tm depends upon and cannot survive without wide +spread public support and donations to carry out its mission of +increasing the number of public domain and licensed works that can be +freely distributed in machine readable form accessible by the widest +array of equipment including outdated equipment. Many small donations +($1 to $5,000) are particularly important to maintaining tax exempt +status with the IRS. + +The Foundation is committed to complying with the laws regulating +charities and charitable donations in all 50 states of the United +States. Compliance requirements are not uniform and it takes a +considerable effort, much paperwork and many fees to meet and keep up +with these requirements. We do not solicit donations in locations +where we have not received written confirmation of compliance. To +SEND DONATIONS or determine the status of compliance for any +particular state visit https://pglaf.org + +While we cannot and do not solicit contributions from states where we +have not met the solicitation requirements, we know of no prohibition +against accepting unsolicited donations from donors in such states who +approach us with offers to donate. + +International donations are gratefully accepted, but we cannot make +any statements concerning tax treatment of donations received from +outside the United States. U.S. laws alone swamp our small staff. + +Please check the Project Gutenberg Web pages for current donation +methods and addresses. Donations are accepted in a number of other +ways including including checks, online payments and credit card +donations. To donate, please visit: https://pglaf.org/donate + + +Section 5. General Information About Project Gutenberg-tm electronic +works. + +Professor Michael S. Hart was the originator of the Project Gutenberg-tm +concept of a library of electronic works that could be freely shared +with anyone. For thirty years, he produced and distributed Project +Gutenberg-tm eBooks with only a loose network of volunteer support. + + +Project Gutenberg-tm eBooks are often created from several printed +editions, all of which are confirmed as Public Domain in the U.S. +unless a copyright notice is included. Thus, we do not necessarily +keep eBooks in compliance with any particular paper edition. + + +Most people start at our Web site which has the main PG search facility: + + https://www.gutenberg.org + +This Web site includes information about Project Gutenberg-tm, +including how to make donations to the Project Gutenberg Literary +Archive Foundation, how to help produce our new eBooks, and how to +subscribe to our email newsletter to hear about new eBooks. + + +</pre> + +</body> +</html> diff --git a/17000.txt b/17000.txt new file mode 100644 index 0000000..db60622 --- /dev/null +++ b/17000.txt @@ -0,0 +1,2850 @@ +The Project Gutenberg EBook of Of the Orthographie and Congruitie of the +Britan Tongue, by Alexander Hume + +This eBook is for the use of anyone anywhere at no cost and with +almost no restrictions whatsoever. You may copy it, give it away or +re-use it under the terms of the Project Gutenberg License included +with this eBook or online at www.gutenberg.org + + +Title: Of the Orthographie and Congruitie of the Britan Tongue + A Treates, noe shorter than necessarie, for the Schooles + +Author: Alexander Hume + +Editor: Henry B. Wheatley + +Release Date: November 4, 2005 [EBook #17000] + +Language: English + +Character set encoding: ASCII + +*** START OF THIS PROJECT GUTENBERG EBOOK ORTHOGRAPHIE OF THE BRITAN TONGUE *** + + + + +Produced by Louise Hope, David Starner and the Online +Distributed Proofreading Team at https://www.pgdp.net + + + + + + +{Transcriber's Note: + +All material in parentheses () or square brackets [], including the +(_sic_) notations, is from the 1865 original. Material added by the +transcriber is in braces {}. + Greek words have been transliterated and shown between +symbols+. + Single Greek letters are identified by name: _eta_, _alpha_. + o: and e: represent omega and eta. + "i" represents upside-down i (used in I.3.6). + {gh} represents yogh (used in I.4.10). + {L} represents the "pounds" symbol. +Letters with diacritics are "unpacked" and shown within braces: + {a'} {e`} a with acute accent, e with grave accent +Irregularities in chapter numbering are explained at the end of the +editor's Notes.} + + + OF THE + + ORTHOGRAPHIE AND CONGRUITIE + + OF THE BRITAN TONGUE + + + A Treates, noe shorter then necessarie, + + for the Schooles, + + Be + + ALEXANDER HUME. + + +Edited from the Original MS. in the British Museum, + by + HENRY B. WHEATLEY. + + + + +LONDON: +Published for the Early English Text Society, +by Truebner & Co., 60, Paternoster Row. +MDCCCLXV. + +HERTFORD: +Printed by Stephen Austin. + + + + +PREFACE. + + +The following Tract is now printed for the first time from the original +Manuscript in the old Royal Collection in the Library of the British +Museum (Bibl. Reg. 17 A. xi). It is written on paper, and consists of +forty-five leaves, the size of the pages being 5-3/4 in. by 3-3/4 in. +The dedication, the titles, and the last two lines, are written with a +different coloured ink from that employed in the body of the MS., and +appear to be in a different handwriting. It is probable that the tract +was copied for the author, but that he himself wrote the dedication to +the King. + +The Manuscript is undated, and we have no means of ascertaining the +exact time when it was written; but from a passage in the dedication to +James I. of England, it is fair to infer that it was written shortly +after the visit of that monarch to Scotland, subsequent to his accession +to the throne of the southern kingdom, that is, in the year 1617. This +would make it contemporaneous with Ben Jonson's researches on the +English Grammar; for we find, in 1629, James Howell (Letters, Sec. V. +27) writing to Jonson that he had procured Davies' Welch Grammar for +him, "to add to those many you have." The grammar that Jonson had +prepared for the press was destroyed in the conflagration of his study; +so that the posthumous work we now possess consists merely of materials, +which were printed for the first time in 1640, three years after the +author's death. + +The Dedication of this Tract is merely signed _Alexander Hume_, and +contains no other clue to the authorship. Curiously enough there were +four Alexander Humes living about the same time, and three of them were +educated at St. Mary's College, St. Andrew's; only two, however, became +authors, the first of whom was Minister of Logie, and wrote _Hymnes or +Sacred Songes_. There can be little doubt, however, that the present +grammar was written by the Alexander Hume who was at one time Head +Master of the High School, Edinburgh, and author of _Grammatica Nova_. + +From Dr. Steven's History of the High School, Edinburgh, and from +M'Crie's Life of Melville, I have been enabled to extract and put +together the following scanty particulars of our author's life:--The +time and place both of his birth and of his death are alike unknown; +but he himself, on the title of one of his works, tells us that he was +distantly connected with the ancient and noble family of Home, in the +county of Berwick. He was educated at the school of Dunbar, under the +celebrated Andrew Simson, and in due time was enrolled a student in St. +Mary's College, St. Andrew's, and then took the degree of Bachelor of +Arts in 1574. He came to England, and was incorporated at Oxford January +26, 1580-81, as "M. of A. of St. Andrew's, in Scotland."[1] He spent +sixteen years in England, partly engaged in studying and partly in +teaching. During the latter part of this term he was a schoolmaster at +Bath, as appears from Dr. Hill's answer to him, published in 1592; and +the fact of his residence in this city is corroborated at page 18 of +the present treatise. He then returned to Scotland, having gained a +reputation for the excellence of his learning and for the power he +possessed of communicating it to others. On the dismissal of Hercules +Rollock, Rector of the High School, Edinburgh, from his office, Hume was +unanimously chosen to succeed him, and his appointment was dated 23rd +April, 1596. During his incumbency the High School underwent many +changes, and received the form which it retains to the present day. In +March, 1606, Hume resigned his office to become principal master in the +grammar school founded a short time previously, at Prestonpans, by the +munificent John Davidson, minister of the parish. The following document +gives an account of Hume's admission to this school:-- + + {Transcriber's Note: + In the following passage, {-e} represents e with overline. + Caret ^ means that the following single letter, or bracketed group + of letters, was printed in superscript.} + + "At hadintoun y^e 25 of Junij 1606. The q^{lk} day M^r Jo^n ker + minister of y^e panis producit y^e pr{-e}ntat^one of M^r Alex^r + hoome to be schoolm^r of y^e schoole of y^e panis foundit be M^r J^o + Davedsone for instructioune of the youth in hebrew, greek and latine + subscryvet be yais to quhome M^r Jo^n davedsone gave power to noi{a~}t + y^e man q^{lk} pr{-e}ntat^one y^e pr{-e}brie allowit and ordenit y^e + moderator & clerk to subscrive y^e samine in y^r names q^{lk} yay + ded. As also ordeanit y^t y^e said kirk of y^e panis suld be visited + upon y^e eight day of Julij next to come for admissione of y^e said + M^r Alex^r to y^e said office. The visitors wer appoyntit M^r Ar^d + oswald M^r Robert Wallace M^r George greir M^r andro blackhall & M^r + andro Maghye to teach."----"At Saltprestoun July 8, 1606. The haill + parischoners being poisit how yay lyckit of y^e said M^r Alex^r w^t + vniforme consent being particularly inqwyrit schew y^r guid lycking + of him and y^r willingnes to accept and receiv him to y^e said + office Q^rupon y^e said M^r Alex^r wes admittit to y^e said + office & in token of y^e approba^one both of visitors & of y^e + parischon{-e}s p^rnt both y^e ane and y^e vother tuik y^e said M^r + Alex^r be y^e hand & y^e haill magistratis gentlemen and reman{-e}t + parischoners p^rnt faithfullie p^rmisit to c{o~]curre for y^e + further{a~}ce of y^e work y^t yit restis to be done to y^e said schoole + as also to keipt y^e said M^r Alex^r and his scholleris skaithlis + finallie for farther authorizing of y^e said (_sic_) it wes thought + meitt y^t y^e haill visitors & parichon{-e}s p^rnt suld enter y^e + said M^r Alex^r into y^e said schoole & y^r heir him teache q^{lk} + also wes doone." (Rec. of Presb. of Haddington).[2] + + [Footnote 1: Wood's Fasti Oxonienses, by Bliss, I., 217.] + + [Footnote 2: M'Crie's Life of Melville, vol. ii., p. 509.] + +The school rapidly rose to distinction under Hume, but in 1615 he +relinquished his position, and accepted the Mastership of the Grammar +School of Dunbar, then in high repute, and the very same school in which +he had commenced his own education. When occupied at Dunbar, Hume had +the honour of being the first who, in a set speech, welcomed James VI. +back to his Scottish dominions, after an absence of fourteen years. The +King stopped on his way northward from Berwick on the 13th of May, 1617, +at Dunglass Castle the residence of the Earl of Home, and Hume, as the +orator of the day, delivered a Latin address. + +The date of Hume's death is not known; but he was witness to a deed on +the 27th of November, 1627; and later still, in the records of the Privy +Council of Scotland, 8th and 16th July, 1630, Mr. D. Laing tells me that +there is a memorandum of the King's letter anent the Grammar of Mr. +Alexander Hume, "schoolmaster at Dunbar." With regard to his private +life, we know that he was married to Helen Rutherford, and had two sons +and a daughter born to him in Edinburgh between the years 1601 and 1606. +He was the father of three more children, also two sons and a daughter, +between 1608 and 1610, in the county of East Lothian. + +Hume was a master in controversy, and wrote on subjects of polemical +divinity; but his mind was principally drawn towards language and the +rules of its construction. He especially gave much of his time to the +study of Latin grammar, and feeling dissatisfied with the elementary +books which were then in use, he drew up one himself, which he submitted +to the correction of Andrew Melville and other learned friends, and +published in 1612 under the title of _Grammatica Nova_. The object he +proposed to himself was to exclude from the schools the grammar of the +Priscian of the Netherlands, the celebrated John Van Pauteren, but his +work did not give the satisfaction which he had expected. He succeeded, +however, in his wishes after many reverses, by the help of Alexander +Seton, Earl of Dunfermline, Chancellor of Scotland, and by authority +both of Parliament and of the Privy Council his grammar was enjoined to +be used in all the schools of the kingdom. But through the interest of +the bishops, and the steady opposition of Ray, his successor at the High +School, the injunction was rendered of no effect. He would not, however, +be beaten, and we find that in 1623 he was again actively engaged in +adopting measures to secure the introduction of his grammar into every +school in North Britain where the Latin language was taught. + +The following is a list of our author's works:-- + +A Reioynder to Doctor Hil concerning the Descense of Christ into Hell. + By Alexander Hume Maister of Artes. 4o. + + No place of printing, printer's name, or date, but apparently + printed at London in 1592 or 1593. Dedicated to Robert Earl of + Essex. Although this is the first work that I can find attributed + to Alexander Hume, yet there is no doubt that there must have been + a former one of which we have no record, and the title and + contents of Dr. Hill's book would lead us to this conclusion--"The + Defence of the Article. Christ descended into Hell. With arguments + obiected against the truth of the same doctrine of one Alexander + Humes. By Adam Hyll, D of Divinity. London 1592. 4o. This little + volume consists of two parts; 1st, the original sermon preached by + Hill 28th February, 1589; 2nd, the reply to Hume. At p. 33, the + end of the sermon, is this note, "This sermon ... was answered by + one Alexander Huns, Schoolemaester of Bath, whose answere wholy + foloweth, with a replye of the author" ... At p. 33, "The reply of + Adam Hill to the answere made by Alexander Humes to a sermon," + etc. + +A Diduction of the true and Catholik meaning of our Sauiour his words, + _this is my bodie_, in the institution of his laste Supper through + the ages of the Church from Christ to our owne dayis. Whereunto is + annexed a Reply to M. William Reynolds in defence of M. Robert Bruce + his arguments on this subject: displaying M. John Hammilton's + ignorance and contradictions: with sundry absurdities following upon + the Romane interpretation of these words. Compiled by Alexander + Hume, Maister of the high Schoole of Edinburgh. Edinburgh, Printed + by Robert Waldegrave, Printer to the King's Maiestie, 1602. Cum + Privilegio Regis. 8o. + +Prima Elementa Grammaticae in usum juventutis Scoticae digesta. Edinburgi, + 1612. 8o. + +Grammatica Nova in usum juventutis Scoticae ad methodum revocata. + Edinburgi, 1612. 8o. + +Bellum Grammaticale, ad exemplar Mri. Alexandri Humii. Edinburgi, + excud. Gideon Lithgo, Anno Dom. 1658 8o. Several later editions. + + This humorous Grammatical Tragi-Comedy was not written by Hume, + but only revised by him. + +King James's Progresses, collected and Published by John Adamson + afterwards Principal of the University of Edinburgh, entitled-- + +TA TO:N MOUSO:N EISODIA+: + The Muses Welcome to the High and Mighty Prince James &c. At his + Majesties happie Returne to Scotland In Anno 1617. Edinburgh 1618, + folio. + + At page 1: "His Majestie came from Bervik to Dunglas the xiij day + of Maye, where was delivered this [latin] speach following by A. + Hume."--At page 16, there is also a couple of Latin verses signed + "Alexander Humius." + +MS. in the British Museum. The present work. + +MS. in the Advocates' Library:-- + + Rerum Scoticarum Compendium, in usum Scholarum. Per Alexandrum + Humium ex antiqua et nobili gente Humiorum in Scotia, a prim{a^} stirpe + quinta sobole oriundum. This work is dated October 1660, and is + therefore merely a transcript. It is an epitome of Buchanan's + History, and Chr. Irvine in Histor. Scot. Nomenclatura, calls it + Clavis in Buchananum, and Bishop Nicholson (Scottish Hist. Lib.) + praises its Latin style. + +The following three works are inserted by Dr. Steven in his list of +Hume's writings, and have been supposed to be his by M'Crie and others; +but Mr. D. Laing believes "there can be no doubt, from internal +evidence, that the true author was Alexander Hume, the poet, who became +minister of Logie, near Stirling, in 1597, and who died in December, +1609." In Wood's Athenae Oxonienses, by Bliss, i., 624, it is stated that +all three of them "were printed in London in 1594, in October," but this +must, I think, be a mistake. + +Ane Treatise of Conscience, quhairin divers secreits concerning that + subject are discovered. At Edinburgh, printed by Robert Walde-grave, + Printer to the King's Maiestie 1594. 8o. + +Of the Felicitie of the world to come, unsavorie to the obstinate, + alluring to such as are gone astray, and to the faithfull full of + consolation. Edinb. 1594. 8o. + +Four Discourses, of Praises unto God, to wit, 1 in Praise of the Mercy + and Goodness of God. 2 of his justice. 3 of his Power. 4 of his + Providence. Edinb. 1594. 8o. + +In conclusion, my acknowledgments are due to David Laing, Esq., who +has kindly suggested some corrections in the list of Hume's works, in +addition to what is noted above. + + London, February, 1865. + + * * * * * + + + To the maest excellent + in all princelie wisdom, + learning, and heroical + artes, JAMES, + of Great Britan, + France, and + Ireland, + King, + Defender of the faeth, + grace, mercie, peace, + honoure here and + glorie hereafter. + + +May it please your maest excellent M_ajestie_, I, your grace's humble +servant, seeing sik uncertentie in our men's wryting, as if a man wald +indyte one letter to tuentie of our best wryteres, nae tuae of the +tuentie, without conference, wald agree; and that they quhae might +perhapes agree, met rather be custom then knawlege, set my selfe, about +a yeer syne, to seek a remedie for that maladie. Quhen I had done, +refyning it, I fand in Barret's Alvearie,[3] quhilk is a dictionarie +Anglico-latinum, that Sr. Thomas Smith,[4] a man of nae less worth +then learning, Secretarie to Queen Elizabeth, had left a learned and +judiciouse monument on the same subject. Heer consydering my aun +weaknes, and meannes of my person, began to fear quhat might betyed my +sillie boat in the same seas quhaer sik a man's ship was sunck in the +gulf of oblivion. For the printeres and wryteres of this age, caring for +noe more arte then may win the pennie, wil not paen them selfes to knau +whither it be orthographie or skuiographie that doeth the turne: _and_ +schoolmasteres, quhae's sillie braine will reach no farther then the +compas of their cap, content them selfes with +autos ephe:+ my master +said it. Quhil I thus hovered betueen hope _and_ despare, the same +Barret, in the letter E, myndes me of a star _and_ constellation to calm +al the tydes of these seaes, if it wald please the supreme Majestie to +command the universitie to censure and ratifie, and the schooles to +teach the future age right and wrang, if the present will not rectius +sapere. Heere my harte laggared on the hope of your M_ajesties_ +judgement, quhom God hath indeued with light in a sorte supernatural, if +the way might be found to draue your eie, set on high materes of state, +to take a glim of a thing of so mean contemplation, and yet necessarie. +Quhiles I stack in this claye, it pleased God to bring your M_ajestie_ +hame to visit your aun Ida. Quher I hard that your G_race_, in the +disputes of al purposes quherwith, after the exemple of _th_e wyse in +former ages, you use to season your moat, ne quid tibi temporis sine +fructu fluat, fel sundrie tymes on this subject reproving your +courteoures, quha on a new conceat of finnes sum tymes spilt (as they +cal it) the king's language. Quhilk thing it is reported that your +M_ajestie_ not onlie refuted with impregnable reasones, but alsoe fel +on Barret's opinion that you wald cause the universities mak an Inglish +gra_m_mar to repres the insolencies of sik green heades. This, quhen I +hard it, soe secunded my hope, that in continent I maed moien hou to +convoy this litle treates to your M_ajesties_ sight, to further (if +perhapes it may please your G_race_) that gud motion. In school materes, +the least are not the least, because to erre in them is maest absurd. +If the fundation be not sure, the maer gorgiouse the edifice the grosser +the falt. Neither is it the least parte of a prince's praise, curasse +rem literariam, and be his auctoritie to mend the misses that ignorant +custom hath bred. Julius Caesar was noe less diligent to eternize his +name be the pen then be the suord. Neither thought he it unworthie of +his paines to wryte a grammar in the heat of the civil weer, quhilk was +to them as the English gram_m_ar is to us; _and_, as it seemes noe less +then necessarie, nor our's is now. Manie kinges since that tyme have +advanced letteres be erecting schooles, and doting revennues to their +ma_in_tenance; but few have had the knaulege them selfes to mend, or +be tuiched with, the defectes or faltes crept into the boueles of +learning, among quhom JAMES the first, ane of your M_ajesties_ worthie +progenitoures, houbeit repressed be the iniquitie of the tyme, deserved +noe smal praise; and your M_ajesties_ self noe less, co_m_manding, at +your first entrie to your Roial scepter, to reform the grammar, and to +teach Aristotle in his aun tongue, quhilk hes maed the greek almaest as +common in Scotland as the latine. In this alsoe, if it please your +M_ajestie_ to put to your hand, you have al the windes of favour in your +sail; account, that al doe follow; judgement, that al doe reverence; +wisdom, that al admire; learning, that stupified our scholes hearing +a king borne, from tuelfe yeeres ald alwayes occupyed in materes of +state, moderat in theological and philosophical disputationes, to the +admiration of all that hard him, and speciallie them quha had spent al +their dayes in those studies. + + [Footnote 3: "An Alvearie or Quadruple Dictionarie, containing + four sundrie tongues, namelie, English, Latine, Greeke and French + ... by Jo. Baret. _London_, 1580." Folio. An edition was published + in 1573, with three languages only, the Greek not being included.] + + [Footnote 4: "De recta et emendata Linguae Anglicae Scriptione + Dialogus. _Lutetiae_, 1568." 4to.] + +Accept, dred Soveragne, your pover servantes myte. If it can confer anie +thing to the montan of your Majesties praise, and it wer but a clod, use +it _and_ the auctour as your's. Thus beseeking your grace to accep my +mint, and pardon my miss, commites your grace to the king of grace, to +grace your grace with al graces spiritual _and_ temporal. + +Your M_ajesties_ + humble servant, + Alexander Hume. + + + + + OF THE ORTHOGRAPHIE + + OF THE BRITAN TONGUE; + + A TREATES, NOE + + SHORTER + + THEN NECESSARIE, FOR + + THE SCHOOLES. + + + + +OF THE GROUNDES OF ORTHOGRAPHIE. + +Cap. 1. + + +1. To wryte orthographicallie ther are to be considered the symbol, the +thing symbolized, and their congruence. Geve me leave, gentle reader, +in a new art, to borrow termes incident to the purpose, quhilk, being +defyned, wil further understanding. + +2. The symbol, then, I cal the written letter, quhilk representes to the +eie the sound that the mouth sould utter. + +3. The thing symbolized I cal the sound quhilk the mouth utteres quhen +the eie sees the symbol. + +4. The congruence between them I cal the instrument of the mouth, +quhilk, when the eie sees the symbol, utteres the sound. + +5. This is the ground of al orthographie, leading the wryter from the +sound to the symbol, and the reader from the symbol to the sound. As, +for exemple, if I wer to wryte God, the tuich of the midle of the tongue +on the roofe of the mouth befoer the voual, and the top of the tongue on +the teeth behind the voual, myndes me to wryte it g_o_d. The voual is +judged be the sound, as shal be shaued hereafter. This is the hardest +lesson in this treates, and may be called the key of orthographie. + + + + +OF THE LATINE VOUALES. + +Cap. 2. + + +1. We, as almaest al Europ, borrow our symboles from the Romanes. +Quherforr, to rectefie our aun, first it behoves us to knaw their's. +Thei are in nu_m_ber 23: a, b, c, d, e, f, g, h, i, k, l, m, n, o, p, q, +r, s, t, u, x, y, and z. + +2. To omit the needless questiones of their order and formes; of them, +five be vouales, ane a noat of aspiration, and all the rest consonantes. + +3. A voual is the symbol of a sound maed without the tuiches of the +mouth. + +4. They are distinguished the ane from the other be delating and +contracting the mouth, and are a, e, i, o, u. + +5. Quhat was the right roman sound of them is hard to judge, seeing now +we heer nae romanes; and other nationes sound them after their aun +idiomes, and the latine as they sound them. + +6. But seeing our earand is with our aun britan, we purpose to omit +curiosities, _et_ quae nihil nostra intersunt. Our aun, hou-be it +dialectes of ane tong, differing in the sound of them, differ alsoe in +pronuncing the latine. Quherfoer, to make a conformitie baeth in latine +and English, we man begin with the latine. + +7. A, the first of them, the south soundes as beath thei and we sound it +in bare, nudus; and we, as beath thei and we sound it in bar, obex. + +8. But without partialitie (for in this earand I have set my compas to +the loadstar of reason), we pronunce it better. If I am heer deceaved, +reason sall deceave me. + +9. For we geve it alwaies ane sound beath befoer and behind the +consonant: thei heer ane and ther an other. As in amabant, in the first +tuae syllabes they sound it as it soundes in bare, and in the last as it +sounds in bar. Quherupon I ground this argument. That is the better +sound, not onelie of this, but alsoe of al other letteres, q_uhi_lk is +alwayes ane. But we sound it alwayes ane, and therfoer better. Ad that +their sound of it is not far unlyke the sheepes bae, q_uhi_lk the greek +symbolizes be _eta_ not _alpha_, +be:+ not +ba+. See Eustat. in Homer. + +10. Of this letter the latines themselfes had tuae other sounds +differing the ane from the other, and beath from this, quhilk they +symbolized be adding an other voual, ae and au. And these they called +diphthonges. + +11. The diphthong they defyne to be the sound of tuae vouales coalescing +into ane sound, quhilk definition in au is plaen, in ae obscurer as now +we pronunce it, for now we sound it generallie lyke the voual e, without +sound of the a, q_uhi_lk, notwithstanding is the principal voual in this +diphthong sound. Questionles at the first it semes to have had sum +differing sound from a, sik as we pronunce in stean, or the south in +stain. But this corruption is caryed with a stronger tyde then reason +can resist, and we wil not stryve with the stream. + +14. E followes, q_uhi_lk in reason sould have but ane sound, for without +doubt the first intent was to geve everie sound the awn symbol, and +everie symbol the awn sound. But as now we sound it in quies and +quiesco, the judiciouse ear may discern tuae soundes. But because +heer we differ not, I wil acquiess. My purpose is not to deal with +impossibilities, nor to mend al crookes, but to conform (if reason wil +conform us) the south and north beath in latine and in English. + +15. Af this voual ryseth tuae diphthonges, ei and eu, quhilk beath +standes wel with the definition, sect. 11. + +16. Of the next, i, we differ farder, and the knot harder to louse, +for nether syde wantes sum reason. Thei in mihi, tibi, and sik otheres, +pronunce it as it soundes in bide, manere; we as it soundes in bid, +jubere. + +17. Among the ancientes I fynd sum groundes for their sound. Cic. epist. +fam. lib. 9, epis. 22, avoues that bini, in latin, and +binei+ in Greek, +had ane sound. And Varro, with sundrie ancientes, wrytes domineis and +serveis, for dominis and servis, quhilk is more lyke the sound of bide +then bid. If this argument reached as wel to i short as i lang, and if +we wer sure how +ei+ was pronunced in those dayes, this auctoritie wald +over-weegh our reason; but seing i, in mihi, _et_c., in the first is +short, and in the last co_m_mon, and the sound of ei uncertan, I stand +at my reason, sect. 9, q_uhi_lk is as powerful heer for i as ther for a. +They pronunce not i in is and quis, id and quid, in and quin, as they +pronunce it in mihi, tibi, sibi, ibi, _et_c., and therfoer not right. + +18. As for o, in latin, we differ not; u, the south pronu_n_ces quhen +the syllab beginnes or endes at it, as eu, teu for tu, and eunum meunus +for unum munus, q_uhi_lk, because it is a diphthong sound, and because +they them selfes, quhen a consonant followes it, pronunce it other +wayes, I hoep I sal not need argumentes to prove it wrang, and not be +a pure voual. + + + + +OF THE BRITAN VOUALES. + +Cap. 3. + + +1. Of a, in our tongue we have four soundes, al so differing ane from an +other, that they distinguish the verie signification of wordes, as, a +tal man, a gud tal, a horse tal. + +2. Quherfoer in this case I wald co_m_mend to our men the imitation of +the greek and latin, quho, to mend this crook, devysed diphthongs. Let +the simplest of these four soundes, or that q_uhi_lk is now in use, +stand with the voual, and supplie the rest with diphthonges; as, for +exemple, I wald wryte the king's hal with the voual a; a shour of hael, +with ae; hail marie, with ai; and a heal head, as we cal it, quhilk the +English cales a whole head, with ea. And so, besydes the voual, we have +of this thre diphthonges, tuae with a befoer, ae and ai, and ane w_i_th +the e befoer, ea. Ad to them au, howbeit of a distinct sound; as, +knaulege with us, in the south knowlege. + +3. These and al other diphthonges I wald counsel the teacheres not to +name be the vouales quherof they are maed, but be the sound q_uhi_lk +they maek, for learneres wil far maer easelie take the sound from the +mouth of the teacher, then maek it them selves of the vouales +ingredient. + +4. Of e, we have tuae soundes, q_uhi_lk it is hard to judge q_uhi_lk is +simplest; as, an el, ulna; and an el, anguilla; hel, infernus; and an +hel, calx pedis. Heer I wald com_m_end to our men quhae confoundes these +the imitation of the south, q_uhi_lk doth wel distinguish these soundes, +wryting the el, ulna, with the voual e, and eel, anguilla, with the +diphthong ee. I am not ignorant that sum symbolizes this sound w_i_th a +diphthong made of ie; eie, oculus; hiel, fiel, miel, _et_c. Here I am +indifferent, and onelie wishes that the ane be used; let the advysed +judge make choise of q_uhi_lk, for my awne paert I lyke the last best; +1. becaus eie, oculus, can not wel be symbolized ee; 2. because the +greekes expresse _eta_ be +ee+, q_uhi_lk, as appeares be the Ioneanes +and Doreanes, drawes neerar to _alpha_, than _epsilon_. + +5. Of i, also, our idiom receaves tuae soundes, as in a man's wil, and +the wil of a fox. Heer, also, I wald have our men learne of the south, +for these soundes they wel distinguish, wryting wil, fil, mil, stil, +with i; and wyl, fyl, myl, styl, with y. + +6. Heer I see be Barrat, in his Alvearie, that sum wald be at +symbolizing these soundes, the ane with the greek diphthong +ei+, and +the other with "i" inverted; as, r+ei+d, equitare; b+ei+d, manere; +r"i"d, legere; h"i"d, cavere. In this opinion I se an eye of judgement, +and therfoer wil not censure it, except I saw the auctour's whole drift. +Onelie for my awn parte I will avoid al novelties, and content my self +with the letteres q_uhi_lk we have in use. And seeing we have no other +use of y distinguished from i, condiscend to the opinion of the south +using i for ane, and y for the other. + +7. O, we sound al alyk. But of it we have sundrie diphthonges: oa, as +to roar, a boar, a boat, a coat; oi, as coin, join, foil, soil; oo, as +food, good, blood; ou, as house, mouse, &c. Thus, we com_m_onlie wryt +mountan, fountan, q_uhi_lk it wer more etymological to wryt montan, +fontan, according to the original. + +8. In this diphthong we co_m_mit a grosse errour, saving better +judgement, spelling how, now, and siklyk with w, for if w be (as it sal +appear, quhen we cum to the awn place of it) a consonant, it can noe +wayes coalesse into a diphthong sound, sik as this out of controversie +is. + +9. U, the last of this rank, the south, as I have said in the latin +sound of it, pronu_n_ces eu, we ou, both, in my simple judgement, wrang, +for these be diphthong soundes, and the sound of a voual sould be +simple. If I sould judge, the frensh sound is neerest the voual sound +as we pronu_n_ce it in mule and muse. + +10. Of it we have a diphthong not yet, to my knawlege, observed of anie; +and, for my awn parte, I am not wel resolved neither how to spel it, nor +name it. Onelie I see it in this, to bou, a bow. I wait not quhither I +sould spel the first buu, or the last boau. As, for exemple, if Roben +Hud wer nou leving, he wer not able to buu his aun bou, or to bou his +aun boau. And therfoer this with al the rest, hou be it in other I have +more for me, I leave to the censure of better judgement. + + + + +OF CONSONANTES. + +Cap. 4. + + +1. This for the vouales, and diphthonges made of them without the +tuiches of the mouth. Now followe the consonantes. + +2. A consonant is a letter symbolizing a sound articulat that is broaken +with the tuiches of the mouth. + +3. The instrumentes of the mouth, quherbe the vocal soundes be broaken, +be in number seven. The nether lip, the upper lip, the outward teeth, +the inward teeth, the top of the tongue, the midle tong, and roof of the +mouth. Of these, thre be, as it were, ha_m_meres stryking, and the rest +stiddies, kepping the strakes of the ha_m_meres. + +4. The ham_m_eres are the nether lip, the top of the tongue, and the +midle tongue. The stiddies the overlip, the outward teeth, the inward +teeth, and the roofe of the mouth. + +5. The nether lip stryking on the overlip makes b, m, p, and on the +teeth it makes f and v. + +6. The top of the tongue stryking on the inward teeth formes d, l, n, r, +s, t, and z. + +7. The midle tongue stryking on the rouf of the mouth formes the rest, +c, g, k, j, q, and x, and so we have 18 consonantes borrowed of the +latines. + +8. These they borrow al from the greekes, saving j and v, quhilk our age +soundes other wayes then it seemes the romanes did; for Plutarch, more +then 100 yeeres after Christ, expressing the sound q_uhi_lk they had in +his tyme, symbolizes them neerar the sound of the vouales quherof they +are maed then now we sound them in latin, for in Galba he symbolizes +junius vindex, +iounios ouindex+, q_uhi_lk, if then it had sounded as +now we sound it, he sould rather have written it with _gamma_ and +_beta_, +gounios bindex+. + +9. We have in our use the sam soundes q_uhi_lk it seemes these +consonantes had in Plutarch's dayes, as in yallou, winter. Quhilk, +seeing now they are worn out of the latin use, my counsel is that we +leave the sound of them q_uhi_lk now is in the latin use to the latines, +and take as our's the sound q_uhi_lk they have left, and geve to the +sound, q_uhi_lk now we use in latin, the latin symbol; as, jolie jhon; +vertue is not vain; and to the soundes quhilk they have left the +symboles q_uhi_lk we have usurped to that end; as, yallou, youk; +water, wyne. + +10. And heer, to put our men af their errour quho had wont to symboliz +yallou with an {gh}, and to put noe difference betueen v and w, {gh} is +a dental consonant, broaken betueen the top of the tongue and root of +the teeth; yal, a guttural sound, made be a mynt of the tongue to the +roofe of the mouth, and therfoer the organes being so far distant, and +the tuich so diverse, this symbol can be no reason serve that sound, nor +nane of that kynd. + +11. As for v and w, seeing we have in our idiom, besyd the latin sound, +an other never hard in latin, as now it is pronu_n_ced, I can not but +com_m_end the wisdom of the south, q_uhi_lk gave the latin sound their +awn symbol, and took to our sound a symbol quhilk they use not. Lyke was +their wisdom in j and y; for as the latines usurped the voual i for a +consonant in their use, q_uhi_lk the greekes had not, so they usurped y, +a voual not mikle different from i, for the correspondent sound, not +used in the latin as now it is pronu_n_ced. + +12. Heerfoer, for distinctiones of both sound and symbol, I wald commend +the symbol and name of i and u to the voual sound; as, indifferent, +unthankful; the symbols of j and v to the latin consonantes, and their +names to be jod and vau; as, vain jestes; and the symboles y and w to +our English soundes, and their names to be ye and we, or yod and wau; +as, yonder, wel, yallou, wool. + +13. Now remaineth h, q_uhi_lk we have called a noat of aspiration, cap. +2, sect. 2, and is, in deed, noe voual, because with a consonant it +makes noe sound; as, ch; nor consonant, because it is pronu_n_ced +without the tuich of the mouth; as, ha. + +14. It may affect al vouales _and_ diphthonges; as, hand, hen, hind, +hose, hurt, hail, hautie, health, heel, heifer, _etc._ But behind the +voual in our tong (so far as yet I can fynd) it hath no use. Of +consonantes, it affecteth g beyond the voual; as, laugh; p befoer the +voual; as, phason; s and t also befoer the voual; as, think, shame. +With c we spil the aspiration, tur_n_ing it into an Italian chirt; as, +charitie, cherrie, of quhilk hereafter. + + + + +OF OUR ABUSING SUM CONSONANTES. + +Cap. 5. + + +1. Now I am cum to a knot that I have noe wedg to cleave, and wald be +glaed if I cold hoep for help. Ther sould be for everie sound that can +occur one symbol, and of everie symbol but one onlie sound. This reason +and nature craveth; and I can not but trow but that the worthie +inventoures of this divyne facultie shot at this mark. + +2. But, contrarie to this sure ground, I waet not be quhat corruption, +we see, not onelie in our idiom, but in the latin alsoe, one symbol to +have sundrie soundes, ye, and that in one word; as, lego, legis. + +3. First, to begin with c, it appeeres be the greekes, quho ever had +occasion to use anie latin word, quharein now we sound c as s, in their +tymes it sounded k; for Cicero, thei wryt Kikero; for Caesar, Kaisar; and +Plut., in Galba, symbolizes principia, +prinkipia+. + +{Transcriber's Note: +The word is written with nu, not gamma.} + +4. This sound of it we, as the latines, also keepe befoer a, o, and u; +as, canker, conduit, cumber. But, befoer e and i, sum tymes we sound it, +with the latin, lyke an s; as, cellar, certan, cease, citie, circle, +_et_c. + +5. Behind the voual, if a consonant kep it, we sound it alwayes as a k; +as, occur, accuse, succumb, acquyre. If it end the syllab, we ad e, and +sound it as an s; as, peace, vice, solace, temperance; but nether for +the idle e, nor the sound of the s, have we anie reason; nether daer I, +with al the oares of reason, row against so strang a tyde. I hald it +better to erre with al, then to stryve with al and mend none. + +6. This consonant, evin quher in the original it hes the awne sound, we +turn into the chirt we spak of, cap. 4, sect. 14, quhilk, indeed, can be +symbolized with none, neither greek nor latin letteres; as, from cano, +chant; from canon, chanon; from castus, chast; from +kyriake:+, a church, +of q_uhi_lk I hard doctour Laurence, the greek professour in Oxfoord, a +man bothe of great learni_n_g and judgement, utter his opinion to this +sense, and (excep my memorie fael me) in these wordes: +kyriake:+ ut ++basilike:+ suppresso substantivo +oikia+ domus domini est. Unde nostrum +derivatur, quod Scoti et Angli boreales recte, pronu_n_ciant a kyrk, nos +corrupte a church. + +7. Yet, notwithstanding that it is barbarouse, seing it is more usual in +our tongue then can be mended befoer the voual, as chance, and behind +the voual, as such, let it be symbolized, as it is symbolized with ch, +hou beit nether the c nor the h hath anie affinitie with that sound; +1, because it hath bene lang soe used; and 2, because we have no other +mean to symbolize it, except it wer with a new symbol, q_uhi_lk it will +be hard to bring in use. + +8. Now, quheras ch in nature is c asperat, as it soundes in charus and +chorus; and seing we have that sound also in use, as licht, micht; if I +had bene at the first counsel, my vote wald have bene to have geven ch +the awn sound. But as now the case standes, ne quid novandum sit, quod +non sit necesse, I not onlie consent, but also com_m_end the wisdom of +the south, quho, for distinction, wrytes light, might, with gh and +referres ch to the other sound, how be it improperlie, and this +distinction I com_m_end to our men, quho yet hes not satis attente +observed it. + +9. Next cumes g, howbe it not so deformed as c; for, althogh we see it +evin in latin, and that, in one word (as is said cap. 5, sect. 2), +distorted to tuo sonndes, yet both may stand with the nature of the +symbol and differ not in the instrumentes of the mouth, but in the form +of the tuich, as the judiciouse ear may mark in ago, agis; agam, ages. + +10. This consonant, in latin, never followes the voual; befoer a, o, u, +it keepes alwayes the awn sound, and befoer e and i breakes it. + +11. But with us it may both begin and end the syllab; as, gang; it may, +both behind and befoer, have either sound; as, get, gist, gin, giant. + +12. These the south hath providentlie minted to distinguish tuo wayes, +but hes in deed distinguished noe way, for the first sum hath used tuo +gg; as, egg, legg, bigg, bagg; for the other dg; as, hedge, edge, +bridge; but these ar not +kata pantos+. Gyles, nomen viri, can not be +written dgiles; nor giles doli, ggiles; nether behind the voual ar they +general; age, rage, suage, are never wrytten with dg. Quherfoer I +conclud that, seeing nether the sound nor the symbol hath anie reason to +be sundrie, without greater auctoritie, nor the reach of a privat wit, +this falt is incorrigible. + +13. Here I am not ignorant quhat a doe the learned make about the +symboles of c, g, k and q, that they be al symboles, but of one sound; +but I wil not medle in that question, being besyde my purpose, q_uhi_lk +is not to correct the latin symboles, but to fynd the best use of them +in our idiom. + +14. T, the last of these misused souldioures, keepes alwayes it's aun +nature, excep it be befoer tio; as, oration, declamation, narration; for +we pronunce not tia and tiu as it is in latin. Onelie let it be heer +observed that if an s preceed tio, the t keepes the awn nature, as in +question, suggestion, _et_c. + +15. Thus have I breeflie handled the letteres and their soundes, quhilk, +to end this parte, I wald wish the printeres, in their a, b, c, to +expresse thus:--a, ae, ai, au, ea, b, c, d, e, ee, ei, eu, f, g, h, i, +j, k, l, m, n, o, oa, oo, ou, p, q, r, s, t, u, ui, v, w, x, y, z, and +the masteres teaching their puples to sound the diphthonges, not be the +vouales quharof they be made, but be the sound quhilk they mak in +speaking; lykwayes I wald have them name w, not duble u nor v, singl u, +as now they doe; but the last, vau or ve, and the first, wau or we; and +j, for difference of the voual i, written with a long tail, I wald wish +to to be called jod or je. + + + + +OF THE SYLLAB. + +Cap. 6. + + +1. Now followes the syllab, quhilk is a ful sound symbolized with +convenient letteres, and consistes of ane or moe. + +2. A syllab of ane letter is symbolized with a voual onelie; as, a in +able, e in ever, i in idle, o in over, u in unitie, for a consonant can +make no syllab alane. + +3. A syllab of moe letteres is made of vouales onelie, or els of vouales +and consonantes. Of onlie vouales the syllab is called a diphthong, of +quhilk we have spoaken in the vouales quherof they ar composed. + +4. A syllab of vouales and consonantes either begin_n_es at the +voual, as al, il, el; or at one consona_n_t, as tal man; or at tuo +consona_n_tes, as stand, sleep; or els at thre at the maest, as strand, +stryp. It endes either at a voual, as fa, fo; or at one consonant, as +ar, er; or at tuo, as best, dart; or at thre at the maest, as durst, +worst. + +5. Heer is to be noated, that in divyding syllabes, the consonantes, one +or moe, that may begin a syllab anie way in the middes of a word belong +to the voual following, as in que-stion, qua-rel, fi-shar, sa-fron, +ba-stard, de-scrib, re-scue. + +6. It is alsoe heer to be observed in printing and wryting, that quhen a +word fales to be divyded at the end of a lyne, that the partition must +be made at the end of a syllab, soe that the one lyne end at the end of +the whol syllab, and the other begin the next lyne. As, for exemple, if +this word magistrat fel to be divided at the first syllab, it behoved to +be ma-gistrat; if at the second, it behoved to be magi-strat; but no +wayes to parte the m from the a, nor the g from the i, nor the s from t, +nor the t from r. + + + + +OF THE RULES TO SYMBOLIZE. + +Cap. 7. + + +1. To symboliz right, the sound of the voual is first to be observed, +quhither it be a simple voual or a compound, and quhilk of them is to be +chosen, for quhilk no rule can be geven but the judgeme_n_t of the ear. + +2. Next the consonantes are to be marked; and first, quhither they break +the voual befoer or behind; then quhither they be one or moe; and +lastlie, w_i_th quhat organes of the mouth they be broaken. + +3. For be the organes of the mouth, quherwith the syllab is broaken, the +consonantes are discerned be quhilk the syllab must be symbolized, +quhilk we have said, cap 1, sect. 5. + +4. The consonantes may differ in hammar (as we called it, cap. 4, sect +3) and stiddie, as b and d. Or they may agre in ham_m_er and differ in +stiddie, as b and v. Or they may agre in both and differ in the tuich, +as f and v, m and p, t and g. + +5. The tuich befoer the voual is be lifting the ham_m_er af the stiddie; +as da, la, pa; and behind, be stryking the hammer on the stiddie; as ad, +al, ap. And quhen the hammer and the stiddie are ane, the difference is +in the hardnes and softnes of the tuich; as may be seen in ca and ga, ta +and da. But w and y maekes sae soft a mynt that it is hard to perceave, +and therfoer did the latines symboliz them with the symbol of the +vouales. They are never used but befoer the voual; as we, ye, wil, you; +behynd the voual thei mak noe consonant sound, nor sould be written, and +therfore now and vow, with sik otheres, are not [to] be written w_i_th +w, as is said befoer. + +6. Of this q_uhi_lk now is said may be gathered that general, q_uhi_lk I +called the keie of orthographie, cap. 1 sect. 5, that is the congruence +of the symbol and sound symbolized; that is, that bathe must belang to +the same organes and be tuiched after the same form. + +7. And, be the contrarie, here it is clere that soundes pronu_n_ced with +this organ can not be written with symboles of that; as, for exemple, a +labiel symbol can not serve a dental nor a guttural sound; nor a +guttural symbol a dental nor a labiel sound. + +8. To clere this point, and alsoe to reform an errour bred in the south, +and now usurped be our ignorant printeres, I wil tel quhat befel my self +quhen I was in the south with a special gud frende of myne. Ther rease, +upon sum accident, quhither quho, quhen, quhat, _et_c., sould be +symbolized with q or w, a hoat disputation betuene him and me. After +manie conflictes (for we ofte encountered), we met be chance, in the +citie of Baeth, w_i_th a Doctour of divinitie of both our acquentance. +He invited us to denner. At table my antagonist, to bring the question +on foot ama_n_gs his awn condisciples, began that I was becum an +heretik, and the doctour spering how, ansuered that I denyed quho to be +spelled with a w, but with qu. Be quhat reason? quod the D_octour_. +Here, I beginni_n_g to lay my gru_n_des of labial, dental, and guttural +soundes and symboles, he snapped me on this hand and he on that, that +the d_octour_ had mikle a doe to win me room for a syllogisme. Then +(said I) a labial letter can not symboliz a guttural syllab. But w is a +labial letter, quho a guttural sound. And therfoer w can not symboliz +quho, nor noe syllab of that nature. Here the d_octour_ staying them +again (for al barked at ones), the proposition, said he, I understand; +the assumption is Scottish, and the conclusion false. Quherat al +laughed, as if I had bene dryven from al replye, and I fretted to see a +frivolouse jest goe for a solid ansuer. My proposition is grounded on +the 7 sectio of this same cap., q_uhi_lk noe man, I trow, can denye that +ever suked the paepes of reason. And soe the question must rest on the +assumption quhither w be a labial letter and quho a guttural syllab. As +for w, let the exemples of wil, wel, wyne, juge quhilk are sounded +befoer the voual with a mint of the lippes, as is said the same cap., +sect. 5. As for quho, besydes that it differres from quo onelie be +aspiration, and that w, being noe perfect consonant, can not be +aspirated, I appele to al judiciouse eares, to q_uhi_lk Cicero +attributed mikle, quhither the aspiration in quho be not ex imo gutture, +and therfoer not labial. + + + + +OF RULES FROM THE LATIN. + +Cap. 7. (_sic._) + + +1. Heer, seeing we borrow mikle from the latin, it is reason that we +either follow them in symbolizing their's, or deduce from them the +groundes of our orthographie. + +2. Imprimis, then, quhatever we derive from them written with c we sould +alsoe wryte with c, howbeit it sound as an s to the ignorant; as +conceave, receave, perceave, from concipio, recipio, percipio; concern, +discern, from concerno, discerno; accesse, successe, recesse, from +accedo, succedo, recedo, w_i_th manie moe, q_uhi_lk I com_m_end to the +attention of the wryter. + +3. Also quhat they wryte w_i_th s we sould alsoe wryte with s; as +servant, from servus; sense, from sensus; session from sessio; passion, +from passio. + +4. Neither is the c joined w_i_th s here to be omitted; as science and +conscience, from scientia, conscientia; ascend and descend, from +ascendo, descendo; rescind and abscind, from rescindo and abscindo. + +4 (_sic_). This difference of c and s is the more attentivelie to be +marked for that wordes of one sound and diverse signification are many +tymes distinguished be these symboles; as, the kinges secrete council, +and the faithful counsil of a frende; concent in musik, and consent of +myndes; to duel in a cel, and to sel a horse; a decent weed, and descent +of a noble house. These tuo last differres alsoe in accent. + +5. Lykwayes, that we derive from latin verbales in tio, sould also be +wrytten with t; as oration, visitation, education, vocation, +proclamation, admonition, _et_c. + +6. Wordes deryved from the latin in tia and tium we wryte with ce; as +justice, from justitia; intelligence, from intelligentia; vice, from +vitium; service, from servitium. In al q_uhi_lk, houbeit the e behind +the c be idle, yet use hes made it tollerable to noat the breaking of +the c, for al tongues bear with sum slippes that can not abyde the tuich +stone of true orthographie. + +7. C is alsoe written in our wordes deryved from x in latin; as peace, +from pax; fornace, from fornax; matrice, from matrix; nurice, from +nutrix, q_uhi_lk the south calles nurse, not without a falt both in +sound and symbol; be this we wryte felicitie, audacitie, tenacitie, +_et_c. + +8. Lykwayes we sould keep the vouales of the original, quherin the north +warres the south; from retineo, the north retine, the south retain; from +foras, the north foran, the south forain; from regnu_m_, the north +regne, the south raigne; from cor, the north corage, the south courage; +from devoro, the north devore, the south devour; from vox, the north +voce, the south voice; from devoveo, the north devote, the south +devoute; from guerrum, the north were, the south war; from gigas, +gigantis, the north gyant, the south giaunt; from mons, montis, the +north mont, the south mount. Of this I cold reckon armies, but wil not +presume to judge farther then the compasse of my awn cap, for howbeit we +keep nearar the original, yet al tongues have their idiom in borrowing +from the latin, or other foran tongues. + + + + +OF SUM IDIOMES IN OUR ORTHOGRAPHIE. + +Cap. 8. + + +1. In our tongue we have some particles q_uhi_lk can not be symbolized +with roman symboles, nor rightlie pronunced but be our awn, for we in +manye places soe absorb l and n behynd a consonant, quher they can not +move without a voual intervening, that the ear can hardlie judge +quhither their intervenes a voual or noe. + +2. In this case sum, to avoid the pronu_n_ciation of the voual befoer +the l and n, wrytes it behind; as litle, mikle, muttne, eatne. Quhilk +houbeit it incurres in an other inconvenience of pronu_n_cing the voual +behind the l or n, yet I dar not presume to reprove, because it passeth +my wit how to avoid both inconveniences, and therfoer this I leave to +the wil of the wryter. + +3. Sum of our men hes taken up sum unusual formes of symbolizing, +q_uhi_lk I wald wish to be reformed, yet if I bring not reason, let no +man change for my phantasie. + +4. First, for peple they wryte people, I trow because it cumes from +populus; but if that be a reason, I wald understand a reason quhy they +speak not soe alsoe. Or gif they speak not soe, I wald understand quhy +they wryte not as they speak. I knawe they have the exemple of France to +speak ane way and wryte an other; but that exemple is as gud to absorb +the s in the end of everie word. Al exemples are not imitable. + +5. They use alsoe to wryte logicque, musicque, rhetoricque, and other of +that sorte, with cque. If this be doon to make the c in logica, _et_c., +subsist, quhy wer it not better to supply a k in the place of it, then +to hedge it in with a whol idle syllab; it wer both more orthographical +and easier for the learner, for c and k are sa sib, _tha_t the ane is a +greek and the other a latin symbol of one sound. In this art it is alyke +absurd to wryte that thou reades not, as to read that thou wrytes not. + +6. We use alsoe, almost at the end of everie word, to wryte an idle e. +This sum defend not to be idle, because it affectes the voual before the +consonant, the sound quherof many tymes alteres the signification; as, +hop is altero tantu_m_ pede saltare, hope is sperare; fir, abies, fyre, +ignis; a fin, pinna, fine, probatus; bid, jubere, bide, manere; with +many moe. It is true that the sound of the voual befoer the consonant +many tymes doth change the signification; but it is as untrue that the +voual e behind the consonant doth change the sound of the voual before +it. A voual devyded from a voual be a consonant can be noe possible +means return thorough the consonant into the former voual. Consonantes +betuene vouales are lyke partition walles betuen roomes. Nothing can +change the sound of a voual but an other voual coalescing with it into +one sound, of q_uhi_lk we have spoaken sufficientlie, cap. 3, to +illustrat this be the same exemples, saltare is to hop; sperare to hoep; +abies is fir; ignis, fyr, or, if you wil, fier; jubere is bid; manere, +byd or bied. + +7. Yet in sum case we are forced to tolerat this idle e; 1. in wordes +ending in c, to break the sound of it; as peace, face, lace, justice, +_et_c.; 2. behind s, in wordes wryten with this s; as false, ise, case, +muse, use, _et_c.; 3. behind a broaken g; as knawlege, savage, suage, +ald age. Ther may be moe, and these I yeld because I ken noe other waye +to help this necessitie, rather then that I can think anye idle symbol +tolerable in just orthographie. + + + + +OF THE ACCENTES OF OUR TONGUE. + +Cap. 9. + + +1. Seing that we fynd not onelie the south and north to differ more in +accent then symbol, but alsoe one word with a sundrie accent to have a +diverse signification, I com_m_end this to him quho hes auctoritie, to +com_m_and al printeres and wryteres to noat the accented syllab in +everie word with noe lesse diligence then we see the grecianes to noat +their's. + +2. Cicero, in his buik de Oratore ad Brutum, makes it a natural harmonie +that everie word pronunced be the mouth of man have one acute syllab, +and that never farther from the end then the third syllab, quhilk the +grammareanes cales to the same end the antepenult. Quhilk observation of +so noble a wit is most true in tongues q_uhi_lk he understud, the greek +and latin. But if Cicero had understud our tongue, he sould have hard +the accent in the fourth syllab from the end; as in m{a'}trimonie, +p{a'}trimonie, v{a'}dimonie, int{o'}llerable, int{e'}lligences, and +whole garrisones of lyke liverie. This anie eare may if he accent the +antepenult matr{i'}monie, or the penult matrim{o'}nie, or the last as +matrimon{i'}e. + +3. Then to the purpose we have the same accentes q_uhi_lk the latin and +the greek hath, acute, circu_m_flex, and grave. + +4. The acute raiseth the syllab quheron it sittes; as prof{e'}sse, +pr{o'}fit, {i'}mpudent. + +5. It may possesse the last syllab: as suppr{e'}st, pret{e'}nce, +sinc{e'}re; the penult: as s{u'}bject, c{a'}ndle, cr{a'}ftie; the +antepenult: as diff{i'}cultie, m{i'}ister, f{i'}nallie; and the fourth +also from the end, as is said sect. 2; as sp{e'}ciallie, ins{a'}tiable, +d{i'}ligentlie. In al q_uhi_lk, if a man change the acce_n_t, he sall +spill the sound of the word. + +6. The grave accent is never noated, but onelie understood in al +syllabes quherin the acute and circumflex is not. Onlie, for difference, +sum wordes ar marked with it, thus `, leaning contrarie to the acute. + +7. The circumflex accent both liftes and felles the syllab that it +possesseth, and combynes the markes of other tuae, thus ^. Of this we, +as the latines, hes almost no use. But the south hath great use of it, +and in that their dialect differes more from our's then in other soundes +or symboles. + +8. The use of the accent wil be of good importance for the right +pronu_n_ciation of our tongue, quhilk now we doe forte, non arte, and +conforming of the dialectes, q_uhi_lk, as I have said, differes most in +this. + + + + +OF THE APOSTROPHUS AND HYPHEN. + +Cap. 10. + + +1. The learned printeres uses to symboliz apostrophus and hyphen as wel +as a, b, c. + +2. Apostrophus is the ejecting of a letter or a syllab out of one word +or out betuene tuae, and is alwayes marked above the lyne, as it wer a +com_m_a, thus '. + +3. Out of one word the apostrophus is most usual in poesie; as Ps. 73, +v. 3, for quhen I sau such foolish men, I grug'd, and did disdain; and +v. 19, They are destroy'd, dispatch'd, consum'd. + +4. Betuene tuae wordes we abate either from the end of the former or the +beginni_n_g of the later. + +5. We abate from the end of the former quhen it endes in a voual and the +next beginnes at a voual; as, th' ingrate; th' one parte; I s' it, for I +see it. + +6. In abating from the word following, we, in the north, use a +mervelouse libertie; as, he's a wyse man, for he is a wyse man; I'l meet +with him, for I wil meet with him; a ship 'l of fooles, for a ship ful +of fooles; and this we use in our com_m_on language. And q_uhil_k is +stranger, we manie tymes cut of the end of the word; as, he's tel the, +for he sal tel the. + +7. This for apostrophus. Hyphen is, as it wer, a band uniting whol +wordes joined in composition; as, a hand-maed, a heard-man, tongue-tyed, +out-rage, foer-warned, mis-reported, fals-deemed. + + + + + OF THE CONGRUITIE + + OF OUR BRITAN + + TONGUE. + + LIB. 2. + + + + +OF THE PERSON. + +Cap. 1. + + +1. Al wordes q_uhi_lk we use to expresse our mynde are personal or +impersonal. + +2. A personal word is q_uhi_lk admittes diversitie of person. + +3. Person is the face of a word, quhilk in diverse formes of speach it +diverselie putes on; as, I, Peter, say that thou art the son of God. +Thou, Peter, sayes that I am the son of God. Peter said that I am the +son of God. + +4. Quherupon person is first, second, and third. + +5. The first person is of him that speakes; as, I wryte. + +6. The second person is of him that is spoaken to; as, thou wrytes. + +7. The third person is of him that is spoaken of; as, Peter wrytes. + + + + +OF NU_M_BER. + +Cap. 2. + + +1. Number is distinction of person be one and moe; and soe is singular +and plural. + +2. The singular speakes of one; as, a hand, a tree, a sheep, a horse, a +man. + +3. The plural speakes of moe then one; as, handes, trees, sheep, horses, +men, tuo, three, foure, or moe, or how manie soever. + +4. This difference is com_m_onlie noted with es at the end of the word +singular; as, a house, houses; a windoe, windoes; a doore, tuo doores. + +5. Sum tymes it is noated be changing a letter; as, a man, men; a woman, +wemen; a goose, geese. + +6. Sum tyme be changing noe thing; as, a sheep, a thousand sheep; a +horse, an hundred horse; a noute, ten noute. + + + + +OF THE DETERMINATION OF THE PERSON. + +Cap. 3. + + +1. A personal word is a noun or a verb. A noun is a word of one person +w_i_th gender and case; as, I is onelie of the first person; thou is +onelie of the second; and al other nounes are onelie the third person; +as, thou, Thomas, head, hand, stone, blok, except they be joined with I +or thou. + +2. The person of a noun singular is determined or undetermined. + +3. The determined person is noated with the, and it is determined either +be an other substantive; as, the king of Britan; or be an adjective; as, +the best king in Europ; or be a relative; as, God preserve the king +quhom he hath geven us. + +4. The undetermined noun is noated with an befoer a voual; as, an ald +man sould be wyse; and with a befoer a consonant; as, a father sould +com_m_and his son. + + + + +OF THE GENDER OF A NOUN. + +Cap. 4. + + +1. Gender is the affection of a noun for distinction of sex. + +2. Sex is a distinction of a noun be male and female, and these are +distinguished the one from the other, or both from thinges without sex. + +3. The one is distinguished from the other be he and she. + +4. He is the noat of the male; as, he is a gud judge; he is a wyse man; +he is a speedie horse; he is a crouse cock; he is a fat wether. + +5. She is the noate of the femal sex; as, she is a chast matron; she is +a stud meer; she is a fat hen; she is a milk cowe. + +6. Nounes that want sex are noated with it; as, it is a tale tree; it is +a sueet aple; it is a hard flint; it is a faer day; it is a foul way. + +7. In the plural number they are not distinguished; as, they are honest +men; they are vertueouse ladies; they are highe montanes. + + + + +OF THE CASE OF THE NOUN. + +Cap. 5. + + +1. Case is an affection of a noun for distinction of person; as, the +corner stone fel on me; stone is the nominative case. The corner of a +stone hurt me; stone is the genitive case. Quhat can you doe to a stone; +stone is the dative case. He brak the stones; it is the accusative case. +Quhy standes thou stone; it is the vocative. And he hurt me with a +stone; it is the ablative case. + +2. This difference we declyne, not as doth the latines and greekes, be +terminationes, but with noates, after the maner of the hebrues, quhilk +they cal particles. + +3. The nominative hath no other noat but the particle of determination; +as, the peple is a beast with manie heades; a horse serves man to manie +uses; men in auctoritie sould be lanternes of light. + +4. Our genitive is alwayes joyned with an other noun, and is noated with +of, or s. + +5. With of, it followes the noun quhar w_i_th it is joined; as, the +house of a good man is wel governed. + +6. With s it preceedes the word quherof it is governed, and s is devyded +from it with an apostrophus; as, a gud man's house is wel governed. + +7. This s sum haldes to be a segment of his, and therfoer now almost al +wrytes his for it, as if it wer a corruption. But it is not a segment of +his; 1. because his is the masculin gender, and this may be foeminin; +as, a mother's love is tender; 2. because his is onelie singular, and +this may be plural; as, al men's vertues are not knawen. + +8. The dative is noated w_i_th to, and for; as, geve libertie evin to +the best youth and it wil luxuriat. Al men doeth for them selves; few +for a frende. + +9. The accusative hath noe other noat then the nominative; as, the head +governes the bodie. + +10. The vocative is the person to quhom the speach is directed; as, +quhence cumes thou Aeneas. + +11. The ablative is noated w_i_th prepositiones in, with, be, and sik +lyke; as, be god al thinges wer made; God w_i_th his word his warkes +began; in my father's house are manie mansiones. + + + + +OF THE DEGREES OF COMPARISON. + +Cap. 6. + + +1. Al nounes that wil join with a substantive ar called adjectives; as, +gud, high, hard, sueet, sour. + +2. These, and al that wil admit mare and mast, are compared be degrees; +as, sueet, more sueet, most sueet. + +3. Of comparison ther be thre degrees: the positive, comparative, and +superlative, if the first may be called a degre. + +4. The positive is the first position of the noun; as, soft, hard; +quhyte, blak; hoat, cald. + +5. The comparative excedes the positive be more, and is formed of the +positive be adding er; as, softer, harder; quhiter, blaker; hoater, +calder. + +6. The superlative excedes the positive be most, and is formed of the +positive be adding est; as, softest, hardest; quhytest, blakest; +hoatest, caldest. + + + + +OF THE VERB'S PERSON AND NUMBER. + +Cap. 7. + + +1. This for the noun. The verb is a word of al persones declyned with +mood and tyme; as, I wryte, thou wrytes, he wrytes. + +2. We declyne not the persones and nu_m_beres of the verb, as doth the +latine, but noat them be the person of the noun. + +3. They are noated w_i_th I, thou, and he in the singular number; we, +ye, and they in the plural. + +4. The nu_m_ber is noated with I and we; thou and ye; he and they. + + + + +OF THE MOOD OF THE VERB. + +Cap. 8. + + +1. The mood is an affection of the verb serving the varietie of +utterance. + +2. We utter the being of thinges or our awn wil. + +3. The being of thinges is uttered be inquyring or avouing. + +4. We inquyre of that we wald knaw; as, made God man w_i_thout synne; +and in this the supposit of the verb followes the verb. + +5. We avoue that q_uhi_lk we knaw; as, God made man without sinne; and +in this the supposit preceedes the verb. + +6. We utter our wil be verbes signifying the form of our wil, or +postposing the supposit. + +7. We wish be wald god, god grant, and god nor; as, wald god I knew the +secretes of nature. + +8. We permit the will of otheres be letting; as, let God aryse; let +everie man have his awn wyfe. + +9. We bid our inferioures, and pray our superioures, be postponing the +supposit to the verb; as, goe ye and teach al nationes; here me, my God. + + + + +OF THE TYME OF THE VERB. + +Cap. 9. + + +1. Tyme is an affection of the verb noating the differences of tyme, and +is either present, past, or to cum. + +2. Tyme present is that q_uhi_lk now is; as, I wryte, or am wryting. + +3. Tyme past is that q_uhi_lk was, and it is passing befoer, past els, +or past befoer. + +4. Tyme passing befoer, q_uhi_lk we cal imperfectlie past, is of a thing +that was doeing but not done; as, at four hoores I was wryting; Quhen +you spak to me I was wryting, or did wryte, as Lillie expoundes it. + +5. Tyme past els is of a thing now past, q_uhi_lk we cal perfectlie +past; as, I have written. + +6. Tyme past befoer is of a thing befoer done and ended; as, at four +hoores, or quhen you spak to me, I had written. + +7. Tyme to cum is of that q_uhi_lk is not yet begun; as, at four houres +I wil wryte. + + + + +OF THE POWER OF THE VERB. + +Cap. 10. + + +1. A verb signifies being or doeing. Of being ther is onelie one, I am, +and is thus varyed. + +2. In the present tyme, I am, thou art, he is; we are, ye are, they are. + +3. In tyme passing befoer, I was, thou was, he was; we wer, ye wer, they +wer. + +4. In tyme past els, I have bene, thou hes bene, he hes bene; we have +bene, ye have bene, they have bene. + +5. In tyme past befoer, I had bene, thou had bene, he had bene; we had +bene, ye had bene, they had bene. + +6. In tyme to cum, I wil be, thou wilt be, he wil be; we wil be, ye wil +be, they wil be. + +7. Verbes of doing are actives or passives. + +8. The active verb adheres to the person of the agent; as, Christ hath +conquered hel and death. + +9. The passive verb adheres to the person of the patient; as, hel and +death are conquered be Christ. + +10. These our idiom conjugates onelie in tuo tymes, the tyme present and +tym past; as, I wryte, I wrote; I speak, I spak; I here, I hard; I se, I +saw; I fele, I felt. + +11. The other differences of tyme ar expressed be the notes of the verb +of being, or be the verb of being it self, and a participle; as, I was +wryting; I have written; I had written; I wil wryte. + + + + +OF THE ADVERB. + +Cap. 11. + + +1. A word impersonal is q_uhi_lk in al formes of speach keepes one face, +and this is adverb or conjunction. + +2. An adverb is a word adhering mast com_m_onlie w_i_th a verb with one +face in al moodes, tymes, nu_m_beres and persones; as, I leve hardlie, +thou leves hardlie; I did leve hardlie; I have leved hardlie; I had +leved hardlie; I wil leave hardlie; leve he hardlie; God forbid he leve +hardlie. + +3. Our men confoundes adverbes of place, q_uhi_lk the south +distinguishes as wel as the latin, and therfoer let us not shame to +learne. + +4. They use quher, heer, ther, for the place in q_uhi_lk; quhence, +hence, thence, for the place from quhilk; quhither, hither, thither, for +the place to q_uhi_lk; as, quher dwel you? quhence cum you? quhither goe +you? + +5. They also distinguish wel in, into, and unto: in, they use with the +place quher; into, with the thing quhither; and unto, for how far; as, +our father, q_uhi_lk art in heavin, admit us into heavin, and lift us +from the earth unto heavin. + +6. Heer, becaus sum nounes incurre into adverbes, let us alsoe noat +their differences. + +7. First no and not. Noe is a noun, nullus in latin, and in our tongue +alwayes precedes the substantive quhilk it nulleth; as, noe man, noe +angle, noe god. + +8. Not is an adverb, non in latin, and in our tong followes the verb +that it nulleth; as, heer not, grant not; I heer not, I grant not; I wil +not heer, I wil not grant. + +9. Ane, in our idiom, and an. Ane is a noun of nu_m_ber, in latin unus; +an a particule of determination preceding a voual, as we have said cap. +3, sect. 4. + +10. Thee and the. Thee is the accusative of thou; as, thou loves God, +and God loves thee. The is the determined not of a noun, of q_uhi_lk we +spak cap. 3, sect. 3. + + + + +OF THE CONJUNCTION. + +Cap. 12. + + +1. Conjunction is a word impersonal serving to cople diverse senses. And +of it ther be tuoe sortes, the one enu_n_ciative, and the other +ratiocinative. + +2. The conjunction enunciative copies the partes of a period, and are +copulative, as and; connexive, as if; disjunctive, as or; or discretive, +as howbe it. + +3. The ratiocinative coples the partes of a ratiocination, and it either +inferres the conclusion or the reason. + +4. Therfoer inferres the conclusion; as, noe man can keep the law in +thought, word, and deed: and therfoer noe man befoer the judg of the +hart, word, and deed, can be justifyed be the law. + +5. Because inferres the reason; as, I wil spew the out, because thou art +nether hoat nor cald. + + + + +OF DISTINCTIONES. + +Cap. 13. + + +1. A distinction is quherbe sentences are distinguished in wryting and +reading. And this is perfect or imperfect. + +2. A perfect distinction closes a perfect sense, and is marked with a +round punct, thus . or a tailed punct, thus ? + +3. The round punct concludes an assertion; as, if Abraham was justifyed +be workes, he had quherof to glorie. + +4. The tailed punct concludes an interrogation; as, sal we, quha are +dead to syn, leve to it? + +5. The imperfect distinction divydes the partes of a period, and is +marked with tuoe punctes, the one under the other, thus : and is red +with half the pause of a perfect punct; as, al have synned, and fallen +from the glorie of god: but are justifyed frelie be his grace. + +6. The com_m_a divydes the least partes of the period, and is pronunced +in reading with a short sob. + +7. The parenthesis divydes in the period a sentence interlaced on sum +occurrences q_uhi_lk coheres be noe syntax w_i_th that q_uhi_lk +preceedes and followes; as, for exemple of beath, and to conclud this +treatesse: + + Bless, guyd, advance, preserve, prolong Lord (if thy pleasur be) + Our King _and_ Queen, and keep their seed thy name to magnifie. + + * * * * * + + +NOTES. + + +The foregoing Tract is one of great interest, not only on account of its +intrinsic merit, but also for the racy style of writing adopted by its +author. We find him continually garnishing his language with such +idiomatic and colloquial expressions as the following:--"Quhae's sillie +braine will reache no farther then the compas of their cap" (page 2); +and again, "but will not presume to judge farther then the compasse of +my awn cap" (p. 20). He observes of the printers and writers of his age +that they care "for noe more arte then may win the pennie" (p. 2), and +on the same page he says, "quhiles I stack in this claye," which appears +to be equivalent to our term "stuck in the mud." At p. 3 he says, "and +it wer but a clod;" at p. 14, "neither daer I, with al the oares of +reason, row against so strang a tyde;" and again, on p. 18, we find +reason under another aspect, thus, "noe man I trow can denye that ever +suked the paepes of reason." + +It seems that the expression, _Queen's English_, is by no means of +modern date, as we have it as the _king's language_ at p. 2. + +Hume laments, in his Dedication, the uncertainty of the orthography +prevailing at the time he writes, and yet we find him spelling words +several different ways, even within the compass of a single sentence, +without being able to lay the blame upon the printers; thus we find him +writing ju_d_gement on p. 11, ju_d_ge p. 8, and ju_d_g p. 33, but juge +p. 18; and there are numberless other instances that it would be tedious +to enumerate. Again, the author uses a mixture of Scotch and English, so +we have sometimes ane and sometimes one; nae on page 1 and noe on p. 2; +mare and mast, and more and most, even in the same sentence (p. 30); and +two is spelt in three different ways, tuae, tuo, and tuoe. + +Our author's stay in England appears to have drawn his attention to the +differences between the two languages of Scotland and England, which he +distinguishes as North and South. He certainly shows, in some instances, +the greater correctness of the Scotch with regard to the spelling of +words derived from the Latin; as, retine instead of retain, corage +instead of courage, etc. (p. 20), in which words the redundant letters +that we Southerners have introduced are thrown out. He is, however, by +no means partial, and gives us praise when he thinks we deserve it. + + Page 9. The arguments in favour of the sound given by the English + Universities to the Latin _i_ are curious: it is stated to have its + value in the Greek +ei+; but the author seems to have been in error as + to the English sounding mihi and tibi alike, or our pronunciation must + have changed since his time. + + P. 10. The author speaks of the letter _y_ as being used by the South + for the sound now symbolized by _i_ with a final _e_ following the + succeeding consonant, as _will_ with an _i_, and _wile_ with a _y_ in + place of the _i_ and final _e_; thus in the same way he spells write, + _wryt_. + + P. 11 (7). He gives food, good, blood, as examples of the same sound, + thus inferring that the English pronounced the two latter so as to + rhyme with food. + + P. 11 (8). He objects to the use of _w_ for _u_ in the diphthongal + sound of _ou_, and therefore spells _how_, _now_, etc., _hou_, _nou_. + + P. 11 (10). It is difficult here to see what the pronunciation of + _buu_ would be, which the author gives as the sound of bow (to bow). + Probably the sound he meant would be better represented by _boo_. + + P. 13 (12). The author here recommends the distinction both of sound + and symbol of _j_ and _v_ as consonants, and _i_ and _u_ as vowels, + and proposes that we should call _j_ _jod_ or _je_, and _v_ _vau_ or + _ve_, and not single _u_, "as now they doe" (p. 16), and _w_ he would + call _wau_ or _we_, and moreover he places them in his alphabet on the + same page. If this proposal was originally his own, it is curious that + the name _ve_ should have been adopted, though not the _we_ for _w_. + Ben Jonson points out the double power of _i_ and _v_ as both + consonant and vowel, but he does not attempt to make them into + separate letters as Hume does. + + P. 15 (12). He gives as an anomaly of the South that while the _d_ is + inserted before _g_ in hedge, bridge, etc., it is omitted in age, + suage, etc. He does not see that the short vowel requires a double + consonant to prevent it from being pronounced long. + + P. 21 (6). He disputes the possibility of a final _e_, separated from + a preceding vowel by a consonant, having any effect whatever in + altering the sound of the preceding vowel, and recommends the use of a + diphthong to express the sound required; as, hoep for hope, fier for + fire, bied for bide, befoer for before, maed for made, etc. He + uniformly throughout follows this rule. + + P. 22 (5). Hume here accents difficultie on the antepenultimate + instead of the first syllable. + + P. 23 (7). He puts down outrage as an instance of two distinct words + joined by a hyphen, which is the derivation given by Ash in his + dictionary, in strange obliviousness of the French word _outrage_. + + P. 27 (1, 6). _T_ is omitted after _s_ in the second person singular + of the verb, and so no distinction is made between the second and the + third persons; thus, thou wrytes, and at p. 32 thou was, and thou hes. + + P. 29 (7). The supposition that the apostrophe 's as a mark of the + possessive case is a segment of his, a question which has been lately + revived, is here denied. + + P. 34. In this last chapter on Punctuation, which the author styles + "of Distinctiones," no mention whatever is made of the "semicolon," + though it occurs frequently in the MS., as, for instance, p. 30, cap. + 6. This stop, according to Herbert, was first used by Richard Grafton + in _The Byble_ printed in 1537: it occurs in the Dedication. Henry + Denham, an English printer who flourished towards the close of the + sixteenth century, was the first to use it with propriety. + + P. 34 (6). The explanation of the mode of pronouncing the comma "with + a short _sob_" is odd.[5] + + [Footnote 5: It will be here as well to mention that as the + punctuation in the MS. is extremely unsystematic, it has been + dispensed with whenever the meaning was confused by it.] + +The author continually uses a singular verb to a plural noun; for +instance, "of this we, as the latines, hes almost no use" (p. 22), +though on p. 20 he writes, "in our tongue we have some particles." + +With regard to the Manuscript, there are two corrections in it worth +noting. At p. 10 (6), in the phrase, "the auctours _whole_ drift," the +word had been originally written _hael_, but is marked through, and +_whole_ substituted for it in the same handwriting. At p. 21 (4), the +word _frensh_ has been inserted before _exemples_, but has been +afterwards struck through. + +The numbering is wrong in three places, but it has not been corrected. +At p. 8 there are no sections 12 and 13, at pp. 17, 19, there are two +cap. 7, and at p. 19 there are two sections 4. + + + + +GLOSSARIAL INDEX. + + +[The words in the present Tract that really required to be glossed are +but few; I have, however, inserted in the following list most of the +variations from ordinary modern usage, in order that it may serve as an +Index.] + +Af = of, p. 9. + Af = off, p. 12. +Ald = old, pp. 3, 21, 28. +Amangs = amongst, p. 18. +Ane = a, one. +Angle = angel, p. 33. +Auctoritie = authority, pp. 22, 29. +Aun = own, pp. 2, 3, 7, 8, 11, 15. +Awn = own, pp. 11, 18, 20, 30, 31. +Awn = proper, pp. 9, 11, 13, 15. +Awne = proper, p. 14. +Awne = own, p. 10. + +Baeth = both, pp. 8, 34. +Bathe = both, p. 17. +Be = by. +Britan = British. + +Cald = cold, pp. 30, 33; + caldest, p. 30. +Cales = calls, pp. 10, 22. +Chirt = a squirt, or a squeeze through the teeth, pp. 13, 14. + See Ruddiman's Glossary to G. Douglas (_chirtand_). +Cold = could, p. 20. +Coples = couples, p. 33. +Corage = courage, p. 20. +Crouse = brisk, p. 28. +Cum = come, pp. 11, 31; + cumes = comes, p. 29. + +Devore = devour, p. 20. +Devote = devout, p. 20. +Distinctiones = punctuation, p. 34. +Doon = done, p. 21. +Doting = giving, p. 3. + +Earand = errand, p. 8. +Evin = even, p. 29. + +Faer = fair, p. 28. +Falt = fault, pp. 15, 20. +Fand = found, p. 1. +Fele = feel, p. 32. +Felles = lowers, p. 22. +Finnes = fineness, p. 2. +Fontan = fountain, p. 11. +Foran = foreign, p. 20. +Frelie = freely, p. 34. + +Geve = give, pp. 7, 8, 9, 12, 28, 29. +Gif = if, p. 21. +Glim = glimpse, p. 2. +Gud = good, pp. 2, 18, 21, 28, 29. + +Hael = hail, p. 10. +Hald = hold, p. 14; + haldes, p. 29. +Hame = home, p. 2. +Hard = heard, pp. 2, 3, 13, 14, 22, 32. +Hart = heart, p. 33. +Heal = whole, p. 10. +Heer = hear, p. 33. +Here = hear, pp. 31, 32. +Hes = has, pp. 3, 14, 15, 19, 22, 32. +Hes = hast, p. 32. +Hes = have, pp. 20, 22. +Hoat = hot, pp. 18, 30, 33; + hoater, p. 30. +Hoores = hours, p. 31. + +Ida, Scotland or Edinburgh, p. 2. +Incurre, _v._ = to run into. Lat. _incurro_, pp. 20, 33. + +Ken = know, p. 21. +Kep, _v._ = to intercept, p. 14. +Kepping = receiving in the act of falling, p. 12. _Jamieson._ +Knau = know, p. 2. +Knaulege = knowledge, pp. 3, 10; + knawlege, pp. 11, 21. +Knaw = know, pp. 7, 30; + knawe, p. 21; + knawen = known, p. 29. + +Laggared = loitered or rested, p. 2. +Lang = long, pp. 9, 14. +Leave = live, p. 32. +Leve = live, pp. 32, 34. +Leving = living, p. 11. +Louse = loose, p. 9. +Lykwayes = likewise, p. 19. + +Maer = more, pp. 2, 10. +Maest = most, pp. 1, 2, 16. +Man = must, p. 8. +Mare = more, p. 30. +Mast = most, pp. 30, 32. +Meer = mare, p. 28. +Middes = middle, p. 16. +Mikle = much, pp. 13, 18, 19, 20. +Mint = aim, pressure, p. 18. +Minted = attempted, p. 15. +Moat, probably _moot_, discussion, chat, etc., p. 2. A.S. _m{o'}t_. +Moe = more, pp. 16, 19, 21, 27. +Moien = means for attaining an end, p. 2. _Jamieson._ Fr. _moyen_. +Mont = mount, p. 24. +Montan = mountain, pp. 3, 11, 28. +Mynt = aim, pp. 12, 17. + +Nae = no, pp. 1, 8. +Nane = none, p. 13. +Noat, _v._ = note, pp. 19, 22, 27, 28, 29, 30, 31, 33. +Noat = note, pp. 7, 13, 28, 29; + noate, p. 28; + noates = notes, p. 29. +Nor = than, p. 3. +Nor, God nor, p. 31. + This most probably means God comfort or nourish us, connected with + _norice_, a nurse, and _norie_, a foster-child. There is also a + substantive _nore_ in Chaucer, meaning comfort. _Norne_ is to + entreat, ask (see _Alliterative Poems_ Glossary), and may have + something to do with this expression, but it is hardly so probable + as the above. +Noute = black cattle, p. 27; + connected with _neat_, as in neat-cattle, neat-herd. +Nulleth = negatives, p. 33. +Nurice = nurse, p. 19. + +Of = off, p. 23. +Ones, at ones = at once, p. 18. + +Paen = trouble, p. 2. +Paert = part, p. 10. +Peple = people, pp. 20, 29. +Phason = pheasant (?), p. 13. +Pover = poor, p. 3. +Punct = stop, p. 34. + +Qu. + At p. 18 the author gives his reasons for making use of the guttural + _qu_ in the place of the labial _w_. The following are the words in + which it is thus used:-- +Quha = who, pp. 2, 3, 34. +Quhae = who, pp. 1, 10; + quhae's = whose, p. 2. +Quhaer = where, p. 2. +Quhar = where, p. 29. +Quharein = wherein, p. 14. +Quharof = whereof, p. 16. +Quhat = what, pp. 2, 8, 15, 17, 18, 28. +Quhatever = whatever, p. 19. +Quhen = when, pp. 2, 9, 11, 23, 31. +Quhence = whence, pp. 29, 32. +Quher = where, pp. 2, 14, 20, 32. +Quheras = whereas, p. 14. +Quherat = whereat, p. 18. +Quherbe = whereby, pp. 11, 34. +Quherfoer, quherforr = wherefore, pp. 7, 8, 10, 15. +Quherin = wherein, pp. 20, 22. +Quherof = whereof, pp. 29, 34. +Quheron = whereon, p. 22. +Quherupon = whereupon, pp. 8, 27. +Quherwith = wherewith, p. 2. +Quhil, quhiles = while, p. 2. +Quhilk = which. +Quhither = whether, pp. 11, 17, 18, 20, 32. +Quho = who, pp. 12, 14, 15, 18, 22. +Quhom = whom. +Quhy = why, pp. 20, 21, 29. +Quhyte = white, p. 30; + quhiter, p. 30; + quhytest, p. 30. +Quod = quoth, p. 18. + +Rease = rose, p. 18. +Red = read, p. 34. +Regne = reign, p. 20. +Retine = retain, p. 20. +Ryseth = ariseth, p. 9. + +Sa = so, p. 21; + sae = so, p. 17. +Sal = shall, pp. 9, 11, 23, 34. +Sall = shall, pp. 8, 22. +Shaued = showed, p. 7. +Shour = shower, p. 10. +Sib = related, p. 21. +Sik = such, pp. 1, 2, 8, 9, 11, 17, 29. +Sillie = wretched, poor, p. 2. +Skuiographie, + probably an invented word, the intention of the author being to + oppose skew or askew to +orthos+, straight. It has been suggested + that it may be intended for sciagraphy, +skiagraphia+, also spelt + sciography; but this is improbable, as the meaning of that word, + viz., the art of shadows, including dialling, is so inappropriate + in this passage, p. 2. +Sould = should, pp. 7, 8, 11, 12, 13, 17, 18, 19, 22, 28, 29. +Spering = inquiring, p. 18. +Spil = destroy, spoil(?), p. 13; + spill, p. 22. +Spilt = corrupted, spoilt(?), p. 2. +Stack = stuck, p. 2. +Stean = stone, p. 8. +Stiddie = anvil, pp. 12, 17. + "And my imaginations are as foul + As Vulcan's stithy." + _Hamlet_, Act iii., sc. 2. + +Strang = strong, p. 14. +Sum = some, pp. 8, 9, 10, 21, 34. +Supposit = subject, pp. 30, 31. +Syllab = syllable, pp. 14, 15, 16, 18, 21, 22; + syllabes, p. 8. + Ben Jonson spells this word _syllabe_ in his English Grammar. +Syne = since, p. 1. + +Tal = tale, p. 9. +Tal = tail, p. 9. +Tale = tall, p. 28. +Trow = believe, pp. 13, 18. +Tuae = two, pp. 1, 8, 9, 10, 22, 23. +Tuelfe = twelve, p. 3. +Tuich = touch, pp. 7, 13, 15, 17; + tuiches, p. 11. +Tuiched = touched, pp. 3, 17. +Tuich stone = touchstone, p. 19. +Tyme passing befoer = imperfect tense, pp. 31, 32. +Tyme past befoer = pluperfect tense, pp. 31, 32. +Tyme past els = perfect tense, pp. 31, 32. + +Vadimonie = recognisance, p. 22. Lat. _Vadimonium._ +Voce = voice, p. 20. + +Waet = know, p. 14. +Wait = know, p. 11. +Wald = would, pp. 1, 2, 9, 10, 13, 14, 16, 20, 21, 30, 31. +Warkes = works, p. 29. +Weer = war, p. 3. +Were = war, p. 20. +Whither = whether, p. 2. + The author in this place uses the letter _w_ instead of _qu_, + although at p. 18 he is so strenuous against its use. +Wrang = wrong, pp. 2, 9, 11. + +Ye = yea, p. 14. +Yeld = yield, p. 21. + + + + +Early English Text Society. + +_Report of the Committee, January, 1865._ + + +The close of the first year of the Society's operations affords the +Committee the welcome opportunity of congratulating the members on the +Society's success. Instead of two Texts, which the first Circular to the +Society suggested might perhaps be issued, the Committee have been +enabled to publish four, and these four such as will bear comparison, as +to rareness and intrinsic value, with the publications of any of the +longest established societies of the kingdom. The _Arthur_ was edited +for the first time from a unique MS., wholly unknown to even the latest +writers on the subject, and exhibits our national hero's life in a +simpler form than even Geoffrey of Monmouth, or Layamon. The _Early +English Alliterative Poems_, though noticed long ago by Dr. Guest and +Sir F. Madden, for their great philological and poetical value, had been +inaccessible to all but students of the difficult and faded MS. in the +British Museum: they have been now made public by the Society's edition, +with their large additions to our vocabulary, and their interesting +dialectal formations. The _Sir Gawayne_, from the same MS., could only +have been had before in Sir Frederick Madden's rare and costly edition, +printed by the Bannatyne Club. And the _Lauder_ has restored, as it +were, to Scotland, a Poet whose name had found no place in the standard +History of Scottish Poetry, and the Biographical Dictionaries. + +Though the Society started late in the past year, these four Texts were +published within a fortnight of its close; and before that time the +first Text for the second year was in the printer's hands. The Committee +pledge themselves to continue their exertions to render the Texts issued +worthy of the Society, and to complete the issue of each set within the +year assigned to it. They rely with confidence on the Subscribers to use +their best endeavours to increase the list of Members, in order that +funds may not be wanting to print the material that editors place at +their service. The aim of the Committee is, on the one hand, to print +all that is most valuable of the yet unprinted MSS. in English, and, on +the other, to re-edit and reprint all that is most valuable in printed +English books, which from their scarcity or price are not within the +reach of the student of moderate means.[6] Those relating to KING ARTHUR +will be the Committee's first care; those relating to our Language and +its Dialects the second; while in due proportion with these, will be +mixed others of general interest, though with no one special common +design. The Committee hope that no year will pass without the issue of +one Text in the Northern dialect, as well in acknowledgment of the +support that the Society has received in Scotland, as to obviate the +hitherto limited circulation of the works of the early Scotch writers +among students south of the Humber. + + [Footnote 6: "A vast mass of our early literature is still + unprinted, and much that has been printed has, as the late Herbert + Coleridge remarked, 'been brought out by Printing Clubs of + exclusive constitution, or for private circulation only, and + might, for all that the public in general is the better for them, + just as well have remained in manuscript, being, of course, + utterly unprocurable, except in great libraries, and not always + there.' It is well known that the Hon. G. P. Marsh, the author of + 'The Origin and History of the English Language,' could not + procure for use in his work a copy of 'Havelok' for love or money; + and the usual catalogue-price of 'William and the Werwolf,' or + 'The Early English Gesta Romanorum,' etc., etc., is six guineas, + when the book should be obtainable for less than a pound. + Notwithstanding the efforts of the Percy, Camden, and other + Societies and Printing Clubs, more than half our early printed + literature--including the Romances relating to our national hero, + Arthur--is still inaccessible to the student of moderate means; + and it is a scandal that this state of things should be allowed to + continue.... Those who would raise any objection to these + re-editions--as a few have raised them--are asked to consider the + absurdity and injustice of debarring a large number of readers + from the enjoyment of an old author, because a living editor has + once printed his works, when the feeling of the editor himself is + well expressed in the words of one of the class, 'You are heartily + welcome to all I have ever done. I should rejoice to see my books + in the hands of a hundred, where they are now on the shelves of + one.'"--_Extract from the first Prospectus._] + +The publications for 1864 are:-- + +1. Early English Alliterative Poems in the West Midland Dialect of the + fourteenth century (ab. 1320-30 A.D.). Edited for the first time + from a unique MS. in the British Museum, with Notes and Glossarial + Index, by Richard Morris, Esq. 16_s._ + +2. Arthur. Edited for the first time from the Marquis of Bath's MS. + (ab. 1440 A.D.), by F. J. Furnivall, Esq., M.A. 4_s._ + +3. Ane compendious and breve Tractate, concernyng ye office and dewtie + of Kyngis, Spirituall Pastoris, and temporall Jugis; laitlie + compylit be William Lauder. Reprinted from the edition of 1556, and + edited by Prof. Fitz-Edward Hall, D.C.L. 4_s._ + +4. Sir Gawayne and the Green Knight. Edited by R. Morris, Esq., from the + Cottonian MS., Nero, A x. (ab. 1320-30 A.D.) 10_s._ + +The publications for the present year (1865) will comprise Texts from at +least four unique MSS., two of which will be edited for the first time. + +5. Of the Orthographie and Congruitie of the Britan Tongue, a treates + noe shorter then necessarie, be Alexander Hume. Edited for the first + time from the MS. in the British Museum (ab. 1617 A.D.), by Henry B. + Wheatley, Esq. 4_s._ + +6. Syr Lancelot du Lak. Edited from the MS. in the Cambridge University + Library (15th century), by the Rev. Walter W. Skeat, M.A. + [_In the Press._ + +7. Morte Arthure: the Alliterative Version. Edited from Robert + Thorntone's MS. (ab. 1440 A.D.) at Lincoln, by the Rev. F. C. + Massingberd, M.A. + +8. Various Poems relating to Sir Gawayne. Edited from the MSS. by + Richard Morris, Esq. + +9. Merlin, or the Early History of Arthur. Edited for the first time + from the MS. in the Cambridge University Library (ab. 1450 A.D.), by + F. J. Furnivall, Esq. Part I. + +Also, the following, if the amount of subscriptions will justify the +Committee in issuing them:-- + +Animadversions uppon the Annotacions and Corrections of some + imperfections of Impressiones of Chaucer's Workes reprinted in 1598, + by Francis Thynne. Edited from the MS. in the Bridgewater Library, + by Henry B. Wheatley, Esq. + +The Story of Genesis and Exodus in English verse of about 1300 A.D. To + be edited for the first time from the unique MS. in the Library of + Corpus Christi Coll., Cambridge, by F. J. Furnivall and R. Morris, + Esqrs. + +The Harrowing of Hell. To be edited from the MS. in the Bodleian + Library, by R. F. Weymouth, Esq. + + +The following is a list of Texts, which it is proposed to print (among +others) in future years:-- + +The Romance of Arthour and Merlin. To be edited from the Auchinleck MS. + (ab. 1320-30 A.D.) + +Mirk's Duties of a Parish Priest. To be edited for the first time from + the MSS. in the British Museum and Bodleian Libraries (ab. 1420 + A.D.), by E. Peacock, Esq. + +The Romance of William and the Werwolf. To be edited from the unique MS. + in the Library of King's Coll., Cambridge. + +The Gospel of Nicodemus in the Northumbrian Dialect. To be edited for + the first time from Harl. MS. 4196, &c., Cotton-Galba E ix., by R. + Morris, Esq. + +The Romance of Melusine. To be edited for the first time from the unique + MS. in the Library of Trinity College, Cambridge. + +Syr Thomas Maleor's Mort d'Arthur. To be edited from Caxton's edition + (1485 A.D.) with a new Preface, Notes, and a Glossary. + +The Arthur Ballads. + +The Romance of Sir Tristrem. To be edited from the Auchinleck MS. + +The English Charlemagne Romances. To be edited from the Auchinleck MS. + +The Early English Version of the Gesta Romanorum. To be edited from the + MSS. in the British Museum and other Libraries. + +The two different Versions of Piers Plowman, in parallel columns. + +Gawain Douglas's Aeneis. To be edited from the Cambridge MS. by Professor + Fitz-Edward Hall, D.C.L. + +The Romance of Kyng Horn. To be edited from the MS. in the Library of + the University of Cambridge. + +Roberd of Brunne's Handlyng Synne, a treatise on the sins, and sketches + of the manners, of English men and women in A.D. 1303. To be + re-edited from the MSS. in the British Museum and Bodleian Libraries + by F. J. Furnivall, Esq., M.A. + +Cursor Mundi, the best dialectal version. To be edited from the MS. by + Richard Morris, Esq. + +The History of the Saint Graal or Sank Ryal. By Henry Lonelich, Skynner + (ab. 1440 A.D.). To be re-edited from the unique MS. in the Library + of Corpus Christi Coll., Cambridge, by F. J. Furnivall, Esq., M.A. + +Dan Michel's Ayenbite of Inwyt, the most valuable specimen of the + Kentish dialect, 1340 A.D. To be edited from the MS. in the British + Museum by Richard Morris, Esq. + +Froissart's Chronicles translated out of Frenche into our maternall + Englyshe Tonge, by Johan Bourchier Knight, Lord Berners. To be + edited by Henry B. Wheatley, Esq. + +Skelton's Translation of Diodorus Siculus, oute of freshe Latin, that is + of Poggius Florentinus, containing six books. To be edited for the + first time from the unique MS. in the Library of Corpus Christi + Coll., Cambridge. + +Sir David Lyndesay's Monarche. Edited by Prof. Fitz-Edward Hall, D.C.L., + from the first edition by Jhone Skott. + +Some of the earliest English Dictionaries, as-- + Abecedarium Anglico-latinum, by Richard Huloet (1552); and Baret's + Alvearie or Quadruple Dictionarie, to be edited from the editions of + 1573 and 1580 by Henry B. Wheatley, Esq. + + + + +The Subscription is {L}1 1_s._ a year, due in advance on the 1st of +January, and should be paid either to the Society's Account at the Union +Bank of London, 14, Argyll Place, W., or by Post Office Order to the +Hon. Secretary, 53, Berners Street, London, W.; to whom Subscribers' +names and addresses should be sent. + +The Committee wish to draw the attention of the Subscribers to the fact +that the Society's Account has been transferred from the London and +Birmingham Bank to the Regent Street Branch of the Union Bank of London. + +The Committee invite offers of voluntary assistance from those who may +be willing to edit or copy Texts, or to lend them books for reprinting +or for re-reading with the original MSS. + +The Honorary Secretary's Cash Account is annexed. + + +_Abstract of the Income and Expenditure of the_ EARLY ENGLISH TEXT +SOCIETY _for the Year ending December 31st, 1864._ + +RECEIPTS. + +1864. {L} _s._ _d._ +One hundred Subscriptions, at 1_l._ 1_s._ 105 0 0 +Forty-five ditto (through Agents), at 1_l._ 45 0 0 +1865. +Two Subscriptions, at 1_l._ 1_s._ 2 2 0 + + + {L}152 2 0 + ============= + +PAYMENTS. + +1864. {L} _s._ _d._ +Printing Account (Austin)-- + Alliterative Poems 62 7 6 + Arthur 8 14 0 + Lauder's Tractate 15 14 0 + Sir Gawayne 35 16 0 + 3,500 Prospectuses 5 5 0 + Packing, Postage, &c., of + Alliterative Poems and Arthur 1 16 6 + ------------- + 129 13 0 + Less Discount 6 9 0 + ------------- + 123 4 0 +Petty Expenses-- + Purchase of Books for Re-editing 5 18 0 + Stationery, &c. 0 18 6 + Postages (Circulars, &c.) 4 4 6 + Deduction on Country Cheque 0 0 7 + Balance in the hands of the Hon. Secretary 0 13 0 + Balance at the Bankers 17 3 5 + ------------- + {L}152 2 0 + ============= + +We have examined this Account with the Books and Vouchers, and certify +that it is correct. + +Wm. CUNNINGHAM GLEN, +REGINALD HANSON, B.A., Auditors. + + + + +LIST OF SUBSCRIBERS. + + +COMMITTEE OF MANAGEMENT: + +DANBY P. FRY, ESQ. +FREDERICK J. FURNIVALL, ESQ. +Professor FITZ-EDWARD HALL. +RICHARD MORRIS, ESQ. +H. T. PARKER, ESQ. + +(_With power to add Workers to their number._) + + +HONORARY SECRETARY: + +HENRY B. WHEATLEY, ESQ., 53, Berners Street, London. W. + + +BANKERS: + +THE UNION BANK OF LONDON, REGENT STREET BRANCH, +14, Argyll Place, W. + + +THE ROYAL LIBRARY, Windsor Castle. + +ADAMS, Dr. Ernest, Victoria Park, Manchester. +ALEXANDER, George Russell, Esq., Glasgow. +ALEXANDER, John, Esq., 43, Campbell Street, Glasgow. +AMHURST, Wm. A. Tyssen, Esq., Didlington Park, Brandon, Norfolk. +ASHER & CO., Messrs., 13, Bedford Street, Covent Garden. W.C. (10 sets.) +ATKINSON, Rev. J. C., Danby Parsonage, Grosmont, York. +AUFRECHT, Professor, 12, Cumin Place, Grange, Edinburgh. +AUSTIN, Stephen, Hertford. + +BACKHOUSE, John G., Esq., Blackwell, Darlington. +BAIN, J., Esq., Haymarket. +BAKER, Charles, Esq., 11, Sackville Street, W. +BEARD, James, Esq., The Grange, Burnage Lane, near Manchester +BLACKMAN, Frederick, Esq., 4, York Road. S. +BLADON, James, Esq., Albion House, Pont y Pool. +BOHN, Henry G., Esq., York Street, Covent Garden, W.C. +BOSWORTH, Rev. Professor, D.D., 20, Beaumont Street, Oxford. +BRADSHAW, Henry, Esq., King's College, Cambridge. +BUXTON, Charles, Esq., M.P., 7, Grosvenor Crescent, S.W. + +CHAPPELL, William, Esq., 30, Upper Harley Street. W. +CHEETHAM, Rev. S., King's College, London. W.C. +CLARK, Rev. Samuel, The Vicarage, Bredwardine, Hereford. +CLARK, E. C., Esq., Trinity College, Cambridge. +COHEN, A., Esq., 6, King's Bench Walk, Temple, E.C. +COLERIDGE, Miss Edith, Hanwell Rectory, Middlesex. +COLERIDGE, J. Duke, Esq., Q.C., 1, Brick Court, Temple, E.C. +COSENS, Frederick, Esq., Larkbere Lodge, Clapham Park. +COWPER, J. Meadows, Esq., Davington, Faversham. +CRAIK, Professor George L., 2, Chlorina Place, Belfast. +CRAIK, George L., Esq., Glasgow. + +DAVIES, Rev. John, Walsoken Rectory, near Wisbeach. +DE LA RUE, Warren, Esq., Bunhill Row. +DE LA RUE, Wm. Frederick, Esq., 110, Bunhill Road, E.C. +DICKINSON, F. H., Esq., Kingweston House, Somerton, Somerset. +DODDS, Rev. James, St. Stephen's, Glasgow. +DONALDSON, David, Esq., Free Normal Seminary, Glasgow. +D'ORSEY, Rev. A. J., B.D., 8, Lancaster Terrace, Regent's Park. N.W. +DOWDEN, Edward, Esq., 8, Montenotte, Cork. +DUBLIN, Right Rev. Richard C. Trench, Archbishop of, Dublin. +DYKES, Rev. J. Oswald, Free St. George's Church, Edinburgh. + +EARLE, Rev. J., Swanswick Rectory, Bath. +EDINBURGH UNIVERSITY LIBRARY. +EISDELL, Miss S. L., Colchester. +EUING, William, Esq., 209, West George Street, Glasgow. + +FIELD, Hamilton, Esq., New Park Road, Brixton Hill. +FREETHY, Mr. Frederick, Working Men's College, London. +FRY, Danby P., Esq., Poor Law Board, Whitehall. +FRY, Frederick, Esq., Wellington Street, Islington. +FURNIVALL, F. J., Esq., 3, Old Square, Lincoln's Inn., W.C. + +GEE, William, Esq., High Street, Boston. +GIBBS, Captain Charles, 2nd Regiment, Devonport. +GIBBS, H. H., Esq., St. Dunstan's, Regent's Park. +GLEN, W. Cunningham, Esq., Poor Law Board, Whitehall. +GOLDSTUECKER, Professor, 14, St. George's Square. N.W. +GORDON, Rev. Robert, 14, Northumberland St., Edinburgh. +GUILD, J. Uylie, Esq., Glasgow. + +HALES, J. W., Esq., Christ's College, Cambridge. +HALKETT, Samuel, Esq., Advocates' Library, Edinburgh. +HALL, Professor Fitz-Edward, D.C.L., 18, Provost Road, Haverstock + Hill. N.W. +HAMLEN, Charles, Esq., 27, Virginia Street, Glasgow. +HANSON, Reginald, Esq., 43, Upper Harley Street. W. +HEATH, N., Esq., Rector, The Academy, Alloa. +HODGSON, Shadworth H., Esq., 45, Conduit Street, Regent's Street. W. +HOOPER, Rev. Richard, Aston Upthorpe. +HORWOOD, Alfred S., Esq., New Court, Middle Temple. E.C. +HOWARD, Hon. Richard E., D.C.L., Stamp Office, Manchester. + +INDIA OFFICE LIBRARY, Cannon Row. + +JACKSON, E. Steane, Esq., Walthamstow House, Essex. +JOHNSON, W., Esq., Eton College, Windsor. +JONES, C. W., Esq., Gateacre, near Liverpool. +JONES, E. B., Esq., 62, Great Russell Street, Bloomsbury. +JONES, Thomas, Esq., Chetham Library, Manchester. + +KING, W. Warwick, Esq., 29, Queen Street, Cannon Street West. E.C. + +LAING, David, Esq., Signet Library, Edinburgh. +LAMONT, Colin D., Esq., Union Bank of Scotland, Greenock. +LECKIE, Thomas, Esq., M.D., 60, Cambridge Terrace, Hyde Park. W. +LEIGH, John, Esq., 26, St. John's Street, Manchester. +LODGE, Rev. Barton, Colchester. +LONDON LIBRARY, St. James's Square. S.W. +LUARD, Rev. Henry Richard, 4, St. Peter's Terrace, Cambridge. +LUSHINGTON, E. L., Esq., Park House, Maidstone. + +MACDONALD, George, Esq., 12, Earles Terrace, Kensington. W. +MACDOUALL, Professor Charles, LL.D., Queen's College, Belfast. +MACKENZIE, John Whitefoord, Esq., 16, Royal Circus, Edinburgh. +MACMILLAN, A., Esq., Bedford Street, Covent Garden. W.C. +MADDEN, Sir Frederick, K. H., British Museum. W.C. +MANCHESTER, The Duke of. +MELBOURNE PUBLIC LIBRARY, Victoria. +MORRIS, Richard, Esq., Christ Church School, St. George's East. E. +MUIR, John, Esq., 16, Regent's Terrace, Edinburgh. +MULLER, Professor Max, 64, High Street, Oxford. +MURDOCH, James Barclay, Esq., 33, Lyndoch Street, Glasgow. + +NAPIER, George W., Esq., Alderley Edge, near Manchester. +NASH, D. M., Esq., 21, Bentinck Street, Manchester Square. W. +NEAVES, Lord, 7, Charlotte Square, Edinburgh. +NICHOL, Professor, University, Glasgow. +NICHOLS, John Gough, Esq., 25, Parliament Street, Westminster. +NORRIS, Edwin, Esq., 6, Michael's Grove, Brompton. S.W. + +OGLE, Messrs. Maurice & Co., Glasgow. +OWEN'S COLLEGE LIBRARY, Manchester. + +PAINE, Cornelius, Jun., Esq., Surbiton Hill, Surrey. +PANTON, Rev. George A., Crown Circus, Dowanhill, Glasgow. (2 sets.) +PARKER, H. T., Esq., 3, Ladbroke Gardens. W. (10 sets). +PEILE, John, Esq., Christ's College, Cambridge. +PERCEVAL, Charles Spencer, Esq., 64, Eccleston Square. S.W. +PRIAULX, Osw. De Beauvoir, Esq., 8, Cavendish Square. W. + +RAINE, Rev. James, York. +REGENT'S PARK COLLEGE. N.W. +REILLY, Francis S., Esq., 22, Old Buildings, Lincoln's Inn. W.C. +RICHARDSON, Sir John, Lancrigg, Grasmere. +ROSSETTI, Wm., Esq., 160, Albany Street. N.W. +RUSKIN, John, Esq., Denmark Hill, Camberwell (10 sets). + +ST. DAVID'S, Right Rev. Connop Thirlwall, Bishop of, Abergwili Palace, + Carmarthen. +SION COLLEGE, President and Fellows of, London Wall. +SKEAT, Rev. Walter W., Christ's College, Cambridge. +SLATTER, Rev. John, Streatley Vicarage, Reading. +SMITH, Charles, Esq., Faversham. +SMITH, J. Guthrie, Esq., Glasgow. +SPRANGE, A. D., Esq., 12, Princes Street, Bayswater. W. +STEPHENS, Professor George, University of Copenhagen, Denmark. +STEVENSON, Rev. Prof., D.D., 37, Royal Terrace, Edinburgh. +STEWART, Alexander B., Esq., Glasgow. +STRATHEARN, Sheriff, County Buildings, Glasgow. + +TENNYSON, Alfred, Esq., D.C.L., Faringford, Isle of Wight. +TRUEBNER, Nicholas, Esq., 60, Paternoster Row (19 sets). +TUCKER, Stephen, Esq., 11, St. Petersburgh Place. W. +TYSSEN, John R. D., Esq., Didlington Park, Brandon, Norfolk. + +WARD, Harry, Esq., British Museum. W.C. +WATTS, Thomas, Esq., British Museum. W.C. +WEDGWOOD, Hensleigh, Esq., 1, Cumberland Place, Regent's Park. +WEYMOUTH, R. F., Esq., Portland Grammar School, Plymouth. +WHEATLEY, Henry B., Esq., 53, Berners Street. W.--_Hon. Sec._ +WILLIAMS, Sydney, Esq., 14, Henrietta Street, Covent Garden, W.C. + (2 sets.) +WILLIAMSON, Stephen, Esq., 13, Virginia Street, Glasgow. +WILSON, Edward J., Esq., 6, Whitefriars Gate, Hull. +WRIGHT, W. Aldis, Esq., Trinity College, Cambridge. + +YOUNG, Alexander, Esq., 38, Elm Bank Crescent, Glasgow. + + + + +STEPHEN AUSTIN, Printer, Hertford. + + + + + + +End of the Project Gutenberg EBook of Of the Orthographie and Congruitie of +the Britan Tongue, by Alexander Hume + +*** END OF THIS PROJECT GUTENBERG EBOOK ORTHOGRAPHIE OF THE BRITAN TONGUE *** + +***** This file should be named 17000.txt or 17000.zip ***** +This and all associated files of various formats will be found in: + https://www.gutenberg.org/1/7/0/0/17000/ + +Produced by Louise Hope, David Starner and the Online +Distributed Proofreading Team at https://www.pgdp.net + + +Updated editions will replace the previous one--the old editions +will be renamed. + +Creating the works from public domain print editions means that no +one owns a United States copyright in these works, so the Foundation +(and you!) can copy and distribute it in the United States without +permission and without paying copyright royalties. Special rules, +set forth in the General Terms of Use part of this license, apply to +copying and distributing Project Gutenberg-tm electronic works to +protect the PROJECT GUTENBERG-tm concept and trademark. Project +Gutenberg is a registered trademark, and may not be used if you +charge for the eBooks, unless you receive specific permission. If you +do not charge anything for copies of this eBook, complying with the +rules is very easy. You may use this eBook for nearly any purpose +such as creation of derivative works, reports, performances and +research. They may be modified and printed and given away--you may do +practically ANYTHING with public domain eBooks. Redistribution is +subject to the trademark license, especially commercial +redistribution. + + + +*** START: FULL LICENSE *** + +THE FULL PROJECT GUTENBERG LICENSE +PLEASE READ THIS BEFORE YOU DISTRIBUTE OR USE THIS WORK + +To protect the Project Gutenberg-tm mission of promoting the free +distribution of electronic works, by using or distributing this work +(or any other work associated in any way with the phrase "Project +Gutenberg"), you agree to comply with all the terms of the Full Project +Gutenberg-tm License (available with this file or online at +https://gutenberg.org/license). + + +Section 1. General Terms of Use and Redistributing Project Gutenberg-tm +electronic works + +1.A. By reading or using any part of this Project Gutenberg-tm +electronic work, you indicate that you have read, understand, agree to +and accept all the terms of this license and intellectual property +(trademark/copyright) agreement. If you do not agree to abide by all +the terms of this agreement, you must cease using and return or destroy +all copies of Project Gutenberg-tm electronic works in your possession. +If you paid a fee for obtaining a copy of or access to a Project +Gutenberg-tm electronic work and you do not agree to be bound by the +terms of this agreement, you may obtain a refund from the person or +entity to whom you paid the fee as set forth in paragraph 1.E.8. + +1.B. "Project Gutenberg" is a registered trademark. It may only be +used on or associated in any way with an electronic work by people who +agree to be bound by the terms of this agreement. There are a few +things that you can do with most Project Gutenberg-tm electronic works +even without complying with the full terms of this agreement. See +paragraph 1.C below. There are a lot of things you can do with Project +Gutenberg-tm electronic works if you follow the terms of this agreement +and help preserve free future access to Project Gutenberg-tm electronic +works. See paragraph 1.E below. + +1.C. The Project Gutenberg Literary Archive Foundation ("the Foundation" +or PGLAF), owns a compilation copyright in the collection of Project +Gutenberg-tm electronic works. Nearly all the individual works in the +collection are in the public domain in the United States. If an +individual work is in the public domain in the United States and you are +located in the United States, we do not claim a right to prevent you from +copying, distributing, performing, displaying or creating derivative +works based on the work as long as all references to Project Gutenberg +are removed. Of course, we hope that you will support the Project +Gutenberg-tm mission of promoting free access to electronic works by +freely sharing Project Gutenberg-tm works in compliance with the terms of +this agreement for keeping the Project Gutenberg-tm name associated with +the work. You can easily comply with the terms of this agreement by +keeping this work in the same format with its attached full Project +Gutenberg-tm License when you share it without charge with others. + +1.D. The copyright laws of the place where you are located also govern +what you can do with this work. Copyright laws in most countries are in +a constant state of change. If you are outside the United States, check +the laws of your country in addition to the terms of this agreement +before downloading, copying, displaying, performing, distributing or +creating derivative works based on this work or any other Project +Gutenberg-tm work. The Foundation makes no representations concerning +the copyright status of any work in any country outside the United +States. + +1.E. Unless you have removed all references to Project Gutenberg: + +1.E.1. The following sentence, with active links to, or other immediate +access to, the full Project Gutenberg-tm License must appear prominently +whenever any copy of a Project Gutenberg-tm work (any work on which the +phrase "Project Gutenberg" appears, or with which the phrase "Project +Gutenberg" is associated) is accessed, displayed, performed, viewed, +copied or distributed: + +This eBook is for the use of anyone anywhere at no cost and with +almost no restrictions whatsoever. You may copy it, give it away or +re-use it under the terms of the Project Gutenberg License included +with this eBook or online at www.gutenberg.org + +1.E.2. If an individual Project Gutenberg-tm electronic work is derived +from the public domain (does not contain a notice indicating that it is +posted with permission of the copyright holder), the work can be copied +and distributed to anyone in the United States without paying any fees +or charges. If you are redistributing or providing access to a work +with the phrase "Project Gutenberg" associated with or appearing on the +work, you must comply either with the requirements of paragraphs 1.E.1 +through 1.E.7 or obtain permission for the use of the work and the +Project Gutenberg-tm trademark as set forth in paragraphs 1.E.8 or +1.E.9. + +1.E.3. If an individual Project Gutenberg-tm electronic work is posted +with the permission of the copyright holder, your use and distribution +must comply with both paragraphs 1.E.1 through 1.E.7 and any additional +terms imposed by the copyright holder. Additional terms will be linked +to the Project Gutenberg-tm License for all works posted with the +permission of the copyright holder found at the beginning of this work. + +1.E.4. Do not unlink or detach or remove the full Project Gutenberg-tm +License terms from this work, or any files containing a part of this +work or any other work associated with Project Gutenberg-tm. + +1.E.5. Do not copy, display, perform, distribute or redistribute this +electronic work, or any part of this electronic work, without +prominently displaying the sentence set forth in paragraph 1.E.1 with +active links or immediate access to the full terms of the Project +Gutenberg-tm License. + +1.E.6. You may convert to and distribute this work in any binary, +compressed, marked up, nonproprietary or proprietary form, including any +word processing or hypertext form. However, if you provide access to or +distribute copies of a Project Gutenberg-tm work in a format other than +"Plain Vanilla ASCII" or other format used in the official version +posted on the official Project Gutenberg-tm web site (www.gutenberg.org), +you must, at no additional cost, fee or expense to the user, provide a +copy, a means of exporting a copy, or a means of obtaining a copy upon +request, of the work in its original "Plain Vanilla ASCII" or other +form. Any alternate format must include the full Project Gutenberg-tm +License as specified in paragraph 1.E.1. + +1.E.7. Do not charge a fee for access to, viewing, displaying, +performing, copying or distributing any Project Gutenberg-tm works +unless you comply with paragraph 1.E.8 or 1.E.9. + +1.E.8. You may charge a reasonable fee for copies of or providing +access to or distributing Project Gutenberg-tm electronic works provided +that + +- You pay a royalty fee of 20% of the gross profits you derive from + the use of Project Gutenberg-tm works calculated using the method + you already use to calculate your applicable taxes. The fee is + owed to the owner of the Project Gutenberg-tm trademark, but he + has agreed to donate royalties under this paragraph to the + Project Gutenberg Literary Archive Foundation. Royalty payments + must be paid within 60 days following each date on which you + prepare (or are legally required to prepare) your periodic tax + returns. Royalty payments should be clearly marked as such and + sent to the Project Gutenberg Literary Archive Foundation at the + address specified in Section 4, "Information about donations to + the Project Gutenberg Literary Archive Foundation." + +- You provide a full refund of any money paid by a user who notifies + you in writing (or by e-mail) within 30 days of receipt that s/he + does not agree to the terms of the full Project Gutenberg-tm + License. You must require such a user to return or + destroy all copies of the works possessed in a physical medium + and discontinue all use of and all access to other copies of + Project Gutenberg-tm works. + +- You provide, in accordance with paragraph 1.F.3, a full refund of any + money paid for a work or a replacement copy, if a defect in the + electronic work is discovered and reported to you within 90 days + of receipt of the work. + +- You comply with all other terms of this agreement for free + distribution of Project Gutenberg-tm works. + +1.E.9. If you wish to charge a fee or distribute a Project Gutenberg-tm +electronic work or group of works on different terms than are set +forth in this agreement, you must obtain permission in writing from +both the Project Gutenberg Literary Archive Foundation and Michael +Hart, the owner of the Project Gutenberg-tm trademark. Contact the +Foundation as set forth in Section 3 below. + +1.F. + +1.F.1. Project Gutenberg volunteers and employees expend considerable +effort to identify, do copyright research on, transcribe and proofread +public domain works in creating the Project Gutenberg-tm +collection. Despite these efforts, Project Gutenberg-tm electronic +works, and the medium on which they may be stored, may contain +"Defects," such as, but not limited to, incomplete, inaccurate or +corrupt data, transcription errors, a copyright or other intellectual +property infringement, a defective or damaged disk or other medium, a +computer virus, or computer codes that damage or cannot be read by +your equipment. + +1.F.2. LIMITED WARRANTY, DISCLAIMER OF DAMAGES - Except for the "Right +of Replacement or Refund" described in paragraph 1.F.3, the Project +Gutenberg Literary Archive Foundation, the owner of the Project +Gutenberg-tm trademark, and any other party distributing a Project +Gutenberg-tm electronic work under this agreement, disclaim all +liability to you for damages, costs and expenses, including legal +fees. YOU AGREE THAT YOU HAVE NO REMEDIES FOR NEGLIGENCE, STRICT +LIABILITY, BREACH OF WARRANTY OR BREACH OF CONTRACT EXCEPT THOSE +PROVIDED IN PARAGRAPH F3. YOU AGREE THAT THE FOUNDATION, THE +TRADEMARK OWNER, AND ANY DISTRIBUTOR UNDER THIS AGREEMENT WILL NOT BE +LIABLE TO YOU FOR ACTUAL, DIRECT, INDIRECT, CONSEQUENTIAL, PUNITIVE OR +INCIDENTAL DAMAGES EVEN IF YOU GIVE NOTICE OF THE POSSIBILITY OF SUCH +DAMAGE. + +1.F.3. LIMITED RIGHT OF REPLACEMENT OR REFUND - If you discover a +defect in this electronic work within 90 days of receiving it, you can +receive a refund of the money (if any) you paid for it by sending a +written explanation to the person you received the work from. If you +received the work on a physical medium, you must return the medium with +your written explanation. The person or entity that provided you with +the defective work may elect to provide a replacement copy in lieu of a +refund. If you received the work electronically, the person or entity +providing it to you may choose to give you a second opportunity to +receive the work electronically in lieu of a refund. If the second copy +is also defective, you may demand a refund in writing without further +opportunities to fix the problem. + +1.F.4. Except for the limited right of replacement or refund set forth +in paragraph 1.F.3, this work is provided to you 'AS-IS' WITH NO OTHER +WARRANTIES OF ANY KIND, EXPRESS OR IMPLIED, INCLUDING BUT NOT LIMITED TO +WARRANTIES OF MERCHANTIBILITY OR FITNESS FOR ANY PURPOSE. + +1.F.5. Some states do not allow disclaimers of certain implied +warranties or the exclusion or limitation of certain types of damages. +If any disclaimer or limitation set forth in this agreement violates the +law of the state applicable to this agreement, the agreement shall be +interpreted to make the maximum disclaimer or limitation permitted by +the applicable state law. The invalidity or unenforceability of any +provision of this agreement shall not void the remaining provisions. + +1.F.6. INDEMNITY - You agree to indemnify and hold the Foundation, the +trademark owner, any agent or employee of the Foundation, anyone +providing copies of Project Gutenberg-tm electronic works in accordance +with this agreement, and any volunteers associated with the production, +promotion and distribution of Project Gutenberg-tm electronic works, +harmless from all liability, costs and expenses, including legal fees, +that arise directly or indirectly from any of the following which you do +or cause to occur: (a) distribution of this or any Project Gutenberg-tm +work, (b) alteration, modification, or additions or deletions to any +Project Gutenberg-tm work, and (c) any Defect you cause. + + +Section 2. Information about the Mission of Project Gutenberg-tm + +Project Gutenberg-tm is synonymous with the free distribution of +electronic works in formats readable by the widest variety of computers +including obsolete, old, middle-aged and new computers. It exists +because of the efforts of hundreds of volunteers and donations from +people in all walks of life. + +Volunteers and financial support to provide volunteers with the +assistance they need, is critical to reaching Project Gutenberg-tm's +goals and ensuring that the Project Gutenberg-tm collection will +remain freely available for generations to come. In 2001, the Project +Gutenberg Literary Archive Foundation was created to provide a secure +and permanent future for Project Gutenberg-tm and future generations. +To learn more about the Project Gutenberg Literary Archive Foundation +and how your efforts and donations can help, see Sections 3 and 4 +and the Foundation web page at https://www.pglaf.org. + + +Section 3. Information about the Project Gutenberg Literary Archive +Foundation + +The Project Gutenberg Literary Archive Foundation is a non profit +501(c)(3) educational corporation organized under the laws of the +state of Mississippi and granted tax exempt status by the Internal +Revenue Service. The Foundation's EIN or federal tax identification +number is 64-6221541. Its 501(c)(3) letter is posted at +https://pglaf.org/fundraising. Contributions to the Project Gutenberg +Literary Archive Foundation are tax deductible to the full extent +permitted by U.S. federal laws and your state's laws. + +The Foundation's principal office is located at 4557 Melan Dr. S. +Fairbanks, AK, 99712., but its volunteers and employees are scattered +throughout numerous locations. Its business office is located at +809 North 1500 West, Salt Lake City, UT 84116, (801) 596-1887, email +business@pglaf.org. Email contact links and up to date contact +information can be found at the Foundation's web site and official +page at https://pglaf.org + +For additional contact information: + Dr. Gregory B. Newby + Chief Executive and Director + gbnewby@pglaf.org + + +Section 4. Information about Donations to the Project Gutenberg +Literary Archive Foundation + +Project Gutenberg-tm depends upon and cannot survive without wide +spread public support and donations to carry out its mission of +increasing the number of public domain and licensed works that can be +freely distributed in machine readable form accessible by the widest +array of equipment including outdated equipment. Many small donations +($1 to $5,000) are particularly important to maintaining tax exempt +status with the IRS. + +The Foundation is committed to complying with the laws regulating +charities and charitable donations in all 50 states of the United +States. Compliance requirements are not uniform and it takes a +considerable effort, much paperwork and many fees to meet and keep up +with these requirements. We do not solicit donations in locations +where we have not received written confirmation of compliance. To +SEND DONATIONS or determine the status of compliance for any +particular state visit https://pglaf.org + +While we cannot and do not solicit contributions from states where we +have not met the solicitation requirements, we know of no prohibition +against accepting unsolicited donations from donors in such states who +approach us with offers to donate. + +International donations are gratefully accepted, but we cannot make +any statements concerning tax treatment of donations received from +outside the United States. U.S. laws alone swamp our small staff. + +Please check the Project Gutenberg Web pages for current donation +methods and addresses. Donations are accepted in a number of other +ways including including checks, online payments and credit card +donations. To donate, please visit: https://pglaf.org/donate + + +Section 5. General Information About Project Gutenberg-tm electronic +works. + +Professor Michael S. Hart was the originator of the Project Gutenberg-tm +concept of a library of electronic works that could be freely shared +with anyone. For thirty years, he produced and distributed Project +Gutenberg-tm eBooks with only a loose network of volunteer support. + + +Project Gutenberg-tm eBooks are often created from several printed +editions, all of which are confirmed as Public Domain in the U.S. +unless a copyright notice is included. Thus, we do not necessarily +keep eBooks in compliance with any particular paper edition. + + +Most people start at our Web site which has the main PG search facility: + + https://www.gutenberg.org + +This Web site includes information about Project Gutenberg-tm, +including how to make donations to the Project Gutenberg Literary +Archive Foundation, how to help produce our new eBooks, and how to +subscribe to our email newsletter to hear about new eBooks. diff --git a/17000.zip b/17000.zip Binary files differnew file mode 100644 index 0000000..1258611 --- /dev/null +++ b/17000.zip diff --git a/LICENSE.txt b/LICENSE.txt new file mode 100644 index 0000000..6312041 --- /dev/null +++ b/LICENSE.txt @@ -0,0 +1,11 @@ +This eBook, including all associated images, markup, improvements, +metadata, and any other content or labor, has been confirmed to be +in the PUBLIC DOMAIN IN THE UNITED STATES. + +Procedures for determining public domain status are described in +the "Copyright How-To" at https://www.gutenberg.org. + +No investigation has been made concerning possible copyrights in +jurisdictions other than the United States. Anyone seeking to utilize +this eBook outside of the United States should confirm copyright +status under the laws that apply to them. diff --git a/README.md b/README.md new file mode 100644 index 0000000..2b67324 --- /dev/null +++ b/README.md @@ -0,0 +1,2 @@ +Project Gutenberg (https://www.gutenberg.org) public repository for +eBook #17000 (https://www.gutenberg.org/ebooks/17000) |